Home

Yokogawa WT1600 Digital Power Meter

1. Current Voltage Range V aa 7500m 1 5000 3 0000 5 0000 7 5000 15 000 30 000 50 000 75 000 150 00 300 00 5 0000m 7 5000 mW 15 000 mW 30 000 mW 50 000 mW 75 000 mW 150 00 mW 300 00 mW 500 00 mW 750 00 mW 1500 0 mW 3 0000 W 10 000m 15 000 mW 30 000 mW 60 000 mWj100 000 mW 150 00 mW 300 00 mW 600 00 mW 1000 0 mW 1500 0 mw 3 0000 W 6 0000 W 25 000m 37 500 mW 75 000 mW 150 00 mW 250 00 mW 375 00 mW 750 00 mW 1500 0mW 2 5000 W 3 7500W 7 5000W 15 000 W 50 000m 75 000 mW 150 00 mW 300 00 mW 500 00 mW 750 00 mW 1500 0 mW 3 0000W 5 0000W 7 5000W 15 000W 30 000 W 100 00m 150 00 mW 300 00 mW 600 00 mW 1000 0 mW 1500 0 mW 3 0000W 6 0000W 10 0000 W 15 000W 30 000 w 60 000 W 250 00m 375 00 mW 750 00 mW 1500 0mW 2 5000W 3 7500W 7 5000W 15 000W 25 000W 37 500W 75 000W 150 00 W 500 00m 750 00 mW 1500 0 mW 3 0000W 5 0000W 7 5000W 15 000W 30 000W 50 000W 75 000W 150 00W 300 00 W 1 0000 1500 0 mW 3 0000 W 6 0000 w 10 0000W 15 000W 30 000 w 60 000W 100 000 w 150 00W 300 00 Ww 600 00 W 2 5000 3 7500W 7 5000W 15 000W 25 000W 37 500W 75 000W 150 00W 250 00W 375 00W 750 00W 1500 0 W 5 0000 7 5000W 15 000W 30 000W 50 000W 75 000W 150 00W 300 00W 500 00W 750 00W 1500 0 W 3 0000 kW 10 000 15 000 W 30 000W 60 000 W 100 000 W 150 00W 300 00W 600 00 W 1000 00 W 1500 0
2. Ht N 2 G N N a 2 oO oa o o ta amp y4 4 Ee 5 3 A 7 7 D D a a P T E E 3 3 o o o e e oO N 17 29 29 2080208c802e8c2c2o2cPo8 208090208090902 200090900000909 980090209090200009000920 2020909000000009 2808000090909090 Bo 0808o o208o802080802o 2020902090902020 2020209090909090 90952080 s20802020802020 2020202090202020 2020202020202090 3820929092092290099390s Ree Roe 020202020202020202020909 0202020209020209 0202090202090209 2pgSa90a 209809902998993 392999992999989 992099390990399 308080808808080 80803s 380880883003939 32803058853809 ji i i i i y i i i rm i c l 1 T 1 1 o E i 1 i i xt i x oS l i i O FI oH 9 i 1 i o gt To N L lt i i i Os elstelnlalsle F Ualalalalslaln 0202020209020209 303090908080903 1 sesesegegegeeeee i o o 8020902090009090 sbesseeessoeaees c c t i 0202020202020209 I l 0802090202090909 _ 808080808080808 i i f lt 1 i 1 1 ae i 1 i i n 5 re i Reet Neer Kh of ft A i 223080308080809080809090 3280208080809080 fa ft ft 289990029290000999900803 2290090280900809 oO oO 90852080 s2080 s2080902o 2020202020202090 382099300
3. ESC SINGLE STORE SET MENU o TRIG D o REMOTE Fa CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC SET peje es j MOTOR SET ran me eae miN TEGRATOR mm GAR se srar oor INTEG SET RESET Procedure 1 Press SHIFT STORE STORE SET to display the Store Set dialog box 2 Press the Mode soft key to select Recall 3 Turn the jog shuttle and set the Recall No number of the data to be recalled The corresponding data is displayed Mode store Mode store Recall No x K Convert Memory Convert Memory Initialize Memory Exec UUL Explanation You can recall and display the stored numerical data or waveform display data There is a one to one relationship between the store count number see section 11 2 and the Recall No If you wish to recall the first stored data for example set Recall No to 1 Note Only the data stored to the internal memory can be recalled 11 20 IM 760101 01E Chapter 12 Saving and Loading the Data 12 1 Precautions to Be Taken When Using the Floppy Disk Drive Floppy Disks That Can Be Used The 3 5 floppy disks below can be used You can format the disk on the WT1600 2HD 1 44 MB MS DOS format Inserting the Floppy Disk into the Floppy Disk Drive With the label facing up insert the disk from the side with the shutter Insert the disk until the eject
4. 100 300 Vpk Note To prevent erroneous operation caused by noise the trigger function uses approximately 2 hysteresis if the crest factor is set to 3 If the trigger slope is set to 4 for example the trigger does not occur until the input signal level falls approximately 2 below the trigger level The trigger function uses approximately 4 hysteresis if the crest factor is set to 6 IM 760101 01E 9 7 Aejdsig woane jy el 9 4 Zooming Vertically and Moving the Vertical Position Procedure Format K Wave K Wave Setting NUUUUULS o RANGE SCALING MOTOR SET a a A H eqn NTEGRATOR mm z oa START STOP Ri INTEG SET RESET FILTER AVG For a functional description see section 1 7 o UP DATE RATE FILE STORE COPY o DISPLAY HOLD SINGLE oTRIGD T ave prones A BERSOA STORE SET MENU REMOTE a LOCAL MISC MAX HOLD O NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC The retrieval of waveform display data must be turned ON to display waveforms For the procedure see section 9 1 Selecting the Target Element Press the Element Object soft key to display the Element menu Only the installed elements are displayed Press one the soft keys corresponding to
5. Measurement Integration ume Elapsed time from the start of integration to stop h m s Time Wp fuo i t dt Watt Wp hour Wp Wp is the sum of positive and negative watt hours Wh Wp is the sum of positive P power consumed 53 Wp is the sum of negative P returned to the power supply regenerated energy 8 a 2 a l 2 PX Ampere a q is the sum of positive and negative current hours hour q q is the sum of positive I current hour Ah q is the sum of negative I current hour The selected item from Irms Imn Idc and lac is applied to I For the selection procedure see section 6 10 Wiring system Single phase Three phase Three voltage Three phase three wire 1P3W three wire 3P3W three current 3V3A four wire 3P4W Urms gt Urms1 Urms2 2 Urms1 Urms2 Urms3 3 US IV Umnz Umn1 Umn2 2 Umn1 Umn2 Umn3 3 v Udc x Udc1 Ude2 2 Udc1 Udc2 Udc3 3 Uac Uac1 Uac2 2 Uac1 Uac2 Uac3 3 Irms gt Irms1 Irms2 2 Irms1 Irms2 Irms3 3 IZ A Imn gt Imn1 Imn2 2 Imn1 Imn2 Imn3 3 Idc Idc1 Idc2 2 Idc1 Idc2 Idc3 3 M lac lac1 lac2 2 lac1 lac2 lac3 3 S Px W P1 P2 P1 P2 P3 S SZ VA S1 S2 v3 S1 S2 v3 S1 S2 S3 S1 S2 S3 QX var Q1 Q2 Q1 Q2 Q3 Pc W Pc1 Pc2 Pci Pc2 Pc3 Wp Wp1 Wp2 Wp1 Wp2 Wp3 Wp Wh Wp Wp 1 Wp 2 Wp 1 Wp 2 Wp 3 Wp gt Wp 1 Wp 2 Wp 1 Wp 2 Wp 3 q
6. JUUUUUE NJUUUUOU JUUUUUU JUUOUUU 10 4 IM 760101 01E 10 2 Selecting the Trend Display Target Explanation Set the item to be shown on the trend display You can set 16 lines of trends trend 1 T1 through trend 16 T16 During Normal Measurement Selecting the Measurement Function The types of measurement functions that can be selected are the items that are indicated in Measurement Function Types during Normal Measurement and Measurement Function Types for Motor Evaluation Function Option in section 1 2 Delta Computation User Defined Function and Corrected Power in section 1 5 and Measurement Functions of Integration in section 1 6 e You can also select not to display the measurement functions None e If you selected measurement functions of delta computation the meanings of the elements described in the next section are different from when other measurement functions are selected For details see the explanation in section 6 1 Selecting the Element Wiring Unit e You can select the element wiring unit from the following list of choices The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements Elementi Element2 Element3 Element4 Element5 Element6 A B and C e If there are no elements that are assigned to the selected wiring unit there is no numerical data Thus the trend is not displayed in this case For example
7. ESG ES Q ESC Store Set Mode Store Set fode Store Setting lode Store Setting Mode Recall Recall Manual Manual File Interval Setting Interval Setting Interval Setting Setting Setting Convert Memory Convert Memory Initialize Memory Exec JEL JEU eeq pa101S ay Burnes pue geq Huljjeo0y pue Bunos z W Store Item M Store Item Numeric Numeric JUUUUOLUE IM 760101 01E 11 3 11 2 Setting the Store Count the Store Interval and the Store Reservation Time Setting the Store Reservation Time 4 Press the Mode soft key to display the Mode menu 5 Press the Real Time soft key to select the real time mode The store reservation time menu appears 6 Press the Real Time Control soft key to display the Real Time Control dialog box 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select one of the reservation year month date hour minute and second boxes for specifying when the store operation will start Store Start 8 Press SELECT A box used to set the time appears 9 Turn the jog shuttle to set the year month date hour minute or second that you selected in step 7 For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 10 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box 1
8. 11 6 IM 760101 01E 11 3 Setting the Numerical Data and Waveform Display Data to Be Stored Selecting the Numerical Data to Be Stored This operation is valid if the stored item was set to Numeric or Numeric Wave in step 5 6 Press the List Item soft key to display the List Item dialog box e Selecting all items at once during normal measurement only Turn the jog shuttle to select All ON 8 Press SELECT The buttons to the left of all the elements and measurement functions are highlighted indicating that all items will be stored N Deselecting all items at once during normal measurement only 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select All OFF 8 Press SELECT The highlighting of the buttons to the left of all the elements and measurement functions are cleared indicating that all items will not be stored Store Setting Hode Manua1 During normal measurement List Item During harmonic measurement All ON All OFF Preset 1 Preset 2 Element 1 c Element 2 0 Element 3 0 Element 4 Element 5 Element 6 za ZB Urns Umean Irns Inean P S Element Element Element 1 6 Element 2 Element 3 0 Element 4 Element 5 c Element 6 M o Interva1 Setting Function udc Idc Uac Iac A Function P s w Xs Rs Others i A 2 xp eee Frequ U peak crt 0 o U peak I peak FfI OONN eee Store Ite
9. ESC UUUUUULE Press SELECT When the button to the left of the selected input signal is highlighted the input signal will be stored If the highlighting of the button is cleared the input signal will not be stored 11 8 IM 760101 01E 11 3 Setting the Numerical Data and Waveform Display Data to Be Stored Explanation Selecting the Items to Be Stored Select the item to be stored from the following list of choices Numeric Numerical data are stored Wave Waveform display data are stored Numeric Wave Numerical data and waveform display data are stored Selecting the Numerical Data to Be Stored Select which numerical data items are to be stored e e During Normal Measurement Only installed elements and wiring units are applicable for the selection e The measurement functions that are to be stored can be selected from the items that are indicated in Measurement Function Types during Normal Measurement and Measurement Function Types for Motor Evaluation Function Option in section 1 2 Delta Computation User Defined Functions and Corrected Power in section 1 5 and Measurement Functions of Integration in section 1 6 During Harmonic Measurement Only installed elements are applicable for the selection e The measurement functions that are to be stored can be selected from U including Uhdf including Ihdf P including Phdf S Q A 0
10. To exit the menu during operation press ESC n PUT o RANGE MOTOR SET o o SCALING WIRING FILTER AVG MEASURE CAL m NTEGRATOR mm a a STOP SYNC INTEG ser RESET 1 Press SHIFT START INTEG SET to display the Integ Set menu La Procedure Selecting Normal Integration Mode or Repetitive Integration Mode Continuous 2 Press the Mode soft key to display the Mode menu 3 Press either the Normal or Continuous soft key to select the integration mode Selecting All Element Simultaneous Integration or Individual Element Integration This menu does not appear on products with only a single element Proceed to step 5 4 Press the Independent Control soft key to select OFF or ON If OFF is selected integration is performed on all elements simultaneously Proceed to step 5 If ON is selected integration is performed according to the integration timer for each element Proceed to step 11 ESC m Q Mode K Norma 1 K Timer Setting Continuous R Norma1 Independent Control PEF ON M Current Mode Independent R Cont inuous Control ON M Current Mode RMS RMS JUUUUUDE JUUUUUUS Note You can set the individual element integration through key operation but the execution of integration can only be done through communication commands Even if Independen
11. A The pin arrangement and assignments of the connector are as follows D A OUTPUT CS Pin No Signal Name Pin No Signal Name 1 Sot 19 1 D A CH1 19 D A CH2 P 2 D A CH3 20 D A CH4 N 3 D A CH5 21 D A CH6 E 4 D A CH7 22 D A CH8 1 5 D A CH9 23 D A CH10 HE 6 D A CH11 24 D A CH12 H OE 7 D A CH13 25 D A CH14 H 8 D A CH15 26 D A CH16 H 9 D A CH17 27 D A CH18 H 10 D A CH19 28 D A CH20 Y JC 1 11 D A CH21 29 D A CH22 18 iat 36 12 D A CH23 30 D A CH24 es 13 D A CH25 31 D A CH26 14 D A CH27 32 D A CH28 15 D A CH29 33 D A CH30 16 D A GND 34 D A GND 17 D A GND 35 D A GND 18 36 Note D A GND pins 16 17 34 and 35 are connected internally to the case AN CAUTION Do not short the D A output terminal or apply external voltage to it This may cause damage to the instrument D A Output Items during Normal Measurement Selecting the Measurement Function The types of measurement functions that can be selected are the items that are indicated in Measurement Function Types during Normal Measurement and Measurement Function Types for Motor Evaluation Function Option in section 1 2 Delta Computation User Defined Function and Corrected Power in section 1 5 and Measurement Functions of Integration in section 1 6 e You can also select not to output the measurement functions None For channels that are set to None 0 V is output since no corresponding data exists e If you selected
12. Control Element 4 00000 00 Elenent g 00 L00 00 Elenent 00 00 MS Auto Cal prow UO IM 760101 01E 6 25 uolesbaju pue JUoWeiINSeayy EWON el 6 9 Setting the Real time Integration Mode the Integration Timer and the Reservation Time Setting the Reservation Time during Individual Element Computation Independent Control ON 28 Press the Real Time Control soft key to display the Independent Real Time Control dialog box 29 Turn the jog shuttle to select one of the reservation year month date hour minute and second boxes for specifying when the integration operation will start 30 Press SELECT A box used to set the timer appears 31 Turn the jog shuttle to set the year month date hour minute or second that you selected in step 29 For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 32 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box 33 Repeat steps 29 to 32 to set the year month date hour minute and second 34 Turn the jog shuttle to select one of the reservation year month date hour minute and second boxes for specifying when the integration operation will end 35 Repeat steps 30 to 33 to set the year month date hour minute and second The procedure for setting the reservation time during individual element c
13. Explanation The floppy disk built in hard disk and SCSI devices connected via SCSI option of the WT1600 can be accessed from a PC or workstation WS on the network To access the WT1600 an FTP client software is needed on the PC or workstation Setting the User Name Enter the user name to allow access to the WT1600 Enter up to 15 characters The characters that can be used are 0 9 A Z _ parenthesis minus sign e If you specify anonymous the WT1600 can be accessed from the outside PC or WS without a password Setting the Password Enter the password for the user name to allow access to the WT1600 e Enter up to 15 characters e The characters that can be used are 0 9 A Z _ parenthesis minus sign Ifthe user name is set to anonymous the WT1600 can be accessed from the outside PC or WS without a password Setting the Timeout Time The WT1600 closes the connection to the network if there is no access for a certain period of time timeout time Select the value in the range of 0 to 3600 s The default value is 60 s Logging List The access log of the WT1600 can be displayed The data and time user name and IP address of the 25 recent accesses are displayed IM 760101 01E 13 21 uondo suonesiunwwos 3u194 3 g 13 6 Accessing the WT1600 from a PC or Workstation FTP Server Function Note The WT1600 supports only a single client When the WT
14. ESC ESC Harmonics Mode OFF PN a Object Harmonics Harmonics m Ko Q WU zA PLL Source Up Exec PLL Source Up Exec PLL Source Down Exec Min Order PLL Source Down Exec L Min Order 9 Max Order _Thd Formula al 1 Fundanental i geO0000 Min Order J e i we Max Order ww Max Order 100 100 W Thd Formula Thd Formula 1 Total 1 Total L M Window Width M Window Width 8192 8192 JOUUUL Explanation When determining the measurement functions Uhdf Ihdf Phdf Uthd Ithd and Pthd of the harmonic measurement mode select the denominator of the equation from the following list of choices For the equation see appendix 1 1 Total All harmonic measurement data from the minimum to the maximum harmonic order up to the upper limit of harmonic order to be analyzed become the denominator 1 Fundamental The data of the fundamental signal component 1st order become the denominator NOTO SS e e HS The minimum and maximum harmonic orders to be analyzed are the components selected in section 7 5 IM 760101 01E 7 13 juswainseayy D1uOW Ie 7 7 Changing the Data Length CR ESC pea pales Senate STORE SET z MENU C we ow ficou me KY To exit the menu during operation press ESC wa feam sr
15. AC alternating current The electricity supplied by the power company is an alternating current The waveform is sinusoidal The amplitude of an AC signal an be expressed in terms of the instantaneous values maximum values rms values and mean values In general it is expressed in terms of rms values The instantaneous value of the current of a sine wave i is expressed as Imsinat Im max value of current angular velocity where 2rf f frequency of the AC signal The heating effect of the AC signal is proportional to i and varies as shown in the following figure Refers to the electrical energy being converted to heat energy due to current flowing through the resistor i Imsinat The rms value effective value is the value of the DC signal that generates the same heating effect as the AC signal If the value of the DC signal that generates the same heating effect is expressed as I then r ae l V Mean over one period ofi Because this value is equal to the square root of the mean of the square of the instantaneous values i over one period in short rms the symbol rms is generally used to denote the effective value IM 760101 01E App 17 Ea xipueddy Appendix 5 Power Basics Power Harmonics Three Constants Related to the AC Circuit For the mean value since taking the average over one period of a sine wave results in zero the mean is determined using the absolut
16. Executing OK Aborting Cancel the Format Operation 10 Press the Format Exec soft key to display the Alert dialog box 11 Turn the jog shuttle to select OK or Cancel 12 Select OK and press SELECT to execute the format operation Select Cancel and press SELECT to abort the format operation Really SC4 will be formatted by deviding 1 part Ok Cancel 12 8 IM 760101 01E 12 5 Formatting the Disk Explanation CAUTION Do not remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or S is blinking Such acts can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium e If the WT1600 cannot recognize a formatted medium format the disk again on the WT1600 Note that all the data on the disk are cleared when the disk is formatted Make sure to back up important data beforehand Media Information Lists the information about the selected medium e Media Name Name of the medium e Media Size Total size e Used Space Size of the used area e Vacant Space Size of the free area e Partition Size Number of partitions If you press the Media Info soft key when a floppy disk that has been formatted to MS DOS format is inserted in the floppy drive the media information of the floppy disk is displayed Formatting a Floppy Disk When using a new floppy disk you must format it The format is 2 HD 1 44 MB 18 sectors Formatting a Disk The formats of the
17. SOURCE LOAD Input terminal 1 Current sensor input connector EXT Note For wiring precautions see also sections 3 7 and 3 8 IM 760101 01E sjuswainseayy Buers 310499 el 3 10 Turning ON OFF the Power Switch Points to Check before Turning ON the Power e Check that the instrument is installed properly See section 3 2 Installing the Instrument Check that the power cord is connected properly see section 3 5 Connecting the Power Supply e Check that the circuit under measurement is wired properly see sections 3 7 Directly Wiring the Circuit under Measurement 3 8 Using an External Current Sensor to Wire the Circuit under Measurement 3 9 Using an External PT or CT to Wire the Circuit under Measurement and 3 10 Wiring a Circuit with Voltage Input Exceeding 600 V Location of the Power Switch The power switch is located in the lower left corner of the front panel Turning ON OFF the Power Switch The power switch is a push button Press the button once to turn it ON and press it again to turn it OFF ms ha Ta l The Order in Turning ON OFF the Power When using the model with the SCSI option and you wish to save or load data using an external SCSI device turn ON the SCSI device first then turn ON this instrument When turning OFF the instrument and SCSI device reverse the order Power Up Operation When the power swit
18. File Name 2001 08 24 06 27 R W Store Setting Convert Memory Property Convert Memory Exec Convert Memory Exec OOU OULR i i Setting the File Name and Comment 11 Press the File Name soft key to display the Save dialog box 12 Turn the jog shuttle to select Auto Naming 13 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF 14 Turn the jog shuttle to select File Name 15 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 16 Use the keyboard to set the file name For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 17 Enter the comment in a similar fashion 18 Press ESC to close the Save dialog box ESG convert Menory M File Name auto Naning Fiene 7 m INSERT 11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9ToT NTE Epes fer tela BICELL HUT IT KEL IME ccrFSLINTOUPLQURISTT UY ux y ZC BAS HS BY A E M CB Comment Property UE JOUG Convert Memory Exec 11 14 IM 760101 01E 11 5 Saving the Stored Data Executing the Save Operation 19 Press the Convert Memory Exec soft key The stored data is saved to the directory indicated by Pathe At the same time the Convert Memory Exec soft key changes to an Abort soft key Aborting the Save Operation 20 Press the Abort soft key to abort the save operation At the same time the Abo
19. Power cord included in the package IM 760101 01E 3 6 Directly Wiring the Circuit under Measurement The measurement cable is wired directly from the circuit under measurement to the voltage current input terminal To prevent the possibility of electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the precautions given in section 3 3 Wiring Precautions Connecting to the Input Terminal e Voltage Input Terminal The terminal is a 64 mm safety banana jack female Insert the safety terminal the conductive parts are not exposed into the voltage input terminal Current Input Terminal When the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current input terminals do not touch the current sensor input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous e When connecting measurement cables from an external current sensor to the current sensor input connector remove the cables connected to the current input terminals In addition when the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current sensor input terminal do not touch the current input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous e The terminal is a binding post The screws used on the terminal binding post are M6 screws Either wind the wire around the screw or pass the crimp on lugs through the screw
20. RANGE SCALING WIRING MOTOR SET o a FILTER i Hg AVG CAL e NTEGRATOR wma g a STOP SR INTEG SET RESET START Procedure 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Config soft key to display the Config menu e Selecting the Crest Factor 3 Press Crest Factor to select CF3 or CF6 Q W Message JE ENG j LoD Brightness 2 Crest Factor Communication CF6 Date Time Conf ig Selftest im iz z m Explanation Selecting the Crest Factor The crest factor is a ratio of the peak to the rms value You can select CF3 or CF6 Note If you set the crest factor to 6 the voltage range and current range are set to the maximum range on all elements If you set the crest factor to 6 the measurement conditions of crest factor 5 and higher required by IEC 62018 are met IM 760101 01E 5 29 SUOI IPUOD JUBWsINSea Y Chapter6 Normal Measurement and Integration 6 1 Changing the Displayed Item of Numerical Data For a functional description see section 1 4 o a MN oispLay HOLD cad FILE srone copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU aTRIGD o REMOTE a WAVE LOCAL MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC a RANGE scaunel WIRING MOTOR SET anil CAL qs NTEGRATOR mm g a START STOP s
21. Item Number of Characters Characters That Can Be Used Date and time Specified number 0 to 9 Equation 1 to 50 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces Unit 1 to 8 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces File Name 1 to 8 characters 0 9 A Z _ parenthesis minus sign Comment 0 to 25 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces Server name 0 to 40 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces User name 0 to 40 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces Password 0 to 40 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces E mail address 0 to 40 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces the character cannot be entered consecutively Note Upper and lower case letters are not distinguished for file names They are distinguished in comments In addition the following five file names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL and CLOCK e When using the GP IB or serial interface commands to enter a file name the following symbols that do not exist on the keyboard of this instrument can be used IM 760101 01E 3 27 s uswainseeyy Buers 310499 el Chapter4 Screen Display Format 4 1 Displaying the Data Numerical Data of Measurement Functions For a functional description see section 1 4
22. OOL Setting the Graphic Color e Selecting default or user 3 Press the Graph Color soft key to display the Graph Color menu 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select Default or User SC Graph Color lode K Graph Color Default K Text Color Kl User Color Setting Netuork JUUUUUUE 15 16 IM 760101 01E 15 7 Setting the Display Color of the Screen e Setting user colors O OW ope 09 Press the User Color soft key to display the Graph Color dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select the item you wish to set Press SELECT to display the color level selection box Turn the jog shuttle to set the color level For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Press SELECT or ESC to close the box Graph Color ESC a Mode Default User Color Graph Color U27115 UOL 12706 U3 16 13 Speed U4 Torque Mi SW amp be Bj 14 Setting the Text Color e Selecting preset or user 3 4 K Press the Text Color soft key to display the Text Color menu Turn the jog shuttle to select Preset1 to User Text Color J Mode Preset 1 m Q User Color e Setting user colors oa Po Press the User Color sof
23. 7 100 5 0 V 140 Approx 7 0 V f 140 100 i 100 140 Displayed value K Approx 7 0 V AES AE Approx 7 5 V and are not output outside 5 V When the display format of is 360 degrees 360 format is output in the range of O V to 5 V When the display format of 6 is 180 Lead lag 180 lag to 180 lead is output in the range of 5 V to 5 V However approximately 7 5 V is output when an error occurs For U pk and l pk only approximately 7 5 V is output when an error occurs e Forn 1 Uhdf Ihdf Phdf Uthd Ithd Pthd Uthf Ithf hvf hcf Slip nmA and nmB 5 V is output when the measured value is equal to 100 e For Utif and Itif 5 V is output when the measured value is equal to 100 e For Torque 5 V is output when the measured value is equal to a value rated value of input range x torque scaling factor For example with an input range of 10 V if the scaling factor is set to 1 Nem torque per 1 V input voltage 5 V is output when torque is 10 Nem For Speed when the revolution signal is an analog signal 5 V is output when the measured value is equal to a value rated value of input range of the analog signal x scaling factor of rotating speed For example with an input range of 10 V if the scaling factor is set to 100 rpm rotating speed per 1 V input voltage 5 V is output when the rotating speed is 1000 rpms
24. I1 W Cursor Path Max 7 Wave Ci Wave 2 00ns Setting Wave C2 x L 5 00ns OUUU m O a IM 760101 01E 9 21 Aejdsig wiojsone jy el 9 9 Performing Cursor Measurements Cursor ESG Select Wave Cursor OFF Ry M WaveC1 Trace UL M WaveC2 Trace IL M Cursor Path Max gt Wave Ci 2 00ms Wave C2 x L 5 00ns L JUUUUE Selecting the Target Waveform for Cursor Measurement Selecting the target waveform for cursor 4 Press the WaveC1 Trace soft key to display the target waveform selection box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select any of the signals starting with U1 6 Press SELECT to confirm the new target waveform Selecting the target waveform for cursor x Press the WaveC2 Trace soft key to display the target waveform selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select any of the signals starting with U1 Press SELECT to confirm the new target waveform Dane Selecting the Movement Path of the Cursor 7 Press the Cursor Path soft key to display the Cursor Path menu 8 Press one of the soft keys from Max to Mid to select the movement path Moving the Cursor 9 Press the Wave C1 Wave C2 x soft key to set the jog shuttle target to Wave C1 Wave C2 x or both Wave C1 and Wave C2 x If you select Wave C1 the position of cursor can be moved e If you select Wave C2 x the position of cursor x can be moved e
25. Range Copy Exec Hila B0000 IM 760101 01E SUOI IPUOD pUu WNSLIN 5 2 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input Explanation Display Position of the Target Element and the Specified Range The target element and the specified range are displayed at the upper right corner of the screen when RANGE is pressed Voltage ge Current Element Voltage range Appears when in auto range mode U2 10000 Auto YOKOGAWA Z 5A 4 Elenent Object Element 2 I U Range Current range Selecting the Target Element to Be Specified Only the installed elements are displayed The Element menu is displayed according to the element configuration of the product Setting the Voltage and Current Ranges There are two types of ranges fixed range and auto range Note Fixed range Voltage range When the crest factor is set to 3 Select 1 5 V 3 V 6 V 10 V 15 V 30 V 60 V 100 V 150 V 300 V 600 V or 1000 V When the crest factor is set to 6 Select 750 mV 1 5 V 3 V 5 V 7 5 V 15 V 30 V 50 V 75 V 150 V 300 V or 500 V Current range For a 5 A input element e When the crest factor is set to 3 Select 10 mA 20 mA 50 mA 100 mA 200 mA 500 mA 1 A 2 A or 5A When the crest factor is set to 6 Select 5 mA 10 mA 25 mA 50 mA 100 mA 250 mA 500 mA 1 A or 2 5 A For a 50 A input element e When the crest factor is set to 3 Select 1 A 2 A 5 A 10 A 20 A or 50
26. Rated supply voltage 50 60 Hz frequency Permitted supply voltage 48 to 63 Hz frequency range Maximum power consumption 150 VA when using the built in printer Insulation resistance 50 MQ or more at 500 VDC Between power plug and case Between all voltage input terminals and case Between all current input terminals and case Between all voltage terminals and all current input terminals Between all torque and revolution signal input connectors and case Between all the torque signal input connectors and all the revolution signal input connectors Withstand voltage 1500 VAC at 50 60 Hz for one minute Between power plug and case 3700 VAC at 50 60 Hz for one minute Between all voltage input terminals and case Between all current input terminals and case Between all voltage terminals and all current input terminals External dimensions See section 17 18 Approx 426 mm W x 177 mm H x 400 mm D Excludes the handle and other projections Weight Approx 15 kg main unit 6 input elements and option installed Installation position Horizontal however the stand can be used Vertical position and stacking not allowed Battery backup Setup parameters and internal time clock are backed up with lithium batteries IM 760101 01E 17 19 h Ey suoneoyioeds 17 17 General Specifications Item Specification Fuse Location Max Rated Voltage Max Rat
27. ccsccceseeseeeestereeees 5 24 5 9 Holding the Numerical Data Display at the MAxiMUM eeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeneeereneees 5 25 A 5 10 Performing Master Slave Synchronized Measurement cccsceccecesssseseeeseeeeseeeeaees 5 26 5 11 Selecting ithe Crest Factor aa e a a a a a E R EA St RETENE 5 29 Chapter 6 Normal Measurement and Integration 6 1 Changing the Displayed Item of Numerical Data c cecceeeceeseeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeteeten 6 1 6 2 Setting the Measurement Period ceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaeeseeseaeesieeeeaeesaaes 6 4 6 3 Selecting the Frequency Measurement Target cccecceesceseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeneeteaeesteeteates 6 7 6 4 Setting the User Defined FUNCTION 0 0 eeeeececeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeaeeeaeeseaeeseeseaeeseeeeeaees 6 8 6 5 Setting the Delta Computation 0 ee eececeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeseaeeseeseaeessaeeeeeeenatees 6 12 6 6 Setting the Equations for Apparent Power and Corrected POWET cscceeseeeeeeeees 6 15 6 7 Selecting the Display Format of the Phase Difference ccceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeees 6 18 6 8 Setting the Normal Integration Mode and the Integration Timer cceeeeeeeeteees 6 20 6 9 Setting the Real time Integration Mode the Integration Timer and the Reservation Time asyisc ee eciei aa nae vite oy aenieen didn ald alae es 6 23 6 10 Selecting the Current Mode for Current Integration a
28. A y O00000 KO s ES oTRIGD o REMOTE a WAVE LOCAL MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC INPUT a RANGE cata MOTOR SET a ve am NTEGRATOR emmma g a START STOP INTEGSET RESET d E FILTER pi CAL Procedure Holding the Numerical Data Display 1 Press HOLD The HOLD indicator above and to the left of the key illuminates and the numerical data display is held Performing a Single Measurement 2 Press SHIFT HOLD SINGLE The measurement is performed once and the instrument enters the held condition Releasing the Held Condition 3 Press HOLD while the values are held The HOLD indicator turns OFF and the numerical data display is updated Hold This function aborts the measurement display operation that is performed at the data update rate and holds the data display of the various functions The D A output the numerical data list that the built in printer prints the communication output and other values are set to the held numerical data Single Measurement While in the held condition the measurement is performed once at the specified data update rate and enters the held condition Note For details on the hold function during integration see section 6 11 5 24 IM 760101 01E 5 9 Holding the Numerical Data Display at the Maximum For a
29. D Aooo00ce K Graph Color K Text Color 4 DA Output a asra How 4 PATE FILE STORE copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o cREMOTE WAVE Harmonics CURSOR To exit the menu during operation press ESC SCSI Setting Netuork Next 272 Press MISC to display the Misc menu Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu Press the D A Output Items soft key to display the D A Output menu IM 760101 01E 15 1 al suonoun4 19440 pue nd no v a 15 1 Setting the D A Output Option Setting the D A Output Items during Normal Measurement Selecting the Target Channel 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select 1 to 30 Selecting the Measurement Function 5 Press the Function soft key to display the measurement function selection box 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select any of the measurement function starting with None T Press SELECT to confirm Selecting the Element Wiring Unit 8 Press the Element soft key to display the element wiring unit selection box 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select any of the elements wiring units starting with Elementi 10 Press SELECT to confirm Proceed to step 14 DA Output Norn Item No DA Output Norm Item No 1 1 M Function WA Function Select Urns None Urns Unean m
30. Domain Suff ix Domain Suff ix2 13 4 IM 760101 01E 13 2 Setting the Ethernet Interface TCP IP When Using Both DHCP and DNS 5 Explanation OOM Turn the jog shuttle to select DHCP Press SELECT to select ON Turn the jog shuttle to select DNS Press SELECT to display the DNS selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select ON or Auto If you selected ON you must enter information according to Entering the Domain Name through Entering the Secondary Domain Suffix on the previous page If you selected Auto the entry information from Entering the Domain Name to Entering the Secondary Domain Suffix is automatically set by the DHCP server Therefore you do not have to enter the information TCP IP Setup DHCP LOFF IP Address Ca Net Mask g5 Gate Way Ca S Select Domal DNS DNS Domal Domain Suff ix2 To use the Ethernet communication functions of the WT1600 DHCP IP address IP address subnet mask default gateway and DNS must be specified Consult your system or network administrator in setting these parameters DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol The IP address subnet mask default gateway and DNS can be automatically specified by using DHCP To use DHCP the network must have a DHCP server Consult your network administrator to se
31. START Procedure The retrieval of trend display data must be turned ON to display trends For the procedure see section 10 1 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu 2 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Displaying Trends 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select Trend Numeric Trend Wave Trend or Bar Trend 4 Press SELECT to confirm the new display format ESG Format Numeric Select Numer ic Wave Item Amount Bar 4 2 Vector Norm Item No Numer ic Wave Numer ic Bar Numer ic Trend Wave Bar Wave Trend Bar Trend Information 1 Numer ic Disp Itens Page Up Scroll Exec Page Down Scroll Exec il JOUUUUE IM 760101 01E 4 15 yewo4 Aejdsig u 19S 4 5 Displaying Trends Explanation A display example is shown below For the procedure in changing the displayed items and contents of trends see chapter 10 When the retrieval of waveform display data is OFF see section 9 1 during normal measurement the horizontal axis is expressed using time as shown below During harmonic measurement or when the retrieval of waveform display data is ON the horizontal axis is expressed using the number of data points on the screen The trend value in the held condition see section 5 8 is the same as the numerical data when HOLD is pressed When hold is released the trend that was held is displayed Uover m m m m
32. The trigger occurs when the trigger source signal rises above the trigger level from a lower level e 4 The trigger occurs when the trigger source signal falls below the trigger level from a higher level e 4 Trigger occurs on both the rising and falling cases Setting the Trigger Level Trigger level refers to the level through which the trigger slope passes When the slope of the trigger source passes through the specified trigger level on a rising or falling edge a trigger occurs The level can be set in the range from 0 0 to 100 0 e Half of the total vertical span of the waveform display screen is considered to be 100 With the vertical center of the screen taken to be the input zero line the upper and lower limits of the waveform display screen are 100 and 100 respectively If the crest factor is set to 3 the upper and lower limits of the waveform display screen correspond to three times the measurement range if scaled the range after scaling of the voltage current that is set for each element Likewise if the crest factor is set to 6 the upper and lower limits correspond to six times the measurement range e The trigger level setting is void when the trigger source is set to Ext Clk Measurement range 100 Vrms when the crest factor is 3 50 Vrms when the crest factor is 6 Trigger level 25 100 300 Vpk W Input zero line Trigger level 25 75 V Vertical center
33. 6016kUA Q z342kvar 0 9211 22 91 e By moving the vectors U1 1 U2 1 and U3 1 so that the starting points of vectors are all at the origin the phase relationship can be observed in the same fashion as the three phase four wire system For the relationship between the positions of the vectors after moving them see Vector Display of Harmonics in section 1 8 The WT1600 does not provide a function for moving the vectors e The phase difference between the line voltages can be determined from the phase difference measurement functions U1 U2 and 9U1 U3 U1 U2 This is the measurement function oU1 U2 U2 U3 oU1 U3 U1 U2 180 oU2 U3 oU1 U3 6U1 U2 180 U3 U1 juswainseayy D1uOW Ie 13 1 Size of the peripheral circle range The size of the vector representing the voltage l and current is expanded 2 times and 1 2 times i respectively The voltage range and current 1 range values are reduced to 1 2 and 2 the original values respectively 6 5546ku 6021kUA 9 2343kvar 0 3212 22 90 IM 760101 01E 7 25 Chapter8 Motor Evaluation Option 8 1 Inputting Signals of Rotating Speed and Torque The rotating speed torque and output of a motor can be determined from the DC voltage analog signal or pulse count signal received from a revolution sensor which is proportional to the rotating speed of the motor and the DC voltage analog signal r
34. Range displayed on i the screen 300 Vpk peters racine oe ioe Led 300 Vpk droio teskeresi ader bee i 100 100 Note To expand and view a section of the waveform we recommend the following procedure 1 Set the zoom factor to 1 2 Move the vertical position so that the desired section of the waveform is at the center position according to the procedure described in this section 3 Set the vertical zoom factor 9 10 IM 760101 01E 9 5 Turning ON OFF the Waveform Display Procedure For a functional description see section 1 7 o EA ee SINGLE oTRIGD o ve on CURSOR RANGE scaunel WIRING a eqs NTEGRATOR mm g a IT CAL START STOP INTEGSET RESET UP DATE RATE a FILE STORE COPY STORE SET REMOTE Loca MISC TMAX HOLD NULL MENU a SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC The retrieval of waveform display data must be turned ON to display waveforms For the procedure see section 9 1 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Bar or Wave Trend For details on setting the display format see section 4 2 The following procedures are given for a representative example in which the dis
35. Setting Element 1 Elenent 2 Element 3 Element 4 Element 5 Elenent 6 Fach ArT mms pe DC AaC_ k mns LL ns Independent Control ON Current Mode HEAN_ DC _ AC RNS MEAN_ OC _ Ac ny DUBULE S Q IM 760101 01E 6 29 uolesbaju pue JUoWeiINSeayy EWON el 6 10 Selecting the Current Mode for Current Integration and ON OFF of Integration Auto Calibration Explanation Turning ON OFF the Integration Auto Calibration 8 4 Nornal 4 Timer Setting T ndependent oN 4 Current Mode Press the Auto Cal soft key to select ON or OFF Mode Q Control Selecting the Current Mode for Current Integration Select the current type used for current integration on each element from the following list of choices For the equations of each current type see section 1 2 e RMS True rms value e MEAN Rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value e DC Linear averaging e AC AC component When the current mode is set to DC the polarity is displayed Turning ON OFF Integration Auto Calibration Zero level compensation is normally performed when the measurement range or line filter is changed However zero level compensation can be automatically performed during integration ON Zero level compensation is automatically performed approximately ever
36. To exit the menu during operation press ESC RANGE scana WIRING MOTOR SET o ae qm NTEGRATOR mmm z oa START STOP INTEG SET RESET FILTER pi H B Procedure 1 Press FILE to display the File menu 2 Press the Utility soft key The Utility menu and the File List dialog box appear 3 Press the Function soft key to display the Function menu 4 Press the Delete soft key to display the Delete menu Delete Funct ESC W Function ieia Delete Set Reset All Set EE NOOOCooe Property MakeDir Attribute Attribute Delete Exec Delete Exec EL JOUOUUL Selecting the Medium and Directory 5 Same as the procedures given in Selecting the Save Destination Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 12 6 12 26 IM 760101 01E 12 9 Specifying the File to Be Displayed Viewing File Properties and Changing the File Attribute Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box 6 Press the Filter soft key to select Item or All e If you select Item the list of files corresponding to the file type Setup Wave or Numeric that is specified for File Item in the File menu in the directory selected in step 5 is displayed If you select All the list of all the files in the directory selected in step 5 is displayed Viewing the Properties On the
37. Wiring system pattern 5 3P4W or 3V3A ZA 3P4W or 3V3A ZB IM 760101 01E suoljoun jo uoneuejdxa 1 3 Measurement Conditions Measurement Range For procedures see section 5 2 Set the measurement range using an rms level When directly inputting voltage or current signals to the input element two types of measurement ranges is available fixed range and auto range When waveforms are displayed the vertical display range corresponds to 3 or 6 times the measurement range when the crest factor see section 5 11 is set to 3 or 6 respectively For details on waveform display see section 1 7 Waveform Display Fixed Range Select each range from a number of choices The selected range does not switch even if the amplitude of the input signal changes For voltage the maximum and minimum selectable ranges are 1000 V and 1 5 V respectively when the crest factor is set to 3 When the crest factor is set to 6 the maximum and minimum selectable ranges are 500 V and 750 mV respectively Auto Range The measurement range switches automatically depending on the amplitude of the input signal The different ranges used in the auto range are the same as those available for fixed range e Range increase e When the data of measurement function Urms or Irms exceeds 110 of the current measurement range the measurement range is increased When the peak value of the input signal exceeds 330 or 660 of the cur
38. a o DISPLAY roo ree FILE STORE COPY ESC SINGLE STORE SET MENU o TRIG D o REMOTE a ae toca mse CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC lt NP o RANGE scaunel WIRING MOTOR SET o o OUOU Se h A co AL qs NTEGRATOR mm z a START STOP src sad INTEG SET RESET Procedure Check that the measurement mode is set to normal measurement If the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement set Mode to OFF in the Harmonics menu see section 7 1 1 Press MEASURE to display the Measure menu 2 Press the User Defined soft key to display the User Defined Function dialog box Turning ON OFF the User Defined Function Computation 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the user defined function you wish to enter from Function1 to Function4 4 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF W Q Measure E Freq Item User Def ined User Defined Function 1 4 4 Measure Function 1 FF _ON Unit V Expression URMS E1 S Formula Function 2 FF _ON Unit _A__ Urns Irns Expression TRMS E1 Formula Function 3 a wmit CIJ Expression UPPK E1 Phase Function 4 PFF ON Unit CA p Lead Lag Expression TPPKCE1 ic Measure Ster Slave JUUUUOUE 6 8 IM 760101 01E 6 4 Setting the User Defined Function Setting the Unit 5 Turn
39. Installed input elements Wiring system pattern 1 Installed input elements N 1P2W 1P2W 1P3W or seamen Wiring system pattern 1 Wiring system pattern 2 Installed input elements 3 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W 1P3W or 3P3W ZA 1P2W B Wiring system pattern 1 Wiring system pattern 2 Wiring system pattern 3 1P2W ZA 1P3W or 3P3W B Wiring system pattern 4 Installed input elements 3P4W or 3V3A ZA 1 2 3 4 Wiring system pattern 1 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W Wiring system pattern 2 1P3W or 3P3W ZA 1P3W or 3P3W B Wiring system pattern 3 3P4W or 3V3A ZA 1P2W B Wiring system pattern 4 Installed input elements 1P2W ZA 3P4W or 3V3A ZB 1 2 3 4 5 Wiring system pattern 1 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W Wiring system pattern 2 1P3W or 3P3W ZA 1P3W or 3P3W B 1P2W C Wiring system pattern 3 1P3W or 3P3W ZA 3P4W or 3V3A IB Wiring system pattern 4 Installed input elements 3P4W or 3V3A ZA 1P3W or 3P3W B 2 3 4 5 6 Wiring system pattern 1 1P2W 1P2w 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W Wiring system pattern 2 1P3W or 3P3W ZA 1P3W or 3P3W B 1P3W or 3P3W C Wiring system pattern 3 1P3W or 3P3W ZA 3P4W or 3V3A ZB 1P2W C Wiring system pattern 4 3P4W or 3V3A ZA 1P3W or 3P3W B 1P2W zC
40. Seiftest WA Test Item Memory UUUUUUUE Test Exec Testing the Keys and the Keyboard e Testing the Keys 5 Press the Test Exec soft key 6 Press the front panel keys to test them 7 Press the arrow keys lt and gt The indicator lights one by one each time an arrow key is pressed 8 Press ESC twice to exit from the key test e Testing the keyboard 9 Press the Soft Key soft key to display the keyboard 10 Operate the keyboard Check that the characters entered on the keyboard are correctly displayed in the entry box of the keyboard For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings ESC Seiftest Test Item Seiftest 4 Test Item key Board Key Board Soft Key Test Exec m Q i OLN e UUUUUUU Test Exec Memory Test Tests whether the internal ROM and RAM are operating correctly If Pass is displayed it is operating correctly If Failed is displayed contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer E Explanation Testing the Keys and the Keyboard e Tests whether the front panel keys are operating properly If the name of the key being pressed appears on the screen it is operating correctly e If the indicator turns ON OFF when the arrow keys lt or gt are pressed the keys are operating correctly To exit from the key test press ESC twice e Ifthe display is not correct contact your nea
41. Single Trend Sampling OFF PN Restart Trend Exec Trend T div i Trend Setting 3szdi y K Trend Disp Items OOBOUULI JOL Explanation The retrieval of trend display data must be turned ON to display trends The numerical data of the measurement function is P P compressed and stored to the memory as trend display data P P compression is performed when there are more than two points of data at a single display segment ON The retrieval of trend waveform data starts OFF Trend display data is not retrieved IM 760101 01E 10 1 Aejdsig pu L 2 10 2 Selecting the Trend Display Target Procedure ESC UUUUUU START STOP INTEG SET RESET For a functional description see section 1 8 _ _sS DISPLAY HOLD ical FILE STORE COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o REMOTE Loca MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD o NULL pi WAVE SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Trend Numeric Trend Wave Trend or Bar Trend For details on setting the display format see section 4 5 The following procedures are given for a representative example in which the display format is set to Trend 2 Press the Trend Setting soft key to display the Trend Setting menu 3 Press the Tre
42. ee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeesaeeteaeeteeeeeaeetaaee 15 9 15 3 Initializing the Settings a e dia niin Seed ce Aiea 15 10 15 4 Performing Zero Level Compensation ceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeesaeeteneeeeeseaeteeeteas 15 12 15 5 Using the NULL FUMCHOM a rra r a T e aae a r aaaea cehes daca se intesdecootsenrantessaestarn 15 13 15 6 Selecting the Message Language and the Screen Brightness ccesseeeseeeees 15 14 15 7 Setting the Display Color of the Screen 00 2 ec eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeesieeseaeeeeeeeeas 15 16 15 8 Seting Key Lock 1 c0iii e T i ddl aE aTr Ea T iil a Eara rnaar aanne an aeria 15 19 Chapter 16 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection te Troubleshooting reee ada a e ea a rnn 16 1 16 2 Error Messages and Corrective ACtiONS ccccesceeseeeeneeeeeeeeneeceeeseaeesaeeeaeeseeeeeaeeeeeeenaaes 16 2 16 3 Performing a Self TeSt porrno iit ceeds at a ea A eee 16 6 16 4 Checking the System Conditions 0 eee eee cee ee cece cee eeee cae eeae tee eeaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeenaeeas 16 8 AX 16 5 Replacing the Power Fuse ccccccccsssssscscsescsecscsesesesecscsesesesecsesesesecseseseecsesesececseseaeenes 16 9 16 6 Recommended Replacement Parts c ceesceeeeseeeeesneeeeeneeeteneeeeeeaeeeeeeneeseneeeeeneeeees 16 10 Chapter 17 Specifications ATA DUT ss eecetepes cles sk tei be e a te ae ieee aces eben deste ee 17 1 W752 DISPlAy EE ETE SEE EEA EAT 17 2
43. 1 5 Computation 1 6 Integration appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions and appendix 2 Determination of Delta Computation For details on the wiring units expressed as XA B and C see section 5 1 Selecting the Wiring System no data is displayed in places where the measurement function is not selected or where numerical data is not present IM 760101 01E uoles6aju pue JUsWeiNSeayy JEUN el 6 2 Setting the Measurement Period For a functional description see section 1 2 eo eaz a o sear HOLD ica FILE srone COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o REMOTE WAVE Loca MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT pi To exit the menu during operation press ESC 3 MOTOR SET z CAL 1 INTEGRATOR mmm E INTEGSET RESET Procedure 1 Press SYNC SRC to display the Sync Src menu Selecting the Target Element 2 Press the Element Object soft key to display the Element menu Only the installed elements are displayed 3 Press one the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element to select the target element The selected element is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen if you selected element 1 Sync Src are displayed Setting the Synchronization Source 4 Press the Item Up Exec or Item Down Exec soft key to set the synchronization source The specifie
44. If you press the Page Down Scroll Exec soft key the numerical data corresponding to item numbers that are larger than those of the numerical data displayed up to that point are displayed Display 4 Format Numer ic A Item Amount 4 2 f Norm Item No m Q 1 K Nuner ic Disp Items Page Up Scroll Exec Page Down Scroll Exec ii IM 760101 01E 43 yewo Aejdsig usa19S 4 1 Displaying the Data Numerical Data of Measurement Functions 4 4 Page Up Dual List Scroll Exec il 7 During Harmonic Measurement Selecting the Number of Displayed Items or List Display 5 6 Press the Item Amount soft key to display the Item Amount menu Select one of the 4 2 to List soft keys to select the number of displayed items or list display Format Numeric Harn Item No 1 Nuner ic Disp Items Page Down Scroll Exec m BO0000LR S Q Display Format Numeric Ttem Amount UDI i Scrolling the Display Turn the jog shuttle to move the highlighting If the number of displayed items is set to 4 2 through 16 8 the item number of the highlighted measurement function is displayed in the Harm Item No box of the Display menu If the number of displayed items is set to Single List or Dual List the highlighted order is displayed in the Order box of the Display menu If the
45. Ue Element Element 7 f Select Element 2 Element 1 Element 1 Elenent 3 Element 4 Element 5 Element 6 X 15 2 IM 760101 01E 15 1 Setting the D A Output Option Setting the D A Output Items during Harmonic Measurement Selecting the Target Channel 4 Press the Harm Item No soft key 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select 1 to 30 Selecting the Measurement Function 6 Press the Function soft key to display the measurement function selection box 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select any of the measurement function starting with None 8 Press SELECT to confirm Selecting the Element Wiring Unit 9 Press the Element soft key to display the element wiring unit selection box 10 Turn the jog shuttle to select any of the elements wiring units starting with Elementi 11 Press SELECT to confirm Selecting the Harmonic Order 12 Press Order soft key 13 Turn the jog shuttle to select the order from Total and 0 to the maximum harmonic order see section 7 5 DA Output ESC DA Output DA Output ESC DA Output ESC Harn Item No Harm Item No Harn Item No Harm Item No i m 1 Function hw Se lect Function M Function M Function baa i g K Element U Element Select Element K Element Element 1 I Element 1 Element 1 O Element 1 P Order Element 2 Ord
46. o a DISPLAY HOLD Za FILE STORE cory SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o REMOTE a WAVE LOCAL MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC os PU RANGE scaune WIRING MOTOR SET o rom we oad CAL e NTEGRATOR mw g a starr STOP sinc sad INTEG SET RESET Procedure 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu 2 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Displaying Numerical Data 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select Numeric Numeric Wave Numeric Bar only during harmonic measurement or Numeric Trend 4 Press SELECT to confirm the new display format Display Select Format Numeric Wave Bar 4 2 Vector Trend Numer ic Wave Numer ic Numer ic Bar Disp Itens Numer ic Trend Wave Bar Wave Trend Page Up Scroll Exec Page Down Scroll Exec Bar Trend Information IM 760101 01E 4 1 yewo Aejdsig u 19S a 4 1 Displaying the Data Numerical Data of Measurement Functions The following procedures are given for a representative example in which the display format is set to Numeric During Normal Measurement Selecting the Displayed Item 5 Press the Item Amount soft key to display the Item Amount menu 6 Press one of the 4 2 to All keys to select the numb
47. 6 35 uolesbaju pue JUoWeINSeayy eEWION el 6 11 Performing Integration Start Stop and Reset Integration When Current Input Is Small If Irms or lac is less than or equal to 0 3 less than or equal to 0 6 when the crest factor is set to 6 and Imn is less than or equal to 1 less than or equal to 2 when the crest factor is set to 6 of the measurement range the current is considered to be zero for the purpose of integration Backup During Power Failures e If a power failure occurs when integration is in progress the integration result is held When the power recovers the integration result calculated up to the point when the power failure occurred is displayed with the integration operation stopped e Ifthe integration is reset after the power recovers integration can be started once again Limitation on Modifying the Settings during Integration When the integration is in progress some of the functions cannot be changed as shown e Yes Settings can be modified e No Settings cannot be modified e Starting integration in auto range mode switches the measurement range to fixed range mode below Integration Operation Condition Integration Reset Integrating Integration Suspended START indicator OFF ON OFF STOP indicator OFF OFF ON Function Wiring system Yes Yes Yes Measurement range Yes No No Scaling Yes No No Filter Yes No No Averaging Yes No No Synchronization source Yes N
48. Harmonics PLL Source Up Exec PLL Source Down Exec Min Order o A W Max Order 100 W Thd Formula 1 Total M Window Width qe NTEGRATOR me a a START STOP INTEGSET RESET It K Hg For a functional description see section 1 2 a o DISPLAY roo ree FILE STORE COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU 5 TRIG D a REMOTE WAVE 2wowcs LOCAL MISC CURSOR r MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC ii Press HARMONICS to display the Harmonics menu Press the Mode soft key to select ON Press the PLL Source Up Exec or PLL Source Down Exec soft key to select the PLL source The selected PLL source is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen at PLL Src Pressing the PLL Source Up Exec soft key makes the target element for the PLL source smaller Pressing the PLL Source Down Exec soft key makes the target element for the PLL source larger NUUUUCE Harmonics Hode PLL Source Up Exec PLL Source Bown Exec Min Order o m Ww Max Order 160 Thd Formula Window Width zA 1 Total JUUBEL 8192 7 8 IM 760101 01E 7 4 Selecting the PLL Source Explanation Set the PLL phase locked loop source that is used to determine the fundamental period which acts as the reference in the analysis of the harmonic orders Displayed Position of the Selected P
49. Load Exec OUOBAL Utility E Selecting the File to Be Loaded 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the file Executing the Load Operation 10 Press the Load Exec soft key The selected file is read from the directory indicated in Path At the same time the Load Exec soft key changes to an Abort soft key Aborting the Load Operation 11 Press the Abort soft key to abort the load operation At the same time the Abort soft key changes to a Load Exec soft key Property L Load Exec 12 24 IM 760101 01E 12 8 Loading Setup Parameters Explanation Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box Same as the procedure given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box in section 12 9 Viewing the Properties Same as the procedure given in Viewing the Properties in section 12 9 CAUTION Do not remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or S is blinking Such acts can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium The setup parameters saved using the WT1600 can be loaded Selecting the Medium and Directory Same as the explanation given in Selecting the Medium and Directory in section 12 6 Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box Same as the explanation given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the
50. RANGE Haul scaunel WIRING o o ol D I a FILTER AVG CAL qs NTEGRATOR wma g a START STOP INTEG SET RESET H nspa noro Vag m STORE COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTAIGD o REMOTE me Ca wo Jean E we CURSOR TMAX HOLD aLL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 3 Press the Network soft key to display the Network menu K g Graph Color K Text Color DA Output ESC SCSI Setting Network Items OOUE 4 Press the Mail Setup soft key to display the Mail Setup dialog box Net Drive Setup Net Print Setup Others IM 760101 01E 13 15 uondo suonesiunwwos 3u194 3 g 13 5 Sending E mail Messages Specifying the Mail Server 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select Mail Server 6 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 7 Use the keyboard to enter the IP address of the mail server If you are using DNS you can specify the server by name For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Entering the Destination Mail Address 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select Mail Address 9 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 10 Use the keyboard to enter the destination mail address For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings
51. 5 Press SELECT to confirm the new pattern Example in which six elements are installed Wiring Element 1 1 2 103 1 4 105 1C06 1 A B Pattern T IP20 I i iP2u 1 i IPA 1 i ipev C tPew 7 T ip2u 1 a _ __ __ _ _ _ X X _ EA E 1P2W 1 E 1PZW 1 1P2W 1 E 1PZW 1 1P2U 1 1P2W 1 XB E iPSW SPSu 1 E iPsu sPiW TC iPsu sPiw p EC E 1P3W 3P3U 1 3P4W 3U3A 1 ipa 1 E SP4U 3U3A it 1P3U 3P3W 1 1P2u 1 Re ATE SP4U 303A 1 SP4W 3U3A 1ya IM 760101 01E 5 1 SUOI IPUOD JUBWsINSeaLY 5 1 Selecting the Wiring System Selecting the Wiring System The procedure described here is not necessary if the wiring system of all elements was set to 1P2W single phase two wire in the previous section Selecting the Wiring System Pattern Two types of wiring systems that use two elements are available 1P3W single phase three wire and 3P3W three phase three wire You can select either type through the procedure described here Two types of wiring systems that use three elements are available 3P4W three phase four wire and 3V3A three voltage three current You can select either type through the procedure described here Turn the jog shuttle to select wiring unit ZA B or XC Some of the wiring units may not be selectable depending on the number of installed elements Press SELECT to select the wiring system Repeat steps 6 and 7 to sel
52. 6 11 integration is in progress 843 Measurement stopped due to overflow during Reset Integration 6 11 integration or due to a power failure 844 Attempted to stop integration even though 6 11 integration was not in progress 845 Attempted to reset integration even though 6 11 integration was in progress or integration mode was not selected 846 Attempted to start integration while 6 11 measurement of peak overflow was in progress or during an overrange condition 847 Attempted to start integration in continuous 6 8 integration mode when integration preset time was set to 0 848 Attempted made to start integration in real time 6 9 counting integration mode when the end time had already passed 849 Attempted made to start storing in real time 11 2 counting storing mode when the end time had already passed 16 4 IM 760101 01E 16 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Code Message Corrective Action Sections 850 Stored file already exists 11 4 Initialize memory before storing 851 Stored file and measurement mode are different 7 1 Set the appropriate measurement mode before recalling 852 Stored file is illegal 11 4 Initialize memory before storing 853 Cannot be executed set during Recall mode 11 1 Set the Mode to Store 854 Waveform display data not found Turn ON the wave sam
53. ASC lhescmincinandeintsa nest z attenuation constant eee cece crete eee eeeeeeeeeeneeees 5 19 attribute wo i AUO O A i T rarae a e p Ea ocastiiediaanitehviasedeemeneccge 6 30 AULO NAMING sic dve itii didt d a auto naming function z auto rangona e aaee an ear a aaa NEA GORT ao EE A S average count AVETAGING E A averaging type selection Of cceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteseeeseaees 5 19 AVG AVG TYP C AE 5 19 bar graph i bar graphs print format Of eee rere eters 14 11 Bar tonm NO Ares eraan aa a a a aain 7 20 binary oo block diagram BMP i inai e a Ea rt neice C CAL ofat Mie eA Rein asi 15 12 circuit with voltage input exceeding 600 V assesses 3 19 clear 11 10 11 18 color 12 21 13 13 COlOr OULDUL niniin asana ani 13 13 13 14 comment oases 11 14 11 18 12 14 12 18 13 13 14 5 CONTIG e N nein bien acca ies heli ae 15 14 Connect Log Listina nnana 13 21 oolaitl alo OIU AEA EE ETETETT Convert Memory Convert Memory EXEC cceceeeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneseneenreeaes 11 15 copy copy destination CODY SOUNCO rasei kias decline anette eats 12 33 COPY O tunini ine tens 12 20 13 12 14 2 14 5 14 7 Corrected POWER ooo eee cece ects ects e eee eeeeteeeeeeetsaeeeaeeeeae 1 18 corrected power equation Of eee eeeeeeeeeeees 6 16 COUNT 2 4 aaa teen nian nein ii eats 5 19 crest factor CP ati Os t een r asst baits a ee 5 15 CT ratio S
54. If expressed in terms of the rms value the equation becomes U X_ where Xi L X is called inductive reactance and its unit is Q Inductance has the effect of inhibiting the current from changing and consequently the current phase lags that of the voltage j L o T 2 Static capacitance Current i when the instantaneous value of u Umsinot of AC voltage is applied to the load capacitance C F is expressed by the following equation T ot Imsin a 2 ot 3 _ Um i Ke sin If expressed in terms of the rms value the equation becomes U Xc where Xc 1 C Xc is called capacitive reactance and its unit is Q When the polarity of the voltage changes the maximum charge current that has the same polarity as the voltage flows through the capacitor When the voltage decreases discharge current that has the opposite polarity as the voltage flows through the capacitor Thus the current phase advances with respect to the voltage App 23 IM 760101 01E Ea xipueddy Appendix 5 Power Basics Power Harmonics Three Constants Related to the AC Circuit R L C series circuit The voltage when resistance Rs Q inductance L H and static capacitance C F are connected in series is expressed by the following equation U 4 Urs UL Uc V IRs IXL IXc IW Rs XL Xc IRs Xs Xs o o tan Re The relationship
55. MOTOR SET o o FILTER AVG ysasuRi A qm NTEGRATOR g a START STOP smc sad INTEG SET RESET Press SHIFT MEASURE CAL to execute zero level compensation Zero Level Compensation This function is used to create a zero input condition using the internal circuit of the instrument and setting the level at that point to zero level Zero level compensation must be performed to meet the specifications of this instrument see chapter 17 e Pressing CAL executes the zero level compensation e Zero level compensation is performed the first time the measurement is made after turning ON OFF harmonic measurement or changing the measurement range or input filter Note e For making accurate measurements it is recommended that zero level compensation be performed after warming up the instrument for at least an hour In addition the ambient temperature need to be within the specifications see chapter 17 and stable e Ifthe harmonic measurement ON OFF setting measurement range and input filter are not changed over a long period of time the zero level may change due to the changes in the environment surrounding the instrument It is recommended that zero level compensation be performed in this case e There are functions that automatically perform zero level compensation during integration See section 6 10 15 12 IM 760101 01E 15 5 Using the NULL Function Procedure Explanation pe vo PRE e
56. Sense Type Analog Pulse Auto Sense Type Analog Pulse Pulse Range 8 9908 10000 0009 Pulse Range 6 9000 10000 6000 Line Filter UFF 10y Line Filter Scaling 5u Scaling 1 0000 __1 6000 1 9000 Unit Tpn Nn 2u Unit Nn W Pulse N 1V Pulse N Pole ey Pole Sync Speed gf IT Sync Speed Sync Source sync Source Setting the Pulse Input Range When the type of revolution signal is Pulse set the pulse input range rated value of the rotating speed For D A output see section 15 1 the D A output value is 5 V when the rotating speed is equal to the rated value 2 Turn the jog shuttle to select Pulse Range 3 Press SELECT to display the pulse input range selection box 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the pulse input range For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 5 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box Motor Set Speed Torque Range 1 200 Sense Type fnalog_ Pulse gec Pulse Range 10068 6600 6000 a Line Filter Scaling C ooo C 1 0000 __ 1 0000 Unit Tpm Nn v Pulse N pole oz Sync Speed gf IT Sync Source Selecting the Synchronization Source 2 Turn the jog shuttle to select Sync Source 3 Press SELECT to display the synchronization signal selection box 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select any
57. Setting the Unit of Motor Output e Number of Characters Eight characters or less e Types of characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard or spaces IM 760101 01E 8 15 uondo uoljenjeaq 1030 e 8 8 Computing the Motor Efficiency and Total Efficiency From the active power measured by the WT1600 and the motor output determined in section 8 7 the WT1600 can compute the motor efficiency ratio of the motor output versus the power consumption by the motor and total efficiency ratio of the motor output versus the power consumption by the motor as well as the converter through which power is fed to the motor Computation examples are indicated below When the Motor Input Is Wired to ZA nmA is the motor efficiency Motor output W XA W Motor output derived in section 8 7 Motor efficiency nmA x 100 ZA Power consumption by the motor D Motor output When the Converter Input Is Wired to XA and Motor Input Is Wired to B nmA and nmB are the total efficiency and motor efficiency respectively Motor efficiency nmB Motor output W x 100 B W Motor output W LA W Total efficiency nmA x 100 Motor output derived in section 8 7 ZA B g Converter Motor output Power consumption Power consumption by the motor and by the motor converter When the Converter Input Is Wired to B and Motor Input Is Wired to XA nmA and nmB are the motor efficiency and total effici
58. Uover Spd lover Trq Motor Element Settings Speed Torque Pm Range 20V 290 Sense Analog Type Pulse 0 0000 ae ane Range 10000 0090 Line Off Off o Filter Scaling 1 9000 1 0000 1 0000 Unit rpm Nn W Pulse N 60 Pole 2 Sync i n pare Speed Sync None Source IM 760101 01E 4 19 Chapiter5 Measurement Conditions 5 1 Selecting the Wiring System For a functional description see section 1 3 o a ose ay HOLD cad FILE srone COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU aTAIGD o REMOTE 2 WAVE Loca MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC ss PUT a i me mm MOTOR SET ae fo CAL a eqs NTEGRATOR mm g a FILTER sanr STOP sinc sad INTEG SET RESET Procedure f Press WIRING to open the Wiring dialog box Selecting the Wiring System Pattern 2 Turn the jog shuttle to select Pattern If the wiring system pattern on all elements is set to 1P2W single phase two wire as shown below the cursor remains at Pattern even if you turn the jog shuttle Example in which six elements are installed Wiring Element 1 10 2 103 104 105 IC 1 A B C Pattern T IP20 I i iP2u 1 i ip2u 1 iP C P O PAN 1 EA 1P2u ZB 1P2u zC 1P2U 3 Press SELECT to open the pattern selection window 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select a pattern
59. Used when selecting setup parameters in a menu Rear Panel Voltage input terminal GP IB or Serial RS 232 connector Wire voltage measurement cables For details on communication functions see Sections 3 6 to 3 9 the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760101 11E Element 1 Section 1 3 External clock input connector a as Used when inputing he syrevonization from the external current sensor Element 4 signal One meas rementcomputanon Section 3 7 i Element 5 period Sections 6 2 and 7 4 Element 6 External start stop signal input output connector Used when performing master slave E T T T T T synchronized measurement ra lt S S 6 Section 5 10 l _ Ethernet connector option O O Connect an Ethernet cable Current input terminal Section 13 1 Wire current measurement For details on communication functions see cables P the Communication Interface User s Manual Sections 3 6 3 8 and 3 9 IM760101 11E _ SCSI connector option Torque signal input connector option Input signals from torque meters when evaluating motors Section 8 1 Revolution signal input connector option Input signals from revolution sensors when evaluating motors Section 8 1 External SCSI devices are connected here Section 12 3 Power connector Section 3 5 Power fuse Section 16 5 RGB video signal VGA output conne
60. e NTEGRATOR wma g a START STOP sinc sac INTEG SET RESET Procedure The retrieval of waveform display data must be turned ON to display waveforms For the procedure see section 9 1 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Bar or Wave Trend For details on setting the display format see section 4 2 2 Press the Wave Setting soft key to display the Wave Setting menu Turning ON OFF the Scale Value Display 3 Press the Scale Value soft key to select ON or OFF Turning ON OFF the Waveform Label 3 Press the Trace Label soft key to select ON or OFF ESC Wave Display Format K Wave W Wave Format Single Interpolate Graticule a Scale Value OFF PN Trace Label oN 4 Wave Setting JOUL K Wave Mapping JUBUUULE IM 760101 01E 9 19 Aejdsig wiojone jy el 9 8 Turning ON OFF the Scale Value and Waveform Label Explanation Turning ON OFF the Scale Value Display You can select whether or not to display ON OFF the upper and lower limits of the vertical axis and the values at the left and right ends of the horizontal axis time axis see section 9 2 of each channel e ON Displays the scale values OFF Does not display the scale values Turning ON OFF the La
61. no data is stored for harmonic orders without data e While the store operation is in progress you cannot turn ON OFF the harmonic measurement mode or change the PLL source the equation for distortion scaling averaging filter integration mode integration timer or the store interval e If you press HOLD to hold the display while the store operation is in progress the value that existed when HOLD was pressed is stored e If you press HOLD to hold the display while storing data with the store interval is 00 00 00 the store operation stops 11 12 IM 760101 01E 11 5 Saving the Stored Data Procedure Store Mode Store n Store Store Setti Conve Menor o a ose HOLD cad FILE COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU aTRIGD o REMOTI Fra WAVE ones LOCAL MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC o FILTER o ol D I a o 5 we fe qs NTEGRATOR wma g a START STOP sine sac INTEG SET RESET Press SHIFT STORE STORE SET to display the Store Set dialog box Press the Mode soft key to select Store Press the Store to soft key to select Memory or File If you selected Memory proceed to When Saving Data That Has Already Been Stored on the next page If you selected File proceed to When Saving Data through a Store and Save Operation Sequence on page 11 16 Store Set Mode S
62. smr srr oor INTEG SET RESET Procedure 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 3 Press the SCSI Setting soft key to display the SCSI Setting dialog box Changing the SCSI ID Number of the WT1600 4 Press the Own ID soft key 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select 0 to 7 6 Press the Initialize SCSI soft key The SCSI ID is changed to the selected ID number The tae icon at the upper left corner of the screen blinks while the change is in progress When the change is complete the icon disappears ESG SCST Setting Graph Color K Text Color Setting Network HDD Motor OFF pr Initialize scs JUUUUUU JUUUUUO E 12 4 IM 760101 01E 12 4 Changing the SCSI ID Number Explanation The SCSI ID number is used to distinguish between the various devices connected to the SCSI chain Make sure not to use duplicate ID numbers on any of the connected devices The SCSI is optional Selectable Range of SCSI ID Numbers for the WT1600 Own ID can be set in the range of 0 to 7 The default value is 6 SCSI ID Number of the Built in Hard Disk Fixed to 4 Note Do not set the SCSI ID number of the external SCSI device to the same ID number as the built in hard disk of the WT1600 e When changing the SCSI ID number make sure to press the Initialize SCSI soft key The SCSI ID numbers of external SCSI devices are autom
63. 0 2 of range 0 5 Hz lt f lt 10 Hz 0 1 of reading 0 2 of range 10 Hz lt f lt 45 Hz 0 1 of reading 0 1 of range 45 Hz lt f lt 66 Hz 0 1 of reading 0 05 of range 66 Hz lt f lt 1 kHz Voltage current of a 5 A input element from direct input or current sensor input 0 1 of reading 0 1 of range Current of a 50 A input element from direct input 0 2 of reading 0 1 of range 1 kHz lt f lt 50 kHz Voltage current of a 5 A input element from direct input 0 3 of reading 0 1 of range Current sensor input 0 015 x f 0 3 of reading 0 1 of range Direct input using current from a 50 A input element 0 1 x f 0 2 of reading 0 1 of range 50 kHz lt f lt 100 kHz Voltage current of a 5 A input element from direct input and external input 0 6 of reading 0 2 of range Current sensor input 0 009 x f 0 6 of reading 0 2 of range Current of a 50 A input element from direct input 0 1 x f 0 2 of reading 0 2 of range 100 kHz lt f lt 500 kHz Voltage current of a 5 A input element from direct input 0 006 x f of reading 0 5 of range Current sensor input 0 03 x f 1 5 of reading 0 5 of range 500 kHz lt f lt 1 MHz Voltage current of a 5 A input element from direct input 0 022 x f 8 of reading 1 of range The unit of f in the reading error equation is kHz Add 20 of range to the above accuracy figure for the accuracy of the waveform display data Upk and Ipk
64. 07 03 03 I5 1002 1 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 FS4 A 1 500000e 02 1 500000e 02 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 08 30 07 03 03 0 0000000E 00 FS4 V 3 000000e 03 3 000000e 03 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 06 30 07 03 03 U6 1002 1 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 FS4 V 3 000000e 03 3 000000e 03 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 08 30 07 03 03 0 0000000E 00 FS4 A 1 500000e 01 1 500000e 01 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 06 30 07 03 03 I6 1002 1 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 FS4 A 1 500000e 02 1 500000e 02 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 08 30 07 03 03 Note The header file is a common file used by YOKOGAWA s measuring instruments Therefore data that is not required by the WT1600 Os is also included IM 760101 01E App 15 Ea xipueddy Appendix 4 ASCII Header File Format PubliciInfo Common Information FormatVersion Header file version No common to YOKOGAWA s header files Model Model name Endian Endian mode when saving data Big DataFormat Storage format of the binary waveform display data Trace GroupNumber The number of Group s indicated below TraceTotalNumber Total number of target waveforms DataOffset Start position of the binary waveform display data Group1 Group Information TraceNumber Number of waveforms in this group Bl
65. 11 14 Selecting the Save Destination Medium 6 Same as steps 6 to 8 under Selecting the Save Destination Medium on page 11 14 Selecting the Save Destination Directory 7 Same as steps 9 and 10 under Selecting the Save Destination Directory on page 11 14 Setting the File Name and Comment 8 Same as steps 11 to 18 under Setting the File Name and Comment on page 11 14 Initializing Clearing the Internal Memory 9 Press ESC twice to return to the Store Set menu 10 Press the Initialize Memory Exec soft key to display the Alert dialog box 11 Turn the jog shuttle to select OK or Cancel 12 If you select OK and press SELECT the data in the internal memory is cleared If you select Cancel and press SELECT the clearing of the data in the internal memory is aborted Starting the Store Operation 13 Press STORE The store operation starts see section 11 4 according to various conditions depending on the store mode see section 11 1 Stopping the Store Operation and Saving the Data 14 Ifthe store operation is in progress pressing STORE again stops the operation Then the stored data is saved to the directory indicated by Pathe Automatically Stopping the Store Operation and Saving the Data 15 The store operation stops see section 11 4 automatically according to the various conditions depending on the store mode Then the stored data is saved to the directory indicated by Pathe Specifying the F
66. AUac3 Alrms4 Almn4 Aldc4 Alac4 Star gt Delta ul u2 u2 u3 u3 u1 i1 i2 i3 Phase voltage of each phase Line current of the neutral conductor AUrms1 AUmn1 AUdc1 AUac1 AUrms2 AUmn2 AUdc2 AUac2 AUrms3 AUmn3 AUdc3 AUac3 Alrms4 Almn4 Aldc4 Alac4 Presumption ul u2 u3 0 Note You can select the delta computation target from wiring units ZA B and XC The input element that is assigned to the selected element is the element on which delta computation is performed The numbers 1 2 and 3 that are attached to sampled data u and i in the above table indicate that elements 1 2 and 3 are target elements on which delta computation is performed If the target elements of delta computation are 2 3 and 4 replace the numbers 1 2 and 3 that are attached to sampled data u and i with 2 3 and 4 respectively The same also holds true when elements 5 and 6 are targets ul u2 u3 denote the sampled data of voltage of elements 1 2 and 3 respectively i1 i2 and i3 denote the sampled data of current of elements 1 2 and 3 respectively The number 1 2 3 and 4 that is attached to the measurement function symbol of the delta computation has no relation to the element number App 6 IM 760101 01E Appendix 2 Determination of Delta Computation Computed P Computed Item Equation lien Equation
67. B and XC are represented by the symbols E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 and E9 respectively One symbol from E1 to E9 can be used except for the following computation symbols One symbol from E1 to E6 can be entered in the parentheses for PHI to FI One symbol from E7 to E9 can be entered in the parentheses for PHIU1U2 e e For operands that do not have a comma inside the parentheses no harmonic order needs to be specified If the harmonic section is set to ORT it represents Total if it is set to O zero it represents DC IM 760101 01E 7 17 juswainseayy D1uOW Ae 7 8 Setting the User Defined Function e Operators The following operators can be used to create the equation Operator Example Description U E1 0R1 U E2 0R1 Basic arithmetic of the measurement functions ABS ABS P E1 ORT P E2 ORT Absolute value of the measurement function SQR SQR I E1 OR0 Square of the measurement function SQRT SQRT ABS I E1 OR3 Square root of the measurement functions LOG LOG U E1 OR25 Natural log of the measurement functions LOG10 LOG10 U E1 OR25 Common log of the measurement function EXP EXP U E1 0OR12 Exponent of the measurement function NEG NEG U E1 0R12 Negation of the measurement function Number and Type of Characters That Can Be Used in the Equation e Number of Characters 50 characters or less e Types of characters Characters that ar
68. Changing the Measurement Function Select the measurement function to be changed from the following list of choices U I P S Q A OU ol Z Rs Xs Rp and Xp Changing the Element Select the element from the following list of choices The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements Elementi Element2 Element3 Element4 Element5 and Element6 e If the selected element is not a harmonic measurement target there is no numerical data Thus the bar graph is not displayed in this case For example if the measurement target is ZA and you select the element assigned to C the bar graph will not be displayed For selecting the measurement target see section 7 3 IM 760101 01E 7 21 7 9 Changing the Display Items of Bar Graphs and Performing Cursor Measurements Setting the Display Range of the Bar Graph Set the display range of the bar graph using harmonic order The display range of bar graph 1 to bar graph 3 is the same The minimum value is Oth order dc However if the measurement function is set to o oU or ol there is no value for the Oth order Thus Oth order is not displayed on the bar graph If the measurement function is set to oU or ol there is no value for the 1st order Thus 1st order is not displayed on the bar graph The maximum value is the 100 order However bar graphs of orders that exceed the upper limit of harmonic order under analysis See section 17 6 are not displayed C
69. End Order L100 L__106 L Juge OOOOBAL JOUG 7 20 IM 760101 01E 7 9 Changing the Display Items of Bar Graphs and Performing Cursor Measurements Performing Cursor Measurements 2 Press SHIFT WAVE CURSOR to display the Cursor menu e Turning ON OFF cursor measurement 3 Press the Bar Cursor soft key to select ON or OFF If ON is selected the result of the cursor measurement is displayed e Moving the cursor 4 Press the Bar C1 Bar C2 x soft key to set the jog shuttle target to Bar C1 Bar C2 x or both Bar C1 and Bar C2 x e If you select Bar C1 the position of cursor can be moved e If you select Bar C2 x the position of cursor x can be moved e If you select both Bar C1 and Bar C2 x the two cursors can be moved without changing the spacing between the two The value of the digit being specified by Bar C1 changes 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set and move the cursor position in terms of the harmonic order For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Bar Cursor Bar Cursor ON F ww Bar Ci Bar Ci 1 order 1 order Bar c2 x Bar C2 x 15 order 15 order juswainseayy D1uOW Ae JOUUUGOLE Explanation Selecting the Item to Be Changed Three types of bar graphs can be specified Select the type from 1 bar graph 1 to 3 bar graph 3
70. For Speed when the revolution signal is a pulse signal 5 V is output when the measured value is equal to the Pulse Range value rated value that was specified in section 8 2 For Sync 5 V is output when the measured value is equal to the rated value of Speed For Pm 5 V is output when the measured value is equal to a motor output determined by the rated value of the torque and of the rotating speed Applicable only to products with the motor evaluation function option 15 8 IM 760101 01E 15 2 RGB Video Signal VGA Output The screen of the WT1600 can be output to a monitor through the RGB video signal VGA output Connectable monitors are VGA monitors or multi sync monitors capable of displaying VGA CAUTION e Connect the cable after turning OFF the WT1600 and the monitor e Do not short the RGB VIDEO OUT terminal or apply external voltage to it This may cause damage to the instrument Pin Arrangement and Signal Assignment of the Video Signal Output Connector 5 VIDEO OUT VGA The pin arrangement and assignments of the connector are as follows Pin No Signal Name Specifications 1 Red 0 7 Vp p 2 Green 0 7 Vp p 3 Blue 0 7 Vp p 4 5 6 GND 7 GND 8 GND 9 10 GND 11 12 13 Horizontal sync signal Approx 31 5 kHz TTL LI negative logic 14 Vertical sync signal Approx 60 Hz TTL LI negative logic 15 7 Connecting to the Mon
71. I to the divided windows regardless of whether or not the display is turned ON Speed is displayed in the top frame Torque is displayed in the 2nd frame from the top The following figure shows how the waveforms are displayed when all 6 elements are installed with the motor evaluation function option the number of division is Quad display of U1 11 U2 12 U3 13 14 and Torque is ON and display of U4 U5 15 U6 16 and Speed is OFF Auto 11 13 Torque e User The waveforms can be mapped arbitrarily to the divided windows regardless of whether or not the display is turned ON You can select the display position from 0 to 3 The waveforms are mapped in order starting from number 0 from the top divided window User when the screen is divided into three windows with 11 Speed and Torque set to 0 1 and 3 respectively 11 Torque 0 3 1 Displayed in order according 2 to the specified number IM 760101 01E 9 15 Aejdsig woane jy el 9 7 Interpolating the Display and Changing the Graticule For a functional description see section 1 7 a o pispLay Hop Y0 PATE FILE STORE copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o coREMOTE E WAVE Locat misc CURSOR TOMAX HOLD O NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC n PUT o RANGE scana WIRING MOTOR SET o o rom
72. If the input is 1000 V iv is approximately 0 5 mA 1000 V 2 MQ If the load current iL is 5 A or more load resistance is 200 Q or less then the effect of iv on the measurement is 0 01 or less If the input is 100 V and 5 A iv 0 05 mA 100 V 2 MQ then the effect of iv on the measurement accuracy is 0 001 0 05 mA 5 A SOURCE LOAD SOURCE LOAD SFO i i o i O HJ iL Input terminal A ee eae ELEMENT WT1600 As a reference the relationship of the voltages and currents that produce effects of 0 1 0 01 and 0 001 are shown in the figure below 0 1 Effect 0 01 Effect 1000 K 800 600 400 200 T Smaller effect 0 001 Effect A beyon painseayy ig L L i L 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 5A _ Measured current A e When the Measurement Current Is Relatively Small Wire so that the current measurement circuit is connected to the load side In this case the voltage measurement circuit measures the sum of the load voltage eL and voltage drop e across the current measurement circuit e is the amount of error in this case The input resistance of the current measurement circuit of the instrument is 100 mQ and 2 mQ for the 5 A and 50 A input terminals respectively For example if the load resistance is 1 kQ then the effects on the measurement accuracy is 0 01 for the 5 A input terminal 100 mQ 1 KQ a
73. In addition to Reset Start Stop and Ready the following integration states are possible TimeUp When the time set on the integration timer elapses integration automatically stops This is called the TimeUp state Error If a power failure occurs when integration is in progress the integration result is held When the power recovers the integration result calculated up to the point when the power failure occurred is displayed with the integration operation stopped This is called the Error state IM 760101 01E 6 33 uoles6aju pue JUoWeiINSseayy EWION el 6 11 Performing Integration Start Stop and Reset Explanation Starting Stopping and Resetting the Integration e The integration can be started stopped or reset from the front panel keys or through communication commands Communication commands allow starting stopping and resetting the integration of individual elements To perform all element simultaneous integration from the front panel keys when performing integration on individual elements through communication commands the operation must be switched to collective operation from individual operation using communication commands or front panel keys The following figure shows the relationship between the integration operation and start stop and reset Pressing RESET after the integration has stopped resets the integration value and the integration time Auto stop Reset Abort Reset Ab
74. Net Print Setup IM 760101 01E 13 11 uondo suonesiunwwos 3u194 3 g 13 4 Outputting the Screen Image to a Network Printer Specifying the Printer Server 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select LPR Server 6 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 7 Use the keyboard to enter the IP address of the printer server If you are using DNS you can specify the server by name For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Entering the Printer Name 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select LPR Name 9 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 10 Use the keyboard to enter the printer name For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Net Print Setup LPR Server LPR Name PASSTHRU Setting the Output Destination to a Network Printer 1 Press SHIFT COPY MENU to display the Copy menu 2 Press the Copy to soft key to display the Copy to menu 3 Press the Net Print soft key Selecting the Output Command 4 Press the Format soft key to display the Format menu 5 Press one of the soft keys from ESC P to Post Script to select the output format If you selected BJ proceed to step 6 If you selected ESC P ESC P2 or PCL5 proceed to step 8 on the next page If you selected LIPS3 or Post Script proceed to step 9 on the next page g File List File Name Post Script 13 12 IM 760101 01E 13 4 Outp
75. Option in section 17 6 Functions The computation accuracy of apparent power S and reactive power Q that can be determined from the measured value is 0 001 of the power range The computation accuracy of power factor that can be determined from the measured value is 0 0001 The computation accuracy of phase difference that can be determined from the power factor is 0 005 IM 760101 01E 17 9 h Ey suoneoyioeds 17 6 Functions Measurement Function and Measurement Conditions Item Specification Method Digital multiplier method Crest factor Select 3 or 6 when rated value of the measurement range is input However the actual crest factor is 2 for the 1000 V range if the crest factor is set to 3 The actual crest factor is 4 for the 500 V range if the crest factor is set to 6 Measurement period Period used to determine and compute the measurement function During normal measurement Measurement period is set using the zero crossing points of the reference signal synchronization source During harmonic measurement Measurement period is equal to the selected FFT data length Wiring system Select the wiring system from the following five types 1P2W single phase two wire 1P3W single phase three wire 3P3W three phase three wire 3P4W three phase four wire and 3V3A three voltage three current However the selectable wiring systems vary depending
76. Press the Timer Setting soft key to display the Independent Timer Setting dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select Setting Press SELECT to select Each or All Turn the jog shuttle to select one box from hour minute and second for Elementi Press SELECT A box used to set the timer appears Turn the jog shuttle to set the hour minute or second that you selected in step 22 For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Press SELECT or ESC to close the box If you selected Each in step 21 the hour minute and second are set only to Element 1 If you selected All in step 21 the hour minute and second are set to all elements at once Repeat steps 22 to 25 to set hour minute and second If you selected Each in step 21 repeat steps 22 to 26 for all elements The procedure for setting the integration timer during individual element computation ends here Integ Set Node R Nornal Independent Timer Setting Setting Element 1 60000 00 00 Element 2 00000 00 00 Control Element 3 00000 00 00 Independent Element 4 00000 00 00 oFrF Element 5 00000 00 00 Current Mode Element 6 60000 00 00 Independent Timer Setting Timer Setting Each An Setting Eac A Element 1 60000 60 00 Element 2 00000 00 Element 3 00000 200 Real Time
77. Procedure 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Information soft key to display the Information window The presence of the Ethernet interface option and the MAC address information are displayed in the Information window Information Model WT1600 760101 24 Version 1 01 DSP 0 01 ASIC 0 01 xxx Element Configuration ee Initialize Type Calibration Date Status Settings Elementi 1600U 5A Element 61 05 14 09 54 06 Element2 1600U 5A Element 61 05 07 16 49 38 Element3 1000V 50A Element 01 05714 09 54 12 Communication Elenent4 1000V 50A Element 01 05 14 09 54 14 Elements 1000V 50A Element 01 05 14 09 54 16 Element6 1000V 50A Element 91 05 14 09 54 18 Date Time seeseseeeees Opt iONS seeeeeEEEEE Communication GP IB Internal Printer Yes No DA Output Motor Evaluation No SCSI Interface Yes Ethernet Yes Mac Address 900064_826_900 Internal HDD Yes Selftest Conf ig Link Date 61 05 16 Wed 12 31 Explanation The Presence of the Ethernet Interface Option The presence of the Ethernet interface is displayed under Ethernet in the Information window e If Yes is displayed the Ethernet interface is installed If No is displayed the Ethernet interface is not installed MAC Address MAC address is a unique address that is pre assigned to the WT1600 The MAC address is displayed under Mac Address in the Information window Note The MAC address is displayed only on produc
78. Select from OFF and 500 Hz A D converter Simultaneous conversion of voltage and current inputs Resolution 16 bits Conversion speed Approx 5 us Range switching Specifiable for each input element manually automatically or through communication commands Auto range function Range increase When Urms or Irms exceeds 110 of the measurement range When the peak value of the input signal exceeds approx 330 Approx 660 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the measurement range Range decrease When Urms or Irms is less than or equal to 30 of the measurement range and Upk and Ipk is less than or equal to 300 Less than or equal to 600 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the next lower range 17 2 Display Item Specification Display 6 4 color TFT LCD monitor Display resolution of the entire screen 640 H x 480 V dots Display resolution of the waveform display 501 H x 432 V dots The LCD screen may contain 0 02 of defect with respect to the total number of pixels 17 2 IM 760101 01E 17 3 Measurement Functions Items during Normal Measurement Measurement Functions Determined for Each Input Element For details on the determination and equations of measurement functions see appendix 1 Item Symbol and Meaning Voltage V Urms true rms value Umn rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value Udc simple average
79. Selecting the Save Destination Directory Perform this operation when directories are present on the medium 15 Turn the jog shuttle to select the save destination directory indicated by lt gt 16 Press SELECT to confirm the new directory The selected medium directory is displayed in Path located at the upper left corner of the File List dialog box File List Path SC4 OO UTDN Space 2138112000 byte File Name Size Date Attribute a W File Item Numer ic m Q Data Type File Name Float W List Item 2001 08 24 16 45 R Property 7 Utility OUUUULUBE JOOU Save Exec Setting the File Name and Comment 17 Press the File Name soft key to display the Save dialog box 18 Turn the jog shuttle to select Auto Naming 19 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF 20 Turn the jog shuttle to select File Name 21 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 22 Use the keyboard to set the file name For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 23 Enter the comment in a similar fashion 24 Press ESC to close the Save dialog box 12 14 IM 760101 01E 12 6 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data and Numerical Data Save Menu ES m Q JUUUUOUE S Q Save Menu g Save File Name futo Naning Fiene 7 CAPS Comment g Prop
80. Setting Comments Enter a comment as necessary 11 Turn the jog shuttle to select Comment 12 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 13 Use the keyboard to enter the comment For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Mail Setup Mail Server Mail Address Comment NailBaseTine 9 9 9 Interval FF Mail Test Setting the Time of Transmission 14 Turn the jog shuttle to select one of the hour minute and second boxes of MailBaseTime 15 Press SELECT to display the entry box 16 Turn the jog shuttle to set the hour minute or second that you selected in step 14 For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 17 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box 18 Repeat steps 14 to 17 to set hour minute and second Mail Setup Mail Server Mail Address Comment Mai lBaseTine fi 9 Interval DFA o Mail Test 13 16 IM 760101 01E 13 5 Sending E mail Messages Selecting the Transmission Interval 19 Turn the jog shuttle to select Interval 20 Press SELECT to display the selection box 21 Turn the jog shuttle to select OFF or 1h to 24h If you select OFF mails are not transmitted 22 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box Performing a Test Transmission 23 Turn the jog shuttle to select Mail Test 24 Press SEL
81. T 1 T AUrms 1 u t dt Alrms 1 i t dt T Jo T Jo a ee ee Mi AUmn u t dt Almn z 1f i t dt 2V2 Th 2V2 Tho T T AUde u t dt Alde 1 i t dt T Io T Io AUac af AUrms AUdc Alac af Alrms Aldc Note e Ifthe sampled data used in the computation does not exist for example when the input element is not installed the sampled data is considered to be 0 for the computation It is recommended that the measurement range and scaling transformation ratio and coefficients of the elements on which delta computation is performed be set the same as much as possible Using a different measurement range or scaling causes the measurement resolution of the sampled data to be different In effect the computation result will have errors Display Format When Set to All Display Delta 3P3W 1 computation V3A p pava AUrm AUrms1 value Aumn AJmnt vato aa iine voltage of the AUdc AUdc1 value AUac AUaci value ote Dede determined by the Measurement 1 delta computation functions Alrm Alrms1 value Almn Almn1 value oo Alde Alda valde ay ra of the Alac Alac1 value rg prase as determined by the delta computation Delta Delta 1 2 3 computation L Star AUrm AUrms1 value AUrms2 value AUrms3 value AUmn AUmni value AUmn2 value AUmn3 value AUde AUdc1 value AUdc2value AUde3 value Nase voltage of AUac AUac 1 value AUac2 value AUac3 value each phase as determined by the Measurement 4 delta computation functions Alrm Alrm
82. Total No Voltage U V U de U 0 U k V Ur k Ui k U 1 Yu k min l k i k RK V max Current I A dc I 0 t 4 Xo k min Active power P W P dc Ur 0 Ir 0 P k Ur k Ir k Uj k li k P P k k min Apparent power S VA S de P dc S k 4 P k Q k S 4 P Q Reactive power Q var Q dc 0 Q k Ur k li k Uj k Ir k Q Q k k min P de P k zR Power factor dc 5 do Mk S k A S Phase difference o k cos Er cos Phase difference with respect to U 1 Phase difference U k with ou respect to U k U 1 Phase difference with respect to I 1 Phase difference I k with ol respect to ol k I 1 E Impedance of the load circuit _ U dc _ U k _ 2 2 Zid Ta zw Serial resistance of the load circuit _ P dc _ P k Rs 2 Rs do Tiel Rs Tio Serial reactance of the load circuit _ Q dc _ Q k Xs 9 Xs de Tdc Xs K Tio Parallel resistance of the load circuit _ U dc U k _ ROEG RP Piac B Piy Parallel reactance of the load circuit E U dc E U k Xp _ 2 1 B Melee Side XP aw Note Continues to the next page k r and j denote the harmonic order real part and imaginary part respectively min denotes the minimum order You can select 0 DC component or 1
83. and the integration is started Holding the integration Press HOLD The HOLD indicator illuminates and the numerical data display is held Integration continues Ke Releasing the Held Condition Press HOLD while the values are held The HOLD indicator turns OFF and the numerical data display is updated In the held condition the display can be updated by carrying out single measurements by pressing SHIFT HOLD SINGLE a Stopping the integration 6 Press STOP The START indicator turns OFF and the STOP indicator illuminates The integration time and integration value are held Integration continues if you press START at this point Resetting the Integration Press SHIFT STOP RESET The STOP indicator turns OFF the integration time and integration value are reset and the display shows no data N IM 760101 01E 6 31 uolesbaju pue JUoWeiINSeayy EWON el 6 11 Performing Integration Start Stop and Reset rms1 mni Jdel Jacl Performing Integration in the Normal Integration Mode ie Check that the integration mode is set to normal integration or repetitive integration Continuous See section 6 8 Check that the integration timer is set to some value other than 0000 00 00 See section 6 8 Starting the integration Press START The START indicator above and to the left of the key illuminates and the integration is started Holding the integration Press HOLD The HOLD
84. can select the scaling method from the following list of choices Auto Trend Scale Trend Ob ject Ti Scaling Manual Upper Scale 1 0006E 02 Lower Scale 1 0000E 02 ES Q JUUUUULIS Trend Scale Trend Ob ject T1 Scaling Manua1 Upper Scale 1 00000E 02 W Lower Scale 1 00000E 02 Set to auto scaling The upper and lower limits on the screen display are automatically determined from the maximum and minimum values of the trend display data Manual Set to manual scaling The upper and lower limits can be set arbitrary as necessary Setting the Upper and Lower Limits during Manual Scaling You can set the limits in the range of 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Note ESC UUUUULS Aejdsig pu L g The setting in section 9 8 determines whether the upper and lower limits and labels are displayed IM 760101 01E 10 13 10 7 Performing Cursor Measurements For a functional description see section 1 7 o DISPLAY I HOLD Ba FILE STORE copy ESC 2 SINGLE STORE SET MENU o T IG D o REMOTE a j rarnoncs LOCAL MISC puana ones CURSOR MAX HOLD 3 NULL SHIFT ar To exit the menu during operation press ESC lt NP o RANGE scannal WIRING OUUU MOTOR SET a na 2 CAL qe NTEGRATOR mm a a were e720 Jencond START INTEG SET RESET Procedure The retrieval of
85. e Enter the file name and comment such as the server name user name password and e mail address for Ethernet communication The following figure shows the keyboard that appears when setting the file name or comment File names and comments can be temporarily held in the internal memory so that they can be used in other file names and comments e Enter the file name and comment and temporarily storing them 1 Turn the jog shuttle to select the character to be entered You can also press the amp and soft keys to move the cursor vertically 2 Press SELECT to enter the string in the entry box If there are strings already in the entry box use the arrow keys to select the entry position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter all the characters 4 After entering all the characters select ENT on the keyboard and press SELECT The string is confirmed and the keyboard disappears you can also press the ENT soft key to achieve the same result At the same time the confirmed string is temporarily stored in the internal memory Up to 8 sets of strings can be stored Beyond eight for all successive entries the oldest string is cleared Recalling the temporary stored string 1 Press the soft key Each time the soft key is pressed the temporarily stored strings are displayed in the entry box of the keyboard in order When the eight strings that are temporarily stored are displayed the most recent string is displayed again If there are str
86. e Normal mode The display is updated only when the trigger occurs The display is not updated if the trigger does not occur Trigger Point Trigger point refers to the point at which a trigger occurred The trigger point is always at the left end of the screen The waveform after the trigger point is displayed from the left to the right of the screen as the time progresses Trigger point Time IM 760101 01E 1 25 suoljoun jo uoneuejdxa 1 7 Waveform Display Zooming on the Waveform For procedures see section 9 4 Each displayed waveform can be expanded or reduced vertically by the zoom factor in the range of 0 1 to 100 The waveform is zoomed around the zero input line When the zoom factor is set to x2 ete eee eee ova a Input zero lines gt 4 Range displayed b i Riae es x oe save fee Vertical Position of the Waveform For procedures see section 9 4 The displayed position of the waveform can be moved vertically to the desired position such as when you wish to view the mutual relationship between the voltage and current waveforms or when the section of the waveform you wish to view goes out of the display frame 100 Move the position by 50 y gt
87. fundamental signal is the first component used Setting the Maximum Harmonic Order to Be Analyzed Select the harmonic order in the range from 1 to 100th order Note ___ When the minimum harmonic order is set to 1 the numerical data representing the total of the harmonic measurement data will not include the DC component You can set the maximum harmonic order up to 100th order but the maximum harmonic order that is actually used to determine the numerical data is the order corresponding to the upper limit of harmonic order under analysis The upper limit is determined automatically maximum is 100 by the frequency of the PLL source The numerical data corresponding harmonic orders exceeding the upper limit is shown as no data 7 12 IM 760101 01E 7 6 Selecting the Equation for the Distortion Factor o a SINGLE STORE SET MENU o TRIG D a REMOTE a we emo ficou wee CURSOR j MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC ss PUT a A y v RANGE scaunel WIRING o o ol S I a FILTER AVG CAL qs NTEGRATOR wma g a START STOP INTEGSET RESET H Procedure Press HARMONICS to display the Harmonics menu Press the Mode soft key to select ON Press the Thd Formula soft key to display the Thd Formula menu Press the 1 Total or 1 Fundamental soft key to select the equation for the distortion factor Pons
88. i he DISPLAY HOLD Ba FILE STORE copy SINGLE aTAIGD o REMOTE a WAVE ones LOCAL MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC RANGE scaunel WIRING MOTOR SET wa road CAL a o FILTER am NTEGRATOR wma g a START STOP sinc sad INTEG SET RESET Procedure 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu 2 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Selecting the List of Setup Parameters 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select Information 4 Press SELECT to confirm the new display format Display ESC Select Format Numeric Numeric Wave Item Amount Bar 4 2 Vector Norm Item No Trend Numer ic Wave Numeric Numer ic Bar Disp Itens Numer ic Trend Wave Bar Wave Trend Page Up Bar Trend Scroll Exec Information Page Down Scroll Exec IM 760101 01E 4 17 yewo Aejdsig u 19S gt 4 6 Listing the Setup Parameters Explanation Displaying the Relation Table of Elements and Measurement Ranges 5 Press the Power Element soft key The relation table of measurement ranges input filters transformation ratios scaling factors and other parameters are displayed for each element Displaying the Relation Table of Trend Targets and Measurement Functions 5 Press the Trend soft key to display the relation table of trend targets and measurement functions Displaying the Re
89. if elements are assigned to XA and XB and no elements are assigned to XC then the trend at the measurement function for ZC is not displayed During Harmonic Measurement Selecting the Measurement Function The types of measurement functions that can be selected are indicated in Measurement Function Types for Harmonic Measurement in section 1 2 and User Defined Functions in section 1 5 e You can also select not to display the measurement functions None Selecting the Element Wiring Unit e You can select the element wiring unit from the following list of choices The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements Elementi Element2 Element3 Element4 Element5 Element6 A B and C e If the selected wiring unit is not a harmonic measurement target there is no numerical data Thus the trend is not displayed in this case For example if the measurement target is ZA the trend at the measurement function of XC is not displayed For selecting the measurement target see section 7 3 Changing the Harmonic Order The harmonic order can be set to total or from dc 0 order up to 100 order Note For the meanings of the measurement function symbols that are displayed see section 1 2 Measurement Functions and Measurement Periods 1 5 Computation 1 6 Integration appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions and appendix 2 Determination of Delta Computation
90. impedance average of the load circuit Rsx Xsz average of the resistance reactance of the load circuit that has a R L and C connected in series Rpx Xpx average of the resistance reactance of the load circuit that has a R L and C connected in parallel Pc sum of Corrected Powers e Efficiency functions n Efficiency 1 1 n Efficiency 2 See Efficiency on the next page e Measurement functions of integration See section 1 6 IM 760101 01E 1 3 suoloun jo uoneuejdxa i 1 2 Measurement Function and Measurement Period Determining the Voltage and Current There are four types of measurement functions for voltage U and current I Urms Irms true rms value These values are the true rms values of the voltage and current The instantaneous values over one period are squared and averaged Then the square root of the value is determined f t and T represent the input signal as a function of time and the period of the input signal respectively T 1 Urms or Irms f t dt Th Umn Imn rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value This function rectifies one period of the voltage or current signal determines the average and multiplies the result by a coefficient The coefficient is a value that when applied to a sinusoidal input signal gives the true rms value When the input signal is a distorted or is a DC waveform these values will differ from the true rms values f t and T represent th
91. the D A output communication output or storing to the internal memory of the numerical data is carried out using this interval Display Position of the Data Update Rate The data update rate is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen when UPDATE RATE is pressed Data update rate Rate 200msec YOKOGAWA Update Rate Update Rate During Normal Measurement You can select from the following choices The numerical data is updated at the selected period You can increase the data update rate to acquire relatively fast load fluctuations in the power system or decrease the rate to acquire sampled data for several periods even for relatively long signals 50 ms 100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1 s 2s and 5 s During Normal Measurement The data update rate is determined by the fundamental frequency of the PLL source and the number of periods of the PLL source used for the analysis You can not change the data update rate from the Update Rate menu described in this section For detailed values see section 17 6 Functions Note The update rate of the numerical data and waveform data that are displayed on the screen may take longer than the data update rate IM 760101 01E 5 23 SUOI IPUOD JUBWaINSeaLy 5 8 Holding the Display and Performing Single Measurements For a functional description see section 1 3 o DISPI HoLD p PATE FILE STORE copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU
92. the file will be deleted If the asterisk to the left of the file name disappears the file will not be deleted Proceed to step 12 File List Delete ES Path SC4 O0 UTDN Function Space 2137751552 byte Q File Name Size Date Attribute Delete a Set Reset 2001 08 24 18 09 2001 08 24 19 15 ALL Set 2001 08 24 19 15 2001 08 24 19 16 2001 08 24 19 15 2001 08 24 18 10 Property 2001 08 24 19 14 2001 08 24 19 14 2001 08 24 19 15 Filter Iten All BE onoono Attribute Delete Exec EL Selecting the Files to be Deleted at Once o 10 k i Delete Function z Delete Turn the jog shuttle to select a file directory or medium Press the All Set soft key Asterisks appear to the left of the directory containing the selected file and all the files in the directory the selected directory and all the files in the directory or all the directories and files in the selected medium The corresponding items will be deleted At the same time the All Set key changes to an All Reset soft key Press the All Reset soft key Asterisks to the left of the directory containing the selected file and all the files in the directory the selected directory and all the files in the directory or all the directories and files in the selected medium disappear The corresponding items will not be deleted At the same time the All Reset soft key changes to an
93. the transformation ratio and coefficient can be specified When Inputting Current Signals via an External Current Sensor The output of current sensors such as shunts and clamps can be input to the current sensor connector EXT and be measured Set how many mV the current sensor outputs when 1 A of current flows transformation ratio Then the input signal can be made to correspond to the numerical data or waveform display data that are obtained when the current is directly applied to the input terminals suoljoun jo uoneuejdxa Measurement Function Transformation Ratio Data before Conversion Conversion Result Current E Is current sensor output Is E Active power P E Ps Ps E Apparent power S E Ss Ss E Reactive power Q E Qs Qs E Max Min current value Ipk E Ipks current sensor output lpks E When Inputting Voltage or Current Signals via an External PT or CT Measurements can be made by connecting the output of the secondary side of the PT and the output of the secondary side of the CT to the same voltage and current input terminals that are used when directly inputting a signal Set the PT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient coefficient multiplied to the power determined from the voltage and current Then the input signal can be made to correspond to the numerical data or waveform display data that are obtained when the current is directly applied to the input terminals Measurement Function Data before Conversion
94. 00 sec 2001 06 30 07 03 03 4 U3 1002 1 0000000E 00 l1 1002 1 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 FS4 A 3 000000e 03 3 000000e 03 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 06 30 07 03 03 13 1002 1 0000000E 00 U2 1002 1 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 FS4 V 3 000000e 03 3 000000e 03 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 06 30 07 03 03 U4 1002 1 0000000E 00 12 1002 1 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 FS4 A 1 500000e 02 1 500000e 02 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 06 30 07 03 03 14 1002 1 0000000E 00 App 14 IM 760101 01E Appendix 4 ASCII Header File Format VOffset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VillegalData VMaxData VMinData HResolution HOffset HUnit Date Time Group3 TraceNumber BlockNumber TraceName BlockSize VResolution VOffset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VillegalData VMaxData VMinData HResolution HOffset HUnit Date Time Privatelnfo Mode ModelVersion 0 0000000E 00 FS4 V 3 000000e 03 3 000000e 03 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 06 30 07 03 03 4 1 U5 1002 1 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 FS4 V 3 000000e 03 3 000000e 03 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 08 30 07 03 03 Wave Normal 1 01 0 0000000E 00 FS4 A 1 500000e 01 1 500000e 01 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E 00 sec 2001 06 30
95. 01E 12 39 eea y Bulpeo7 pue Burnes D Chapter 13 Ethernet Communications Option 13 1 Connecting the WT1600 to a PC Network Connection To connect to a network connect a UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair cable or an STP Shielded Twisted Pair cable that is connected to a hub for example to the 10BASE T port on the rear panel of the WT1600 10BASE T HUB or router UTP cable or N RIAN E itra WT1600 3 Siess 10BASE T port aS RJ 45 modular jack Ld LJ NIC One to One Connection Even when connecting the WT1600 and a PC in a one to one configuration connect them via a hub as shown below 10BASE T HUB or router OF OOOO 0 UTP PC cable AIAN co coo or WT1600 STP E cable z J straight ee TE 4 3 NIC Note e When connecting the WT1600 and a PC in a one to one configuration use a 10BASE T 100BASE TX auto switching NIC or a 10BASE T NIC on the PC side e Avoid connecting the WT1600 and a PC directly without going through a hub Operations are not guaranteed for communications using direct connection IM 760101 01E 13 1 uondo suonesiunwwos 3u194 3 g 13 2 Setting the Ethernet Interface TCP IP Procedure ESC lt NP o RANGE scaunel WIRING MOTOR SET OUOU L
96. 1 2 3 and 4 split window displays are possible Display interpolation of the Select dot or linear display waveform Graticule Select the grid and cross scale display Auxiliary display ON OFF Turn ON OFF the upper and lower limits scale value and the waveform label Cursor measurement Measure the value at the point where the cursor is placed on the waveform Vector Display and Bar Graph Display Item Specification Vector display Applicable during harmonic measurement Displays vectors of the phase difference of the fundamental waveforms Bar graph display Applicable during harmonic measurement Displays the bar graph of the amplitude of each harmonic 17 14 IM 760101 01E 17 6 Functions Trend Display Displays the trend of the numerical data of the measurement function on a line graph Simultaneous Display Displays a combination of two displays from numerical waveform bar graph and trend in the top and bottom halves of the divided screen Data Store and Recall Store the numerical data and waveform display data in the internal memory Save the stored data to a storage medium Recall the stored data from the internal memory 1 Floppy disk built in hard disk SCSI device network drive etc Built in hard disk SCSI and Ethernet interface are optional 2 Cannot recall the data from a saved file Data Save and Load Save setup parameters waveform display
97. 1 Installed input elements Wiring system Pattern 1 s N SUOI IPUOD pUu WNSLIN 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 2 Installed input elements 1P3W or 3P3W ZA 1 2 3 Wiring system Pattern 1 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 2 1P3W or 3P3W ZA 1P2W B Wiring system Pattern 3 1P2W ZA 1P3W or 3P3W B Wiring system Pattern 4 Installed input elements 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 1 3P4W or aa 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 2 1P3W or 3P3W ZA 1P3W or 3P3W B Wiring system Pattern 3 Wiring system Pattern 4 Installed input elements 1 al 3P4W or 3V3A ZA 3P4W or a 1P2W B 5 Wiring system Pattern 1 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 2 1P3W or 3P3W ZA 1P3W or 3P3W B 1P2W C Wiring system Pattern 3 1P3W or 3P3W ZA 3P4W or 3V3A ZB Wiring system Pattern 4 Installed input elements 3P4W or 3V3A ZA 2 3 1P3W or 3P3W B 4 5 6 Wiring system Pattern 1 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W 1P2W Wiring system Pattern 2 1P3W or 3P3W ZA 1P3W or 3P3W B 1P3W or 3P3W C Wiring system Pattern 3 1P3W or 3P3W ZA 3P4W or 3V3A ZB 1P2W C Wiring system Pattern 4 Wiring system Pattern 5 Note 3P4W or 3V3A ZA 3P4W or 3V3A ZA 1P3W or 3P3W B 3P4W or 3V3A ZB 1P2W C e Select the wiring
98. 1 0000 1 00900 1 0000 1 0000 Ct Ratio 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 1 00909 1 0000 1 0000 Scaling 1 0000 1 0000 1 0009 1 0099 1 0090 1 0990 Factor Sunc Src T1 IZ 13 14 15 16 4 18 IM 760101 01E 4 6 Listing the Setup Parameters Relation Table of Trend Targets and Measurement Functions Uoyer lover m m m Trend Settings Normal Harnonics Normal Harnonics Function Function Function Function Urnsi Uitiy fer 9 Ornsz U2 Trnsi Tid Tie Irmsz 1213 PI PICI Omi PZ PZJ Si sid Tiz 82 3201 qi PELES OTI qZ Qe AL AIG Em4 LY Ae I TLES Borg 2 ee p ful FULCI Eme UZ AEE o te 5 A g Relation Table of D A Output Channels and Measurement Functions D Displayed only on products with the D A output option D lt Uover m m Tl lover Q D A Output Settings 3 Ea Normal Harmonics Normal Harmonics Function Function Function Function Urmsi U1 U pki 510 Umi i U pkt MELEN Udet Pi T pki AIG SI T pki UO Irnsi Qi cfUL 1165 Imi AL CF11 Pics Idei UTES Timet 31065 T111 Wpt Qi Pitt Wp i AIG id Wp i vit Q11 qi 117 AIG qed Pic ELER q 1 S10 T113 g ELER Pita i AIC Relation Table of the Rotating Speed of Motor Evaluation Function Option and Input Ranges of Torque Displayed only to products with the motor evaluation function option
99. 11 3 P1 4 S1 5 Q1 6 U1 1 7 11 1 8 P1 1 9 1 1 10 Q1 1 11 A1 1 12 o1 1 13 U1 2 14 ol1 2 15 fU1 1 16 fl1 1 17 Z1 1 18 Rs1 1 19 Xs1 1 20 Rp1 1 21 Xp1 1 22 Uhdf1 1 23 Indf1 1 24 Phdf1 1 25 Uthd1 26 Ithd1 27 Pthd1 28 Uthf1 29 Ithf1 30 Utif1 31 Itif1 32 hvf1 33 hcf1 34 oU1 U2 35 oU1 U3 36 oU1 I1 37 oU1 I2 38 oU1 I3 39 FA 40 F2 41 F3 42 F4 43 to 100 Harmonic orders are displayed inside parentheses IM 760101 01E App 13 Ea xipueddy Appendix 4 ASCII Header File Format When waveform display data Wave is saved the following two files are automatically created in the directory e Waveform display data file wvf e ASCII header file hdr The ASCII header files explained here cannot be viewed on the WT1600 Use the data such as when analyzing the waveforms on your PC NOKOGAWA ASCII FILE FORMAT Publicinfo FormatVersion Model Endian DataFormat GroupNumber TraceTotalNumber DataOffset Group1 TraceNumber BlockNumber TraceName BlockSize VResolution VOffset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VillegalData VMaxData VMinData HResolution HOffset HUnit Date Time Group2 TraceNumber BlockNumber TraceName BlockSize VResolution 1 11 WT1600 Big Trace 3 12 4096 4 1 U1 1002 1 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 FS4 V 9 000000e 02 9 000000e 02 2 0000000E 05 0 0000000E
100. 13 Measurement range of each element Total of U I P S Q A and of each element Uthd Ithd Pthd Uthf Ithf Utif Itif hvf and hcf of each element Turning ON OFF Header Information Printing e ON Prints the header information OFF Does not print the header information Selecting Numerical Data and Bar Graph You can select numerical data or bar graph to be printed Only installed elements are applicable for the selection e The numerical data can be selected from U including Uhdf including Ihdf P including Phdf S Q A 6 oU ol Z Rs Xs Rp Xp and LList The bar graph can be selected from U I P S Q A 6 oU ol Z Rs Xs Rp Xp Uhdf Ihdf and Phdf e The range of harmonic order is the range specified by Min Order and Max Order in section 7 5 Print Format of Numerical Data Lists and Bar Graphs The selected numerical data or bar graph items are printed e Prints a list consisting of elements and measurement functions in the horizontal direction and harmonic order in the vertical direction IM 760101 01E 14 11 uondo Jeu Ul INg g Chapter 15 D A Output and Other Functions 15 1 Setting the D A Output Option Procedure K Information g Communication 4 Selftest Initialize Settings Date Time Conf ig INPUT RANGE SCALING MOTOR SET a me oad eqs NTEGRATOR mm g a x sr re INTEG SET RESET FILTER Al
101. 13 4 13 5 13 6 13 7 13 8 Connecting the WT1600 to a PC eccecceescceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeeneeeseaeeeseceeeeseeeeeesnneeess 13 1 Setting the Ethernet Interface TCP IP eeceesceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseeeeaeeseaeeseeenaeeeaees 13 2 Saving Setup Waveform Display Numerical and Image Data to the FTP Server FTP GlientiFunction ssccrcchderect iia aaea nies eadene witha denne Saad Mette 13 8 Outputting the Screen Image to a Network Printer cccsccesseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseneeeesnees 13 11 Sending E mail Messages ceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeceaeeesaeseaeesaeeeeaeeseeeeaeeseaeteaeeeeaeeeaeetes 13 15 Accessing the WT1600 from a PC or Workstation FTP Server Function 0 13 19 Checking the Presence of the Ethernet Interface Option and the MAC address 13 23 Setting the FTP Passive Mode and LPR SMTP Timeout cccecceeeesceeeeeteeeeseees 13 24 Chapter 14 Built in Printer Option 14 1 14 2 14 3 Installing the Paper Roll and Paper Feeding cesssceeeeseeeeeneeeeeeneeeesneeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeaes 14 1 Printing Screen IMaQeS vcs scat nies reteset athena eh kiana ne one 14 5 Printing Numerical Data Lists and Bar Graphs ecceeeceeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeens 14 7 xii IM 760101 01E Contents Chapter 15 D A Output and Other Functions A 15 1 Setting the D A Output Option eneee a a 15 1 15 2 RGB Video Signal VGA Output o
102. 2092990009320s ESS 020202020202020202020909 0202090202020909 Roe 209809002993993 902099990900999 9000000090 0 00 090 0 0 0 0090000000900000 l 17 18 External D I 7 17 21 Unless otherwise specified tolerance is 3 however tolerance is 0 3 mm when below 10 mm IM 760101 01E Appendix Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions Measurement Functions during Normal Measurement Minimum value U pk Table 1 3 Measurement Functions TEER 7 during Normal Method of Determination Equation Measurement True rms value Urms Urms Umn Udc Uac U pk U pk Rectified mean Mir calibrated to the rms value UMN aa Simple average Udc 1 T nx 1 T 1 T V AC component Uac u t dt u t dt 4 u t dt 4 Urms Udc Maximum Minimum Maximum value U pk TI 2 V2 T Jo T Io True rms value Irms Current to the rms value Imn 1 A Simple average Idc AC component lac Maximum value l pk Minimum value I pk Irms Imn Idc lac l pk I pk Rectified mean value calibrated Maximum Minimum T T B fafiera HOt Liwat firma ie Voltage frequency fU FreqU Hz Current frequency fl Freql Hz The voltage frequency fU and current frequency fl are measured using zero crossing detection Voltage form factor Ffu Current form factor Ffl Voltage form factor FfU ums C tf factor Ffl ums oltage form factor TF urrent form fact
103. 2250 0 W 3 7500 kW 5 0000 11 2500W 22 500W 45 000W 75 000 W 112 500W 225 00W 450 00W 750 00 W 1125 00W 2250 0 W 4 5000 kW 7 5000 kw 10 000 22 500W 45 000W 90 000 W 150 000 W 225 00 W 450 00W 900 00 W 1500 00 kW 2250 0 W 4 5000 kW 9 0000 kWj 15 0000 kw 25 000 56 250 W 112 500 W 225 00W 375 00W 562 50W 1125 00W 2250 0 W 3 7500 kW 5 6250 kW 11 2500 kW 22 500 kW 37 500 kW IM 760101 01E 5 3 Setting the Measurement Range When Using an External Current Sensor For a functional description see section 1 3 a o pispLay Holo VRAE FILE STORE copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o coREMOTE E wave Hanwones Locat misc CURSOR TOMAX HOLD O NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC aR N q RANGE soaum urna lt a rom we roar CAL qm NTEGRATOR mmm z oa START STOP srne sacl INTEGSET RESET Procedure 1 Press RANGE to display the Range menu Selecting the Target Element 2 Press the Element Object soft key to display the Element menu Only the installed elements are displayed 3 Press one of the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element to select the target element The selected element is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen if you selected element 1 U1 and l1 are
104. 50A 50A 23 5A 5A 50A 50A 50A 24 5A 5A 50A 50A 50A 50A 30 5A 5A 5A 31 5A 5A 5A 50A 32 5A 5A 5A 50A 50A 33 5A 5A 5A 50A 50A 50A 40 5A 5A 5A 5A 41 5A 5A 5A 5A 50A 42 5A 5A 5A 5A 50A 50A 50 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 51 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 50A 60 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A Communication interface C1 Either one is built in C2 GP IB Interface Serial RS 232 interface IM 760101 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Suffix Code Description Power cord D UL CSA Standard power cord Part No A1006WD Maximum rated voltage 125 V Maximum rated current 7 A F VDE Standard Power Cord Part No A1009WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A Q BS Standard Power Cord Part No A1054WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A R AS Standard Power Cord Part No A1024WD Maximum rated voltage 240 V Maximum rated current 10 A Options B5 Built in printer C7 SCSI C10 SCSI Ethernet interface and internal hard disk DA D A output 30 channels MTR Motor evaluation function Either C7 or C10 can be added Example of specifications and suffix code Ex 5 A input terminals in elements 1 through 3 50 A input terminals in elements 4 through 6 GP IB interface UL CSA standard power cord built in printer and SCSI 760101 33 C1 D B5 C7 NO Instrument No When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the instrument please qu
105. 7 below If you selected SC in step 5 proceed to step 7 on the next page Funct ion ESG File List C Format ESC File Nane Size Space M Function Delete FDO Media Info sc4 Format E DUBU Media Name FDO Media Size 1457664 byte Used Space 38912 byte Vacant Space 1418752 byte Partition Size 0 g Copy Media Info Rename MakeDir Format Attribute Delete Exec EL Selecting the Floppy Disk Format 7 Press the Format soft key to display the Format menu Proceed to step 10 Function Format Media Info K Format OUUGUUU IM 760101 01E 12 7 eea y Bulpeo7 pue Burnes 5i 12 5 Formatting the Disk Selecting the Medium Format of the SCSI Device 7 Press the Format soft key to display the Format menu Selecting the number of partitions 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select a value from 1 to 10 e Selecting the format type 9 Press the Format Type soft key to select Normal or Quick For models with firmware version 1 06 or later if you select SC4 internal hard disk this menu is not displayed Only a logical format Quick is performed Function Format W Function Format Format K Media Info Media Info Format B Partition Format 1 Format Type Format Type quick quick Format Exec UUUOUULE ESC
106. A e When the crest factor is set to 6 Select 500 mA 1 A 2 5 A 5 A 10 A or 25 A The range is set in reference to the RMS value of the input signal For example if a 100 Vrms sinusoid is to be applied set the range to 100 V The selectable current range varies depending on whether the installed element is a 5 A input element or a 50 A input element Check the type of element that is installed in the product Auto range If you press the U Range Up Exec or the Range Up Exec soft key when the range is at maximum auto range is enabled The range switches automatically depending on the amplitude of the input signal as follows The different ranges used in the auto range are the same as those available for fixed range IM 760101 01E 5 2 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input Note e Range increase When the data of measurement function Urms or Irms exceeds 110 of the current measurement range the range is increased When the peak value of the input signal exceeds 330 or 660 of the current measurement range when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively the range is increased e Range decrease When the data of the measurement function Urms or Irms is less than or equal to 30 of the measurement range and Upk and Ipk is less than or equal to 300 or 600 of the next lower range when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively the range is decreased When non periodic pulse waveforms are
107. Appendix 3 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numerical Data eeeeeee App 8 Appendix 4 ASCII Header File Format cccccecsceesceceeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeseaeeseeeseaeessaeeeeeersaees App 14 Appendix 5 Power Basics Power Harmonics Three Constants Related to the AC Circuit 00 App 17 Index IM 760101 01E xiii oh 7 Chapter1 Explanation of Functions 1 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram System Configuration j Numerical data Waveform display data Screen image data Stored data Setup parameters y CRT PC Numerical data Waveform display data Screen image data Stored data gt Printer A image signal Setup parameters X RGB video signal VGA output Outputs measured D A output option etl option values using analog lt Interface N mericalaata voltage Waveform display data SCSI interface PC option GP IB serial Setup parameters External Setup parameters interface SCSI p device Numerical data Floppy disk Waveform display data e Setup parameters a p Screen image data Stored data Numerical data Waveform display data Screen image data and stored data External clock input gt Master slave Measurement start lt gt sync signal Measurement stop lt gt Built in printer option Prints screen image numerical data list Internal memory Motor evaluation I
108. Connecting the WT1600 and a SCSI Device 1 oonoooo0o0000o00000ranonnnn opopoo0o0o00p000o0000000000000 26 27 28 48 49 50 Connect the SCSI cable to the SCSI connector on the rear panel of the instrument Turn ON the SCSI device first and then the WT1600 Rear panel To format the hard disk follow the procedure described in the section 12 5 Formatting the D isk Connectable SCSI Devices Most SCSI devices MO disk drive hard disk and ZIP can be connected to the instrument but there are some exceptions For example the maximum number of partitions that can be selected is 10 and each partition cannot exceed 2 GB If the total capacity of all partitions exceeds 20 GB the hard disk cannot be formatted For details on which devices can be connected ask your YOKOGAWA dealer For general handling precautions for the connected SCSI device see the instruction manual that is provided with the device Note When connecting multiple SCSI devices in a chain attach a SCSI terminator to the device at the other end of the chain IM 760101 01E 12 3 eea y Bulpeo7 pue Burnes 5i 12 4 Changing the SCSI ID Number a o DISPLAY roo ree FILE STORE COPY ESC o TRIG D o REMOTE a won roeal mee CURSOR MAX Hody SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC ET k j MOTOR SET we eam miN TEGRATOR mm GAR
109. Cursor x is at 13 order Cursor x Vector Display of Harmonics For procedures see section 7 10 During harmonic measurement vectors can be displayed to show the relationship between the phase difference and amplitude rms value of the fundamental signals U 1 and I 1 of each element that is assigned to the selected wiring unit The positive vertical axis is set to 0 angle 0 and the vector of each input signal is displayed In addition you can zoom in on the vector or display the values of the amplitude and the phase difference between the signals simultaneously The vector display is shown on the next page The elements that are to be displayed as vectors vary depending on the number of installed input elements and the selected wiring pattern Explanation is given below for the case when the number of installed input elements is 5 the wiring system pattern is three phase four wire for ZA and three phase three wire for xB When the target of the harmonic measurement is set to wiring unit ZA the target elements are 1 2 and 3 Vectors 1 2 and 3 correspond to elements 1 2 and 3 respectively The relationship between the phase difference and amplitude of U1 1 U2 1 U3 1 11 1 12 1 and 138 1 is displayed as vectors When the target of the harmonic measurement is set to wiring unit B the target elements are 4 and 5 Vectors 4 and 5 correspond to elements 4 and 5 respectively The relationship between
110. File List Dialog Box in section 12 9 Properties Same as the explanation given in Properties in section 12 9 Note For the meanings of the measurement function symbols that are displayed see section 1 2 Measurement Functions and Measurement Periods 1 5 Computation 1 6 Integration appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions and appendix 2 Determination of Delta Computation e For details on the wiring units expressed as XA B C see section 5 1 Selecting the Wiring System e The maximum order for which the harmonic data is saved is the maximum harmonic order to be analyzed that is specified in section 7 5 e If you change the extension of the file such as on a PC the file can no longer be loaded The following data is saved in the places where numerical data does not exist when saving the numerical data e For ASCII files Characters NAN INF INF or ERROR e For Float files 0x7FC00000 0x7F800000 OxFF800000 or OxFFFFFFFE e Up to 36 characters can be displayed in Path e The file names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following five file names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL and CLOCK e When using the GP IB or serial interface commands to enter a file name the following symbols that do not exist on the keyboard of this instrument can be used e Setup parameters that have been
111. For details on the determination and equations of functions see appendix 1 Item Symbol and Meaning Voltage V Ux 1 rms value of the harmonic voltage of order 1 UX total rms value of the voltage signal Current A Ix 1 rms value of the harmonic current of order 1 I total rms value of the current signal Active power W Px 1 Active power of the harmonic signal of order 1 PZ total active power Apparent power VA Sz 1 Apparent power of the harmonic signal of order 1 SZ total apparent power Reactive power var Qz 1 Reactive power of the harmonic signal of order 1 Q total reactive power Power factor 431 Power factor of the harmonic signal of order 1 AZ total power factor 1 Total is a value determined according to the equation given in appendix 1 from the fundamental signal 15t order and all harmonic components 2 to the upper limit The DC component can also be included 17 6 IM 760101 01E 17 5 Accuracy Voltage and Current Accuracy Item Specification Accuracy 3 month Conditions accuracy Temperature 23 3 C Humidity 30 to 75 RH Input waveform Sine wave Common mode voltage 0 V Line filter OFF power factor 1 Crest factor 3 After warm up time has passed Wired condition after zero level compensation or measurement range change fis the frequency Frequency Accuracy reading error measurement range error DC 0 1 of reading
112. Link Date 01 05 16 Wed 12 31 Explanation Displaying the System Conditions You can check the model ROM version element configuration and the existence of options 16 8 IM 760101 01E 16 5 Replacing the Power Fuse A e To prevent the possibility of fire use only a fuse having the specified rating voltage current and type Make sure to turn OFF the instrument and unplug the power cord before replacing the fuse e Never short the fuse holder Fuse Rating The power fuse used on this instrument is specified as follows e e e e e Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 6 3 A Type Time lag Standard UL VDE certified Part number A1354EF Replacement Procedure Replace the power fuse according to the procedure below 1 Turn OFF the power switch 2 Remove the power cord from the power connector 3 Insert the tip of a flat blade screw driver in the dented section of the fuse holder on the power connector side turn it in the direction of the arrow and remove the fuse holder 4 Remove the blown fuse that is attached to the tip of the fuse holder 5 Attach a new fuse to the fuse holder and attach the fuse holder back in the original place Val Q Fuse holder IM 760101 01E 16 9 g uolsedsu pue avueugzuien HunooysajqnoiL 16 6 Recommended Replacement Parts The three year warranty applies only to the WT1600 start
113. Move the position by 50 100 a Turning ON OFF of the Waveform Display For procedures see section 9 5 The voltage and current waveforms corresponding to the element that has input modules installed can be turned ON OFF This feature enables easy viewing of waveforms as only the required waveforms can be displayed 1 26 IM 760101 01E 1 7 Waveform Display Split Screen of the Waveform and Waveform Mapping For procedures see section 9 6 The screen can be evenly divided and the waveforms can be mapped to the divided windows The screen can be divided into up to four windows This function is useful when there are many waveforms on the screen You can select the method of mapping from the following list of choices Auto The waveforms that are turned ON are mapped in order according to the element number to the divided windows voltage first and then current Fixed The waveforms are mapped in order by element number in the order voltage and current to the divided windows regardless of whether or not the display is turned ON User The waveforms can be mapped arbitrarily to the divided windows regardless of whether or not the display is turned ON Display Interpolation of the Waveform For procedures see section 9 7 The waveform display data can be connected linearly to display the waveform smoothly Linear Interpolation Linearly interpolates between two points Interpolation OFF No interp
114. Preset1 to 3 and user setting For user color the display color can be specified for each item e Menu Fore Set the color of the text on the menu dialog box window and other screens e Menu Back Set the background color of the waveform display frame e Select Box Set the background color of the background within the selected menu frame and box e Sub Menu Set the display color of the selected dialog box or window Selected Key Set the display color of the selected soft key or item 15 18 IM 760101 01E 15 8 Setting Key Lock RANGE SCALING MOTOR SET o a FILTER AVG CAL m NTEGRATOR mw g a START STOP SR INTEG SET RESET WIRING A H Procedure 1 Press MISC to display the 2 Press the Config soft key Setting Key Lock o a asra HOLD Did FILE STORE cory SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o WAVE HARMONICS CURSOR To exit the menu during operation press ESC Misc menu to display the Config menu 3 Press the Key Lock soft key to select ON or OFF Explanation Key Lock If key lock is turned ON all keys except the power switch MISC key ESC key and Message ENG m Q W LoD Brightness 2 Crest Factor CF6 the 5th soft key from the top are disabled When key lock is ON the wo
115. Q are multiplied by the PT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient e OFF The voltage U current I and power P S and Q are not multiplied by the PT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient The output values of the external PT and CT are read directly as numerical data in this case Setting the PT Ratio The ratio can be set in the range of 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Setting the CT Ratio The ratio can be set in the range of 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Setting the Power Coefficient The ratio can be set in the range of 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Note If the result of multiplying the PT ratio CT ratio or power coefficient scaling factor to the measurement range exceeds 99999M the display frame of the numerical data will display OF 5 16 IM 760101 01E 5 5 Selecting the Input Filter For a functional description see section 1 3 o a SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTAIGD o REMOTE rae fae oon mac CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC n PUT a A y i HA RANGE scaunel WIRING OTOR SET 3 o a Hae FILTER ave a CAL INTEGRATOR wmm g a START STOP INTEGSET RESET H Procedure f Press FILTER to display the Filter menu Selecting the Target Element 2 Press the Element Object soft key to display the Element menu Only the installed elements are displayed 3 Press one the soft keys corresponding to the displayed
116. Rs Xs Rp and Xp Utif1 1 Itif1 4999 hyf1 z9 0 0008 6 616 36 0 0007 0 014 31 0 0009 9 018 32 0 0010 9 021 33 0 0008 0 016 34 0 0006 0 011 PLL UL 5 8545 dc 1 04293 20 633 Freq 46 Hz 1 4 0427 79 982 2 3 0339 60 023 3 6 0144 9 285 4 0 0068 9 135 UL 5 0545 V 5 6 0059 117 6 0 0048 0 096 Ii 4 7348 A 7 6 0037 0 072 8 6 0041 0 080 PL 8 067 W 3 6 0021 6 041 10 0 0021 0 043 S1 8 11 0 0022 0 044 12 0 0022 0 043 I 13 6 0022 0 043 14 0 0016 0 032 AL 0 81 Q 15 0 0018 0 035 16 0 0014 0 029 i 35 eN 17 0 0009 6 618 18 6 0013 6 026 Uthdi 75 3 19 6 0015 0 030 26 6 0012 0 023 Ithd1 7524 zi 6 9007 0 013 22 6 0012 0 023 Pthdi ae z3 0 0012 0 023 24 0 0007 0 014 Uthfi r z5 0 0004 0 008 26 0 0011 6 022 Ithfi Er o z7 0 0008 6 616 28 6 0614 6 628 o Q Ke a 35 0 0010 0 019 36 0 0010 0 020 37 0 0010 6 626 38 0 0007 0 014 39 0 0005 6 616 40 0 0007 0 014 41 0 0002 0 004 42 0 0004 9 007 43 0 0006 0 011 44 0 0005 0 010 45 0 0004 0 009 46 0 0007 0 014 lt sjeusis s1uowuey e 0 paa eea Numerical data of Harmonic distortion factor each harmonic When the selected measurement function is U I or P Uhdf Ihdf or Phdf is displayed respectively 1 16 IM 760101 01E 1 4 Numeric Display e Dual list The data of two measurement functions is displayed in its own column You can select the following measurement functions U I P S Q A 6 oU ol Z Rs Xs Rp and Xp PLL UL
117. System 1P3W Using PT and CT SOURCE LOAD C D 2 2 Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 IM 760101 01E 3 17 sjuswainseayy Buers 310499 el 3 8 Using an External PT or CT to Wire the Circuit under Measurement Wiring Example of a Three Phase Three Wire System 3P3W Using PT and CT R SOURCE LOAD S T ICT T ViPT 1 MWU 1 WU 1 MW 1 WU 1 A 1 oT 1 OOO 1 OTT iO Obi LO Ow KO Ol L Ovi EE EEEE NEEN EE EE Smee as ae SEET ieee eee es are O F D 2 Input terminali Input terminal2 Wiring Example of a Three Voltage Three Current System 3V3A Using PT and CT R SOURCE LOAD n gt t Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 Input terminal 3 Wiring Example of a Three Phase Four Wire System 3P4W Using PT and CT SOURCE LOAD zion o 9 4 Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 Input terminal 3 Note For the relationship between the wiring systems and the method of determining the measured values or computed values see Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Meas
118. W 3 0000 kW 6 0000 kw 25 000 37 500 W 75 000W 150 00W 250 00W 375 00 W 750 00W 1500 0 W 2 5000 kW 3 7500kW 7 5000 kW 15 000 kW 25 000 kw Effective Power Range of the Wiring Unit of Wiring System 3P4W Current Voltage Range V Range A 750m 1 5000 3 0000 5 0000 7 5000 15 000 30 000 50 000 75 000 150 00 300 00 500 00 5 0000m 1 1 2500 mW 22 500 mW 45 000 mW 75 000 mW 112 500 mW 225 00 mW 450 00 mW 750 00 mW 1125 00 mW 2250 0 mW 4 5000 W 7 5000 W 10 000m 22 500 mW 45 000 mW 90 000 mW 150 000 mW 225 00 mW 450 00 mW 900 00 mW 1500 0 mW 2250 0 mW 4 5000 W 9 0000 Wj 15 0000 W 25 000m 56 250 mW 112 500 mW 225 00 mW 375 00 mW 562 50 mW 1125 00 mW 2250 0 mW 3 7500W 5 6250W 11 2500W 22 500 W 37 500 W 50 000m 1 12 500 mW 225 000 mW 450 00 mW 750 00 mW 1125 00 mW 2250 0 mW 4 5000W 7 5000 W 11 2500W 22 500W 45 000W 75 000 W 100 00m 225 00 mW 450 00 mW 900 00 mW 1500 0 mW 2250 0 mW 4 5000 W 9 0000 W 15 0000W 22 500W 45 000W 90 000 W 150 000 W 250 00m 562 50 mW 1125 00 mW 2250 0 mW 3 7500W 5 6250W 11 250W 22 500W 37 500W 56 250W 112 500 W 225 00W 375 00 W 500 00m 1125 00 mW 2250 0 mW 4 5000W 7 5000 W 11 2500 W 22 5000W 45 000W 75 000 W 112 500W 225 00W 450 00 W 750 00 W 1 0000 2250 0mW 4 5000W 9 0000 W 15 0000W 22 500W 45 000 W 90 000 W 150 000W 225 00W 450 00W 900 00 W 1500 00 W 2 5000 5 6250 W 11 2500 W 22 500W 37 500W 56 250W 112 500W 225 00W 375 00W 562 50W 1125 00W
119. YOKOGAWA g lover im m Trend Setting Displayed trend target mn EE measurement function upper limit M Trend Fornat Single Trend Sampling OFF pny i Restart 4 Trend Exec Trend Tediv 1Osvdiy 4 K Displayed trend target ae i Disp rtens measurement function os R Trend lower limit F i gah saa mimaa Scale Update 9937 Trend 133 Time at the left end of the screen Time at the right end of the screen fixed to 0 s time span of the screen Number of trend display data Number of data points displayed in the range points retrieved from the left to the right end of the screen e When P P is displayed trend is displayed using P P compression see sections 1 7 and 1 8 Selecting the Display Format Select the trend display format from the following list of choices Trend Only trends are displayed Numeric Trend The numerical data and trend are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on setting the numerical data display see section 4 1 chapters 6 7 and 8 Wave Trend The waveform and trend are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on setting the waveform display see section 4 2 and chapter 9 Bar Trend The bar graph and trend are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on setting the bar graph display see section 4 3 and section 7 9 4 16 IM 760101 01E 4 6 Listing the Setup Parameters STORE SET MENU
120. an R L and C connected in parallel Xpz Reactance of the load circuit that has a R L and C connected in parallel Corrected Power W Pc Applicable standard IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 IEC76 1 1993 Integration Time Integration time Wpz Sum of positive and negative watt hours Wp z Sum of positive P consumed watt hour Wp z Sum of negative P watt hour returned to the power supply qz Sum of positive and negative ampere hours q Sum of positive ampere hour q Sum of negative ampere hour Efficiency 1 n Efficiency of wiring B against wiring A Efficiency 2 1 n Efficiency of wiring A against wiring B Measurement Functions of Motor Evaluation For details on the determination and equations of the measurement functions of motor evaluation see appendix 1 Item Symbol and Meaning Rotating speed Speed Motor s rotating speed Torque Torque Motor s torque Synchronous speed Sync Slip Slip Motor output Pm Motor s mechanical output mechanical power Motor efficiency nmA or nmB Ratio of the motor output versus the power consumption of the motor Total efficiency nmA or nmB Ratio of the motor output versus the power consumed by the motor as well as the converter through which power is fed to the motor If PZA is the power to the converter and the motor and P amp B is the power to the motor nmA and nmB are the to
121. and the integration is started Holding the integration Press HOLD The HOLD indicator illuminates and the numerical data display is held Integration continues Releasing the Held Condition Press HOLD while the values are held The HOLD indicator turns OFF and the numerical data display is updated In the held condition the display can be updated by carrying out single measurements by pressing SHIFT HOLD SINGLE Stopping the integration Press STOP The START indicator turns OFF and the STOP indicator illuminates The integration time and integration value are held If you press STOP before the time specified by the integration timer is reached and then press START integration continues up to the time specified by the integration timer If the reservation time for stopping the integration is reached in the real time normal integration mode the START indicator turns OFF and the STOP indicator illuminates The integration time and integration value are held If the time specified by the integration timer elapses in the real time repetitive integration mode the integration time and integration value are automatically reset and the integration is repeated until STOP is pressed or when the reservation time for stopping the integration is reached Resetting the Integration Press SHIFT STOP RESET The STOP indicator turns OFF the integration time and integration value are reset and the display shows no data
122. as an external current sensor have a good understanding of the voltage of the circuit under measurement and the specifications and handling of the clamp type sensor Then confirm that there are no shock hazards For safety reasons when using the instrument on a rack mount furnish a switch for turning OFF the circuit under measurement from the front side of the rack After connecting the measurement cable attach the current input protection cover using the 4 screws provided for your safety Make sure that the conductive parts are not exposed from the protection cover 3 4 IM 760101 01E 3 3 Wiring Precautions A To make the protective functions effective check the following items before applying the voltage or current of the circuit under measurement e The power cable provided with the instrument is used to connect to the power supply and the instrument is grounded e The power switch of the instrument is turned ON e The current input protective cover provided with the instrument is being used When the power switch of the instrument is turned ON do not apply a signal that exceeds the following values to the voltage or current input terminals When the instrument is turned OFF turn OFF the circuit under measurement For other input terminals see the specifications of each module in chapter 17 Instantaneous Maximum Allowable Input 1 cycle for 20 ms Voltage Input Peak value of 4000 V or RMS value of 1500 V
123. be stored Float FLD Approx 4 K 4 x 1002 x Tw 16 x store count Tw Number of waveforms to be stored e During harmonic measurement Same as for normal measurement IM 760101 01E 11 17 e eq pal0 s ay Bulaes pue geq Huljjeoey pue Bunos z 11 5 Saving the Stored Data Selecting the Medium and Directory Media on which saving and reading is possible are displayed on the File List dialog box Display Example of a Medium FDO Floppy disk SC4 SCSI device whose ID number is 4 built in hard disk fixed to D4 SC5 SCSI device whose ID number is 5 see section 12 3 SC5_01 Partition 1 of a SCSI device whose ID number is 5 NDO Network drive see section 13 3 File Name and Comment A file name must be assigned Comments are optional e You cannot save to a file name that already exists in the same directory overwriting not allowed Number of Characters and Types That Can Be Used Item Number of Characters Characters That Can Be Used Filename 1 to 8 characters 0 9 A Z _ parenthesis minus sign Comment 0 to 25 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces Auto Naming Function When Auto Naming is turned ON files with a three digit number from 000 to 999 are automatically created when saving the data You can specify a common name up to five characters specified through Filename that is placed before the number Initializing Clearing the Internal Me
124. correctly if a different signal is specified ov S Slip Sync Speed 14 ad Sync 27 Speed Torque e Scaling factor Motor Pm 60 When the unit of Speed is min or rpm the unit of Torque is Nem and the scaling factor is 1 the unit of motor output Pm is W For products with ROM version 1 05 or earlier the equation for Pm is as follows Pm Speed Torque x Scaling factor Pm mA n PSA 100 Pm o nmB xB 100 e Motor efficiency is the ratio of the motor output with respect to the power consumed by the motor e Total efficiency is the ratio of the motor output versus the power consumed by the motor as well as the converter through which power is fed to the motor If PXA is the power to the converter and the motor and PB is the power to the motor nmA and nmB are the total efficiency and motor efficiency respectively Conversely if PZB is the power to the converter and the motor and PXA is the power to the motor nmB and nmA are the total efficiency and motor efficiency respectively IM 760101 01E App 3 Ea xipueddy Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions Measurement Functions during Harmonic Measurement Table 1 2 Measurement Functions during Harmonic Measurement Method of Determination Equation Characters values inside the of the measurement function dc When k 0 When k 1 1 k When k 2 to max
125. data numerical data and screen image data to a storage medium Load the saved setup parameters from the storage medium Floppy disk built in hard disk SCSI device network drive etc Built in hard disk SCSI and Ethernet interface are optional Printing of the Screen Image Numerical Data List and Bar Graph Print the screen image numerical data list and bar graph using the built in printer The built in printer is optional Ethernet Communications Option Item Specification FTP client Save setup parameters waveform display data numerical data and screen image data to an FTP server network drive on the network Load the setup parameters that have been saved to the FTP server FTP server Access the WT1600 from a PC or workstation on the network and download files on the floppy disk built in hard disk and SCSI device connected to the WT1600 However an FTP client software is needed on the PC or workstation LPR client Print the screen image on a network printer SMTP client Periodically transmit the information of the WT1600 to a specified mail address IM 760101 01E 17 15 h Ey suoneoyioeds 17 7 Input Output of the Master Slave Synchronization Signal Item Specification Connector type BNC connector Common to the master and slave I O level TTL Common to the master and slave Output logic LJ Negative logic falling edge Applicable to t
126. defined function a file name and a comment can be entered using the keyboard that is displayed on the screen The jog shuttle arrow keys and SELECT key are used to operate the keyboard to enter the character strings e Entering the date or unit The following figure shows the keyboard that appears when setting the date or unit 1 Turn the jog shuttle to select the character to be entered 2 Press SELECT to enter the string in the entry box If there are strings already in the entry box use the arrow keys to select the entry position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter all the characters 4 After entering all the characters select ENT on the keyboard and press SELECT The string is confirmed and the keyboard disappears Entry box INSERT indicator 3 24 IM 760101 01E 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Entering the equation for the user defined function The following figure shows the keyboard that appears when setting the equation for the user defined function Long equations can be temporarily held in the internal memory so that it can be used in other equations e Entering the equation and temporarily storing it 1 Turn the jog shuttle to select the character to be entered Long function names can be selected by pressing one key 2 Press SELECT to enter the string in the entry box If there are strings already in the entry box use the arrow keys to select the entry position 3 Repeat steps 1 a
127. disk that are connected via the SCSI option are as follows e MO PD Semi IBM format It is handled as a removable disk e Zip JAZ Hard disk format It is handled as a fixed disk Formatting a Hard Disk IBM compatible format IM 760101 01E 12 9 eea y Bulpeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 5 Formatting the Disk Selecting the Format Type When formatting an external SCSI device you can select the format type from the following list of choices Normal Performs both physical format and logical format Quick Performs only a logical format The approximate time required for the format operation are indicated below the time varies depending on the SCSI device Media Normal Quick MO 128 MB Approx 10 minutes Approx 15 s MO 230 MB Approx 10 minutes Approx 15 s External HDD 10 GB Approx 15 minutes Approx 15 s Built in hard disk Approx 15 minutes Approx 10 s Built in hard disk Approx 10s For models with firmware version 1 06 or later Selecting the Number of Partitions The external hard disk can be divided into several partitions Select the number of partitions in the range from 1 to 10 If the number of partitions is set to 2 the hard disk is divided into two partitions named SCO and SC 1 When formatting a large hard disk select the number of partitions so that each partition does not exceed 2 GB If the total capacity of all partitions exceeds 20 GB the hard disk cannot be fo
128. element to select the target element Selecting the Line Filter 4 Press the Line Filter soft key to select the filter from OFF to 5 5k If any of the target elements is set to a setting other than OFF the FILTER indicator above and to the left of the key illuminates Selecting the Zero Crossing Filter 4 Press the Zero Cross Filter soft key to select OFF or 500 m KA Q Element Ob ject Element 1 K Element Object Element 1 Element 1 E JOUUUUU Element 2 zero Cross Filter 500 Element 3 Element 4 Element 5 Element 6 Filter Copy Exec NJUUUUUO Filter Copy Exec i IM 760101 01E 5 17 SUOI IPUOD pUu WNSLIN 5 5 Selecting the Input Filter Copying the Input Filter The input filter specified for a given element can be set to the elements of the same wiring unit The input filters for other elements that were specified before is not held 3 Press one of the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element from which the information is to be copied the copy source 4 Press the Filter Copy Exec soft key The input filter of the copy source is copied to the elements of the same wiring unit However if the wiring system is pattern 1 the measurement range is copied to all other elements Element 1 Element 2 ES Q Element Object Element 1 Zero Cross Filter 500 Element 3 Element 4 E
129. element wiring unit from the following list of choices The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements Element1 Element2 Element3 Element4 Element5 Element6 XA B and XC If the selected wiring unit is not a harmonic measurement target there is no numerical data Thus O V is output in this case For example if the measurement target is XA 0 V is output at the measurement function of ZC For selecting the measurement target see section 7 3 Changing the Harmonic Order The harmonic order can be set to total or from dc Oth order up to 100th order Note For the meanings of the measurement function symbols that are output see section 1 2 Measurement Functions and Measurement Periods 1 5 Computation 1 6 Integration appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions and appendix 2 Determination of Delta Computation For details on the wiring units expressed as XA B and XC see section 5 1 Selecting the Wiring System 0 V is output in places where the measurement function is not selected or where numerical data is not present The harmonic order can be set to total or from dc Oth order up to 100th order However the numerical data up to the order corresponding to the upper limit of harmonic order under analysis see section 17 6 that is automatically determined from the minimum analysis order specified in section 7 5 to the PLL source frequency i
130. factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively The conditions of the input signals of elements 1 to 6 are displayed in order from the left Displayed only to products with the motor evaluation function option The color changes from green to red when the analog revolution torque signal level exceeds approx 180 of the specified measurement range For pulse revolution signal the color changes from green to red when approx 10 V is exceeded The first and second lines correspond to the conditions of rotating speed and torque respectively Uover Spd ui 300U Auto YOKOGAWA lover m m m m m m Trq Ti 10U Display K Format Urms1 93 33 V 9 MES e T Item Anount o Umni 93 36 V acas g Udc 1 0 04 V Norm Item No 3 Uacl 93 33 V r h Numeric Irms1 1 74 A Mi li 9 Imnl 0 00 A gt Idei 0 01 A an Scroll Exec Tacl 174A Page Doun Scroll Exec Update 570 Trend a Number of data updates e The number of data updates is shown in the Update line at the lower left part of the screen e Press HOLD to stop the data from updating The update number stops incrementing Press HOLD again to allow updating to continue The update number resumes incrementing e If the value exceedes 65535 it returns to 0 e If the power is turned OFF the number of data updates resets to 0 During Normal Measurement Meaning of the Measurement Function Symbols e For the meanings of the measurement function symbols that are d
131. frequency measurement When the button to the left of the input signal in the frequency measurement source selection box is highlighted that is the target input signal for frequency measurement selected in section 6 3 If you select an input signal that is not a frequency measurement target an error results In normal cases a voltage or current supplied to the motor of which the input signal is a frequency measurement target see section 6 3 is selected If a frequency other than that of the voltage and current supplied by the motor is specified the synchronous speed may not be determined correctly Equation for Deriving the Synchronous Speed The unit of synchronous speed is fixed to min or roms The equation is shown below 120 x Frequency of the frequency measurement source Hz Sync min yau Motor s number of poles Equation for Deriving the Slip The unit of synchronous speed is fixed to min or rpm Therefore to determine the slip set the scaling factor see section 8 4 of the rotating speed so that the unit of rotating speed is also min or rpm foot i pated Slip Synchronous speed min Rotating speed min x 100 Synchronous speed min Rotating speed derived in section 8 4 Note Please select a stable voltage or current supplied by the motor with small distortion or noise for the frequency measurement source IM 760101 01E 8 13 uondo uoljenjeaq 1030 e 8 7 Setting
132. held at that point Setting the Integration Timer This description is the same as section 6 8 Set the time in units of hour minute second in the following range 0000 00 00 to 10000 00 00 When performing all element simultaneous integration by turning Independent Control OFF a single integration timer can be specified The value specified here is also set in the integration timer of Element 1 in the Independent Timer Setting dialog box that appears when Independent Control is turned ON When performing individual element integration by turning Independent Control ON timers can be specified for each element The value specified for the integration timer for Element 1 is also set in the integration timer in the Timer Setting dialog box that appears when Independent Control is turned OFF By turning Independent Control ON the integration timer can be set for each element Each or for all elements at once All Note If the integration timer is set to 0000 00 00 in the real time normal integration mode the integration is started at the specified start date time The integration is stopped at the specified stop date time when the maximum integration time of 10000 hours is exceeded or when the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value The integration time and value are held at that point The individual element integration function does not operate on products with only a single element In such case the
133. higher orders The PLL phase locked loop source is the signal that is used to determine the fundamental period Selecting a signal with little distortion or fluctuation for the PLL source will result in a stable harmonic measurement An ideal signal would be a rectangular wave with amplitude that is greater than or equal to 50 or 100 of the measurement range see section 1 3 when the crest factor see section 5 11 is set to 3 or 6 respectively In addition a sampling clock signal Smp Clk with a frequency that is 2048 times the fundamental frequency of the waveform on which to perform harmonic measurements can be input to the external clock input connector Stable harmonic measurement is achieved by using this sampling clock to sample data from the target waveform Stable harmonic measurement can also be achieved by applying a clock signal Ext Clk that has the same period as the waveform on which to perform harmonic measurements Types of Measurement Functions of the Motor Evaluation Function Option By using the motor evaluation function option the rotating speed torque and output of a motor can be determined from the DC voltage analog signal or pulse count signal received from a revolution sensor which is proportional to the rotating speed of the motor and the DC voltage analog signal received from a torque meter which is proportional to the motor s torque In addition the synchronous speed and slip of a motor can be determin
134. image data and setup parameters can be saved to an FTP server on the network in the same fashion as with the floppy disk or external SCSI device The saved setup parameters can also be loaded as necessary PC or workstation on which the FTP server function is running 1 32 IM 760101 01E 1 9 Saving and Loading Data and Other Functions EN Accessing the WT1600 from an FTP Client on the Network FTP Server Function The WT1600 can be accessed from an FTP client on the network and files on the floppy disk built in hard disk and external SCSI device connected to the WT1600 can be retrieved PC or workstation on which the FTP client function is running suoloun jo uoneuejdxa Outputting to a Network Printer LPR Client Function The screen image can be printed to a network printer in the same fashion as with the built in printer ACN EP E wrieoe Printer Sending Mail SMTP Client Function The information of the WT1600 can be transmitted periodically to a specified mail address GP IB Serial Communication See the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760101 11E Either a GP IB interface or a serial interface conforming to EIA 574 9 pin EIA 232 RS 2
135. in sections 3 6 and 3 9 are the sections where the current flows Use appropriate wires that are suitable for the current In order to make accurate measurements of the voltage of the circuit under measurement connect the cable to the circuit as close as possible In order to make correct measurements separate the measurement cables as far away from the earth ground wires and the instrument s case as possible to minimize the static capacitance to earth ground To more accurately measure apparent power and power factor in three phase unbalanced circuits we recommend the three voltage three current 3V3A measurement method IM 760101 01E sjuswainseeyy Buers 310499 el 3 4 For Making Accurate Measurements Effects of Power Loss By using an appropriate wiring system that matches the load the effects of power loss on measurement accuracy can be minimized We will consider the current source SOURCE and load resistance LOAD below e When the Measurement Current Is Relatively Large Wire so that the voltage measurement circuit is connected to the load side The current measurement circuit measures the sum of current i flowing through the load of the circuit under measurement and the current iy flowing through the voltage measurement circuit Because the current flowing through the circuit under measurement is i iv is the amount of error The input resistance of the voltage measurement circuit of the instrument is approximately 2 MQ
136. in the range up to 1 MHz The effective input range is within 300 of the range within 600 of the range if the crest factor is set to 6 However for 1000 V range the range is within 200 within 400 for 500 V range if the crest factor is set to 6 For a 5 A input element add 20 uA to the DC accuracy of the current For a 50 A input element add 1 mA to the DC accuracy of the current For current sensor input add 0 05 current sensor trans ratio A to the DC accuracy of the current For temperature changes after zero level compensation and range change on a 5 A input element add 10 uA C to the DC accuracy of the current For temperature changes after zero level compensation and range change on a 50 A input element add 1 mA C to the DC accuracy of the current For temperature changes after zero level compensation and range change on a current sensor input add 0 05 current sensor transformation ratio A C to the DC accuracy of the current e For a 5 A input element add 0 006 x to the current accuracy For a 50 A input element add 0 00006 x to the current accuracy For Irms Imean and lac on a 5 A input element accuracy figures are specified with the line filter turned ON for 2 mA or less For Irms Imean and lac on a 50 A input element accuracy figures are specified with the line filter turned ON for 200 mA or less For Irms lmean and lac on a current sensor input accuracy figures are specif
137. individual element integration menu does not appear IM 760101 01E 6 27 uoles6aju pue JUsWeiNseayy eEWION el 6 9 Setting the Real time Integration Mode the Integration Timer and the Reservation Time Setting the Reservation Time e The reservation time is set in units of year month date hour minute second Set the hour minute second in the following range 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 e When performing all element simultaneous integration by turning Independent Control OFF a single reservation time can be specified The value specified here is also set in the reservation time of Element 1 in the Independent Real Time Control dialog box that appears when Independent Control is turned ON e When performing individual element integration by turning Independent Control ON the reservation time can be specified for each element The value specified here for Element 1 is also set in the reservation time in the Real Time Control dialog box that appears when Independent Control is turned OFF e By turning Independent Control ON the reservation time can be set for each element Each or for all elements at once All e Make sure the reservation time for stopping the integration is after the reservation time for starting the integration Note mam The reservation time allows up to 31 days to be specified for February If an erroneous date is specified an error message is displayed at the time of execution of the integration operation sec
138. integrating lac DC lower limit of frequency determined by the data update rate to 100 kHz Display Resolution The maximum display resolution of integration value is 999999 When the integrated value reaches 1000000 counts the decimal point shifts automatically For example if 0 001 mWh is added to 999 999 mWh the display shows 1 00000 Wh For the number of displayed digits other than during integration see section 1 4 Display When Integration Overflow Occurs When the integration time reaches its maximum 10000 hours or the integration value reaches its maximum or minimum 999999 MWh or 999999 MAh the integration is stopped and the integration time and integration value at that point are held Integration When MAX Hold Function Is Enabled The integration value is determined and displayed by summing the value that is measured at every display update rate irrespective of the MAX hold function section 5 9 Integration When the Measured Value Exceeds the Measurement Limit If the instantaneous voltage or current of the sampled data exceeds 300 of the measurement range when the crest factor is set to 3 the value is considered to be the value corresponding to 300 for the purpose of integration If the instantaneous voltage or current of the sampled data exceeds 600 of the measurement range when the crest factor is set to 6 the value is considered to be the value corresponding to 600 for the purpose of integration IM 760101 01E
139. is displayed simultaneously with waveforms bar graphs or trends only half of the selected number of items is displayed Not all the data can be displayed on one screen Thus you can scroll through the displayed items to view the succeeding data Example in which eight items are displayed U1 5 0545 V I1 4 7348 A F Ta 0 067W 8 S s1 0 082 VA 3 Q1 0 047 var UD 4 0427 V 8 1D 0 0172 A S Pim 0 069 W IM 760101 01E 1 15 1 4 Numeric Display Changing the Displayed Items When Four Eight or 16 Items Are Displayed By selecting a displayed item the numerical data value that is displayed at the position can be changed U1 0 0094 V U1 0 0094 V I1 0 0002 A Change the measurement 1 0 0002 A P1 0 000 W function of the third item gt pi 130 853 S1 0 000 VA S1 0 000 VA U1 0 0094 V I1 0 0002 A E2 0 001kW S1 0 000 VA Change the element of the third item Change the harmonic order U1 0 0094 V I1 0 0002 A P236 0 000k W S1 0 000 VA List Display For each measurement function the numerical data of the fundamental and all harmonics can be displayed in two columns When the numerical data is displayed simultaneously with waveforms bar graphs or trends approximately half of the data is displayed e Single list The data of a single measurement function is displayed by separating the even and odd harmonics in each column You can select the following measurement functions U I P S Q A oU ol Z
140. mA is specified on a 5 A input element and the range of this element is copied the range for 50 A input elements is set to the minimum range for the 50 A input element 1 A If the crest factor is set to 6 and a current range between 5 mA and 250 mA is specified on a 5 A input element and the range of this element is copied the range for 50 A input elements is set to the minimum range for the 50 A input element 500 mA If the crest factor is set to 3 and a current range between 10 A and 50 A is specified on a 50 A input element and the range of this element is copied the range for 5 A input elements is set to the maximum range for the 5 A input element 5 A If the crest factor is set to 6 and a current range between 5 A and 25 A is specified ona 50 A input element and the range of this element is copied the range for 5 A input elements is set to the maximum range for the 5 A input element 2 5 A IM 760101 01E 5 7 SUOI IPUOD JUBWaINSeaLY 5 2 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input The combinations of the actual voltage and current ranges and the power range are listed below according to the table on the previous page when the voltage or current range of each element is set to the same range The table shows the active power range unit W The same ranges are set for apparent power unit VA and reactive power unit var Just replace the unit with VA or var when looking at the tables e When the crest factor i
141. meanings of the measurement function symbols that are displayed see section 1 2 Measurement Functions and Measurement Periods 1 5 Computation and appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions e For details on the wiring units expressed as XA B C see section 5 1 Selecting the Wiring System Example 20 harmonic voltage of element 2 U2 20 __poth order Element 2 Voltage Average of the 30 harmonic current of the elements combined by wiring unit B I B 30 L 30th order X function of wiring unit 2B Current Selecting the Display Format Select the display format of the numerical data from the following list of choices no data is displayed in places where the measurement function is not selected or where no numerical data is present e Numeric Only the numerical data is displayed e Numeric Wave The numerical data and waveform are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on setting the waveform display see section 4 2 and chapter 9 e Numeric Bar The numerical data and bar graph are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on setting the bar graph display see section 4 3 and section 7 9 e Numeric Trend The numerical data and trend are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on setting the trend display see section 4 5 and chapter 10 Selecting the Number of Displayed Items or List Display S
142. measurement functions of delta computation the meanings of the elements described in the next section are different from when other measurement functions are selected For details see the explanation in section 6 1 Selecting the Element Wiring Unit You can select the element wiring unit from the following list of choices The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements Elementi Element2 Element3 Element4 Element5 Element6 XA B and C IM 760101 01E 15 5 al suonoun4 19440 pue indino v a 15 1 Setting the D A Output Option If there are no elements that are assigned to the selected wiring unit there is no numerical data Thus O V is output in this case For example if elements are assigned to XA and XB and no elements are assigned to XC then the measurement function for ZC output 0 V D A Output Items during Harmonic Measurement Selecting the Measurement Function The types of measurement functions that can be selected are indicated in Measurement Function Types for Harmonic Measurement in section 1 2 and User Defined Functions in section 1 5 You can also select not to output the measurement functions None For channels that are set to None 0 V is output since no corresponding data exists The DA output is fixed at 0 for channels on which Z Rs Xs Rp Xp Utif Itif F1 F2 F3 or F4 were selected as the measurement function Selecting the Element Wiring Unit You can select the
143. menu during operation press ESC ree re Ges oe FILTER pi TEGRATOR mmm oa START STOP INTEG SET RESET q Check that the measurement mode is set to normal measurement If the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement set Mode to OFF in the Harmonics menu see section 7 1 1 Press MEASURE to display the Measure menu 2 Press the Phase soft key to display the Phase menu 3 Press either the 180 Lead Lag or 360 degrees soft key to select the display format of the phase difference D NJUUUUUUE Freq Iten Freq Item User Def ined Def ined 4 Measure 4 Measure S Formula S Formula Urms Irms Urns Irns 4 Pc Formula Pc Formula K Phase 180 Lead Lag Sync Measure Slave 6 18 IM 760101 01E 6 7 Selecting the Display Format of the Phase Difference Explanation Select the display format of the phase difference of the voltage and current from the following list of choices This is valid during the normal measurement mode 180 Lead Lag With the positive vertical axis set to zero degrees this format displays using 180 notation with a lead D indicated by the counter clock wise direction and a lag G by the clockwise direction 360 degrees With t
144. multiple files the files after the error occurrence are not deleted IM 760101 01E 12 31 eea y Bulpeo7 pue Burnes D 12 11 Copying Files Procedure 2 ii Cd sma wae RR vue Prone cor ES SINGLE STORE SET MENU o TRIG D o REMOTE a C oen wee CURSOR MAX HOLD gt NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC SET es j MOTOR SET a me feom miN TEGRATOR mm GAR sr srr oreo INTEG SET RESET 1 Press FILE to display the File menu 2 Press the Utility soft key The Utility menu and the File List dialog box appear 3 Press the Function soft key to display the Function menu 4 Press the Copy soft key to display the Copy menu i Delete ESC Function ESC File Item Function Delete Setup Delete Set Reset Copy All Set Renane EE JOOO008 Property MakeDir Filter Format Attribute Delete Exec ten All Attribute Utility Delete Exec BUUUUUL JUUUUOU EL E Selecting the copy destination medium and directory 5 Same as the procedures given in Selecting the Save Destination Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 12 6 Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box 6 Same as the procedure given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box in section 12 9 Viewing the Prope
145. must confirm the new settings If you do not abort the operation the new settings will not take effect Note The date and time information is backed up with the lithium battery when the power is turned OFF e The instrument contains leap year information The instrument determines the leap year calendar when the new settings are confirmed If you enter 2 29 on a non leap year an error message will be displayed IM 760101 01E 3 23 sjuswainseayy Buers 310499 el 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Entering Values After selecting the setup parameter with the SELECT key and soft keys the value can be changed using the jog shuttle The outer shuttle ring can be used step through the values in large increments On some parameters the arrow keys below the jog shuttle can be used to move among the digits ESG L_Integ Set 4 Mode Element Ob ject Normal Element 1 Timer Setting H gJ alj oaaao f oo i Sensor Ratio mU Ay Tiner Setting Independent Control OFF oN M Current Mode E Ct Ratio RMS 1 0000 fe scaling Factor 1 0000 Scaling Copy Exec 4 DA Output Rated Time JUUUUOUE JUUUUULUS Note Some of the parameters that can be changed using the jog shuttle are reset to their initial values when the RESET key is pressed Entering Strings The date time the equation for the user
146. name 13 9 13 10 Le integration MOE 1 0 cece eeeee eee eeeeeetteeeeeeeeeeeeeee a E tr acesesnacie SE ooae Pateorm antec ters 10 43 NULL sesseecennnsseeennnnnssecennnnsssceeennnssseeennnnasseennnnnnsseeeetty Lower Seale n 10 13 NULL function E E AE T eatany S 1 34 LPR client fUNCtION ecsessessesssssssssssssvsssssessssesesseeseseeeeeee 1 33 Ra Sioa SER pe Se eh EPR Name ete Astana ee Ae Numeric PiSp NEMIS erssriss etiri reelad sae oe LPR Server Numeric Wave soo eeesneeeesnnaeesaneeeesneeeesneneeesnnneesanaeesanaais 11 6 LPR Time Out numerical data display order Of eee eeeeeeeeee App 12 numerical data list printing Of cere eee 14 10 numerical data saving of 12 17 M numerical display harmonic measurement ee 1 15 ee oS numerical display normal measurement eeeeee 1 14 address hei can eich A eine eae mail address 0 eee cece eeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeaeeteeetnaeennees 13 16 mail server 13 16 13 17 O Mall S t Psaniisi nere eiiie riiai avanen redire tiiir 13 15 3 maltesi 13 47 ODJOCE BEET EEA A EE A AE A O AOA 7 7 mail transmission OF eee ceeceeeseeeeeeeeeesssseeeeeeeeeees 13 15 ong year accuracy ITEN nas MailBaseTime fh oh ca csssoh esata Mire rctehe lan ct 13 16 ONG 1O ONO COrNNACHON a aartine permeate 191 Miahial operating altitude videos ELE NAET E EENE E EET 17 19 manual SCAMING ccscccaceccsstcecseccscesaceesdocesstsseiserbennsderseessetenss 10 13 ee e
147. not all steps need to be taken This section describes the setup parameters and the limitations regarding the procedures It does not give a detailed explanation of the function For details on the function see chapter 1 IM 760101 01E Contents Checking the Contents of the Package e cecceeseeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseaeesaeeseaeeseeseaeesneeeseeeeeeteaes ii Safety PreCcautions s inson aea e tec ye aan scaled a T a a e tisk deste E E aaae vi How to Use This Manual ieie a aa are a aea A ra p mep aa E a iea a Eea aa aarep aia E a i viii Chapter 1 Explanation of Functions 1 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeseeeeeeeteaeeseeeteaten 1 1 1 2 Measurement Function and Measurement Period esssesseeseeereerirerirssrrnerrrerrrnerrresre 1 3 1 3 Measurement Conditions cccceeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeceeeseaeeseeeeeaeeseaeesaeesaeeeaeeseaeeeeeseaeeneeteas 1 9 1a Numeric DISPIAY asresten et etd aie AA ovis Ace era 1 14 1 5 Computation tecisti iirc ei aie elite iets re LA dialed eis 1 18 1 6 Integration Ss ee een ae eto Bede eactantee aah Sin Pet ited et oe 1 20 7 Wavetorim Display a ae a aaraa esac A paaa gest stich eaaa E a aa a ea eae 1 23 1 8 Bar Graphs Vectors and Trend Displays ceecceeeeeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeteaeeeeeseaeesieeeeeeniaes 1 29 1 9 Saving and Loading Data and Other Functions 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaees 1 32 C
148. number of displayed items is set to 4 2 8 4 or 16 8 proceed to step 2 If Item Amount number of displayed items is set to Single List or Dual List proceed to step 13 For details on setting the number of displayed items see section 4 1 napa ESC K 4 Format Numer ic A Item Amount 4 2 f Harnm Iten No 1 Numer ic Disp Itens Page Up Scroll Exec Page Down Scroll Exec il 7 2 IM 760101 01E 7 2 Changing the Displayed Item of Numerical Data ESG Format K Numeric Harm Item No 1 K Nuner ic Disp Items Page Up Scroll Exec Page Down Scroll Exec JUUOUUU The following procedures are given for a representative example in which the display format is set to Numeric When Item Amount Number of Displayed Items Is Set to 4 2 8 4 or 16 8 Numeric Itens Harn Item No M Function K Element Element 1 Reset List Exec 2 Dw 10 Press the Numeric Disp Items soft key to display the Numeric Items menu Selecting the Item to Be Changed Press the Harm Item No soft key Turn the jog shuttle to select the item to be changed The item to be changed is highlighted Changing the measurement function Press the Function soft key to display the measurement function selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select any of the measurement function starting with None Press SELECT The symbo
149. number of displayed items is set to XList the symbol of the highlighted measurement function is displayed in the Function box in the Display menu and the order in the Order box If the Function box is selected with the soft key the measurement functions are scrolled If the Order box is selected the order is scrolled The corresponding numerical data is displayed When set to 4 2 to 16 8 When set to Single List When set to xList g Display ormat Numeric Item Amount 4 2 Harm Item No Nuner ic Disp Itens or Dual List ESC ESC Display ESC ormat K Format Numeric Numeric Ttem Amount W Item Amount Single List List Function List Items u O order DO Page Up Scroll Exec Page Up Scroll Exec i Page Down Scroll Exec He JUUUUUUE JOUUUUI Page Down Scroll Exec 4 4 IM 760101 01E 4 1 Displaying the Data Numerical Data of Measurement Functions Page Scrolling the Display e When 4 2 through 16 8 is selected in step 6 7 Press the Page Up Scroll Exec or Page Down Scroll Exec soft key to scroll the page If you press the Page Up Scroll Exec soft key the numerical data corresponding to item numbers that are smaller than those of the data numerical data of measurement functions displayed up to that point are displayed Ifyou press the Page Down Scroll Exec soft key the numerica
150. o TA CAL qe NTEGRATOR wm a a START STOP src sad INTEG SET RESET a SINGLE oTRGD o WAVE CURSOR 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 3 Press the Network soft key to display the Network menu K Communication Date Time Conf ig K Selftest Net Drive Setup Net Print Setup Others Connect Log List K Graph Color K Text Color Setting Network K DA Output UP DATE RATE FILE REMOTE cca ac MAX HOLD o STORE COPY STORE SET MENU NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC 13 2 IM 760101 01E 13 2 Setting the Ethernet Interface TCP IP When Using Only DHCP 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select DHCP Press SELECT to select ON Turn the jog shuttle to select DNS Press SELECT to display the DNS selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select OFF OOM TCP IP Setup DHCP LOFF IP Address 4 Net Mask p55 Gate Way Ca ms When Using Only DNS 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select DHCP 6 Press SELECT to select OFF Entering the IP Address 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select IP Address 8 Press SELECT to display the IP address entry box 9 Turn the jog shuttle to enter the IP address of the WT
151. of range Current sensor input 0 009 x f 0 9 of reading 0 3 of range 50 A input element and the current is direct input 0 3 x f 9 5 of reading 0 3 of range 5 A input element and the current is direct input 0 008 x f of reading 1 of range Current sensor input 0 06 x f 4 of reading 1 of range 100 kHz lt f lt 500 kHz 500 kHz lt f lt 1 MHz 5 A input element and the current is direct input 0 048 x f 20 of reading 2 of range The unit of f in the read error equation is kHz Fora5 A input element add 20 u A x voltage reading to the DC accuracy e Fora 50 A input element add 1 mA x voltage reading to the DC accuracy For a current sensor input add 0 05 current sensor transformation ratio A x voltage reading to the DC accuracy 17 8 IM 760101 01E 17 5 Accuracy Item Specification For temperature changes after zero level compensation and range change on a 5 A input element add 10 uA x voltage reading C to the DC accuracy For temperature changes after zero level compensation and range change on a 50 A input element add 1 mA x voltage reading C to the DC accuracy For temperature changes after zero level compensation and range change on a current sensor input add 0 05 current sensor transformation ratio A x voltage reading C to the DC accuracy When the data update rate is 50 ms add 0 1 of range to all
152. of the binary waveform display data Offset from the beginning of the file Always 4096 on the WT1600 4 Maximum number of blocks in the group Maximum number of blocks when the number of blocks varies for each waveform Always 1 on the WT1600 5 Conversion equation of the Y axis of each waveform Y axis value VResolution x raw data VOffset 6 Data type ISn n byte signed integer lUn n byte unsigned integer FSn n byte signed real number FSn n byte unsigned real number Bm m bit data App 16 IM 760101 01E Appendix 5 Power Basics Power Harmonics Three Power Constants Related to the AC Circuit This section describes the basic concepts of power harmonics and the three constants related to the AC circuit Electrical energy is transformed and used in different forms such as heat in an electric heater or an electric furnace rotational power to drive motors and light in fluorescent and mercury lamps Power electric power represents the amount of work that the electricity electrical energy performs on these types of loads over a unit amount of time The unit of power is W watts When 1 joule of work is done over a period of 1 second the electrical power is equal to 1 W DC power DC power P W can be determined by the product of the applied voltage U V and the current I A P Ul W In the following figure electrical energy indicated in the above equation is taken from the power source and dissipated at R Q load
153. on the number of input elements that are installed You may be able to select only a single type of wiring system or two or three types of wiring systems Measurement range See section 17 1 Scaling Set the current sensor transformation ratio PT ratio CT ratio and power factor in the range of 0 0001 to 99999 9999 when inputting the external current sensor PT or CT output to the instrument Input filter Specify a line filter or a zero crossing filter See section 17 1 Averaging During normal measurement Select exponential average or moving average Exponential average Select the attenuation constant from 2 4 8 16 32 and 64 e Moving average Select the average count from 8 16 32 64 128 and 256 During harmonic measurement Exponential average only FFT data length Fundamental frequency of the PLL source Attenuation constant 8192 55 Hz lt f lt 75 Hz 5 625 Outside the above range 4 6875 4096 55 Hz lt f lt 75 Hz 11 25 Outside the above range 9 375 2048 55 Hz lt f lt 75 Hz 22 5 Outside the above range 18 75 Data update rate Select from 50 ms 100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s and5s However the data update rate is slower than the specified value when the waveform data acquisition is ON or depending on the acquisition conditions of the waveform data The display update rate is 200 ms when the data update rate is 50 ms 100 ms and 200 ms Response time Data upd
154. or 6 9 to an integer multiple of the store interval the integrated values at integration start and integration stop that are repeated according to the time setting of the integration timer can be stored 11 2 IM 760101 01E 11 2 Setting the Store Count the Store Interval and the Store Reservation Time o a DISPLAY HOLD ve FILE copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o REMOTE Fo WAVE Hanmoncs Loca misc CURSOR TOMAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC e NTEGRATOR mw g a START STOP INTEG SET RESET H Procedure 1 Press SHIFT STORE STORE SET to display the Store Set dialog box 2 Press the Mode soft key to select Store 3 Press the Store Setting soft key to display the Store Setting dialog box Setting the Store Count 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the store count Setting the Store Interval 4 Press the Interval Setting soft key to display the Interval Setting dialog box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select one of the hour minute and second boxes 6 Press SELECT A box used to set the time appears 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set the hour minute or second that you selected in step 5 For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Press SELECT or ESC to close the box Repeat steps 5 to 8 to set hour minute and second w
155. range Twice these values for the input signal level when the crest factor is set to 6 Frequency measurement filter Zero crossing filter see section 17 1 Integration Item Specification Mode Select from manual normal repetitive real time normal and real time repetitive Measurement function See section 17 3 Individual element integration All element simultaneous or individual element integration is possible However the individual element integration can be executed only through communication commands Integration timer Automatic stop of integration by setting a timer 0000h00m00s to 10000h00m00s Count overflow When the integration time reaches its maximum 10000 hours or the integration value reaches its maximum or minimum 4999999 MWh or 999999 MAh the integration is stopped and the integration time and integration value at that point are held Accuracy Power accuracy or current accuracy 0 05 of reading Timer accuracy 0 02 Integration cannot be executed when waveform data acquisition is ON or during harmonic measurement IM 760101 01E 17 11 h Ey suoneoyioeds 17 6 Functions Harmonic Measurement Item Specification Measured item Select a single wiring unit Method PLL synchronization method or external sampling clock method Frequency range PLL synchronization method Fundamental frequency of the P
156. saved on products with firmware version having incompatible data cannot be loaded IM 760101 01E 12 19 eea y Bulpeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 7 Saving Screen Image Data a SINGLE aTRIGD o REMOTE WAVE LOCAL MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC lt NP o RANGE scaunel WIRING MOTOR SET j CAL o FILTER qe NTEGRATOR wm a a were e720 lence START INTEG SET RESET Procedure 1 Press SHIFT COPY MENU to display the Copy menu 2 Press the Copy to soft key to display the Copy to menu 3 Press the File soft key Q JUUUUUGE Selecting the Save Destination Medium and Directory 4 Press the File List soft key to display the File List dialog box 5 Same as the procedures given in Selecting the Save Destination Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 12 6 6 Press ESC to close the File List dialog box File List Path FDO Space 1379840 byte File Name Size Date Attribute rs F 1l SC4 00 SC4 01 INDO 1 000 TIF 38574 2001 08 24 17 54 RU 001 TIF 38574 2001 08 24 17 55 RW 12 20 IM 760101 01E 12 7 Saving Screen Image Data Selecting the Data Format 7 Press the Format soft key to display the Format menu 8 Press one of the soft keys from TIFF to Post Script to sel
157. selected harmonic orders Element and wiring system Or 1 Elementi Element2 Element3 U V l 94 84 0 0000k 0 0000k F I A 1 0 0001k 0 0001 0 002 P IW J3 0 01k 0 0000k 0 000k p S UA 1 0 01k 0 0000k 0 000k o c Q Ivar 0 01k 0 0000k 0 000k A E 1 0 6467 0 8150 6 9000 ke 1 310 29 3 wr el e E Z 1 1 1566k A Caa Rs 2 1 748 00 237 12 Xs 1 882 19 168 62 E Rp 2 1 1 7884k 357 02 a Xp 2 1 1 5164k 502 06 A otf 41 02 1 Ss 401 13 Scrolling the Page ZA 0 0316k 0 6467 Not all the harmonic data can be displayed on one screen When the list display is not set to list you can scroll the page to display the succeeding or preceding data Resetting the Numerical Display If the number of displayed items is set to four eight or 16 the display order of measurement functions can be reset to a default order 1 default set IM 760101 01E suoloun jo uoneuejdxa 1 5 Computation By using the data of measurement functions the following types of computation can be performed In addition a function is provided in which the equation used to determine the measurement function data can be selected User Defined Functions For procedures see sections 6 4 and 7 8 Equations can be created defined by combining the measurement function symbols and operators The numerical data corresponding to the equation can then be determined The
158. set to Numeric is transmitted Note e When using the SMTP client function set the TCP IP parameters according to section 13 2 Setting the Ethernet Interface TCP IP The sender From address of the e mail messages sent by the WT1600 is the same as the specified recipient address When the transmission interval is set to OFF mail messages cannot be transmitted 13 18 IM 760101 01E 13 6 Accessing the WT1600 from a PC or Workstation FTP Server Function o a psa HOLD ve FILE STORE cory SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o REMOTE WAVE HARMONICS CURSOR To exit the menu during operation press ESC n PUT a RANGE scaune WIRING a og 3 D a ql z 9 FILTER CAL SP NTEGRATOR mm g START STOP INTEGSET RESET H Procedure 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 3 Press the Network soft key to display the Network menu Graph Color ESG K Text Color SCSI Setting Network K DA Output Itens UU Net Print Setup IM 760101 01E 13 19 uondo suonesiunwwos 3u194 3 g 13 6 Accessing the WT1600 from a PC or Workstation FTP Server Function Setting the User Name 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select User Nam
159. srr oreo 1 Press HARMONICS to display the Harmonics menu 2 Press the Mode soft key to select ON 3 Press the Window Width soft key to display the Window Width menu 4 Press one of the 8192 to 2048 soft keys to select the window width to be analyzed Harmonics ESC Mode OFF px a Object zA Ej PLL Source Up Exec PLL Source Down Exec Min Order o a W Max Order 100 Min Order an J Ww Max Order 160 4 Thd Formula Thd Formula 1 Total 1 Total M Window Width Window Width 8192 OL 8192 Explanation You can select the target data length number of sampled data for the harmonic measurement from the following list of choices The selected data length becomes the measurement period When the waveform is displayed the measurement period corresponds to one screen of the waveform 8192 4096 and 2048 Note The data update rate interval during harmonic measurement is as follows e When all the following conditions are met a data length of 8192 retrieval of waveform display data turned OFF and a PLL source frequency of 50 60 Hz 8192 sampling frequency during harmonic measurement s For all other conditions data length sampling frequency during harmonic measurement approx 0 5 s 7 14 IM 760101 01E 7 8 Setting the User Defined Function o a ose HOLD cad FILE srone COPY SINGL
160. system to match the circuit under measurement that is actually wired The method in which the function is determined varies depending on the wiring system If the selected wiring system does not match the actual circuit measurements and computation will not be correct For the relationship concerning the wiring system and the determination of the function see appendix 1 IM 760101 01E 5 2 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input For a functional description see section 1 3 o DISPLAY HOLD UP DATE RATE FILE STORE COPY TRIG D SINGLE a WAVE HARMONICS CURSOR STORE SET REMOTE LOCAL MISC MAX HOLD 3 NULL MENU SHIFT Q To exit the menu during operation press ESC RANGE AVG WIRING i Hao 1g ol i FILTER g qm NTEGRATOR mm z START STOP INTEG SET RESET Procedure 1 Press RANGE to display the Range menu Selecting the Target Element 2 Press the Element Object soft key to display the Element menu Only the installed elements are displayed Press one of the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element to select the target element The selected element is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen if you selected element 1 U1 and l1 are displayed
161. that is determined according to the following principle Display Position of the Target Element and Synchronization Source Displayed at the upper right corner of the screen when SYNC SRC is pressed Target element Synchronization source example in which the voltage of Element2 is specified Sync Srei z YOKOGAWA Elenent Object Element 1 I Ttem M Selecting the Target Element to Be Specified Only the installed elements are displayed The Element menu is displayed according to the element configuration of the product Setting the Synchronization Source You can select which input signal will be the synchronization source synchronized to the zero crossing point of the input signal for each element Select the signal to be the synchronization source from the following list of choices The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements U1 11 U2 12 U3 13 U4 14 U5 15 U6 16 Ext Clk external clock and None For the specifications of the Ext Clk external clock see the explanation in section 7 4 N te See a Se e If you specify no synchronization source by selecting None the entire sampled data within the data update interval is the data used to determine the numerical data When measuring DC signals this method can be used to prevent errors in the detection of the measurement period caused by noise It is recommended that the synchronization source be set so that the number
162. the characters on the screen SHIFT key means you will press SHIFT to turn ON the indicator that is located above and to the left of SHIFT followed by the operation key The menu written below the pressed key appears on the screen Symbols The following symbols are used in this manual A Improper handling or use can lead to injury to the user or damage to the instrument This symbol appears on the instrument to indicate that the user must refer to the user s manual for special instructions The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the user s manual to identify those instructions In the manual the symbol is used in conjunction with the word WARNING or CAUTION WARNING Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent injury or CAUTION Note death to the user Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent minor or moderate injury or damage to the instrument Provides important information for the proper operation of the instrument Symbols Used on Pages Describing Operating Procedures On pages that describe the operating procedures in Chapter 3 through 16 the following symbols are used to distinguish the procedures from their explanations Explanation Indicates the key related to the operation Follow the steps indicated with numbers The procedures are given with the premise that the user is carrying out the steps for the first time Depending on the operation
163. the displayed element to select the target element 4 5 K g Timezdiy Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Bar or Wave Trend For details on setting the display format see section 4 2 Press WAVE to display the Wave menu Press the V Zoom amp Position soft key to display the V Zoom amp Pos menu Wave Sampling OFF PN 0 5ms Trigger U Zoom amp Position UO V Zoom amp Pos K Elenent Object Element 1 W U U Zoom x1 OW Position 0 0007 O 1 U Zoom x1 O Position 6 000 V Zoom Copy Exec Position Copy Exec il m JUUUUUOR S Q Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 Element 5 Element 6 Position Copy Exec i Element 1 DUO 9 8 IM 760101 01E 9 4 Zooming Vertically and Moving the Vertical Position V Zoom amp Pos K Element Object Element 1 W U U Zoom x1 OW Position 0 000 O 1 UV Zoom x1 OU Position 6 000 Zooming in on the Voltage Waveform 6 Press the U V Zoom soft key 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set the zoom factor Moving the Voltage Waveform Position 6 Press the U Position soft key 7 Ifthe crest factor is set to 3 or 6 turn the jog shuttle to set the position in terms of a percentage with the value equal to measurement range x 3 or measurement range
164. the execution of integration can only be done through communication commands Even if Independent Control is set to ON individual element integration ON the WT1600 operates in the same fashion when Independent Control is OFF individual element integration OFF 6 34 IM 760101 01E 6 11 Performing Integration Start Stop and Reset e Ifthe integration is stopped while the display is held the display and communication output values do not change from the held values When the hold function is released OFF or a single measurement by pressing HOLD SINGLE after pressing SHIFT is made the integration result at the time the integration was stopped is displayed or output via communications ON HOLD HOLD OFF SINGLE ON Single measurement Display value Dotted line is the integration value Integration time 1 t START STOP RESET Sample Rate and the Allowable Frequency Range for Integration The sample rate is approximately 200 kHz The voltage current signal frequencies that can be integrated are as follows Integrated Item Allowable Frequency Range for Integration Active power DC to 100 kHz Current When integrating Irms DC lower limit of frequency determined by the data update rate to 100 kHz When integrating Imn DC lower limit of frequency determined by the data update rate to 100 kHz When integrating Idc DC to 100 kHz When
165. the left to the right end of the screen e When P P is displayed waveform is displayed using P P compression see section 1 7 Selecting the Display Format Select the waveform display format from the following list of choices Wave Only waveforms are displayed Numeric Wave The numerical data and waveform are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on setting the numerical data display see section 4 1 chapters 6 7 and 8 Wave Bar The waveform and bar graph are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows The bar graph is valid during harmonic measurement For details on setting the bar graph display see section 4 3 and section 7 9 Wave Trend The waveform and trend are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on setting the trend display see section 4 5 and chapter 10 IM 760101 01E 4 11 yewo Aejdsig u 19S a 4 3 Displaying Bar Graphs For a functional description see section 1 8 PNS i DISPLAY I HOLD ica FILE STORE COPY ESC SINGLE STORE SET MENU o TRIG D REMOTE pi WAVE Loca MISC CURSOR CMAX HOLD c NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC lt NP o RANGE scaunel WIRING JOUOUL MOTOR SET o o FILTER AVG resur CAL qe NTEGRATOR mm a a sear ee eneen START INTEG SET RESET Procedure Check that the measurement mode is set to h
166. the phase difference and amplitude of U4 1 U5 1 14 1 and 15 1 is displayed as vectors The vectors for U6 1 and I16 1 are computed and displayed IM 760101 01E 1 29 suoljoun jo uoneuejdxa 1 8 Bar Graphs Vectors and Trend Displays Vector display when the wiring system is 3P4W three phase four wire U1 1 U2 1 and U3 1 are common mode voltages 11 1 12 1 and 13 1 are line currents 11 1 Vector display when the wiring system is 3V3A three voltage three current U1 1 U2 1 and U3 1 are line voltages 11 1 12 1 and 13 1 are line currents 1 11 1 By moving the vectors U1 1 U2 1 U3 1 and U3 1 without changing their orientations so that the starting points of vectors are all at the origin the phase relationship can be observed in the same U3 U1 fashion as the three phase four wire system 9U1 U3 The WT1600 does not provide a function for moving the vectors The phase difference between the line voltages can be determined from the phase difference measurement functions oU1 U2 and oU1 U3 B4 12 1 U1 U2 This is the measurement function oU1 U2 1 U2 U3 9U1 U3 pU 1 U2 180 oU3 U1 U1 U3 Vector display when the wiring system is 3P3W three phase three wire U1 1 U2 1 and U3 1 are line voltages 11 1 12 1 and 13 1 are line currents However U3 1 and 13 1 are not actually measured for the three phase three wire system
167. time For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings e Confirming the New Settings 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select Set 9 Press SELECT If ON was selected in step 4 the new date and time are displayed in the lower right corner of the screen If the procedure is aborted without pressing SELECT the new settings are not reflected on the display Information Initialize Settings Communication Setting the date 01707701 Date Tine Conmunication Display Date e1707701 i Date Tine Tine 14 59 60 Date Time conf ig Conf ig Selftest Selftest 2001707701 16 05 0 3 22 IM 760101 01E 3 11 Setting the Date and Time Explanation e Turning ON OFF the Date Time display You can select whether or not to display the date and time in the lower right corner of the screen e OFF Do not display the date and time e ON Display the date and time e Setting the Date and Time e Setting the date You can set the date in the form YY MM DD year month day Set the lower two digits of the year Set 00 to 99 for years 2000 to 2099 e Setting the time You can set the time in the form HH MM SS hour minute second The hour is set using a 24 hour clock e Confirming the New Settings When the date time is turned ON OFF it is immediately reflected on the screen However if you are changing the date and time you
168. to enable auto range The range changes automatically depending on the amplitude of the input signal The switching conditions and precautions are the same as the descriptions given in section 5 2 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input The different ranges used in the auto mode are the same as those available for fixed range Pulse Input Range e When the type of revolution signal is Pulse set the value of the rotating speed rated value of the rotating speed that will cause a D A output see section 15 1 of 5 V e Set the pulse count in the range from 0 0001 to 99999 9999 e When the type of revolution signal is Pulse the lower limit of the waveform display is fixed to 0 and the upper limit is the value equal to 1 2 times the rated value specified here Selecting the Synchronization Source e Select which element s input signal will be used as a synchronization source synchronized to the zero crossing point of the selected signal when measuring the analog signal of the revolution signal and torque signal Select the signal to be the synchronization source from the following list of choices The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements U1 11 U2 12 U3 13 U4 14 U5 15 U6 16 Ext Clk external clock and None For the specifications of the Ext Clk external clock see the explanation in section 7 4 The measurement period determined by the synchronization source selected here is used to
169. trend display data must be turned ON to display trends For the procedure see section 10 1 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Trend Numeric Trend Wave Trend or Bar Trend For details on setting the display format see section 4 5 2 Press SHIFT WAVE CURSOR to display the Cursor menu Turning ON OFF Cursor Measurement 3 Press the Trend Cursor soft key to select ON or OFF If ON is selected the result of the cursor measurement is displayed Format Trend a L Trend Setting 10 14 IM 760101 01E 10 7 Performing Cursor Measurements Selecting the Target Trend for Cursor Measurement e Selecting the target trend for cursor 4 5 6 e 4 5 6 Press the TrendC1 Trace soft key to display the target trend selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select T1 to T16 Press SELECT to confirm the new target trend Selecting the target trend for cursor x Press the TrendC2 Trace soft key to display the target trend selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select T1 to T16 Press SELECT to confirm the new target trend Moving the Cursor Press the Trend C1 Trend C2 x soft key to set the jog shuttle target to Trend 7 C1 Trend C2 x or both Trend C1 and Trend C2 x If you select Trend C1 the position of cursor can be moved e If you select Trend C2 x the position of cursor x can b
170. voltage Ithf Telephone harmonic factor of current factor Applicable standard IEC34 1 1996 Telephone influence Utif Telephone influence factor of voltage Itif Telephone influence factor of current factor Applicable standard IEC34 1 1996 Harmonic voltage factor hvf harmonic voltage factor Applicable standard IEC34 1 1996 Harmonic current factor hef harmonic current factor Determined in the same way as hvf Frequency Hz fU FreqU voltage frequency fl Freql current frequency The frequency of up to three signals including the signal selected for the PLL source can be measured as fU or fl You can also select to measure only three sets of voltage frequencies or only three sets of current frequencies The display of signals that are not selected shows no data 1 kis an integer in the range from 0 to the upper limit of harmonic order under analysis O order is the DC component The upper limit is determined automatically maximum is 100 by the frequency of the PLL source 2 Total is a value determined according to the equation given in appendix 1 from the fundamental signal 15t order and all harmonic components 2nd to the upper limit The DC component can also be included 3 Total harmonic is a value determined according to the equation given in appendix 1 from all harmonic components 2 to the upper limit 4 Measurement functions specific to the IEC or IEEE
171. w Setting the Voltage Range 4 Press the U Range Up Exec or U Range Down Exec soft key to set the voltage range The specified range is displayed by the element displayed at the upper right corner of the screen Pressing the U Range Up Exec soft key increases the voltage range If you press the U Range Up Exec soft key when the range is at maximum auto range is enabled e Pressing the U Range Down Exec soft key decreases the voltage range Q o Q Range E Element Object Element 1 W Range C Element Object Element 1 z Element 1 U Range Up Exec Element 2 U Range Up Exec U Range Down Exec Element 3 U Range Doun Exec il OOOUC0GE oid Terminal Terminal Element 4 irect Sen irect Sen I Range Up Exec Element 5 I Range Up Exec I Range Doun Exec Element 6 I Range Down Exec Range Copy Exec Range Copy Exec Range Copy Exec CI0g00p UUUUGELUE GG GG l 5 4 IM 760101 01E 5 2 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input Setting the Current Range e Selecting the current input terminal Press the Terminal soft key to select Direct a Setting the current range Press the I Range Up Exec or Range Down Exec soft key to set the current range The specified range is displayed by the element displayed at the upper right corner of the screen Pressing the Range
172. whichever is less Current Input 5 A input element Peak value of 30 A or RMS value of 15 A whichever is less 50 A input element Peak value of 450 A or RMS value of 300 A whichever is less Continuous Maximum Allowable Input Voltage Input Peak value of 1500 V or RMS value of 1000 V whichever is less Current Input 5 A input element Peak value of 10 A or RMS value of 7 A whichever is less 50 A input element Peak value of 150 A or RMS value of 50 A whichever is less CAUTION Use measurement cables that have adequate margins of withstand voltage and current capacity with respect to the voltage or current being measured It should also have proper ratings that are suited to the measurement Example When making measurements on a current of 20 A use copper wires that have a conductive cross sectional area of 4 mm When the measurement cable is connected it may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Note After wiring the wiring system must be selected See section 5 1 Selecting the Wiring System When measuring large currents or voltages or currents that contain high frequency components take special care in dealing with mutual interference and noise when wiring Keep the measurement cables as short as possible to minimize the loss between the circuit under measurement and the instrument The thick lines on the wiring diagrams shown
173. x 6 respectively taken to be 100 For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Zooming in on the Current Waveform 6 Press the I V Zoom soft key 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set the zoom factor Moving the Current Waveform Position 6 Press the I Position soft key 7 Ifthe crest factor is set to 3 or 6 turn the jog shuttle to set the position in terms of a percentage with the value equal to measurement range x 3 or measurement range x 6 respectively taken to be 100 For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Copying the Zoom Factor and Position The zoom factor and position specified for a given element can be set to the elements of the same wiring unit The zoom factor and position for other elements that were specified before are not held 6 Press one of the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element from which the information is to be copied the copy source 7 To copy the zoom factor press the V Zoom Copy Exec soft key To copy the position press the Position Copy Exec soft key The zoom factor and position of the voltage and current waveforms of the copy source are copied to the elements of the same wiring unit However if the wiring system is pattern 1 the settings are copied to all other elements n ESC U Zoon amp Pos ESC U Zo
174. 00 belongs 20 Turn the jog shuttle to select Domain Name 21 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 22 Use the keyboard to enter the domain name of the network to which the WT1600 belongs For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Entering the Address of the Primary DNS Server 23 Turn the jog shuttle to select DNS Server 24 Enter all four octets of the primary DNS server address in the same fashion as the IP address Entering the Address of the Secondary DNS Server Enter the information if the system or network to which the WT1600 belongs uses a secondary DNS server If a secondary server is not used proceed to Entering the Primary Domain Suffix 25 Turn the jog shuttle to select DNS Server2 26 Enter all four octets of the secondary DNS server address in the same fashion as the IP address Entering the Primary Domain Suffix Enter the information if a domain suffix is required 27 Turn the jog shuttle to select Domain Suffix1 28 Enter the primary domain suffix in the same fashion as the IP address Entering the Secondary Domain Suffix Enter the information if a secondary domain suffix is present 29 Turn the jog shuttle to select Domain Suffix2 30 Enter the secondary domain suffix in the same fashion as the IP address TCP IP Setup pace PrN IP Address Net Mask Gate Way DNS ON Domain Name DNS Serveri DNS Server2
175. 00 kHz 5 Vpeak 1 V peak to peak or more 50 duty ratio rectangular wave Approx 1 MQ 42 Vpeak or less IM 760101 01E uondo uoljenjeaq 1030 e 8 1 Inputting Signals of Rotating Speed and Torque Torque Meter Signal Input Connector TORQUE Input the signal output from the torque meter a DC voltage analog signal that is proportional to the torque of the motor according to the following specifications TORQUE Item Specification Connector type BNC connector Input range 20 V 10 V 5V 2 V and 1 V Effective input range 110 of the measurement range However 20 V or less Input resistance Approx 1 MQ Maximum allowable input 20 V Continuous maximum common mode voltage 42 Vpeak or less 8 2 IM 760101 01E 8 2 Selecting the Input Range of the Revolution and Torque Signals and the Synchronization Source oan OTOR SET a A i rom we fo CAL qm NTEGRATOR mm g a Oooo ran er pe INTEG SET RESET Procedure o o pispLay HoLp V RATE FILE STORE copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o coREMOTE oa WAVE _ HARMONICS N CURSOR TOMAX HOLD O NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC 1 Press SHIFT RANGE MOTOR SET to display the Motor Set dialog box Selecting the Input Range of the Revolution Signal e When Analog is se
176. 000 W 120 000 W 240 00W 400 00 W 600 00 W 1200 00 W 2 4000 kW 4 0000 kw 5 0000 15 000 W 30 000W 60 000 W 100 000 W 150 00W 300 00W 600 00 W 1000 00 W 1500 0 W 3 0000 kW 6 0000 kW 10 0000 kw 10 000 30 000W 60 000 W 120 000W 200 00W 300 00W 600 00 W 1200 00 W 2 0000 kW 3 0000 kW 6 0000 kW 12 0000 kW 20 000 kW 20 000 60 000 W 120 000 W 240 00 W 400 00 W 600 00 W 1200 00 W 2 4000 kW 4 0000 kW 6 0000 kW 12 0000 kW 24 000 kW 40 000 kw 50 000 150 00W 300 00W 600 00 W 1000 00 W 1500 0 W 3 0000 kW 6 0000 kW 10 0000 kW 15 000 kW 30 000 kW 60 000 kW 100 000 kw Effective Power Range of the Wiring Unit of Wiring System 3P4W Current Voltage Range V Range A 1 5000 3 0000 6 0000 10 000 15 000 30 000 60 000 100 00 150 00 300 00 600 00 1000 0 45 000 mW 90 000 mW 180 000 mW 300 00 mW 450 00 mW 900 00 mW 1800 00 mW 3 0000W 4 5000W 9 0000 Wj 18 0000 W 30 000 W 90 000 mW 180 000 mW 360 00 mW 600 00 mW 900 00 mWj1800 00 mw 3 6000W 6 0000 W 9 0000 W 36 000 W 60 000 W 225 00 mW 450 00 mW 900 00 mW 1500 00 mW 2250 0 mw 4 5000 W 9 0000 W 15 0000 W 22 500 W 90 000 WI 150 000 W 450 00 mW 900 00 mW 1800 00 mW 3 0000 W 4 5000 W 9 0000 W 18 0000 W 30 000 W 45 000 W 180 000 W 300 00 W 900 00 mW 1800 00 mW 3 6000 W 6 0000 Ww 9 0000 W 18 0000 W 36 000 W 60 000W 90 000 W 180 000 W 360 00 W 600 00 W 2250 0 mW 4 5
177. 000W 120 00W 200 00W 300 00W 600 00 W 1 2000 kW 2 0000 kW 3 0000 kW 6 0000 kW 12 000 kW 20 000 kw 50 000 75 00W 150 00W 300 00W 500 00W 750 0W 1 5000 kW 3 0000 kW 5 0000kW 7 500 kW 15 000 kW 30 000 kW 50 000 kw Effective Power Range of the Wiring Unit of Wiring System 1P3W 3P3W and 3V3A Current Voltage Range V Range A 1 5000 3 0000 6 0000 10 000 15 000 30 000 60 000 100 00 150 00 300 00 600 00 1000 0 10 000m 30 000 mW 60 000 mW 120 000 mW 200 00 mW 300 00 mW 600 00 mw 1200 00 mW 2 0000 Wy 3 0000W 6 0000 W 12 0000 W 20 000 W 20 000m 60 000 mW 120 000 mW 240 00 mW 400 00 mW 600 00 mW 1200 00 mW 2 4000W 4 0000W 6 0000W 12 0000W 24 000 W 40 000 W 50 000m 150 00 mW 300 00 mW 600 00 mW 1000 00 mW 1500 0 mW 3 0000W 6 0000 W 10 0000W 15 000W 30 000W 60 000 W 100 000 W 100 00m 300 00 mW 600 00 mW 1200 00 mW 2 0000 w 3 0000 Ww 6 0000 w 12 0000W 20 000W 30 000W 60 000 W 120 000 W 200 00 W 200 00m 600 00 mW 1200 00 mW 2 4000 W 4 0000 Ww 6 0000 W 12 0000 W 24 000W 40 000 Ww 60 000 W 120 000 W 240 00W 400 00 W 500 00m 1500 0 mW 3 0000W 6 0000 W 10 0000 W 15 000W 30 000W 60 000 W 100 000W 150 00W 300 00W 600 00 W 1000 00 W 1 0000 3 0000W 6 0000 W 12 0000 W 20 000W 30 000W 60 000 W 120 000W 200 00W 300 00W 600 00 W 1200 00 W 2 0000 kw 2 0000 6 0000 W 12 0000W 24 000W 40 000W 60
178. 000W 9 0000 W 15 0000 W 22 500W 45 000 W 90 000 W 150 000 W 225 00 W 450 00 W 900 00 W 1500 00 W 4 5000 W 9 0000 W 18 0000 WwW 30 000 W 45 000 W 90 000 Wf 180 000 W 300 00 Ww 450 00 Ww 900 00 W 1800 00 W 3 0000 kW 9 0000 W 18 0000 W 36 000 W 60 000 Ww 90 000 w 180 000 w 360 00 W 600 00 W 900 00 W 1800 00 W 3 6000 kW 6 0000 kw 22 500 W 45 000 W 90 000 W 150 000 W 225 00 W 450 00 W 900 00 W 1500 00 W 2250 0 W 4 5000 kW 9 0000 kW 15 0000 kw 45 000 W 90 000 W 180 000 W 300 00 W 450 00 W 900 00 W 1800 00 W 3 0000 kW 4 5000 kW 9 0000 kW 18 0000 kW 30 000 kw 90 000 W 180 000 W 360 00 W 600 00 W 900 00 W 1800 00 W 3 6000 kW 6 0000 kW 9 0000 kW 18 0000 kW 36 000 kW 60 000 kw 50 000 225 00 W 450 00 W 900 00 W 1500 00 W 2250 0 W 4 5000 kW 9 0000 kW 15 0000 kW 22 500 kW 45 000 kW 90 000 kW 150 000 kw 5 8 IM 760101 01E 5 2 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input Effective Power Range of the Wiring Unit of Wiring System 1P2W or Each Element e When the crest factor is set to 6 Current Voltage Range V RAT 750m 1 5000 3 0000 5 0000 7 5000 15 000 30 000 50 000 75 000 150 00 300 00 500 00 5 0000m 3 7500 mW 7 500 mW 15 000 mW 25 000 mW 37 500 mW 75 00 mW 150 00 mW 250 00 mW 375 00 mW 750 0mW 1 5000W 2 5000 W 10 000m 7
179. 000k 94 66 0 0000k 0 0000k 5 Irnsfa 1 0 159 0 0031k 0 0000 0 163 Im A J 0 000 0 0000k 0 0000 0 000 Idc A 0 007 0 0000k 0 0003 0 008 Iac A 0 159 0 0031k 0 0000 0 163 P Wl 0 000k 0 00k 0 0000k 0 000k S va 1 0 000k 0 29k 0 0000k 0 000k Q yar 0 000k 0 29k 0 0000k 0 000k A E 1 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 y 1 14 IM 760101 01E 1 4 Numeric Display a Changing the Displayed Items x By selecting a displayed item the numerical data value that is displayed at the Fy position can be changed a o makii chal hd Change the measurement rie ip a Unni 5 0516 V ae Unni 5 0516 V m Udc1 0 0315 YU _function of the third item Ummi 5 0516 V 5 Uaci 5 0516 V Uaci 5 0516 V Irmsi 5 6530 A Irmsi 5 0530 A 3 Inni 5 9551 A Imi 5 0551 A Urns1 5 9517 V Change the element Unni 5 0516 V of the third item Udc2 9 0307 VU Uaci 5 0516 V Irmsi 5 0530 A Inni 5 9551 A Scrolling the Page Not all the data can be displayed on one screen Thus you can scroll the page to display the succeeding or preceding data Resetting the Numerical Display If the number of displayed items is set to a value other than All the display order of measurement functions can be reset to the default order 1 default set Numerical Display during Harmonic Measurement For procedures see sections 4 1 and 7 2 Selecting the Number of Displayed Items You can select four eight or 16 for the number of displayed items When the numerical data
180. 01E 11 5 e eq Pal10 s ay urnes pue geq Huljjeooy pue Bunos z 11 3 Setting the Numerical Data and Waveform Display Data to Be Stored a o DISPLAY HOLD ica FILE copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o REMOTE Fo WAVE Hanwones Locat misc CURSOR TOMAX HOLD O NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC CAL am NTEGRATOR mmm z START STOP Ri INTEG SET RESET Procedure 1 Press SHIFT STORE STORE SET to display the Store Set dialog box 2 Press the Mode soft key to select Store 3 Press the Store Setting soft key to display the Store Setting dialog box Selecting the Stored Item 4 Press the Store Item soft key to display the Store Item dialog box 5 Press one of the soft keys from Numeric to Numeric Wave to select the stored item If you select Numeric the stored item is the numerical data If you select Wave the stored item is the waveform display data If you select Numeric Wave the stored item is both the numerical data and the waveform display data ESC Store Set Mode Recall Store Setting 4 Mode Mode Recall Manual a Store Setting Store Setting Interval Setting L Convert Memory Convert Memory Initialize Memory Exec Store Item Numer ic List Item OUBUUUUE
181. 01E 11 9 e eq Pal10 S ay urnes pue geq Huljjeooy pue Bunos z 11 4 Storing the Data a oO SINGLE STORE SE MENU ESC o TRIG D o REMOTE a CURSOR MAX HOLD o NULL SHIFT KY To exit the menu during operation press ESC RANGE MOTOR SET UUUUUU Y cannel WIRING o FILTER T Haul AVG CAL qe NTEGRATOR mm a a STOP INTEGSET RESET Y 3 J 3 Procedure Initializing Clearing the Internal Memory 1 Press SHIFT STORE STORE SET to display the Store Set dialog box Press the Mode soft key to select Store Press the Store to soft key to select Memory Press the Initialize Memory Exec soft key to display the Alert dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select OK or Cancel If you select OK and press SELECT the data in the internal memory is cleared If you select Cancel and press SELECT the clearing of the data in the internal memory is aborted DRN ESC Store Set Mode Recall Store Set Mode Reca11 Store to File Store Setting Store Setting g Store memory will be initialized Store Setting OK Cancel K Convert Memory Initialize Memory Exec Convert Memory Initialize Memory Exec Convert Memory JUUUUUOS 11 10 IM 760101 01E 11 4 Storing the Data Starting the Store Operation 7 Press STORE The STORE ind
182. 1 Ho Function u g Element Element 1 Start Order 1 End Order 109 piv Update 3421 Trend i Selecting the Display Format Select the bar graph display format from the following list of choices Bar Only bar graphs are displayed Numeric Bar The numerical data and bar graph are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on setting the numerical data display see section 4 1 chapters 6 7 and 8 Wave Bar The waveform and bar graph are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on setting the waveform display see section 4 2 and chapter 9 Bar Trend The bar graph and trend are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on setting the trend display see section 4 5 and chapter 10 IM 760101 01E 4 13 yewo Aejdsig uae19S 4 4 Displaying Vectors For a functional description see section 1 8 PNS i DISPLAY I HOLD ica FILE STORE COPY ESC f SINGLE STORE SET MENU aTRIGD o REMOTE a WAVE LOCAL MISC O CURSOR CMAX HOLD O NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC lt NP o RANGE scaunel WIRING JOUOUL MOTOR SET o o FILTER AVG resur CAL qe NTEGRATOR mm a a START STOP smc sad INTEG SET RESET Procedure Check that the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement If the measurement mode is set to normal measurement set Mode t
183. 1 Repeat steps 7 to 10 to set the year month date hour minute and second 12 Turn the jog shuttle to select one of the reservation year month date hour minute and second boxes for specifying when the store operation will end Store End 13 Repeat steps 8 to 11 to set the year month date hour minute and second Manual Real Time Store Setting ESC Store Setting ESC Real Time a Count BL 100 q Interval Setting Integ Sync Interval Setting Real Time Control Real Time Control Store Start Store End Store Item W Store Item W Store Item Numeric Numeric Numeric 4 List Item M List Item p List Item JOU BUULE 11 4 IM 760101 01E 11 2 Setting the Store Count the Store Interval and the Store Reservation Time Explanation To store data parameters such as the store mode the store count the store interval and the store reservation time must be specified before executing the operation This section explains the store count the store interval and the store reservation time For the procedure on how to set the store mode see section 11 1 for the procedure on how to start the store operation see section 11 4 Setting the Store Count e Set the store count in the range from 1 to 999999 e Ifthe data being stored exceeds the internal memory s
184. 1 repetitive integration mode reservation TIME noori aeiee inead ae aa aaa E 6 28 Reset List EXEC in naiean e eean A iEn Aa ans 6 2 resistance App 23 FOSOIUTION apcris aaie aa 13 13 response time 17 10 Restart Trend Exe 0 c cccecccceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenae 10 18 revolution signal input Connector s es 2 1 8 1 revolution signal input range Of esseen 8 3 revolution signal type selection of RGB video Signal neee RGB video signal VGA output connector eee 2 1 rms value 3 roll papei m e N tects eieassveaes detente S S ELLA E EAn AES TEE SAMPIG Wale enin eane aa aaaeaii iiaia sampling frequency SAVE bi ceaecie Save Exec saved items aeiae areara ne diata ieee ranged scale values i ous ceecssedsdassia evettecedeseses iaesttbectiessres tae scaling Scaling Copy Exec ccecceceecesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees Scaling actor a R aa scaling function operation of screen brightness eee ee eee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeee screen image data saving of SCS E i hes AE E eee SCSI setting secondary SOM 1OSb Ayes eee lie ete sien Sai sonias Sense Type eeeeceeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeaeeateneeeeeeaes Sensor Ratio mV A serial l a Set Reset SOUD annem nan e A at setup parameters listing of setup parameters saving of 1 33 12 30 12 33 S functions during harmonic measuremen
185. 1600 For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 10 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box 11 Enter all four octets of the IP address Entering the Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask according to the system or network to which the WT1600 belongs If the subnet mask is not required proceed to Entering the Default Gateway 12 Turn the jog shuttle to select Net Mask 13 Enter all four octets of the subnet mask of the network to which the WT1600 belongs in the same fashion as the IP address Entering the Default Gateway Enter the default gateway according to the system or network to which the WT1600 belongs If the default gateway is not required proceed to Turning ON the DNS 14 Turn the jog shuttle to select Gate Way 15 Enter all four octets of the default gateway of the network to which the WT1600 belongs in the same fashion as the IP address TCP IP Setup DHCP IP Address 3 1 3 L9 Net Mask cin Gate Way Ca ms IM 760101 01E 13 3 uondo suonesiunwwos 3u194 3 g 13 2 Setting the Ethernet Interface TCP IP Turning ON the DNS 16 Turn the jog shuttle to select DNS 17 Press SELECT to display the DNS selection box 18 Turn the jog shuttle to select ON 19 Press SELECT to confirm the DNS ON setting Entering the Domain Name Enter the domain name of the system or network to which the WT16
186. 1600 is accessed from the PC or workstation login m is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen The FTP server function cannot be used under the following cases When the WT1600 is accessing a PC or workstation on the network FTP client function see section 13 3 e When the WT1600 is outputting to a network printer LPR client function see section 13 3 When the WT1600 is performing file operations see chapter 12 In the root directory of the PC or workstation accessing the WT1600 the floppy disk is displayed as FDO the built in hard disk as SC4_00 SC4_01 SC4_02 SC4_03 SC4_04 the network drive as NDO other drives connected via SCSI as SCn where n is the SCSI ID and so on The logging list is cleared when the power is turned OFF When using the FTP server function set the TCP IP parameters according to section 13 2 Setting the Ethernet Interface TCP IP To apply new settings the WT1600 must be power cycled 13 22 IM 760101 01E 13 7 Checking the Presence of the Ethernet Interface Option and the MAC address BCS eat sa sees asevar HOLD ve FILE STORE copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o cREMOTE a nl a CURSOR MAX HOLM SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC STS os PU a RANGE scana WIRING o a INTEG SET RESET
187. 17 3 Measurement Functions Items during Normal Measurement 17 3 17 4 Measurement Functions Items during Harmonic Measurement eseeeeerteeeees 17 5 17 57 ACCULACY 4 iicts a av Ra ae ee A ed 17 7 1726 FUNCIONS vinnie eae eRe tee tn ea a ences at Maciet fee tee 17 10 17 7 Input Output of the Master Slave Synchronization Signal ccceceeseeseeeteeeeeeee 17 16 1 2 8 External Clock ANpUt seest haeo eaaa a aa a a aaa 17 16 17 9 RGB Video Signal VGA Output ssseesseeseeseesieeieereeieeirettetinsttntinstnttintinntnnenntnneensennenne 17 17 17 10 Built in Floppy DISK isnt a ea ae ales 17 17 1741 Builtzin Hard Disk Option a a e aa ae aa e Eo aaa ra aaa ara a iSSi 17 17 1712 SGSP Option a a hid tin eae es E 17 17 17 13 Ethernet Interface Option ecceecceeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeesaeeeaeeseaeesseeeeaeeteeseaeeesaeenas 17 18 17 14 Builtin Printer Option c s vs sees ater eae Gay aes eden a hag ceed 17 18 raae nanie EATA OAA ATT 17 18 17 16 Serial RS 232 Interface 0 eee eceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeseaeeeseeseaeeeeeeseaeeseeeteaeete 17 19 IZI General Specifications ipsnm aioe Beitr nine aa eee 17 19 17 18 External DIM NSIONS reni ea cele is ads i a ee a 17 21 Appendix Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions cscceeseeeeees App 1 Appendix 2 Determination of Delta Computation ecceecceeeteeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeenetens App 6
188. 2 are displayed as percentages as indicated by the equations given in appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions However measurement functions ETA and DIVETA described in this section are displayed as ratios Example n 80 ETA 0 8 The user defined function lets you can combine operands to calculate physical values other than those offered by the standard measurement functions For example the equation for measurement function S calculates efficiency using PSB in the numerator and PSA in the denominator With user defined functions you can calculate efficiency using different values in the numerator and denominator such as values from a separate power measurement 6 10 IM 760101 01E 6 4 Setting the User Defined Function e Operators The following operators can be used to create the equation Operator Example Description URMS E1 URMS E2 Basic arithmetic of the measurement functions ABS ABS UMN E1 UMN E2 Absolute value of the measurement function SQR SQR IDC E1 Square of the measurement function SQRT SQRT ABS IDC E1 Square root of the measurement function LOG LOG UDC E1 Natural log of the measurement function LOG10 LOG10 UDC E1 Common log of the measurement function EXP EXP UAC E1 Exponent of the measurement function NEG NEG URMS E1 Negation of the measurement function e Number and Type of Characters That Can Be Used in the Eq
189. 32 comes standard with the WT1600 specified at the time of purchase The measured data can be transferred to a PC for analysis or an external controller can be used to control the instrument for making measurements Communication wr RIAN Se E WT1600 interface BSL J a Z gt D A Output Option For procedures see section 15 1 The numerical data can be output using a 5 V FS DC analog voltage Up to 30 items can be specified for normal measurement and harmonic measurement separately RGB Video Signal VGA Output For procedures see section 15 2 The RGB video signal VGA Video Graphics Array can be output to an external monitor This allows values and waveforms to be displayed on a large screen Initialization For procedures see section 15 3 The settings entered using keys and soft keys can be initialized to factory default condition For details on the initial settings see appendix 3 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numerical Data IM 760101 01E 1 33 1 9 Saving and Loading Data and Other Functions Zero Level Compensation For procedures see section 15 4 Zero level compensation refers to creating a zero input condition inside the WT1600 and setting the level at that point as the zero level Zero level compensation must be performed in order to satisfy the specifications of this instrument see chapter 17 Zero level compensation is automatically per
190. 5 16 20 25 40 50 and 100 Moving the Position Vertical Direction Only The displayed position of the waveform can be moved vertically to the desired position such as when you wish to view the mutual relationship between the voltage and current waveforms or when the section of the waveform you wish to view goes out of the display frame e The position can be set in the range from 0 000 to 130 000 e When the zoom factor is 1 half of the total vertical span of the waveform display screen equal to measurement range x 3 or measurement range x 6 when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively is considered to be 100 100 Move the positions by 50 x gt Move the position by 50 100 e When the zoom factor is not 1 the value equal to the measurement range x 3 100 or measurement range x 6 100 when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively is not located at the upper and lower limits of the screen as shown in the following figure Set the position by paying attention to the zoom factor The following figure shows an example when the crest factor is set to 3 300 Vpk r 7 7 1 r r cena J00 Vpk rascia asare prsi 100 fee ee ee ee ae eee eee ee ee eee ee 255 Vpk m t i yyy i 150 Vpk mn rn Sy 150 Vpk Move the position by 25 NOY Hi 150 Vpk 150 Vpk
191. 5 0545 4 7348 Freq 46 Hz dc 1 0429 20 633 dc 0 0530 1 126 iw 1 4 0427 79 982 1 0 0172 0 363 S u1 5 0545 V 2 3 0339 60 023 2 0 0187 9 396 li 4 7348 A 3 6 0144 0 285 3 0 0182 0 384 P1 0 067 U 4 0 0068 0 135 4 0 0180 0 381 S31 8 68 5 9 0059 117 5 0 0191 0 404 oO Qi 0 0 a 6 0 0048 0 096 6 0 0201 0 425 v Al 9 816 Q 0 0037 0 072 0 01 9 405 pma i 35 7 8 0 0041 0 080 8 0 0223 0 472 o Uthdl 75 0 3 3 6 0021 0 041 93 0 0231 0 489 a Ithd1 7524 6 6 8 0021 6 043 16 8 0226 0 477 Pthdi 30 5 1 8 0022 0 044 11 0 0282 0 596 o Uthfi prp u 2 0 0022 0 043 12 0 0289 0 611 2 Ithfi Erri o 3 0 0022 0 043 13 9 0294 0 621 Utif1 1 3 O 4 6 0016 8 032 i4 0 0399 6 844 gt Itif1 4999 6 F 5 9 0018 8 035 15 0 0432 0 913 ivy wf 0 4 Q 6 0 0014 0 029 16 0 0470 0 992 hefi 0 2 i 7 0 0009 0 018 17 0 0750 1 585 3 vFi 8 0 0013 0 026 18 0 1027 2 168 fo F2 19 0 0015 6 630 19 6 1741 3 678 5 F3 26 0 0012 0 023 20 4 7228 99 746 M oe 21 0 0097 9 013 21 9 1928 4 072 iz U1 UZ 22 6 0012 6 023 22 0 0755 1 594 o amp s D o Numerical data of Harmonic distortion factor each harmonic When the selected measurement function is U I or P Uhdf Ihdf or Phdf is displayed respectively e list Displays the numerical data of measurement functions such as U I P S Q oU ol Z Rs Xs Rp Xp 6U1 U2 6U1 U3 oU1 11 p U1 12 and U1 13 of each element and each wiring system for the
192. 50 mV 100 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1V 2V 5V or 10 V e When the crest factor is set to 6 Select 25 mV 50 mV 125 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1 V 2 5 V 5 V e Auto range Select Auto for range setting to enable auto range The range changes automatically depending on the amplitude of the input signal The switching conditions and precautions are the same as the descriptions given in section 5 2 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input The different ranges used in the auto mode are the same as those available for fixed range 5 12 IM 760101 01E 5 3 Setting the Measurement Range When Using an External Current Sensor Copying the Current Sensor Range The current sensor range specified for a given element can be set to the elements of the same wiring unit However if the wiring system is pattern 1 the measurement range can be copied to all other elements The voltage range see section 5 2 is also copied e The current sensor range for other elements that were specified before is not held Setting the Current Sensor Transformation Ratio The ratio can be set in the range of 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Copying the Current Sensor Transformation Ratio The current sensor transformation ratio specified for a given element can be set to the elements of the same wiring unit However if the wiring system is pattern 1 the measurement range can be copied to all other elements e The ON OFF condition PT ratio CT ratio and power coeffici
193. 500 mW 15 000 mW 30 000 mW 50 000 mW 75 00 mW 150 00 mW 300 00 mW 500 00 mw 750 0mW 1 5000W 3 0000W 5 0000 W 25 000m 18 750 mW 37 500 mW 75 00 mW 125 00 mW 187 50 mW 375 00 mW 750 0mW 1 2500W 1 8750W 3 7500W 7 500W 12 500 W 50 000m 37 500 mW 75 00 mW 150 00 mW 250 00 mW 375 00 mW 750 0mW 1 5000W 2 5000W 3 7500W 7 500W 15 000W 25 000 W 100 00m 75 00 mW 150 00 mW 300 00 mW 500 00 mW 750 0mW 1 5000W 3 0000W 5 0000W 7 500W 15 000W 30 000W 50 000 W 250 00m 187 50 mW 375 00 mW 750 0mW 1 2500W 1 8750W 3 7500W 7 500W 12 500W 18 750W 37 500W 75 00W 125 00 W 500 00m 375 00 mW 750 0mW 1 5000W 2 5000W 3 7500W 7 500W 15 000W 25 000W 37 500W 75 00W 150 00W 250 00 W 1 0000 750 0mW 1 5000W 3 0000Ww 5 0000W 7 500W 15 000W 30 000W 50 000W 75 00W 150 00W 300 00W 500 00 W 2 5000 1 8750W 3 7500W 7 500W 12 500W 18 750W 37 500W 75 00W 125 00W 187 50W 375 00W 750 0W 1 2500 kw 5 0000 3 7500W 7 500W 15 000W 25 000W 37 500W 75 00W 150 00W 250 00W 375 00W 750 0W 1 5000 kW 2 5000 kW 10 000 7 500W 15 000W 30 000W 50 000W 75 00W 150 00W 300 00W 500 00W 750 0W 1 5000 kW 3 0000 kW 5 0000 kW 25 000 18 750W 37 500W 75 00W 125 00W 187 50W 375 00W 750 0W 1 2500 kW 1 8750 kW 3 7500kW 7 500 kW 12 500 kW Effective Power Range of the Wiring Unit of Wiring System 1P3W 3P3W and 3V3A SUOI IPUOD JUBWsINSea y eo
194. AN e When P P is displayed waveform is displayed using P P compression see section 1 7 o ooos f lt e 1o02 cee 5 gt 0 000m5 Time at the left end of Time at the right end of the screen fixed to 0 s the screen During Harmonic Measurement The time corresponding to one screen in harmonic measurement is automatically determined from the sample rate which can be derived from the fundamental frequency of the PLL source see section 7 4 and the data length Time width over which FFT analysis is performed when determining harmonics see section 7 7 It cannot be set arbitrarily YOKOGAWA Wave Sampling DFF pry No time div setting Trigger e Number of data points displayed in the range from the left to the f zona right end of the screen Position e When P P is displayed waveform is displayed using P P compression see section 1 7 Q H lt lt 1008 cpp gt 500 Display segment at the left Display segment at the right end of the screen end of the screen Oth line 500th line Aejdsig wiojone jy el IM 760101 01E 9 3 Setting the Trigger Procedure ESC OUUU L n PUT o RANGE scaunel WIRING MOTOR SET a na 2 CAL qe NTEGRATOR mm a a START wear eee Jencond INTEG SET RESET oTRIGD o J ave mows Al CURSOR For a functional description see section 1 7 o aa 2 DISPL
195. AY HOLD ical FILE STORE SINGLE STORE SET REMOTE Loca MISC MAX HOLD o NULL COPY MENU fi SHIFT The retrieval of waveform display data must be turned ON to display waveforms For the procedure see section 9 1 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Bar or Wave Trend For details on setting the display format see section 4 2 2 Press WAVE to display the Wave menu 3 Press the Trigger soft key to display the Trigger menu Format Wave K Wave Setting JUUUUUU Wave Sampling OFF px Ww Time diy 5ms g Trigger M U Zoom amp Position im W To exit the menu during operation press ESC 9 4 IM 760101 01E 9 3 Setting the Trigger Selecting the Trigger Mode 4 Press the Mode soft key to display the Mode menu 5 Press the Auto or Normal soft key to select the trigger mode Q E L L L L Selecting the Trigger Source 4 Press the Source soft key to display the trigger source selection box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select any of the signals starting with U1 6 Press SELECT to confirm the new trigger source m Q 4 Mode Auto ha Se lect K Source UL JUUUOL Selecting the Tri
196. AY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Trend Numeric Trend Wave Trend or Bar Trend For details on setting the display format see section 4 5 The following procedures are given for a representative example in which the display format is set to Trend 2 Press the Trend Setting soft key to display the Trend Setting menu Format Trend Trend Setting 10 6 IM 760101 01E 10 3 Turning ON OFF the Trend Display 3 Press the Trend Display soft key to display the Trend Display dialog box Turning ON OFF the Trend Display at Once e Turning ON the display of all trends at once 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select All ON 5 Press SELECT All the buttons to the left of the trend symbols are highlighted In addition if the retrieval of the trend display data see section 10 1 is ON the trends are displayed e Turning OFF the display of all trends at once 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select All OFF 5 Press SELECT The highlighting of all the buttons to the left of the trend symbols is cleared and the trends are no longer displayed Turning ON OFF the Trend One at a Time 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select the desired trend symbol 5 Press SELECT If the retrieval of the trend display data see section 10 1 is ON and the button to the left of the selected trend symbol is highlighted the corresponding trend is displayed If the hig
197. All Set soft key File List Delete ES Path SC4 O0 UTDN Function Space 2137751552 byte File Nane Size Date Attribute Delete a m Q Si Q Set Reset Set Reset All Set EE Property 2001 08 24 18 10 Property 2001 08 24 19 14 2001 08 24 19 14 Filter 2001708724 19 15 Filter M Item All Iten All 2001 08 24 18 09 2001 08 24 19 15 All Reset 2001 08 24 19 15 2001 08 24 19 16 2001 08 24 19 15 EE Attribute Attribute Delete Exec EL Delete Exec JUUUOULIS NJUUUUULUE HE Executing the Delete Operation 12 Press the Delete Exec soft key All files with asterisks are deleted 12 30 IM 760101 01E 12 10 Deleting Files Explanation CAUTION Do not remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or S is blinking Such acts can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Selecting the Medium and Directory Same as the explanation given in Selecting the Medium and Directory in section 12 6 Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box Same as the explanation given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box in section 12 9 Properties Same as the explanation given in Properties in section 12 9 Selecting the File Attribute Same as the explanation given in Selecting the File Attribute in
198. Check that the measurement mode is set to normal measurement If the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement set Mode to OFF in the Harmonics menu see section 7 1 1 Press MEASURE to display the Measure menu Selecting the Equation for Apparent Power 2 Press the S Formula soft key to display the S Formula menu 3 Press one of the soft keys from Urms Irms to Umean Irms to select the equation for apparent power JUUOUUUE K Freq Item U Def ined 4 Measure S Formula Urns Irns K Pc Formula K Phase 180 Lead Lag Sync Measure Slave IM 760101 01E 6 15 uolesbaju pue JUoWeiINSeayy EWON el 6 6 Setting the Equations for Apparent Power and Corrected Power Setting the Equation for Corrected Power 2 Press the Pc Formula soft key to display the Pc Formula dialog box Selecting the applicable standard Turn the jog shuttle to select the standard for Pc Formula Press SELECT to select either IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 or IEC76 1 1993 A W Setting the coefficient When the applicable standard of the equation is IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 Turn the jog shuttle to select P1 Press SELECT A box used to set coefficient P1 appears 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set P1 For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 8 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box 9 T
199. Color Mode Preset 1 SCSI Own ID 6 the optional built in hard disk is fixed to 4 HDD Motor On displayed when the optional built in hard disk is installed Ea xipueddy IM 760101 01E App 11 Appendix 3 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numerical Data Display Order of the Numerical Data When the order of the numerical data is reset the measurement function data are displayed in the order given in the next table The measurement function data of element 1 is displayed During Normal Measurement Order Measurement Function 1 Urms1 2 Umn mean 1 3 Udc1 4 Uac1 5 Irms1 6 Imn mean 1 7 Idc1 8 lac1 9 P1 10 S1 11 Q1 12 M 13 o1 14 fU FreqU 1 15 fl Freql 1 16 U pk1 17 U pk1 18 l pk1 19 l pk1 20 CfU1 21 Cfl1 22 FfU1 23 Ffl1 24 Z1 25 Rs1 26 Xs1 27 Rp1 28 Xp1 29 Pc1 30 Time1 31 Wp1 32 WP 1 33 WP 1 34 qi 35 q 36 q 1 37 n 38 1m 39 F1 40 F2 41 F3 42 F4 43 AUrms1 44 AUmn mean 1 45 AUdc1 46 AUac1 47 Alrms1 48 Almn mean 1 49 Aldc1 50 Alac1 51to 100 _ App 12 IM 760101 01E Appendix 3 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numerical Data The following data is displayed on models with the motor evaluation function Order Measurement Function 51 Speed 52 Torque 53 Sync 54 Slip 55 Pm 56 nmA 57 nmB During Harmonic Measurement Order Measurement Functions Order 1 U1 2
200. Conversion Result Voltage U U2 secondary output of PT UsxP P PT ratio Current lo secondary output of CT Ilex C C CT ratio Active power P P2 P2 x PxC xSF SF Power coefficient Apparent power S S2 Sex P x C x SF Reactive power Q Q2 Q2 x P x C x SF Max Min current value Ipk Ipk2 secondary output of CT Ipk2 x C Input Filter For procedures see section 5 5 There are two types of filters This WT1600 makes measurements by synchronizing to the input signal Therefore the frequency of the input signal must be measured accurately Line Filter The line filter is inserted into the circuit under measurement It removes the noise from the inverter and from distorted waveforms The cutoff frequency can be selected Zero Crossing Filter This filter is inserted only into the frequency measurement circuit Zero crossing refers to the point where the input signal crosses the center level of the amplitude This filter is used to accurately detect the zero crossing point The WT1600 detects the zero crossing point with a hysteresis of approximately 5 or 10 of the measurement range when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively The zero crossing detection is used to determine the measurement period measure the frequency and determine the period of a PLL source IM 760101 01E 1 11 1 3 Measurement Conditions Averaging For procedures see section 5 6 The averaging function is effective when reading of the numer
201. Destination FTP Server 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select Login Name 9 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 10 Use the keyboard to enter the login name For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 11 Turn the jog shuttle to select Password 12 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 13 Use the keyboard to enter the password Password is not required if the login name is anonymous For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Setting the Timeout Time 14 Turn the jog shuttle to select Time Out 15 Press SELECT to display the timeout time selection box 16 Turn the jog shuttle to set the timeout time For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 17 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box Connecting to Disconnecting from the Save Destination FTP Server 18 Turn the jog shuttle to select Connect or Disconnect 19 Press SELECT e If you select Connect and press SELECT connection is established to the save destination FTP server When the connection is made cal is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen e If you select Disconnect and press SELECT connection to the save destination FTP server is dropped The cal displayed at the upper left corner of the screen disappears Net Drive Setup FTP Server Login Nane ANONYMOUS Passuord Time Out sec Connect Discom
202. E STORE SET MENU aTAIGD o REMOTE a WAVE ones LOCAL MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC a RANGE scaunel WIRING MOTOR SET a A ear AL eqs NTEGRATOR wma g a ea sr moor START INTEG SET RESET Procedure Check that the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement If the measurement mode is set to normal measurement set Mode to ON in the Harmonics menu see section 7 1 1 Press MEASURE to display the Measure menu 2 Press the User Defined soft key to display the User Defined Function dialog box Turning ON OFF the User Defined Function Computation 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the user defined function you wish to enter from Function1 to Function4 4 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF g JUUUUOUE Freq Iten Def ined User Defined Function 1 4 Unit v Function 1 FF ON Expression UCE1 0R1 Function 2 DFW ie CA Expression TCE1 0R1 Function 3 PF mit C Expression PCE1 OR1 Function a P unit Expression S CE1 0R1 c Measure Ster Slave IM 760101 01E 7 15 juswainseayy D1uOW Ie 7 8 Setting the User Defined Function Setting the Unit 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select Unit 6 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 7 Use t
203. ECT The symbol for the selected measurement function and the numerical data are displayed at the highlighted position Changing the Element Wiring Unit 7 8 ES Q 4 Format Numeric Norm Item No 1 K Numeric Disp Items Page U Scroll Exec H Page Down Scroll Exec OUUU il Press the Element soft key to display the element wiring unit selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select any of the elements wiring units starting with Elementi Press SELECT The symbol for the selected element number or wiring unit and the numerical data are displayed at the highlighted position ESC Numeric Ttens Norn Iten No Numeric Itens Norn Item No Numeric Itens 1 1 W Function Select Function M Function urns None Urns Element Unean Element 1 Urns m D K Element Select Element Element 1 Element 2 Element 1 T W Element 3 Element 4 Element 5 Element 6 X E j 3 g amp 3 z Z Reset List Exec Reset List OUUUUBUE L Reset List Exec Ei Resetting the Order of the Displayed Items 3 4 5 Press the Reset List Exec soft key The Alert dialog box is displayed Turn the jog shuttle to select OK or Cancel Select OK and press SELECT to execute the reset of the order of the displayed items Select Ca
204. ECT to send a test mail to the destination Mail Setup Mail Server Mail Address Comment NailBaseTine 9 9 9 Interval Mail Test Explanation The condition of the WT1600 can be sent in e mail messages at a certain interval to a specified mail destination Mail Server e Specify the mail server by entering the IP address e lf you are using DNS see section 13 2 you can specify the server by name Recipient Mail Address Enter the mail address of the device that is to receive the messages sent by the WT1600 Setting Comments Same as the explanation given in File Name and Comment in section 12 6 Setting the Time of Transmission e Specify the time to start transmitting the e mail messages e Set the time in units of hour minute second in the following range 0 0 0 to 23 59 59 Selecting the Transmission Interval e Specify the interval for transmitting the e mail messages e You can select from the following list of choices If you select OFF mails are not transmitted OFF 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h and 24h IM 760101 01E 13 17 uondo suonesiunwwos 3u194 3 g 13 5 Sending E mail Messages Transmitted Information of the WT1600 The numerical data from numbers 1 to 100 of the menu items Norm Item No during normal measurement Harm Item No during harmonic measurement that are displayed when Format display format under the Display menu is
205. ELTAURM AUmn DELTAUMN AUdc DELTAUDC AUac DELTAUAC Alrms DELTAIRM Almn DELTAIMN Aldc DELTAIDC Alac DELTAIAC Pm PM Torque TORQUE Speed SPEED Slip SLIP Sync SYNC nmA MAETA nmB MBETA Wp WH Wp WHP Wp WHM q AH q AHP q AHM Time TI A symbol representing the element to which the measured signal is to be applied is entered in parentheses Elements 1 2 3 4 5 6 ZA B and C are represented by the symbols E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 and E9 respectively One symbol from E1 to E9 can be used except for the following computation symbols One symbol from E1 to E6 can be entered in the parentheses for FU to FFI functions e No symbols need to be entered in the parentheses for ETA DIVETA PM TORQUE SPEED SLIP SYNC MAETA and MBETA The element symbol inside the parentheses of delta computation DELTAURM to DELTAIAC does not represent the element to which the measured signal is to be applied but rather the location A1 to A4 at which to store or display the results of the delta computation see section 6 5 A1 A2 A3 and A4 are represented by symbols E1 E2 E3 and E4 respectively One symbol from E1 to E4 can be set within the range defined by the delta computation For example DELTAURM E1 substitutes the value of AUrms1 in the equation The measurement functions n efficiency 1 and 1 n efficiency
206. File List Dialog Box in section 12 9 Properties Same as the explanation given in Properties in section 12 9 Note e If you change the extension of the file such as on a PC the file can no longer be loaded Up to 36 characters can be displayed in Path e The file names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive e Ifthe setup parameters that are saved to a file is loaded the key settings are changed to the loaded information and cannot be undone It is recommended that you first save the current setup parameters and then load the setup parameters from a file Setup parameters such as the date and time communications and SCSI ID numbers are not saved Therefore loading setup parameters from a file will not change the date and time communication and SCSI ID settings e Setup parameters that have been saved on products with firmware version having incompatible data cannot be loaded Settings can not be loaded between different models or models with different element configurations firmware ROM options or other characteristics IM 760101 01E 12 25 eea y Bulpeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 9 Specifying the File to Be Displayed Viewing File Properties and Changing the File Attribute 2 o DISPLAY HOLD ica FILE store copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o coREMOTE E pace oe CURSOR MAX HOLD O NULL SHIFT
207. File List dialog box turn the jog shuttle to select the file Press the Property soft key to display the file property window 9 Press ESC to close the file property window g Delete W Function Delete Set Reset All Set EE Attribute Delete Exec EL Changing the File Attribute m UUBUUUUE Si Q Property Comment File Name File Size Date Time Attribute 8000 SET 16681 byte RA 10 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file 11 Press the Attribute soft key to change the attribute of the selected file to R or RW File List Path SC4 O0 NUTDN Space 2138079232 byte File Nane Size Date FDO 1 SC4 001 SC4 01 INDO 1 lt gt 5000 SET 2001 08 24 18 09 RW 16681 2001 08 24 18 10 R Attribute a Delete 4 Function Delete Set Reset All Set EE Property Filter ten All Attribute Delete Exec EL 2001 08 24 18 10 W ESC JUUUUUU Delete Function Delete Set Reset EE All Set Property Property Filter Filter all ten all Attribute Delete Exec EL m D IM 760101 01E 12 27 eea y Bulpeo7 pue Burnes D 12 9 Specifying the File to Be Displayed Viewing File Properties and Changing the File Attribute Explanatio
208. Format Selection Extension and Data Size Select the data format from the following list of choices The extension is automatically added Data Format Extension Data Size Bytes TIFF TIF Approx 350 K Color BMP BMP Approx 50 K Color Compress is ON PostScript PS Approx 80 K Reference value For PostScript there are no Color Reverse and data compression selection items For TIFF there is no data compression selection item Selecting the Color Select the color when the data format is TIFF or BMP from the following list of choices e Color Saves the screen image data in color 256 colors e Reverse Saves the screen image data with a white background black text and colored waveforms e OFF Saves the screen image data in black and white Turning ON OFF Data Compression When the data format is BMP and the color selection is Color or Reverse select from the following list of choices e OFF Outputs the data without compression e ON Saves the BMP format image using RLE data compression File Name and Comment Same as the explanation given in File Name and Comment in section 12 6 However only the first 20 characters of the comment can be displayed on the screen Auto Naming Function Same as the explanation in Auto Naming Function in section 12 6 12 22 IM 760101 01E 12 8 Loading Setup Parameters o eee ose HOLD cad FILE srone copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTAIGD o co
209. Hz 1 24 IM 760101 01E 1 7 Waveform Display Trigger For procedures see section 9 3 Trigger is a cue used to display the waveform on the screen The trigger is activated when the specified trigger condition is met At this point the waveform is ready to be displayed on the screen Trigger Source Trigger source refers to the signal that is used in checking the trigger condition Trigger Slope Slope refers to the movement of the signal from a low level to a high level rising edge or from a high level to a low level falling edge When the slope is used as one of the trigger conditions it is called a trigger slope Trigger Level Trigger level refers to the level through which the trigger slope passes When the slope of the trigger source passes through the specified trigger level on a rising or falling edge a trigger occurs You can select the input signal of each element or external clock input signal as a trigger source Trigger level I 1 Trigger source i i A trigger occurs at this point if rising edge 4 is selected trigger point Trigger Mode Trigger mode specifies the conditions for updating the screen display e Auto mode If a trigger occurs within a specified amount of time about 100 ms referred to as the timeout period the waveform display is updated If a trigger does not occur within the timeout time the display is automatically updated when the timeout time elapses
210. INSeaLY 5 10 Performing Master Slave Synchronized Measurements Procedure n PUT o ranae SCALING WIRING MOTOR SET a o FILTER ave MEASURE AL qm NTEGRATOR mm g G START STOP Ri INTEG SET RESET a o DISPLAY UP DATE HOLD RATE FILE STORE COPY TRIG D WAVE CURSOR SINGLE a STORE SET REMOTE LOCAL MISC TMAX HOLD 3 NULL MENU SHIFT For a functional description see section 1 3 To exit the menu during operation press ESC Setting the Instrument to be a Master or a Slave 1 2 Press MEASURE to display the Measure menu Press the Sync Measure soft key to select Master or Slave Only a single master and a single slave can be specified During normal measurement K K Performing Synchronized Measurements Freq Item Def ined A Measure S Formula Urns Irms K Pc Formula Phase Sync Measure 180 Lead Lag Slave During harmonic measurement Freq Item Def ined Sync Measure Slave Connect the external start signal input output connectors between the master and slave instruments using BNC connectors sold separately and do the same for the external stop signal input output connectors e The slave ins
211. IRING a MOTOR SET T H FILTER a CAL qs NTEGRATOR mm g a START STOP INTEGSET RESET H Procedure 1 Press HARMONICS to display the Harmonics menu 2 Press the Mode soft key to select ON Selecting the Minimum Harmonic Order to Be Analyzed 3 Press the Min Order soft key to select 0 or 1 Selecting the Maximum Harmonic Order to Be Analyzed 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the maximum harmonic order to be analyzed Harmonics ESC Harmonics zA PLL Source Up Exec PLL Source Down Exec Min Order Min Order J e i Ww Max Order Max Order 109 100 A Thd Formula W Thd Formula 1 Total 1 Total Window Width M Window Width 8192 8192 JUUL IM 760101 01E 7 11 juswainseayy D1uOW Ie 7 5 Setting the Harmonic Order to Be Analyzed Explanation Select the range of harmonic orders that will be used to determine the numerical data of Total and the distortion factor of the harmonic waveform For details on how to determine the data see appendix 1 Selecting the Minimum Harmonic Order to Be Analyzed You can select from the following list of choices e 0 Includes the Oth order DC component when determining the various numerical data of the harmonic waveform e 1 Does not include the Oth order DC component when determining the various numerical data of the harmonic waveform 1st order
212. If you select both Wave C1 and Wave C2 x the two cursors can be moved without changing the spacing between the two The value of the digit being specified by Wave C1 changes 10 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Wave Cursor OFF Ry WaveC1 Trace Wave Cursor OFF M WaveC1 Trace Select u UL UL M WaveC2 Trace W WaveC2 Trace 1 W Cursor Path Max l wave Ci Wave ci Wave ci 2 00ns 2 00ns 2 00ms I Wave C2 x Wave C2 Xx Wave C2 x L 5 00ns is 5 00ns i 5 00ns ULL 9 22 IM 760101 01E 9 9 Performing Cursor Measurements Explanation ON OFF A cursor can be placed on the displayed waveform to measure and display the value at that point It can be used to measure the voltage and current of various sections of the waveform and the data on the horizontal axis X axis e ON Performs cursor measurement e OFF Does not perform cursor measurement Measurement Target Select the target waveform for the cursor measurement from the following list of choices The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements U1 11 U2 12 U3 13 U4 14 U5 15 U6 16 Speed and Torque Applicable only on models with the motor evaluation function option However durin
213. LL Source User Defined Function1 Off Off Unit1 V V Expression1 URMS E1 U E1 0R1 Function2 Off Off Unit2 A A Expression2 IRMS E1 I E1 0R1 Function3 Off Off Unit3 V W Expression3 UPPK E1 P E1 OR1 Function4 Off Off Unit4 A VA Expression4 IPPK E1 S E1 OR1 AMeasure Object ZA Type Off S Formula Urms Irms Pc Formula IEC76 1 1976 G P1 and P2 of IEC76 1 P1 0 5000 P2 0 5000 1993 Phase 180 Lead Lag Sync Measure Master Master IM 760101 01E Appendix 3 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numerical Data D A Rated Time Item Setting INTEGRATOR Integrator Status Reset status INTEG SET Mode Normal Timer Setting 00000 00 00 Independent Mode Off Start Time 2001 01 01 00 00 00 End Time 2001 01 01 01 00 00 Current Mode RMS Auto Cal Off 00001 00 00T displayed when the optional D A output is installed SYNC SRC Element Object Sync Source Elementi l1 DISPLAY Numeric Format Item Amount Norm Item No Harm Item No Function Element Order During normal measurement During harmonic measurement Numeric Numeric 4 2 4 2 1 1 Urms U Elementi Elementi 1 DISPLAY Wave Setting Wave Display On Wave Format Interpolate Graticule Scale Value Trace Label Wave Mapping Mode User Setting U1 to I6 Speed Torque Single Line Grid On Off Auto U1 0 11 0 U2 1 12 1 U3 2 13 2 U4 3 14 3 U5 0 15 0 U6 1 16 1 Speed 2
214. LL Source The selected PLL source is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen when HARMONICS is pressed Below is a display example when the PLL source is set to the voltage of Element PLL source Voltage Element PLL Src UL yOkOGAWA Harmonics Mode OFF pry Selecting the PLL Source Select the PLL source from the following list of choices The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements U1 11 U2 12 U3 13 U4 14 U5 15 U6 16 Ext Clk and Smp Clk If you select Ext Clk harmonic measurement is performed using the frequency of the signal applied to the external clock input connector as the fundamental frequency If you select Smp Clk harmonic measurement is performed using 1 2048 x the frequency of the signal applied to the external clock input connector as the fundamental frequency When the PLL Source Is Set to Ext Clk or Smp Clk Apply a clock signal to the external clock input connector EXT CLK on the rear panel according to the following specifications AN ext cLk e Ext Clk specifications Item Specification Connector type BNC connector same as the Smp Clk connector simultaneous input with Smp Clk is not allowed Frequency range 10 Hz to 1 kHz Input level TTL Input waveform 50 duty ratio rectangular wave e Smp Clk specifications Item Specification Connector type BNC connector same as the Ext Clk connector simultaneous inpu
215. LL source is in the range of 10 Hz to 1 kHz External sampling clock method Input a sampling clock signal having a frequency that is 2048 times the fundamental frequency between 0 5 Hz and 100 Hz of the waveform on which to perform harmonic measurement The input level is TTL The input waveform is a rectangular wave with a duty ratio of 50 PLL source Select the voltage current or external clock of each input element Measurement function See section 17 4 FFT data length Select from 8192 4096 and 2048 FFT processing word length 32 bits Window function Rectangular Anti aliasing Filter Set using a line filter 5 5 kHz Sample rate sampling frequency window width and upper limit of harmonic order under analysis during PLL synchronization Fundamental Freq Sample Window Width against Upper Limit of of the PLL Source Rate the FFT Data Length Harmonic Order Hz S s Freq of the Fundamental Wave under Analysis 8192 4096 2048 10 lt f lt 20 f x 2048 4 2 1 100 20 lt f lt 40 f x 1024 8 4 2 100 40 lt f lt 75 fx 512 16 8 4 100 75 lt f lt 150 f x 256 32 16 8 100 150 lt f lt 440 f x 128 64 32 16 50 440 lt f lt 1000 f x 64 128 64 32 25 Sample rate window width and upper limit of harmonic order under analysis when using external sampling clock Fundamental Freq Sample Window Width against Upper Limit of of the PLL Source Rate the FFT Data Length Harmon
216. List Dialog Box 6 Same as the procedure given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box in section 12 9 Viewing the Properties 7 Same as the procedure given in Viewing the Properties in section 12 9 Changing the File Attribute 8 Same as the procedure given in Changing the File Attribute in section 12 9 Renaming a Directory or File 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select a directory or file 10 Press the File Name soft key to display the keyboard The name of the selected directory or file is displayed in the entry box of the keyboard 11 Use the keyboard to enter the directory or file name For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings ESC Renane E SC Rename Function z JUUUUOUE Renane File Name Property Ie C Attribute IM 760101 01E 12 37 eea y Bulpeo7 pue Burnes D 12 12 Renaming Directories and Files and Creating Directories Creating a Directory MakeDir W Function MakeDir K Dir Name Property Attribute ESG JUUUUOUE 4 Press the MakeDir soft key to display the MakeDir menu __Funct ion ESC Delete Copy Renane MakeDir Format Attribute Delete Exec JUUOUUU EL Selecting the Medium and Directory 5 Same as the procedures given in Selecting the Sa
217. NTEG SET RESET Procedure 1 Press SCALING to display the Scaling menu Selecting the Target Element 2 Press the Element Object soft key to display the Element menu Only the installed elements are displayed 3 Press one the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element to select the target element Turning ON OFF the Scaling Function 4 Press the Scaling soft key to select ON or OFF If any of the target elements is turned ON the SCALING indicator above and to the left of the key illuminates Setting the PT Ratio 4 Press the Pt Ratio soft key 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the PT ratio For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings ESC ESC Element Element 1 Scaling Element Object Element 1 K Element Object Element 1 Element Object Element 1 E JOUUUUUU W Sensor Ratio mvsa 10 6000 W Sensor Ratio mua 10 0000 Sensor Ratio mua 10 0000 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 im W O Ct Ratio O Ct Ratio O Ct Ratio Element 5 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 Scaling Factor 1 0000 Scaling Copy Exec Scaling Factor 1 0000 Scaling Factor 1 0000 Element 6 Scaling Copy Exec Scaling Copy Exec AJUUUUUG fs fH fH 5 14 IM 760101 01E 5 4 Setti
218. OMONY E EEE cece ts Seas taca et acetets Cots Helse dees ta sdedsbanvaaaten 16 6 memory test ceccccecceeeeseeeeeseeeeeesseeeeaseeeesnseeeeenseenenssnaeees 16 7 J MENU nosis 12 20 13 12 14 2 14 5 14 7 JOO SHUTH CS aii reta ereis a raises 2 3 ING SOQ Ear seesserzesSeadesecnosesuecezesnstesysseseauastscrsstesgeatinerstsenys 15 14 message language 1 34 15 14 K Midtiseeeden teeters E ities 9 22 Min Orders e e seeds desk seach nennsehacadsacetetasyicensncassdnasictayerentee 7 11 minimum harmonic order to be analyzed ee eee 7 11 a ae ites ee elas A Dy MISC 12 2 12 4 13 2 13 8 13 11 13 15 13 19 13 23 keyboard testing of 46 7 aoe 15 1 15 10 15 14 ee aT ae een epee iy ee ee ae z MOda a a aan Geen 20 6 23 7 1 11 1 ee TESTING Of iriri i MODE feet a motor efficiency sessssieesessreerserusensrruernsrrneirennennrrusenerrnses 8 16 MOTOR SET eee 8 3 8 6 8 7 8 10 8 12 8 14 L P EAEE 1 28 9 19 N line filter oo eee 5 17 8 6 A ineen Selecon Oi se ene 5 17 Net Drive SOUP ee aha Ag 13 8 St RSI aeaaea Net Print RE E E E E E T aua de 13 12 PE nce auras ct getey Net Print Setup cis edi ecee tafe dneepltib dence 13 11 List Item No network 0 sen 13 2 13 8 13 11 13 15 13 19 13 24 sadist network connection i hgehScscdeVeyades avastd Vast E E 13 1 load Exod lt oe PANTOP etter did E 13 12 anaia a ace ions aD Ps RTA head a BG NN iii paca terrint EE TOTE EEE EAO 12 10 bell d i login
219. ON to display trends For the procedure see section 10 1 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Trend Numeric Trend Wave Trend or Bar Trend For details on setting the display format see section 4 5 The following procedures are given for a representative example in which the display format is set to Trend 2 Press the Trend Setting soft key to display the Trend Setting menu 3 Press the Trend Format soft key to display the Format menu 4 Press one of the keys from Single to Quad to select the number of windows ny JUUUUOUE S Q Format 4 Trend Display Trend M Trend Format Single Trend Sampling OFF pn Trend T div Trend Setting asvdiv Trend Disp Items Trend Disp Items NUOUUULE 10 8 IM 760101 01E 10 4 Splitting the Screen and Displaying Trends Explanation The screen can be evenly divided and the trends can be mapped to the divided windows Selecting the Number of Windows Same as the waveform display section 9 6 Waveform Mapping The trends that are turned ON see section 10 3 are mapped in order according to the trend number T1 to T16 to the divided windows This corresponds to the Auto setting for the waveform display IM 760101 01E 10 9 Aejdsig pu L g 10 5 Setting the Time Axis Procedure For a functional de
220. OREMOTE a wave meres coca mse CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC START STOP INTEGSET RESET Procedure le Press FILE to display the File menu 2 Press the File Item soft key to display the File Item menu 3 Press the Setup soft key to select the setup parameters D Q File Item Setup Numeric L Utility Utility OOOOUUBS JUL IM 760101 01E 12 23 eea y Bulpeo7 pue Burnes D 12 8 Loading Setup Parameters 4 Press the Load soft key The Load Menu menu and the File List dialog box appear Selecting the Load Source Medium 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select the load source medium indicated by 6 Press SELECT to confirm the new medium Selecting the Load Source Directory Perform this operation when directories are present on the medium 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select the load source directory indicated by lt gt 8 Press SELECT to confirm the new directory The selected medium directory is displayed in Path located at the upper left corner of the File List dialog box File List Load Menu File Iten Path SC4 O0 UTDN Space 2138079232 byte File Name Size Date Attribute a Setup JE lt gt 2001 08 24 18 09 RW 000 SET 16681 2001 08 24 18 10 RW Property Filter All
221. Order extra rolls from your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Part No B9316FX Specifications Thermal sensitive paper 10 m Sales unit 10 rolls Handling Precautions of the Roll Paper The paper is a thermal sensitive paper that changes color with the application of heat Take note of the following points e Storage precautions The paper starts changing color at around 70 C Itis affected by heat humidity light and chemicals regardless of whether the paper has been used of not e Store the paper in a cool dry and dark place e After opening the package use it quickly e Ifthe paper is left in contact with plastic film such as a vinyl chloride film or Scotch tape containing plasticizers for an extended time the paper will lose some of its ability to reproduce color If you are going to store the paper ina folder for example use a folder made of polypropylene e When using glue on the paper do not use a glue containing organic solvents such as alcohol or ether as they will change the color of the paper e For prolonged storage we suggest you copy the roll chart Due to the characteristics of the thermal sensitive paper the recording section may lose color over time e Precautions on Use e Use only genuine paper rolls provided by YOKOGAWA e Touching the paper with sweaty hands can leave finger print marks or blur the printing e Rubbing the surface with a hard object can cause the paper to change color due to the hea
222. PY SINGLE STORE SET MENU REMOTE oTRIGD o Loca MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD o NULL WAVE pi SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC The retrieval of trend display data must be turned ON to display trends For the procedure see section 10 1 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Trend Numeric Trend Wave Trend or Bar Trend For details on setting the display format see section 4 5 The following procedures are given for a representative example in which the display format is set to Trend 2 Press the Trend Setting soft key to display the Trend Setting menu 3 Press the Restart Trend Exec soft key to restart the trend Format Trend Trend Setting JOOBLE 7 Trend Display M Trend Format Single Trend Sampling FF Trend T div asvdiv K Trend Disp Items UUUBUUUE 10 18 IM 760101 01E 10 8 Restarting the Trend Explanation When the trend is restarted the trend up to that point is cleared In addition to pressing the Restart Trend Exec soft key the following operations cause the trend to be restarted e e e e e Changing the data update rate Changing the time axis setting of the trend Turning ON OFF the harmonic measurement mode Turning ON OFF the retrieval of waveform display data Turning ON OFF the retrieval of trend data Note If y
223. Q Numer ic W Item Amount Single List K List Items j Order Page Up Scroll Exec Page Down Scroll Exec Explanation UUUUG HE K g List Items Changing the harmonic order 22 23 ist Item No 1 Function u Element Element 1 ESC JUUUUUO Press ESC to return to the Display menu Turn the jog shuttle to set the harmonic order The display is scrolled and the specified harmonic order and the numerical data are displayed You can also page scroll see section 4 1 List Items OList Item No List Items I ormat 1 Numeric m 12 R OList Item No 1 Function u Element Element 1 l Oooo Item Amount Select M Function cw uU Single List W Select Element Element 2 K List Items Element 1 I P S Q Element 3 A Element 4 o Element 5 u Element 6 X OUOU Page Up Scroll Exec Page Down Scroll Exec m LL L JUUUEULE il When Item Amount Number of Displayed Items Is Set to 4 2 8 4 or 16 8 e Changing the measurement function The types of measurement functions that can be selected are indicated in Measurement Function Types for Harmonic Measurement in section 1 2 and User Defined Functions in section 1 5 You can also select not to display the meas
224. RE copy i y ESC SINGLE STORE SET MENU D o REMOTE a CURSOR TOMAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC JOUUOL IO v il INPUT RANGE canel WIRING MOTOR SET o pi FILTER AVG qe NTEGRATOR mm a a STOP INTEGSET RESET i aa START Procedure During Normal Measurement 1 Press UPDATE RATE to display the Update Rate menu 2 Press the Update Rate Up Exec or Update Rate Down Exec soft key to change the data update rate The specified data update rate is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen Pressing the Update Rate Up Exec soft key increases data update rate Pressing the Update Rate Down Exec soft key decreases data update rate Update Rate Up Exec Update Rate Down Exec L L_ C C L L During Harmonic Measurement The data update rate is determined by the fundamental frequency of the PLL source and the number of periods of the PLL source used for the analysis You can not change the data update rate from the Update Rate menu described in this section For detailed values see section 17 6 Functions 5 22 IM 760101 01E 5 7 Changing the Data Update Rate Explanation The data update rate refers to the interval in which the sampled data used to determine the measurement functions is retrieved When the retrieval of waveform display data is OFF during normal measurement
225. Range e ssssseeeee 6 35 integration auto Calibration 2 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 30 integration holding of integration MOE eee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeneeteaeeeaes Integration Overflow 0 eee cece e cee teeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeneaee integration resetting of integration resolution of integration starting of integration StOPPING Of seseesseseeseseieerrerresirerrerrrerrerrnrreens integration timer cece eseeeesesseeeeeessseereeeseeeeens internal memory initialization of interpolate oo ee eeeseeeseseseseeeseecseeeeseessanseeeseeeesseessaesesees Index 2 IM 760101 01E interval cessevccrevscaveecvncacependuecent need lE eee y measurement functions determination of c App 1 Interval Setting measurement functions symbols Of e eee App 1 IP address i measurement method ee 17 10 tem AMOUNT CaN measurement period ssesssessesrrsseesrrsererrnsensenrrrerenrreurrnsenee 1 8 Item Copy Exec measurement range sssssseseesiierierisriesrisrinerrerrernerens 1 10 5 4 Item DOWM EXEC osteria a 6 4 media tevechsennedicnese 11 14 11 18 tem UP EXEC i area a Ne eee iss 6 4 media information 12 7 12 9 items not covered by warranty sessesessereerrsrrrerrerenere 16 10 Medium Selection Of 0 eee cee eeeee tere eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeee 12 18 IM
226. S is a system used to associate names used on the Internet called host names and domain names to IP addresses Given AAA BBBBB com AAA is the host name and BBBBB com is the domain name Instead of using the IP address which is a sequence of numbers host name and domain name can be used to access the network Enter the domain name the DNS server address and the domain suffix If DHCP can be used these values are automatically assigned When accessing a network drive or a network printer from the WT1600 a name can be used to access the destination rather than an IP address Entering the domain name e Enter the network domain name that the WT1600 belongs to e Enter up to 30 characters e The characters that can be used are 0 9 A Z _ parenthesis minus sign Entering the DNS server address e Enter the IP address of the DNS server The default setting is 0 0 0 0 e You can specify up to two DNS server addresses primary and secondary When the primary DNS server is down the secondary DNS server is automatically looked up for the mapping of the host name domain name and IP address Entering the Domain Suffix e When the IP address corresponding to the server name with the domain name specified in the previous section is not found the system may be set up to search using a different domain name Enter this alternate domain name as the domain suffix e You can specify up to two domain suffixes primary and second
227. S s 200000 data points are sampled every second e Types of Measurement Functions Measurement functions on each input element The following 29 types of measurement functions are available For details on the determination of each measurement function data see appendix 1 U voltage Urms Umn Udc Uac current Irms Imn Idc lac P active power S apparent power Q reactive power power factor o phase difference fU fl also expressed as fU FreqU and fl Freql measures the frequencies of up to three voltage current signals U pk U pk maximum minimum values of voltage I pk I pk maximum minimum values of current CfU Cfl crest factor of voltage current FfU Ffl form factor of voltage current Z impedance of the load circuit Rs Xs resistance reactance of the load circuit that has a resistor R inductor L and capacitor C connected in series Rp Xp resistance reactance of the load circuit that has a R L and C connected in parallel Pc Corrected Power e Measurement functions of the average or sum of input elements 2 functions The following 19 types of measurement functions are available For details on the determination of each measurement function data see appendix 1 UX voltage average Urmsz Umnz Udcx Vac I current average Irmsz ImnxX Idcx lacz P sum of active powers SX sum of apparent powers Q sum of reactive powers AX power factor average oz phase difference average Z
228. SHIFT COPY MENU key Feeds printer paper sets the saving or printing of screen image data and numerical data list Section 12 6 and chapter 14 SHIFT STORE STORE SET key Sets store and recall operations Chapter 11 MISC key Confirms or initializes the system conditions sets GP IB and serial communications sets the date and time selects the message language sets the brightness of screen performs self tests sets displayed colors selects the crest factor sets key lock changes SCSI ID numbers sets Ethernet communications and sets D A output Sections 3 11 5 11 12 4 chapter 13 sections 15 1 15 3 15 6 15 7 15 8 16 3 and 16 4 For details on setting the GP IB and serial communications see the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760101 11E L SHIFT MISC NULL key Sets the NULL function Section 15 5 LOCAL key See the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760101 11E IM 760101 01E sled JO s sn pue soweN D Chapter3 Before Starting Measurements 3 1 Precautions Concerning the Use of the Instrument Safety Precautions Safety Precautions If you are using this instrument for the first time make sure to thoroughly read the Safety Precautions given on pages vi to vii Do Not Remove the Case Do not remove the case from the instrument Some sections inside the instrument have high voltages that are extremely dangerous For internal inspection or adjustment conta
229. SO PEAK DET FDD Signal Flow and Process The input circuits Elements 1 through 6 consist of a voltage input circuit and a current input circuit The input circuits are mutually isolated They are also isolated from the case The voltage signal that is applied to the voltage input terminal U is normalized using the voltage divider of the voltage input circuit and an operational amplifier OP AMP It is then isolated by the transformer and input to a voltage A D converter The current input circuit is equipped with two types of input terminals a current input terminal l and a current sensor input connector EXT Either one can be used at any given time The voltage signal from the current sensor that received the signal at the current sensor input connector is normalized using the voltage divider and an operational amplifier OP AMP It is then isolated by the transformer and input to a current A D converter The current signal that is applied to the current input terminal is converted to a voltage by a current divider Then it is input to the current A D converter in the same fashion as the voltage signal from the current sensor During normal measurement the voltage signal that is input to the voltage A D converter or current A D converter is converted to digital values at an interval of approximately 5 us The measured value is derived using a DSP based on the converted digital values During harmonic m
230. T6 L4 SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DT1 and CO Protocol Conforms to IEEE Std 488 2 1987 Code ISO ASCII code Mode Addressable mode Address 0 to 30 Clear remote mode Remote mode can be cleared by pressing LOCAL except during Local Lockout For details on the specifications of the GP IB interface see the Communications Interface User s Manual IM760101 11E 17 18 IM 760101 01E 17 16 Serial RS 232 Interface Item Specification Connector type D sub 9 pin plug Electrical specifications Conforms to EIA 574 9 pin EIA 232 RS 232 Connection format Point to point Transmission mode Full duplex Synchronization Start stop synchronization Baud rate Select from the following rates 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 bps For details on the specifications of the serial interface see the Communications Interface User s Manual IM760101 11E 17 17 General Specifications Item Specification Warm up time Approximately 1 hour Operating conditions Temperature 5 to 40 C Humidity 20 to 80 RH when not using the printer 35 to 80 RH when using the printer No condensation Operating altitude 2000 m or less Storage environment Temperature 25 to 60 C Humidity 20 to 80 RH no condensation Rated supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC 200 to 240 VAC Permitted supply voltage range 90 to 132 VAC 180 to 264 VAC
231. The vectors are displayed through computation 1 30 IM 760101 01E 1 8 Bar Graphs Vectors and Trend Displays The trends of all measurement functions that are measured during normal measurement and harmonic measurement are displayed Trend Display Trend Display Data When the retrieval of waveform display data is OFF during normal measurement the numerical data of measurement functions that is determined for each data update rate is P P compressed for each display segment raster and made into trend display data When the retrieval of waveform display data is ON during normal measurement the numerical data of measurement functions that is determined each time a trigger occurs is P P compressed for each display segment raster and made into trend display data During harmonic measurement the numerical data of the measurement function that is automatically determined from the sample rate which can be derived from the fundamental frequency of the PLL source see page 1 7 and the window width time width over which FFT analysis is performed when determining harmonics is P P compressed for each display segment raster and made into trend display data In some cases P P compression is not performed suoloun jo uoneuejdxa Split Screen Display and Assignments For procedures see section 10 4 Up to 16 lines T1 through T16 of trends can be displayed You can select the measurement function of any element to be ass
232. This occurs when the fluctuation of the power supply or the load is large or when the input signal frequency is low During Normal Measurement Turning ON OFF Averaging You can select whether to perform the specified averaging operation e ON Performs averaging e OFF Does not perform averaging Selecting the Averaging Type Select one of the following list of choices For the equation of each type see section 1 3 e Exp Performs exponential averaging e Lin Performs moving averaging Setting the Attenuation Constant or Average Count If the averaging type is Exp exponential averaging set the attenuation constant If the averaging type is Lin moving averaging set the average count e For Exp Select the attenuation constant from 2 4 8 16 32 and 64 e For Lin Select the average count from 8 16 32 64 128 and 256 Measurement Functions That Are Averaged The measurement functions that are directly averaged are shown below Other functions that use these functions in their computation are also affected by the averaging For details regarding the determination of each measurement function see appendix 1 e Urms Irms Umn Imn Udc Idc and P Torque and speed are also measured when the motor evaluation function option MTR is installed 5 20 IM 760101 01E 5 6 Averaging During Harmonic Measurement If Mode is turned ON in the Harmonics menu see section 7 1 the instrument enters the harmonic measurement m
233. Torque 2 DISPLAY Bar Setting Trend T div Trend P div Trend Object Function Element Order Scaling Upper Scale Lower Scale Bar Format Single Bar Item No 1 Function U Element Elementt Start Order 1 End Order 100 DISPLAY Vector Setting Numeric On U Mag 1 000 Mag 1 000 DISPLAY Trend Setting Trend Display On T1 to T8 Trend Format Single Trend Sampling Off 3 s div during normal measurement 50 during harmonic measurement During normal measurement During harmonic measurement T1 T1 Urms U Elementi Elementi 1 Auto Auto 1 0000E 02 1 0000E 02 1 0000E 02 1 0000E 02 IM 760101 01E App 9 z xipueddy Appendix 3 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numerical Data Item Setting HOLD Hold Off UPDATE RATE Update Rate 500 ms WAVE Wave Sampling Off Time div 0 5 ms only during normal measurement Trigger Mode Auto Source U1 Slope Rise Level 0 0 V Zoom amp Position Element Object Elementi U V Zoom x1 U Position 0 00 1 V Zoom x1 1 Position 0 00 Trend Sampling Off CURSOR for Wave Wave Cursor Off Wave C1 Trace U1 Wave C2 Trace 11 Cursor Path Max During normal measurement During harmonic measurement Wave C1 2 00 ms 10 Wave C2 x 8 00ms 490 CURSOR for Bar Bar Cursor Off Bar C1 1 order Bar C2 x 15 order CURSOR for Trend Trend Cursor Off Trend C1 Trace Ti Trend C2 Trace T2 Trend C1 6 Tren
234. Uac AC component Current A Irms true rms value Imn rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value dc simple average lac AC component Active power W P Apparent power VA S Reactive power var Q Power factor Phase difference o Frequency Hz fU FreqU voltage frequency fl Freql current frequency The frequency of up to three signals can be measured as fU or fl You can also select to measure only three sets of voltage frequencies or only three sets of current frequencies The display of signals that are not selected shows no data Voltage max and min V U pk Voltage maximum U pk Voltage minimum Current max and min A 1 pk Current maximum I pk Current minimum Crest factor CfU Voltage crest factor Cfl Current crest factor Form factor FfU Voltage form factor Ffl Current form factor Impedance Q of the Z load circuit Resistance and reactance Rs Resistance of the load circuit that has a resistor R inductor L and capacitor C connected in Q of the load circuit series Xs Reactance of the load circuit that has a resistor R inductor L and capacitor C connected in series Rp Resistance of the load circuit that has an R L and C connected in parallel Xp Reactance of the load circuit that has an R L and C connected in parallel Corrected Power W Pc Applicable standard IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 IEC76 1 1993 Integration Time Integratio
235. Up Exec soft key increases the current range If you press the Range Up Exec soft key when the range is at maximum auto range mode is enabled Pressing the Range Down Exec soft key decreases the current range O Range ESG K Element Ob ject Element 1 ESC K Element Object Element 1 U Range Up Exec U Range Up Exec Lie Ea U Range U Range Down Exec Down Exec GG Terninal Terminal Direct Sen irect Sen I Range I Range Up Exec Up Exec I Range I Range Down Exec Down Exec Range Range Copy Exec Copy Exec UUUSUUU UBGU0UU ee BGG N Repeat steps 2 to 6 to set the measurement range of all elements Copying the Range The measurement range specified for a given element can be set to the elements of the same wiring unit The measurement range for other elements that were specified before is not held Press one of the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element from which the range is to be copied the copy source Press the Range Copy Exec soft key The measurement range of the copy source is copied to the elements of the same wiring unit However if the wiring system is pattern 1 the measurement range is copied to all other elements o Range ESG Element Object Element 1 z U Range Up Exec U Range Down Exec ifi Terminal Direct Sen I Range Up Exec I Range Down Exec
236. Va S l1 t S z L SOURCE ODO _ Loan T s 3 gt N24 O 1O Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 Input terminal 3 Wiring Example of a Three Phase Four Wire System 3P4W If there are six input elements two three phase four wire systems can be set up elements 1 2 and 3 and elements 4 5 and 6 The assignment of elements to the input terminals in the figure varies depending on the number of installed input elements For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 1 3 Measurement Conditions SOURCE LOAD z4 0D Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 Input terminal 3 Note For the relationship between the wiring systems and the method of determining the measured values or computed values see Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions IM 760101 01E 3 11 s u w nsean Buers 310499 el 3 7 Using an External Current Sensor to Wire the Circuit under Measurement To prevent the possibility of electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the precautions given in section 3 3 Wiring Precautions As shown below when the maximum current value of the circuit under measurement exceeds the maximum range of the input element an external sensor can be connected to the current sensor input connector in order to measure the cu
237. W 8 12 IM 760101 01E 8 6 Setting the Motor s Number of Poles Used to Compute the Synchronous Speed and the Slip Selecting the Frequency Measurement Source Voltage or Current Supplied to the Motor 2 Turn the jog shuttle to select Sync Speed 3 Press SELECT to display the frequency measurement source selection box 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select any of the target input signals for frequency measurement see section 6 3 When the button to the left of the input signal in the selection box is highlighted that is the target input signal for frequency measurement selected in section 6 3 5 Press SELECT to confirm the new frequency measurement source Motor Set Speed Torque Pm Range W Wgeselect Sense Type Analog Pul ul Pulse Range 8 8080 Line Filter TF u2 Scaling or m unit Ta Cn Pulse N 66__ B Pole ua Sync Speed Ti 14 Sync Source Bus 3 Explanation Setting the Motor s Number of Poles The value can be set in the range of 1 to 99 Sets the number of poles for the motor being measured Setting the Frequency Measurement Source e Select the frequency measurement source from the following list of choices The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements U1 11 U2 12 U3 13 U4 14 U5 15 U6 and I6 Select any of the target input signals for
238. WTIB Digital Power Meter USER S MANUAL More Application Information and Pricing available at a a of tis TestWorld 250 Technology Way sales testworld com Rocklin CA 95765 1 855 200 TEST 8378 Click to go www TestWorld com E i _ YOKOGAWA Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 760101 01E 4th Edition Product Registration Thank you for purchasing YOKOGAWA products YOKOGAWA provides registered users with a variety of information and services Please allow us to serve you best by completing the product registration form accessible from our homepage http Awww yokogawa com tm PIM 103 01E Notes Trademarks Revisions 4th Edition April 2004 YK Thank you for purchasing the YOKOGAWA WT1600 Digital Power Meter This user s manual contains useful information about the functions operating procedures and handling precautions of the instrument To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly before beginning operation After reading the manual keep it in a convenient location for quick reference whenever a question arises during operation The following two manuals including this one are provided as manuals for the WT1600 Read them along with this manual Manual Title Manual No Description WT1600 Digital Power Meter IM 760101 01E This manual Explains all functions and User s Manual procedures of the WT1600 excluding the communication functions WT1600 Digital Po
239. Wave Format UE Single Interpolate Graticule a Scale Value OFF pr Trace Label oN u 14 us 15 u I6 K Wave Mapping Explanation Only the input signals corresponding to the installed elements are displayed The waveform display can be turned ON OFF for those input signals For models with the motor evaluation function option the waveform display for Speed and Torque input signals can be turned ON OFF through this procedure 9 12 IM 760101 01E 9 6 Splitting the Screen and Displaying Waveforms Procedure A E v n PUT a RANGE scaunel WIRING a FILTER o Heli g Hl H AVG CAL eqs NTEGRATOR wma g a START STOP INTEGSET RESET H For a functional description see section 1 7 Hoo SINGLE UP DATE RATE a prenouc REMOTE Loca MISC TMAX HOLD NULL a FILE STORE COPY STORE SET MENU a SHIFT co TRIG D WAVE CURSOR To exit the menu during operation press ESC The retrieval of waveform display data must be turned ON to display waveforms For the procedure see se ction 9 1 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Bar or Wave Trend For details on setting the display format see section 4 2 The f
240. When Carrying the Instrument First turn OFF the devices under measurement and remove the measurement cables Then turn OFF the instrument and remove power and other cables To carry the instrument use the handle or carry it using both hands Cleaning When cleaning the case or the operation panel first turn OFF the circuit under measurement and the instrument and remove the instrument s power cord from the outlet Then wipe with a dry soft cloth Do not use volatile chemicals as this may cause discoloring and deformation IM 760101 01E 3 1 sjuswainseayy Buers 310499 el 3 2 Installing the Instrument Installation Conditions Install the instrument in a place that meets the following conditions Flat Even Surface If the instrument is not installed on a stable horizontal surface the printer s recording quality may degrade and precise measurements may be impeded Well Ventilated Location Vent holes are located on the top and bottom of the instrument To prevent internal overheating allow at least 20 mm of space around the vent holes When connecting measurement wires and other various cables or when opening or closing the built in printer cover allow extra space for operation Ambient Temperature and Humidity Ambient temperature 5 to 40 C Ambient humidity 20 to 80 RH when the printer is not used 35 to 80 RH when the printer is used No condensation in either case Do Not Install the Instrument in the Follo
241. Y HOLD SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTAIGD o REMOTE a wave meres toca msc CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC a RANGE scaunel WIRING MOTOR SET anil OA CAL qs NTEGRATOR wma g a START INTEG SET RESET Procedure Check that the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement If the measurement mode is set to normal measurement set Mode to ON in the Harmonics menu see section 7 1 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Vector For the display format of vectors see section 4 4 Turning ON OFF the Numerical Data Display 2 Press the Numeric soft key to select ON or OFF Q JUUUUEBUE IM 760101 01E 7 23 juswainseayy 2luoweH 7 10 Changing the Vector Display Zooming in on the Vector 2 Press the U Mag I Mag soft key to set the jog shuttle target to U Mag Mag or both U Mag and Mag If U Mag is selected you can zoom in on the vector of the fundamental wave U 1 of each element that is specified for harmonic measurement If Mag is selected you can zoom in on the vector of the fundamental wave I 1 of each element that is specified for harmonic measurement If both U Mag and Mag is selected you can zoom in on the vector of the fundamental waves U 1 and I 1 of each element that are specified for harmonic measurement without changing the dif
242. You can set the list item No to 1 or 2 e Changing the measurement function Select the measurement function to be changed from the following list of choices U I P S Q A 6 OU ol Z Rs Xs Rp and Xp e Changing the elemeni wiring unit The description is the same as with the aforementioned When Item Amount Number of Displayed Items Is Set to 4 2 8 4 or 16 8 e Changing the harmonic order The description is the same as with the aforementioned When Item Amount Number of Displayed Items Is Set to 4 2 8 4 or 16 8 Note For the meanings of the measurement function symbols that are displayed see section 1 2 Measurement Functions and Measurement Periods 1 5 Computation and appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions e For details on the wiring units expressed as ZA B and C see section 5 1 Selecting the Wiring System no data is displayed in places where the measurement function is not selected or where numerical data is not present The harmonic order can be set to total or from dc Oth order up to 100th order However the numerical data up to the order corresponding to the upper limit of harmonic order under analysis see section 17 6 that is automatically determined by the frequency of the PLL source is the data determined by the harmonic measurement IM 760101 01E 7 3 Selecting the Measurement Target o a ose a
243. able items vary depending on the selected wiring system pattern XA B C Selecting the Delta Computation Type You can select the delta computation type from the following list of choices The selectable items vary depending on the selected wiring system pattern e 3P3W gt 3V3A Computes the other data when the wiring system is changed from three phase three wire 83P3W to three voltage three current 8V3A AU1 AUrms1 AUmn1 AUdc1 AUac1 Alt Alrms1 Almn1 Aldc1 Alac1 e Delta gt Star Using the data from a three voltage three current system the various data of a star connection is computed from the data of a delta connection delta star transformation AU1 AUrms1 AUmn1 AUdc1 AUac1 AU2 AUrms2 AUmn2 AUdc2 AUac2 AU3 AUrms3 AUmn3 AUdc3 AUac3 Al4 Alrms4 Almn4 Aldc4 Alac4 IM 760101 01E 6 13 uolesbaju pue JUoWeINSeayy JEUN el 6 5 Setting the Delta Computation Star gt Delta Using the data from a three phase four wire system the various data of a delta connection are computed from the data of a star connection start delta transformation AU1 AUrms1 AUmn1 AUdc1 AUac1 AU2 AUrms2 AUmn2 AUdc2 AUac2 AU3 AUrms3 AUmn3 AUdc3 AUac3 Al4 Alrms4 Almn4 Aldc4 Alac4 5 Es Note If the sampled data used in the computation do not exist for example when the element is not installed the sampled data are considered to be 0
244. accuracy figures All accuracy figures for 0 5 to 10 Hz are reference values e Iff Hz x voltage V gt 2 2 x 10 for frequencies above 100 kHz the accuracy figures are reference values e For currents that exceed 20 AAC excluding the range of 50 to 400 Hz the accuracy figures are reference values For currents less than 5 mA with frequencies above 1 kHz the accuracy figures are reference values Effective input range 0Qto 110 of the power range see section 5 2 for DC measurement 110 of the power range for current measurement when the voltage and current are in the range of 1 to 110 of the measurement range Except the signal level of the synchronization source must be greater than or equal to 10 greater than or equal to 20 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the measurement range However at a voltage of 1000 V the range is up to 5 A 50 A and 10 V for a 5 A input element 50 A input element and current sensor input respectively Lower limit of measurement frequency Same as the accuracy for voltage and current Power factor A influence e WhenidA 0 Add apparent power reading x 0 15 in the range of 45 to 66 Hz For other frequencies see below However the figures are reference values e For a 5 A input element when the current is direct input add the apparent power reading x 0 15 0 05 x f KHz For a 50 A input element when the current is direct input add the apparent
245. aeetseeeeaeenees 1 8 data update rate ceececceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeeeeees 1 13 5 22 date time 3 22 3 23 default gateway delete we 13 3 13 6 12 26 12 29 Delete Exes denimi a eas 12 30 delta computation eeeee 1 18 6 12 delta computation determination Of eeeeeeeeeees App 6 DMG ASUIC irinenn eeni reacia e aae inane 6 12 DHOP 13 3 CIO CIOY arannira aiid 11 18 IM 760101 01E Index 1 A gi Index directory Creation Of cccecccesseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeaee directory renaming of directory selection of disk formatting Of ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeetes display senenin niss iaa rinses etii Raai 4 1 display colors display format 4 7 4 8 4 11 4 13 4 16 display interpolation eee eee eee eeeeeeeneeeees 1 27 9 16 display resolution ooo eee eee eee eeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees display segments eee cece eect eeee tee eeeeeeeaeeneeees displayed items number of distorted wave ssec distortion factor equation for DIN E ecient citi ati Giainsneenalinee DNS server addres ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeaeeeaes domain name domain suffix d allisteni tin the crest dann edness E CMICIONCY aiaa iaaa ota duabiettieal ies a aA 1 4 element 1 4 1 7 2 1 6 2 7 3 7 4 7 20 10 3 10 4 15 2 15 3 Element O
246. ailure Check using another disk If the same message still appears maintenance service is required 614 File is protected 12 9 615 Physical format error Reformat the medium If the same error occurs the 12 5 instrument is probably unable to execute a format on this medium 616 File system failure Check using another disk If the same message to 620 still appears maintenance service is required 621 File is damaged Check the file 622 File system failure Check using another disk If the same message to 641 still appears maintenance service is required 642 No media exists in SCSI device Check that the storage medium is correctly inserted in the SCSI device 643 Media failure Check the medium to 653 654 Media failure Check the format type of the floppy disk 12 5 655 File system failure Check using another disk If the same message to 664 still appears maintenance service is required 665 Cannot load this file format File was stored on other models or other versions 666 File is now being accessed Execute after access is made 668 Cannot find HDR file Check the file 12 6 16 2 IM 760101 01E 16 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Codes Messages Actions Sections 669 Cannot find INF file Check the file 670 No wave displayed T
247. amental wave fundamental component Periodic complex waves are divided into different sinusoid groups The fundamental wave is the signal with the longest period It is the sinusoid that has the fundamental frequency among the periodic complex wave Fundamental frequency This is the frequency corresponding to the period of the periodic complex wave It is the frequency of the fundamental wave Distorted wave The distorted wave has a waveform that is different from the fundamental wave Higher harmonic Sinusoids that have frequencies that are integer multiples 2 or greater of the fundamental frequency Harmonic component The signal component of the waves that have frequencies that are integer multiples 2 or greater of the fundamental frequency Harmonic distortion factor The ratio of the rms value of the nth harmonic signal contained in the distorted waveform to the rms value of the fundamental signal or total signal Harmonic order The integer ratio of the harmonic frequency with respect to the fundamental frequency Total harmonic distortion The ratio of the rms value of all harmonics to the rms value of the fundamental signal or total signal Interference caused by harmonic signals Harmonic signals that adversely affect electric devices and facilities are as follows Phase advance capacitor or series reactor The reduction of circuit impedance caused by the harmonic current causes excessive current to flow resulting in vibrat
248. an value calibrated to the rms value 3 the simple average and 4 the rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value for the voltage and the true rms value for the current as explained in Determining the Voltage and Current in section 1 2 Measurement Function and Measurement Period Corrected Power For procedures see section 6 6 Depending on the applicable standard when the load that is connected to the potential transformer is extremely small the active power of the potential transformer that is measured needs to be compensated In such case set the compensating equation and the coefficient IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 IEC76 1 1993 Pc a F une po p 1 Yrm urns 1 F2 Umn Umn Pc Corrected Power P Active power Urms True rms voltage Umn Voltage rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value P4 P2 Coefficient as defined in the applicable standard 1 18 IM 760101 01E 1 5 Computation z Phase Difference For procedures see section 6 7 The display format of the phase difference between the voltage and current of each element can be selected With the voltage of each element as a reference one format displays the phase difference using 360 in the clockwise direction and the other format displays a lead of 180 in the counter clock wise direction and a lag of 180 in the clockwise direction suoloun jo uoneuejdxa Equation for the Distortion Factor For procedures se
249. and Strings c cecceecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeseaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeteeeseaeeseeeeeatess 3 24 Chapter 4 Screen Display Format 4 1 Displaying the Data Numerical Data of Measurement Functions ssec 4 1 4 2 Displaying Waveforms icc cicecedecsascesekeesesceceesasevhsddearaccnasencaseaveneasessenennanaenazeraaaacsensevereanies 4 10 4 3 Displaying Bar Graphs tun accent ik ek eae at eee oh ees 4 12 4 4 Displaying Vectors is r a a es Sask a aa ees a a a ae A a a a E aE aeai 4 14 4 5 Displaying TOMAS oaei a a a a ea aa Aaa ack are dee 4 15 4 6 Listing the Setup Parameters cceccceesceeseceeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeeeaeesaeeseaeeeseeseaeeeaeeseaeeseeeeeaeens 4 17 Chapter 5 Measurement Conditions 5 1 Selecting the Wiring System ecceeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeseaeeeaeeseaeeeeeseaeeseaeseaeesaeeeeeseatens 5 1 5 2 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input e ee eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeaeeeees 5 4 5 3 Setting the Measurement Range When Using an External Current Sensor 0 5 10 5 4 Setting the Scaling Function When Using an External PT of CT cesescceesereeeeeteees 5 14 5 5 Selecting the Input Filter ensenen eiei eiiiai iieiea 5 17 D6 AVAAN Sik ee ee Be A e ee ee 5 19 5 7 Changing the Data Update Rate 0 2 eeeeeseeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseaeeeeeseaeeteeeteaeeneeeeeaten 5 22 IM 760101 01E Contents 5 8 Holding the Display and Performing Single Measurement
250. applied during auto range the range may not remain constant In this case use the fixed range setting Power Range The measurement ranges power ranges of active power P apparent power S and reactive power Q are as follows Wiring System Power Range 1P2W single phase two wire voltage range x current range 1P3W single phase three wire voltage range x current range x 2 3P3W three phase three wire when the voltage and current ranges on the 3V3A three voltage three current corresponding elements are set to the same range 3P4W three phase four wire voltage range x current range x 3 when the voltage and current ranges on the corresponding elements are set to the same range Note Copy When the result of voltage range x current range exceeds 1000 W VA or var the displayed unit changes to kW kVA or kvar The display resolution is 60000 Because the voltage and current ranges switch independently according to range increase and decrease conditions in auto range mode different power ranges may be set for the same power value ing Ranges The measurement range specified for a given element can be set to the elements of the same wiring unit However if the wiring system is pattern 1 the measurement range can be copied to all other elements The measurement range for other elements that were specified before is not held If the crest factor is set to 3 and a current range between 10 mA and 500
251. armonic measurement If the measurement mode is set to normal measurement set Mode to ON in the Harmonics menu see section 7 1 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu 2 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Displaying Bar Graphs 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select Wave Bar Numeric Bar Wave Bar or Bar Trend 4 Press SELECT to confirm the new display format ESG Select Format Numeric Numeric Wave Item Amount Bar 42 vector Norn Item No Trend 1 Numeric Wave fj Numeric Numer ic Bar Disp Items Nuner ic Trend Wave Bar Wave Trend Page U Bar Trend Scroll Exec i Information Page Down Scroll Exec JUUUUUOE il 4 12 IM 760101 01E 4 3 Displaying Bar Graphs Explanation A display example is shown below For the procedure in changing the displayed items and contents of bar graphs see section 7 9 When the vertical axis is set to logarithmic coordinates the characters lt log Scale gt appears at the upper left corner of the screen Distinction of voltage or current the element and the upper limit of the displayed bar graph Distinction of voltage or current the element and the lower limit of the displayed bar graph Range of orders of the displayed bar graph Uover PLL Src ui YOKOGAWA Jover i m Display Be 01 o Tos Seales E ETE Format Bar H Bar Fornat Single Bar Item No
252. ary Note If you changed settings related to the Ethernet network the WT1600 must be power cycled If the WT1600 is turned ON with the DHCP function enabled without an Ethernet cable connected communications and file functions may not operate properly In this case turn DHCP OFF and power cycle the WT1600 13 6 IM 760101 01E 13 2 Setting the Ethernet Interface TCP IP Configuring the TCP IP Settings of the PC Communication parameters such as the IP address must be specified also on the PC side Communication parameters are specified for each Ethernet NIC that is installed in the PC Here the settings of the NIC required for connecting your PC and the WT1600 are explained If the IP address and other parameters are to be assigned dynamically using the DHCP server the following settings are not necessary Select Obtain an IP address automatically under the IP Address tab of the TCP IP Properties dialog box For example if you are connecting a PC and the WT1600 to an independent Ethernet network you can specify parameters as indicated in the next table For details on the parameters consult your system or network administrator Parameter Value Notes IP address Example 192 168 21 128 IP address for the PC Subnet mask Example 255 255 255 0 Set the same value as the subnet mask that was specified for the WT1600 Gateway None DNS Not used WINS Not used The following procedure describes the st
253. ase difference of the fundamental voltage U2 1 of element 2 with respect to the fundamental voltage U1 1 of element 1 e oU1 U3 Phase difference of the fundamental voltage U3 1 of element 3 with respect to the fundamental voltage U1 1 of element 1 e oU1 I1 Phase difference of the fundamental current 11 1 of element 1 with respect to the fundamental voltage U1 1 of element 1 e oU1 l2 Phase difference of the fundamental current 12 1 of element 2 with respect to the fundamental voltage U1 1 of element 1 e oU1 I3 Phase difference of the fundamental current 13 1 of element 3 with respect to the fundamental voltage U1 1 of element 1 Harmonic measurement function of the average or of the sum of the input elements 2 functions The following 6 types of harmonic measurement functions are available For details on the determination of each measurement function see appendix 1 Chars and Numbers Measurement inside All Function 1 No UX Yes Yes Yes Numerical data exists IX _ Yes Yes PX Yes Yes SZ Yes Yes Qx Yes Yes AX Yes Yes e For measurement functions with parentheses the value 1 is entered in the parentheses This represents the numerical data of the fundamental signal e All No parentheses are appended after the measurement function Indicates numerical data related to all waveforms including the fundamental and harmonics IM 760101 01E 1 2 Measure
254. asecdeccecsstesssetecessebevestvesienearenieevesedeeed 17 11 timer setting 6 21 6 24 TOP VSW Levecccestsverccececastaseccnogeewescevantaseecdestsiscedeaseroivvas reeteaces 2 2 TOPQUC ers scene teed often ference N AT sas Paes 8 2 8 4 torque meter signal input Connector s 2 1 8 2 torque Scaling Of eee eee torque signal input range of total efficiency c e total harmonic distortion cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteees Trend Ci Feiras n A 10 15 trend Cursor osasse 10 14 trend data retrieval Of cee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 1 Trend Disp LEMS merre nanenane wosseastedesecd o anaa eea 10 2 trond displaya asise neen irsi ina trend format trend object trend sampling trend Scales cscs ee sedi wee eee aon trend setting 10 1 10 2 10 6 10 8 10 10 10 12 10 18 TrendG 1 Tracgiven nnsa a TrendC2 Trace trigger trigger l vol iani cthceeechetanddtecevchsvibcuenoasteesierniverss trigger Mode ssesessessreesesrrsersrrrrerserrrenrrnsennrrnsenerrnsenee trigger slope Ai trigger SOULCO isisi siasii sesveeccceveccussvessidvectestreesearessndercens U U Range Down EXEC 0 ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaae U Range Up tEXeG vita ecihedecasetdd ge a anaapa eoa haaie Umean Irms update rate Update Rate Down Exec Update Rate Up Exec oe sesecscsesersreseseeeseseseessseseanes Upper limit 5 268 sae enea tetas ae ie hee upper limi
255. asurement The data length the number of sampled data to be used in harmonic measurement is set to 8192 4096 or 2048 points The selected data length is the measurement period When the waveform is displayed the measurement period corresponds to one screen of the waveform IM 760101 01E 1 3 Measurement Conditions Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems For procedures see section 5 1 The selectable patterns of wiring systems vary depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the instrument You may be able to select only a single type of wiring system or two or three types of wiring systems You can select the wiring system from the following five types 1P2W single phase two wire 1P3W single phase three wire 3P3W three phase three wire 3P4W three phase four wire and 3V3A three voltage three current The input element assignment to wiring units XA XB and C is determined from the wiring system pattern This allows functions of voltage current active power apparent power reactive power power factor phase difference and other parameters to be determined For the relationship between the wiring system and the determination of the function see appendix 1 The following table shows the relationship between the number of installed elements the selectable wiring system patterns and the assignment of input elements to wiring units ZA B and C 1 1P2W
256. ata to the instrument Chapter 13 Ethernet Communications Option Describes how to mutually transfer files containing setup parameters waveform display data and numerical data with PCs and workstations that are on the network using the Ethernet interface Chapter 14 Built in Printer Option Describes how to output numerical data and screen image to the built in printer Chapter 15 D A Output and Other Functions Describes how to set the D A output and other functions Chapter 16 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection Describes the possible causes of problems and their appropriate corrective measures Describes the messages that are displayed on the screen Describes maintenance and inspection issues such as how to perform self tests and replace power fuses Chapter 17 Specifications Summarizes the specifications of the instrument in tables Appendix Describes how to determine the measurement function and delta computation Gives a list of initial settings Describes the ASCII header file format Index Alphabetic and symbol index of contents viii IM 760101 01E How to Use This Manual Conventions Used in This Manual Unit k Denotes 1000 Example 15 kg 100 kHz K Denotes 1024 Example 640 KB Storage capacity of floppy disks Displayed Characters Bold characters used in the procedural explanations indicate characters that are displayed on the panel keys for the respective procedure or
257. ate rate x 2 at the maximum However when retrieval of waveform display data is OFF Hold Holds the data display Single measurement Executes one measurement during the held condition MAX hold Holds the maximum value of the numerical data Zero level compensation Null Performs zero level compensation 17 10 IM 760101 01E 17 6 Functions Frequency Measurement Item Specification Measured item Select up to three of the frequencies of the voltage or current that is input to the input element During harmonic measurement select up to three including the signal selected as the PLL source Method Reciprocal method Measurement range Data Update Rate Measurement Range 50 ms 45 Hz lt f lt 1 MHz 100 ms 25 Hz lt f lt 1 MHz 200 ms 15 Hz lt f lt 500 kHz 500 ms 5 Hz lt f lt 200 kHz 1s 2 5 Hz lt f lt 100 kHz 2s 1 5 Hz lt f lt 50 kHz 5s 0 5 Hz lt f lt 20 kHz However the measurement range is up to 100 kHz for a 50 A input element and 500 kHz for a current sensor input Accuracy 0 05 of reading 1 digit When the input signal level is greater than or equal to 0 6 V voltage input 25 mV current sensor input 5 mA 5 A input element or 150 mA 50 A input element and the signal is greater than or equal to 30 0 5 Hz to 440 Hz with zero crossing filter ON 10 440 Hz to 500 kHz or 30 500 kHz to 1 MHz of the measurement
258. ated to the rms value of the voltage and current Ude ldc Determines the apparent power from the simple average of the voltage and current Umean Irms Determines the apparent power from the rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value of the voltage and the true rms value of the current Setting the Equation for Corrected Power Depending on the applicable standard when the load that is connected to the potential transformer is extremely small the active power of the potential transformer that is measured needs to be compensated In such case set the compensating equation and the coefficient Corrected power Pc is a measurement function in the normal measurement mode e Selecting the applicable standard Select the standard from the following choices For the equations of each applicable standard see section 1 5 e IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 e IEC76 1 1993 Setting the coefficient Set coefficients P1 and P2 Set the coefficients in the range from 0 0001 to 9 9999 Note The equations for apparent power and corrected power are applied to measurement functions in the normal measurement mode IM 760101 01E uoles6aju pue JUoWeiINSseayy JEUN el 6 7 Selecting the Display Format of the Phase Difference Procedure For a functional description see section 1 5 a o spray HOLD ical FILE STORE copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o coREMOTE E CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT HY To exit the
259. atically detected IM 760101 01E 12 5 eea y Bulpeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 5 Formatting the Disk Procedure a eas seiay nowo Umea FILE store copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU o TRIG D o REMOTE a ae toca mse CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC RANGE scaunel WIRING MOTOR SET o o e qe NTEGRATOR wm a a FILTER H H p K 9 QO START INTEGSET RESET Press FILE to display the File menu Press the Utility soft key The Utility menu and the File List dialog box appear Press the Function soft key to display the Function menu File Item Setup Utility Delete Function Delete Set Reset All Set EE Property Filter Attribute Delete Exec UUUUUUGR ALTE 12 6 IM 760101 01E 12 5 Formatting the Disk Selecting the Medium to Be Formatted 4 Press the Format soft key The media list is displayed in the File List dialog box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select the medium to be formatted If there are no external SCSI devices that are detected and only a floppy disk is inserted in the floppy drive only FDO appears Viewing the Media Information 6 Press the Media Info soft key The information about the medium that was selected in step 5 is displayed If you selected FDO in step 5 proceed to step
260. ation Number of drives 1 Size 3 5 Capacity 1 44 MB 17 11 Built in Hard Disk Option Item Specification Number of drives 1 Capacity 10 GB IBM format 17 12 SCSI Option Item Specification Standard SCSI Small Computer System Interface ANSI X3 131 1986 Connector type Half pitch 50 pins pin type Connector pin assignment Unbalanced single ended built in terminator SCSI devices that can HD drive MS DOS version 3 3 or later or SCSI HD drive that can be formatted using EZ SCSI be used MO drive 128 230 640 MB drive MO medium uses semi IBM format ZIP drive PD drive For further information please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer IM 760101 01E 17 17 h Ey suoneoyioeds 17 13 Ethernet Interface Option Item Specification Number of communication ports 1 Connector type RJ 45 connector Electrical and mechanical specifications Conforms to IEEE 802 3 Transmission system Ethernet 10BASE T Transmission rate 10 Mbps Protocol TCP IP 17 14 Built in Printer Option Item Specification Printing system Thermal line dot system Dot density 8 dots mm Paper width 80 mm Printing width 72 mm 17 15 GP IB Interface Item Specification Electrical and mechanical specifications Conforms to IEEE Std 488 1978 JIS C 1901 1987 Functional specifications SH1 AH1
261. axis then tighten firmly by holding the terminal knob Y 2 1 Unit mm Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems The selectable wiring systems vary depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the instrument You may be able to select only a single type of wiring system or two or three types of wiring systems For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 1 3 Measurement Conditions IM 760101 01E 3 9 sjuswainseayy Buers 310499 el 3 6 Directly Wiring the Circuit under Measurement Note After wiring the wiring system must be selected See section 5 1 Selecting the Wiring System The thick lines on the wiring diagrams are the sections where the current flows Use appropriate wires that are suitable for the current Wiring Example of a Single Phase Two Wire System 1P2W If there are six input elements six single phase two wire systems can be set up SOURCE LOAD souno Loap sal K Input terminal SOURCE LOAD SOURCE WO 00 Input terminal Wiring Example of a Single Phase Three Wire System 1P3W e If there are six input elements three single phase three wire systems can be set up elements 1 and 2 elements 3 and 4 and elements 5 and 6 The assignment of elements to the input terminals in the figure varies depending on the number of installe
262. bel Display Select whether to display the waveform label name input signal name ON Displays the label name OFF Does not display the label name Upper limit e BEHE A label Lower limit Lff 358 diens nma Time at the right end of the screen Time at the left end of the screen 9 20 IM 760101 01E 9 9 Performing Cursor Measurements For a functional description see section 1 7 DispLay I HOLD FILE STORE COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU aTRGD o REMOTE a E z HARMONICS LOCAL MISC ii ramones CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC ss PUT a RANGE scaunel WIRING MOTOR SET FILTER ay Hal AVG CAL eqs NTEGRATOR wma g a START STOP INTEG SET RESET H Procedure The retrieval of waveform display data must be turned ON to display waveforms For the procedure see section 9 1 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Bar or Wave Trend For details on setting the display format see section 4 2 2 Press SHIFT WAVE CURSOR to display the Cursor menu Turning ON OFF Cursor Measurement 3 Press the Wave Cursor soft key to select ON or OFF If ON is selected the result of the cursor measurement is displayed Q Format Wave Cursor OFF Ry WaveC1 Trace Wave UL W WaveC2 Trace
263. bject 5 4 5 10 5 11 5 14 5 17 6 4 9 8 element selection Of 0e 5 4 5 10 5 14 5 17 6 4 End Ordr nna 40 Seed acti het ei keh ieee 7 20 equation ONON MOSSAQOS sce ce siecescceecsasneceecsiecvesseensescevdessanecseceanen 16 2 ESC PR hx te ichOh th atin tek RAP enh At eile 13 12 Etherneta secession L aN PAE icra ons 1 32 13 1 Ethernet CONNE COM iien eare aa iaa a aeara a 2 1 Ethernet interface expendable items E A ETTE AEAEE AE A ENN E OR EXTENSION sses extensions of numerical data external clock input connector external GIMENSIONS 0 eee eect eee eee external start stop signal input output Connector ooo ee cece eee e cee tence tee eeeeeeeaeenaes 2 1 ED FFT processing word length sssssesesseerererrierierreereree 17 12 file 12 6 12 11 12 20 12 23 12 26 12 29 12 32 12 36 file AttriDUteS iaiiaeeeai 12 27 12 28 File Item 12 11 12 23 file list s cnai 11 14 12 20 File List dialog BOX ce eeeseceeseessseeeseessseeeneeseaneeseeoees 11 18 file NAME wees sco eases annie 11 14 11 18 12 14 12 18 file Properti ES svc ssciscrstaensiveuecoccecteswatdeeaute cecdessucwancratueedece 12 26 files copying of 12 32 files deleting of 12 29 files renaming Of eeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeteae 12 39 FILO Rs feestoteneeees apeteannasate ieee dont avenge 5 17 11 15 12 27 Filter Copy EXEC 0 c eeeeceecessceeeeeseceeeesec
264. button pops out Removing the Disk from the Floppy Disk Drive Check that the access indicator is turned OFF and press the eject button Access indicator CAUTION Do not remove the floppy disk drive when the access indicator or e is blinking Such act can damage the magnetic head of the floppy disk drive or destroy the data on the disk General Handling Precautions of Floppy Disks For the general handling precautions of the floppy disk read the instruction manual that came with the floppy disk IM 760101 01E 12 1 eea y Bulpeo7 pue Burnes D 12 2 Built in Hard Disk Option Procedure Explanation a o DISPLAY roo ree FILE STORE COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRGD o REMOTE WAVE LOCA MISC CURSOR ra ESC A p SHIFT Q To exit the menu during operation press ESC INPUT UJUUUUU ie v RANGE cannel WIRING MOTOR SET o a CAL qe NTEGRATOR wm a a STOP INTEGSET RESET T Haul FILTER START Press MISC to display the Misc menu Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu Press the SCSI Setting soft key to display the SCSI Setting dialog box Press the HDD Motor soft key to select ON or OFF Oh ESC SCSI Setting K Graph Color K Text Color Setting Network HDD Motor OFF pr Initialize SCSI You can turn ON OFF the power to the built in hard disk on this
265. c Frequency 9 3562kU gu1 U2 3615kUA qgi u3 8 0618kvar qui It 9 039853 1 12 3 01 13 ELED 191 00 Y 13 4 5087 4 PH 0 3J455k4 3544kUA 0 0789kvar 0 3749 12 87 U3 1 oU1 U3 When the vector size is zoomed Example in which the voltage is zoomed 2 times and the current is zoomed 1 2 times Wiring A 3U3A 185 73 U PLL Src 3 5241 A Frequency 9 4657ku gui U2 6545kUA qgi u3 8 4600kvar gui 11 7115 Ui 12 315 35 qu1 13 u 171 45 Y 13 1 3 5090 8 PH 5542ku 301 599 6016kUA VELED 2342kvar LELES 0 3549 0 9211 gsc 249 22 pz 22 91 the size of the signal and the phase difference between signals For a 3V3A three voltage three current For a 3P3W three phase three wire wiring system wiring system U1 1 U2 1 and U3 1 are line voltages U1 1 U2 1 and U3 1 are line voltages 11 1 12 1 and 13 1 are line currents 11 1 12 1 and 13 1 are line currents However U3 1 and 13 1 are not actually measured for the three phase three wire system The vectors are displayed through computation 185 73 U 3 5238 A 185 73 U 3 5241 A Wiring A 3P3U Wiring A 3U3A PLL Src PLL Src Frequency 0 4657KW Frequency 9 4656kU gu1 U2 6545kUA gu1 U2 9 6545kUA gui ug 8 4600kvar gui ug 8 4600kvar gui I1 gui 11 h u1 12 u1 12 401 13 qu1 13 6017kUA 9 2341kvar 0 9212 22 90
266. ceeeeseeeeeneeteeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeetens 9 13 IM 760101 01E xi as 7 Contents 9 7 9 8 9 9 Interpolating the Display and Changing the GratiCule ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetens 9 16 Turning ON OFF the Scale Value and Waveform Label 0 seeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 19 Performing Cursor Measurements ce ceeecceeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeesaeeeaeeseeeeaeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeaeees 9 21 Chapter 10 Trend Display 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 Retrieving Trend Display Data 0 eeecceesseeeeeseeeteeeeeeeeseeeeeeneesesaeeneeseeeseeeeeeeseetensaeeneees 10 1 Selecting the Trend Display Target cccccescesseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeesaeeseaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaes 10 2 Turning ON OFF the Trend Display ccccececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeeeeeseaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeeeeesnaten 10 6 Splitting the Screen and Displaying Trends eeccesceseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeaeesseeeseeseneeeaees 10 8 Setting the TIMEAXIS inas caches deste Wee ead A ee ie 10 10 Setting the Scalene hed Ai ie ae clad 10 12 Performing Cursor Measurements cccsceeecceeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseeeeaeeseaeeeieeteneeeaes 10 14 Restarting the Trend tcc30 cia ila einige eet 10 18 Chapter 11 Storing and Recalling Data and Saving the Stored Data 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 Setting the Store Mode usoniene aeaea e ia sea ai aah wees 11 1 Setting the Store Count the Store Interval and the Store Reservation T
267. ch is turned ON the self test starts automatically When the self test completes successfully the display shows the screen that is displayed when the power switch is turned OFF Note If the instrument does not operate as described above when the power switch is turned ON turn OFF the power switch and check the following points Check that the power cord is securely connected to the outlet e Check that the correct voltage is coming to the power outlet see section 3 5 Connecting the Power Supply Check that the fuse is not blown see section 16 5 Replacing the Power Fuse e If the power switch is turned ON while pressing RESET the setup parameters are initialized to their factory default values For information on initialization see section 15 3 Initializing the Settings If the instrument still does not work after checking these points contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs 3 20 IM 760101 01E 3 10 Turning ON OFF the Power Switch For Making Accurate Measurements Allow the instrument to warm up for at least an hour after turning ON the power switch Perform zero level compensation after warm up see section 15 4 Performing Zero Level Compensation Shutdown Operation The setup parameters that exist immediately before the power switch is turned OFF are stored in memory The same is true when the power cord gets disconnected from the outlet The next time the power sw
268. combination of a measurement function and element number Urms1 for example constitutes an operand Four equations F1 through F4 can be defined for normal measurement and harmonic measurement Operators There are 11 types of operators ABS absolute value SQR square SQRT square root LOG logarithm LOG10 common logarithm EXP exponent and NEG negation Number of Operands There can be up to 16 operands in one equation Delta Computation For procedures see section 6 5 Delta computation can be performed during normal measurement For example if elements 1 2 and 3 are assigned to wiring A the sum or difference of the instantaneous values sampled data of the voltage or current between elements 1 2 and 3 can be determined Then from the results the measurement functions AUrms Alrms AUmn Almn AUdc Aldc AUac and Alac can be determined This operation is called delta computation The delta computation can be used for example to perform star to delta transformation of a three phase AC circuit For the equation see appendix 2 The measurement period is the same as that described in section 1 2 Measurement Function and Measurement Period Equation for the Apparent Power For procedures see section 6 6 The apparent power can be determined by the product of the voltage and current The voltage and current can be selected from the four types 1 the true rms value 2 the rectified me
269. contains characters which are not 12 6 allowed or the file name is not a valid MS DOS file name Enter another file name 802 Cannot be set in the normal measurement mode Set the measurement mode to harmonic 7 1 803 Cannot be set in the harmonic measurement Set the measurement mode to normal 7 1 mode 805 Cannot change this parameter when averaging Turn OFF the averaging function 5 6 is ON 806 Cannot change this parameter when any of Turn OFF all user defined functions 6 4 7 8 the user defined functions is ON 808 Cannot change this parameter during numerical display 809 Cannot change this parameter during vector display 810 Cannot change this parameter during bar graph display 812 Cannot be set while storing recalling of data being performed 813 Cannot be set while integration is running Reset Integration 6 11 816 Cannot set selected Harmonics Object with 5 1 current Wiring Pattern 820 Cannot be set while trend sampling is running 10 1 823 Cannot change during CAL Wait until CAL is completed 15 4 827 Illegal math expression Input a correct computing equation 6 4 7 8 834 Duplicate SCSI ID Set different ID numbers 12 4 840 Attempted to start integration when wave Turn OFF the wave sampling function 9 1 sampling was ON 841 Attempted to start integration after Reset Integration 6 11 integration time has reached its preset value 842 Attempted to start integration while
270. ct the target for the specified trigger condition trigger source from the following list of choices The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements U1 11 U2 12 U3 13 U4 14 U5 15 U6 16 and Ext Clk external clock If the trigger source is set to Ext Clk apply a signal according to the following specifications If the trigger source is set to Ext Clk the trigger level settings are void When Setting the Trigger Source to Ext Clk Apply a trigger signal to the external clock input connector EXT CLK on the rear panel according to the following specifications A T CLK Item Specification Connector type BNC connector Input level TTL Minimum pulse width 1 us Trigger delay time Within 1 us 1 sample period AN CAUTION Applying a voltage outside the range of 0 to 5 V to the external clock input connector EXT CLK can damage the instrument 9 6 IM 760101 01E 9 3 Setting the Trigger Input Circuit for the External Trigger Signal and Time Chart 5 V EXT CLKj99 0 External trigger signal AM Zz V Minimum pulse width External trigger when set to l Trigger delay time Internal trigger Selecting the Trigger Slope The up and down movement of a signal level is called a slope When the slope is used as one of the trigger conditions it is called a trigger slope You can select the trigger slope from the following list of choices
271. ct your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Abnormal Behavior Stop using the instrument if there are any symptoms of trouble such as strange odors or smoke coming from the instrument If these symptoms occur immediately turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord In addition turn OFF the power to the measurement circuits that are connected to the input terminals Then contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Power Cord Nothing should be placed on top of the power cord The power cord should also be kept away from any heat sources When unplugging the power cord from the outlet never pull by the cord itself Always hold and pull by the plug If the power cord is damaged check the part number indicated on page iii and purchase a replacement General Handling Precautions Do Not Place Objects on Top of the Instrument Never stack the instruments or place other instruments or any objects containing water on top of the instrument Such act can lead to malfunction Keep Electrically Charged Objects Away from the Instrument Keep electrically charged objects away from the input terminals They may damage the internal circuitry Do Not Damage the LCD The LCD is very vulnerable to scratches Therefore be careful not to damage the surface with sharp objects Also do not apply vibration or shock to it When Not Using the Instrument for a Extended Time Turn OFF the power to the measurement circuit and the instrument and remove the power cord from the outlet
272. ction 5 9 Holds the maximum value of the numerical data Holds the data of measurement functions Urms Umn Udc Uac Irms Imn Idc lac P S Q U pk U pk l pk and I pk as well as the data of the function of these functions while the MAX hold function is enabled Master Slave Synchronized Measurement For procedures see section 5 10 With the master instrument outputting measurement start and stop signals and the slave instrument receiving those signals synchronized measurement on two instruments is achieved IM 760101 01E 1 13 suoljoun jo uoneuejdxa gt 1 4 Numeric Display The numerical data can be displayed The display format differs between normal measurement and harmonic measurement In addition the screen can be divided into top and bottom halves so that the numerical data can be displayed simultaneously with waveforms bar graphs or trends explained later Display Resolution The display resolution for voltage current active power apparent power reactive power and so on is 60000 When the range rating rated value of the specified range is applied the function of voltage current active power apparent power reactive power and so on is set to the decimal point position and unit of the element with the lowest display resolution of the target elements For the display resolution during integration see section 6 11 Numerical Display during Normal Measurement For procedures see sections 4 1 an
273. ctor Outputs image signals Section 15 2 D A output connector option Outputs numeric data that has been converted to analog DC voltage Section 15 1 IM 760101 01E 2 1 Front Panel Rear Panel and Top View Top View Rear Panel Vent holes are also present on the bottom side Vent holes Section 3 2 P 202o202020909020202020 SeSesesesoseseges 9peoe2o0e092929 20090909 Seeosesoeesesosesesorceo Sesescessescsaste etaGs 22209008990090920 000893 PERREN 3 Osasasesetososozo 82000202000009020 Seepseseuscveese PRR RRR sbesseseoses 9282998989892082 090902000200 RR Se coseescesst ER 9288850353 Sesesesesegogozecogozoco 2000000000009099 33822989898s 020909000909 Seesesceeessescee RES eee Seeeescaasoseeescee SBE aoaaa eass Seoseeesseceesseeesscees 8030808000809000 229800909990 Sessececeosases S 3 Front Panel IM 760101 01E 2 2 2 2 Operation Keys Jog Shuttle Common to All Functions r ESC key Clears and escapes from the current menu RESET key Press this key to reset the value to default SELECT key Confirms the selection made using the jog shuttle or the set value EES Belmore SHIFT key ESC Sa ammo After pressing SHIFT to light the indicator suo bcc Usa above and to the left of SHIFT x press an operation key t
274. ctor display is used to show the amplitude and phase relationships of the voltage and current Taking the positive vertical axis to be the reference an angle in the counter clockwise direction is taken to be positive To clearly indicate that the graph is showing a vector a dot is placed on the top of the symbol representing the value The amplitude of the vector represents the rms value When the current lags the voltage When the current leads the voltage A A ut The vector display of the voltage and current of a three phase AC signal would look something like the following figure 14 App 19 IM 760101 01E z xipueddy Appendix 5 Power Basics Power Harmonics Three Constants Related to the AC Circuit AC power Because a phase difference depending on the load exists between the voltage and current AC power is not as easily determined as DC power When the instantaneous voltage is u Umsinot and the instantaneous current is i Imsin t p the instantaneous power p is p u x i Umsinat x Imsin wt Ulcoso Ulcos 2at 6 where U and represent the rms values of the voltage and current respectively p becomes the sum of the time independent term Ulcos and the AC component of twice the frequency of the voltage or current Ulcos 2at 6 The mean value of power over one period is called the AC power Taking the mean over one period the AC power P becomes P Ulcos
275. ctor is 1 the rotating speed is equal to the number of rotations per minute min or rom When the revolution signal is a changed signal you can set the scaling factor See previous item to determine the rotating speed before the change Setting the Unit of Rotating Speed Number of Characters Eight characters or less e Types of characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard or spaces IM 760101 01E 8 9 uondo uoljenjeaq 1030 e 8 5 Setting the Scaling Factor and Unit Used to Measure the Torque o B SES pispLay HoLp VR RATE FILE STORE copy ES SINGLE STORE SET MENU o TRIGD o amp REMOTE oa WAVE Hanmonics Locat msc CURSOR TOMAX HOLD O NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC Fa FILTER AVG MEA CAL INTEGRATOR mma STOP Ri INTEG SET RESET i H E START Procedure 1 Press SHIFT RANGE MOTOR SET to display the Motor Set dialog box Setting the Scaling Factor Used to Transform the Torque Signal 2 Turn the jog shuttle to select Scaling under Torque 3 Press SELECT to display the scaling factor setting box 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the scaling factor For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 5 Press SELECT or ESC to close the bo
276. current exceeds 50 Arms Connecting to the Input Terminal e Voltage input terminal Insert the safety terminal the conductive parts are not exposed into the voltage input terminal e Current input terminal e When the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current input terminals do not touch the current sensor input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous e When connecting measurement cables from an external current sensor to the current sensor input connector remove the cables connected to the current input terminals In addition when the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current sensor input terminal do not touch the current input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous e The screws used on the terminal binding post are M6 screws Either wind the wire around the screw or pass the crimp on lugs through the screw axis then tighten firmly by holding the terminal knob Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems The selectable wiring systems vary depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the instrument You may be able to select only a single type of wiring system or two or three types of wiring systems For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 1 3 Measurement Condit
277. d 6 7 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select Numeric Bar Press SELECT to select Bar Turn the jog shuttle to select the element or measurement function that you wish to specify Press SELECT When the button to the left of the selected element or measurement function is highlighted the numerical data of the measurement function of the element will be printed When the highlighting of the button is cleared the numerical data of the measurement function of the element will not be printed K Copy to Printer Information Nuneric Bar funeric Bar Element 1 0 Element 2 o Element 3 Element 4 Element Function u I P OFF PN List Item Print Data List Exec Ead Paper Feed Abort Element 5 Element 6 S A w sa 2 R Xs UUUUGUUE E IM 760101 01E 14 9 uondo Jeu Ul INg g 14 3 Printing Numerical Data Lists and Bar Graphs Executing Aborting the Print Operation 10 Press ESC to close the List Item dialog box Executing the Print Operation 11 Press the Print Data List Exec soft key The numerical data list is printed Aborting the Print Operation 12 Press the Abort soft key in the Copy menu n Copy to Printer Information OFF pr W List Item Print Data List Exec li m KA Comment Paper Feed Abort BE Explanation During Norma
278. d ready in the real reset and the integration is ready to be started during cancelled or time integration fsa done Oui 100U ESC u1 109V Oui 100V AUi 1000V oll 19U ll 10V oll 10U oll 5A V Integ Reset Integ Start Integ Stop Integ Ready 94 26 wie a wie sa we sa wie ea Integ Reset Integ Start Integ Stop Integ Stop 94 3 0 No soa Na soa N soa aura sen ry Integ Reset Integ Start Integ Stop Integ Stop Asua 10000 Apua 10000 Aua 10000 Cua 1000 O14 50A AVCI 50A O14 50A O14 50A 0 00 V Integ Reset Integ Start Integ Stop Integ Stop is soa ers sen eure sen curs ooa Integ Reset Integ Start Integ Stop Integ Stop A 904 26 V Aie eoa Aie sen cure soa Aie son e Integ Reset Integ Start Integ Stop Integ Stop 6 32 IM 760101 01E 6 11 Performing Integration Start Stop and Reset Performing Integration in the Real time Integration Mode 1 e e 4 e e e 7 Note Check that the integration mode is set to real time normal integration R Normal or real tie repetitive integration R Continuous See section 6 9 Check that the integration timer and the reservation time are specified See section 6 9 Starting the integration Press START The START indicator above and to the left of the key blinks and the instrument enters the ready condition When the reservation time for starting the integration is reached the START indicator changes to illumination
279. d 6 1 Selecting the Number of Displayed Items You can select the number of displayed items in the range from 4 to all When the numerical data is displayed simultaneously with waveforms bar graphs or trends only half of the selected number of items is displayed Not all the data can be displayed on one screen Thus you can scroll through the displayed items to view the succeeding data e Example in which eight items are displayed Urms1 3 1290 V Umn1 4 5265 V Ude 1 1 1130 V Uac1 5 0068 V Irms1 4 9235 A Imn1 4 9231 A Idc1 0 0434 A Iac1 4 9233 A ead uoloun zu waINSe IN e Example in which all items are displayed Element and wiring system Elementi Element Element3 Element4 Element5 z Urms U 1 94 6 0 0000k 0 0000k 0 0000k 0 0000k Um V J 94 64 0 0000k 0 0000k 0 0000k 0 0000k o Udc V J 0 05 0 0001k 0 0000k 0 0000k 0 0000k o Uac V 1 94 66 0 0000k 0 0000k 0 0000k 0 0600k IrmsiA 1 6 0031k 0 0000 0 163 0 168 0 165 c Im A 1 0000k 0 0000 0 000 0 000 0 000 oO Idc A 1 0 0000k 0 0003 0 008 0 006 0 006 3 Iac A 1 0 0031k 0 0000 0 163 0 168 0 165 o P wid 0 00k 0 0000k 0 000k 0 000k 0 000k 5 S VA J 0 29k 0000k 0 000k 0 000k 0 000k o Gaa Q var 0 29k 0 0000k 0 000k 0 000k 0 000k D h A IE l1 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 m c Elenent6 A B zc D Ss Urns 1 6 0000k 94 66 0 0000k 0 0000k o Um YV 0 0000k 94 64 0 0000k 0 0000k Udc V 1 8 0000k 0 05 0 0001k 0 0000k e Uac U 0 0
280. d C2 x 54 HARMONICS Mode Off Object ZA PLL Source U1 Min Order 1 Max Order 100 Thd Formula 1 Total Window Width 8192 STORE Store Status Off STORE SET Mode Store Store To Memory Store Setting Mode Manual Count 100 Store Interval 00 00 00 Store Item Numeric List Item Element1 On U On MAX HOLD Max Hold Off NULL Null Off App 10 IM 760101 01E Appendix 3 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numerical Data Item Setting MOTOR SET displayed when the optional motor evaluation function is installed Range Speed 20V Range Torque 20 V Sense Type Analog Pulse Range 10000 0000 Line Filter Off Scaling Speed 1 0000 Scaling Torque 1 0000 Scaling Pm 1 0000 Unit Speed rpm Unit Torque Nm Unit Pm W Pulse N 60 Pole 2 Sync Speed 11 Sync Source None Settings That Are Not Initialized through Initialization MISC Initialize Settings Item Setting FILE File Item Setup Data Type Binary when File Item is Wave ASCII when File Item is Numeric COPY MENU Copy To File Format TIFF when Copy To is File Color Off when Copy To is File Information Off when Copy To is Printer Format ESC P2 when Copy To is Net Print Color Off when Copy To is Net Print MISC Communication GP IB Address 1 RS232 Band Rate 19200 Format 8 No 1 Rx Tx No No Terminator Cr Lf Date Time Display On Config Message ENG LCD Brightness 2 Crest Factor CF3 Key Lock OFF Graph Color Mode Default Text
281. d connection Chapter 13 755 FTP Error Rm Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 756 FTP Error List Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 757 FTP Error Mkdir Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 758 FTP Error Rmdir Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 759 FTP Error Get Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 760 FTP Error Put Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 761 FTP Error GetData Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 762 FTP Error PutData Confirm the network settings connection Chapter 13 and disk capacity 763 FTP Error AppendData Confirm the network settings connection Chapter 13 and disk capacity 764 FTP Error Client Handle Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 765 FTP Error Others Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 785 Cannot send data to a network printer Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 786 Cannot send a mail Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 IM 760101 01E 16 3 g uonsedsu pue ooueuajueyy HunooysajqnoiL 16 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Error in Setting Code Message Corrective Action Sections 800 Illegal date time Set the correct date and time 3 11 801 Illegal file name The file name
282. d input elements For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 1 3 Measurement Conditions SOURCE LOAD LOAD Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 3 10 IM 760101 01E 3 6 Directly Wiring the Circuit under Measurement Wiring Example of a Three Phase Three Wire System 3P3W If there are six input elements three three phase three wire systems can be set up elements 1 and 2 elements 3 and 4 and elements 5 and 6 The assignment of elements to the input terminals in the figure varies depending on the number of installed input elements For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 1 3 Measurement Conditions ae 1 l LOAD l R SOURCE 0 R gig U s T SOURCE LOAD T S 12 NS U Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 Wiring Example of a Three Voltage Three Current System 3V3A If there are six input elements two three voltage three current systems can be set up elements 1 2 and 3 and elements 4 5 and 6 The assignment of elements to the input terminals in the figure varies depending on the number of installed input elements For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 1 3 Measurement Conditions p SOURCE LOAD
283. d of the screen with the left end of the screen taken to be the 0 point During normal measurement retrieval of waveform display data OFF Indicates the relative time of cursor from the left end of the screen with the left end of the screen taken to be 0 s The numerical value on the menu indicates the position of cursor in terms of data points from the left end of the screen with the left end of the screen taken to be the 0 point During Harmonic Measurement Indicates the position of cursor in terms of data points from the left end of the screen with the left end of the screen taken to be the 0 point Xx X axis value of cursor x from the left end of the screen During normal measurement retrieval of waveform display data ON Indicates the position of cursor x in terms of data points from the left end of the screen with the left end of the screen taken to be the 0 point During normal measurement retrieval of waveform display data OFF Indicates the relative time of cursor x from the left end of the screen with the left end taken to be 0 s The numerical value on the menu indicates the position of cursor x in terms of data points from the left end of the screen with the left end of the screen taken to be the 0 point During Harmonic Measurement Indicates the position of cursor x in terms of data points from the left end of the screen with the left end of the screen taken to be the 0 point AX The difference between the X axis valu
284. d synchronization source is displayed by the element displayed at the upper right corner of the screen Sync Src Elenent ESC K Element Element Object Element 1 Item Down Exec Object Element 1 Element 1 E JUUOUOU Iten Up Exec Element 2 Item Element 3 Hf Down Exec Element 4 Element 5 Elenent 6 x C C L Item Copy Exec i I Copy Exec 6 4 IM 760101 01E 6 2 Setting the Measurement Period Explanation Copying the Synchronization Source The synchronization source specified for a given element can be set to the elements of the same wiring unit The synchronization source for other elements that were specified before is not held 3 Press one of the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element from which the information is to be copied the copy source 4 Press the Item Copy Exec soft key The synchronization source of the copy source is copied to the elements of the same wiring unit However if the wiring system is pattern 1 the measurement range is copied to all other elements Element 1 Element 2 Element Object Element 1 Item Up Exec Item Down Exec K Element 3 Element 4 Element 5 Element 6 Item Copy Exec UUUUUULUE Iten Copy Exec During normal measurement the numerical data is measured or computed using the sampled data in the measurement period
285. displayed Selecting the Current Sensor Input Connector 4 Press the Terminal soft key to select Sen Setting the Current Sensor Range 5 Press the Range Up Exec or Range Down Exec soft key to set the current sensor range The specified range is displayed by the element displayed at the upper right corner of the screen Pressing the Range Up Exec soft key increases the current sensor range If you press the Range Up Exec soft key when the range is at maximum auto range is enabled Pressing the Range Down Exec soft key decreases the current sensor range 6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to set the current sensor range of all elements ETenent ESC Range ESC ESG 4 Element Element Object Elenent 1 Object Elenent 1 Element 1 Element 2 U Range Up Exec U Range Up Exec U Range Down Exec Element 3 U Range Down Exec ifa Ffa Terminal Direct Terminal Terminal pen Element 4 Direct Sen I Range Element 5 Up Exec I Range Up Exec I Range Up Exec I Range Element 6 Doun Exec I Range Down Exec I Range Down Exec Range Copy Exec Range Copy Exec Range Copy Exec Range Copy Exec C1028000 UUUBUUU ER aH oi a 5 10 IM 760101 01E 5 3 Setting the Measurement Range When Using an External Current Sensor Copying the Current Sensor Range The current sensor range specifi
286. dt Sf RS i ae are ae a Fork as oe We MASTOT raratan aniidae i EA 5 26 PTET On KYS or master slave synchronized measurement 1 13 ipa Py MAX res cexescensatceasronduceevtustefosceetelunsnetvnescuseninerspdeetetpaitaniatheael Or220 ce a ae BAAN ho ssccecesdionies ceattioetseccccaaecines 1 13 5 25 a Wh dated E E ddd day cab dad cu EREE EE E maximum harmonic order to be analyzed ee 7 11 tod comman ee RETA e R R Gn A ete MaX MUM OUTPUT CUFTEN ossssssessesisesiesineieeinsrrrernnrrnernsrreene 17 13 Own ID maximum power consumption 947219 OWN ID bsssssssssssssssssrsssssnrsnnenssnrrnnsnnsnnsnnsnnennsnnnennnnnnnnnsnnnns maximum value App 17 MOAN VAIUC asais ieira rea a App 18 P MEASUFE ooo eee eee 5 26 6 7 6 12 6 15 6 18 7 15 measurement function symbols meanings Of 4 6 4 8 P P COMPIESSION i e ccisevacceseccesstssetcersceoccenvensscessecerssecestonoeces 1 24 measurement function types harmonic measurement 1 5 package Contents Of sessessesseesseecsseesseesseeseseeseneeeseeeees ii measurement function types motor evaluation funct 1 7 PAPEL FOOT oo eese sess tecssteesteesseeeseeenteeseesnessanessnteneessateass 14 2 measurement function types normal measurement 1 3 PALtIRIOMS ee eeeseeeeeeeeceteceeeeecseeeeeneeeeneeteeneeteneteeees 12 8 12 10 measurement functions of integration cccccceseeees 1 20 PASSWOID 0 eee 13 9 13 10 13 20 13 21 IM 760101 01E Index 3 A i
287. e 6 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 7 Use the keyboard to enter the user name e For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings When not restricting the access specify anonymous If you specify anonymous you do not have to set the password Setting the Password If you set user name to anonymous in step 7 you do not have to set the password 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select Password 9 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 10 Use the keyboard to enter the password For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Setting the Timeout Time 11 Turn the jog shuttle to select Time Out 12 Press SELECT to display the timeout time selection box 13 Turn the jog shuttle to set the timeout time For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 14 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box User Account User Nane ANONYMOUS Password Time Out sec Accessing the WT1600 15 Execute an FTP client software on the PC or workstation 16 Access the WT1600 using the user name and password specified in the previous section 13 20 IM 760101 01E 13 6 Accessing the WT1600 from a PC or Workstation FTP Server Function Displaying the Logging List 17 Press the Connect Log List soft key to display the access log of the WT1600 Net Drive Setup Net Print Setup
288. e Current 50 A input element e Direct input Peak value of 450 A or RMS value of 300 A whichever is less e Current sensor input Peak value less than or equal to 10 times the measurement range Continuous maximum allowable input Voltage Peak value of 1500 V or RMS value of 1000 V whichever is less Current 5 A input element e Direct input Peak value of 10 A or RMS value of 7 A whichever is less e Current sensor input Peak value less than or equal to 5 times the measurement range Current 50 A input element e Direct input Peak value of 150 A or RMS value of 50 A whichever is less e Current sensor input Peak value less than or equal to 5 times the measurement range IM 760101 01E 17 1 h Ey suoneoyioeds 17 1 Input Item Specification Continuous maximum common mode voltage 50 60 Hz 600 Vrms Influence from common mode voltage When 600 Vrms is applied with the voltage input terminals shorted and current input terminals open 50 60 Hz 0 01 of range or less 0 01 x 15 rated value of the range of range or less for 10 V range or less Up to 100 kHz reference value 0 1 x f of range or less 0 1 x f x 15 rated value of range of range or less for 10 V range or less Twice this value if the crest factor is set to 6 Except at least 0 01 The unit of frequency f is kHz Line filter Select from OFF 500 Hz and 5 5 kHz Zero crossing filter
289. e input signal as a function of time and the period of the input signal respectively T 1 24 2 T e Udc Idc simple average These are the average values over one period of the voltage and current signal This function is useful when determining the average value of a DC input signal or a DC component that is superimposed on an AC input signal T 1 Udc or Idc f t dt Tlo e Uac lac AC component These are the AC components of the voltage and current They are the square root values of the difference of the square of the true rms values of the input signal and the square of the DC component Uac 4 Urms Udo F lac V Irms Idc Umn or Imn f t dt Element Element refers to a set of input terminals that can input a single phase of voltage and current to be measured The WT1600 can contain up to six elements which are numbered from 1 to 6 The element number is appended to the symbols that were defined in the earlier section Measurement functions on each input element so that the correspondence between the numerical data and the element can be seen For example Urms1 represents the true rms value of the voltage of element 1 Wiring System The selectable patterns of wiring systems vary depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the instrument You may be able to select only a single type of wiring system or two or three types of wiring systems When two or mor
290. e For details on the wiring units expressed as XA B and XC see section 5 1 Selecting the Wiring System e The trend is not displayed in places where the measurement function is not selected or where numerical data is not present The harmonic order can be set to total or from dc 0 order up to 100 order However the data determined by the harmonic measurement is the numerical data from the minimum harmonic order to be analyzed as specified in section 7 5 Min Order to the maximum order to be analyzed see section 17 6 that is automatically determined by the frequency of the PLL source e If you change the item for which the trend is displayed only the modified trend is cleared and the new trend is displayed from the cleared point position IM 760101 01E 10 5 Aejdsig pu L 2 10 3 Turning ON OFF the Trend Display Procedure ESC a N pispLay HOLD SINGLE aTRIGD o HARMONICS WAVE CURSOR UP DATE RATE FILE REMOTE LOCAL o STORE COPY STORE SET MENU pi MISC a MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC ee PUT o MOTOR SET o o RANGE UUUUUU SCALING WIRING FILTER qe NTEGRATOR me a a START STOP INTEGSET RESET measure CAL The retrieval of trend display data must be turned ON to display trends For the procedure see section 10 1 1 Press DISPL
291. e Unit of Motor Output 2 Turn the jog shuttle to select Unit under Pm 3 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 4 Use the keyboard to set the unit For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Motor Set Range Sense Typ Pulse Rani Line Filt Scaling Unit Pulse N Pole Sunc Speed Sync Source None Explanation Setting the Scaling Factor You can specify the scaling factor used to compute the motor output mechanical power from the rotating speed and torque Set the factor in the range from 0 0001 to 99999 9999 The equation is indicated below When the scaling factors of rotating speed and torque see section 8 4 and 8 5 are set so that the unit of rotating speed is min or rpm and the unit of torque is Nem and the scaling factor of the motor output specified here is 1 the unit of motor output Pm becomes W In the computation of efficiency in section 8 8 the computation is carried out by taking the unit of Pm to be W Therefore it is recommended that the scaling factors of the items be set so that the unit of Pm becomes W Motor output Pm A 4 _ 2xnx Rotating speed Scaling factor x Torque 60 1 Rotating speed derived in section 8 4 2 Torque derived in section 8 5 Note For products with ROM version 1 05 or earlier the equation for Pm is as follows Pm Rotating speed x Scaling factor x Torque
292. e WT1600 is being accessed by a PC or workstation on the network FTP server function see section 13 6 When the WT1600 is performing file operations see chapter 12 When using the FTP client function set the TCP IP parameters according to section 13 2 Setting the Ethernet Interface TCP IP To apply new settings that are made while the connection is up drop the connection using Disconnect and reconnect If a connection is dropped by the server while you are operating the FTP client the connection will be automatically reestablished when you display the File List dialog box through file operation 13 10 IM 760101 01E 13 4 Outputting the Screen Image to a Network Printer o a DISPLAY HOLD ve FILE STORES copy SINGLE STORE SI MENU oTRIGD o AN a WAVE Hanwonics MISC a OTe CURSOR ILL To exit the menu during operation press ESC es NP RANGE CALING WIRING a SE INTEGRATOR mm G STOP INTEGSET RESET O 3 D a IL o S FILTER T H H START Procedure 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 3 Press the Network soft key to display the Network menu Graph Color ESG K Text Color SCSI Setting Netuork K DA Output Itens OOUOL
293. e data update interval e You can select which input signal will be the synchronization source synchronized to the zero crossing point of the input signal for each element You can select the voltage current or external clock that is input to the element to be the synchronization source signal 1 For details on the sampled data see the description of the sampled data in the earlier section Types of Measurement Functions during Normal Measurement 2 The measurement period for determining the numerical data of the peak voltage or peak current is the entire span within the data update interval Therefore the measurement period for the measurement functions U pk U pk I pk I pk CfU Cfl FfU and Ffl that are determined from the maximum value of the voltage and current is also the entire span within the data update interval 3 Slope refers to the movement of the signal from a low level to a high level rising edge or from a high level to a low level falling edge 4 The data update interval is the interval by which the data is sampled for determining the measurement functions This is equivalent to the value you can specify in Data Update Rate of section 1 3 Data update interval Data update interval Data update interval Measurement period te Measurement period le Measurement period Input signal U1 Input signal U2 Input signal U3 ne During Harmonic Me
294. e displayed on the keyboard and spaces Note e An equation F1 to F4 cannot be placed inside another equation F1 to F4 e f an operand in the equation is undetermined the computation result displays no data For example if the measurement function of an element that is not installed is in the equation 7 18 IM 760101 01E 7 9 Changing the Display Items of Bar Graphs and Performing Cursor Measurements Procedure a RANGE scaune WIRING MOTOR SET o a rom we oad CAL e NTEGRATOR mw g a START STOP sinc sac INTEG SET RESET For a functional description see section 1 8 o a pispLay Hop Y PATE FILE STORE copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o REMOTE a HARMONICS ams ance ocn wee pe iN i CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC Check that the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement If the measurement mode is set to normal measurement set Mode to ON in the Harmonics menu see section 7 1 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Bar Numeric Bar Wave Bar or Bar Trend For the display format of the bar graph see section 4 3 When the display format is set to Numeric Bar Wave Bar or Bar Trend pressing the Bar Setting soft key displays the Bar Settin
295. e distorted or the amplitude level is small with respect to the measurement range the specifications may not be met To achieve accurate measurements on the high orders of the harmonics set the PLL source to external clock and apply a signal with the same period as the input signal to the external clock input connector If the fundamental frequency is less than or equal to 440 Hz and the signal contains high frequency components it is recommended that the zero crossing filter be set to 500 Hz The cut off frequency of this filter is 500 Hz and is valid only for the frequency measurement circuit If the amplitude level of the signal input to the element specified as the PLL source is small with respect to the range PLL synchronization may not be achieved If the crest factor is set to 3 set the measurement range so that the amplitude level of the PLL source is at least 30 If the crest factor is set to 6 set the measurement range so that the amplitude level of the PLL source is at least 60 When the PLL source frequency changes the correct measured values are displayed starting from the 4th data update after the change 7 10 IM 760101 01E 7 5 Setting the Harmonic Order to Be Analyzed o a ose ay HOLD cad FILE srone COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU ATRIGD g REMOTE a Fae om foe me CURSOR j TOMAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC lt lt PUT a RANGE scaunel W
296. e filter is set to both the revolution signal and the torque signal OT 02 ND Motor Set Speed Torque Range 1 200 Sense Type Anaig puise J Pulse Range 9 0900 C10000 0000 Scaling 1 0000 Unit y Pulse N Pole Sync Speed C sume Source Explanation A line filter can be inserted into the circuits that measure the revolution signal and torque signal It eliminates harmonic noise The cutoff frequency can be selected from the list of choices below OFF and 100 Hz Selecting OFF disables the filter Note When the revolution signal type is Pulse the line filter does not function 8 6 IM 760101 01E 8 4 Setting the Scaling Factor the Pulse Count and Unit Used to Measure the Rotating Speed a a UP DATE DISPLAY HOLD RAE FILE STORE copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTAGD a REMOTE a WAVE HARMONICS PON CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC EC rom we e CAL e NTEGRATOR mm g a START STOP R INTEG SET RESET Procedure 1 Press SHIFT RANGE MOTOR SET to display the Motor Set dialog box Setting the Scaling Factor Used to Transform the Revolution Signal 2 Turn the jog shuttle to select Scaling under Speed 3 Press SELECT to display the scaling facto
297. e if DHCP can be used If you use DHCP a different IP address may be assigned every time the WT1600 is powered up You must be careful when using the FTP server function of the WT1600 IP Address Internet Protocol Address Enter the IP address assigned to the WT1600 The default setting is 0 0 0 0 The IP address is used to uniquely identify a device on the Internet when using TCP IP The address is a 32 bit value expressed using four octets each 0 to 255 each separated by a period as in 192 168 111 24 A unique IP address must be obtained from the network administrator If DHCP can be used the address is automatically assigned IM 760101 01E 13 5 uondo suonesiunwwos 3Uu194 3 g 13 2 Setting the Ethernet Interface TCP IP Subnet Mask Enter the mask value used when determining the subnet network address from the IP address The default setting is 255 255 255 0 Consult your network administrator for the appropriate value You may not need to set the value If DHCP can be used the subnet mask is automatically assigned Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default gateway that is used when communicating with other devices on a different segment network unit The default setting is 0 0 0 0 Consult your network administrator for the appropriate value You may not need to set the value If DHCP can be used the default gateway is automatically assigned DNS Domain Name System DN
298. e moved If you select both Trend C1 and Trend C2 x the two cursors can be moved without changing the spacing between the two The value of the digit being specified by Trend C1 changes Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Cursor Select e T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T T8 Td T16 v Trend Cursor Cursor Trend Cursor W Trend C1 6 Trend c2 x 54 IM 760101 01E 10 15 Aejdsig pu L 2 10 7 Performing Cursor Measurements Explanation ON OFF A cursor can be placed on the displayed trend to measure and display the value at that point It can be used to measure the data on the vertical axis Y axis and horizontal axis X axis of various sections of the trend ON Performs cursor measurement OFF Does not perform cursor measurement Measurement Target Select the target trend for the cursor measurement from T1 to T16 Measured Items Y Vertical value of cursor Y axis value Yx Vertical value of cursor x Y axis value AY The difference between the Y axis values of cursor and cursor x X X axis value of cursor from the left end of the screen During normal measurement retrieval of waveform display data ON see section 9 1 Indicates the position of cursor in terms of data points from the left en
299. e on won oe CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC I RANGE scaunel WIRING MOTOR SET STOP INTEG SET RESET A START H Procedure During Normal Measurement 1 Press AVG to display the Avg menu Turning ON OFF the Averaging Function 2 Press the Averaging soft key to select ON or OFF Selecting the Averaging Type 3 Press the Avg Type soft key to select Exp or Lin Setting the Attenuation Constant or the Average Count 4 Press the Count soft key 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the attenuation constant or the average count For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings If the averaging type is Exp exponential averaging set the attenuation constant If the averaging type is Lin moving averaging set the average count oH Q JUUUUOUE IM 760101 01E 5 19 SUOI IPUOD JUBWsINSea Y 5 6 Averaging During Harmonic Measurement If Mode is turned ON in the Harmonics menu see section 7 1 the instrument enters the harmonic measurement mode f Press AVG to display the Avg menu Turning ON OFF the Averaging Function 2 Press the Averaging soft key to select ON or OFF Averaging DE oN Explanation The averaging function is effective when reading of the numerical display is difficult due to fluctuations
300. e section 7 6 The measurement functions Uhdf Ihdf Phdf Uthd Ithd and Pthd during harmonic measurement have two defining equations that you can select from For the equations see appendix 1 IM 760101 01E 1 19 1 6 Integration The WT1600 can integrate the active power watt hour and current current hour During integration the measured and computed values of normal measurements can be displayed in addition to the watt hour current hour and integration time However integration cannot be performed when the waveform display is turned ON Measurement Functions of Integration Measurement Functions on Each Input Element The following seven types of numerical data can be determined For details on the determination of each measurement function data see appendix 1 Wp watt hour sum of positive and negative watt hours Wp positive watt hour consumed Wp negative watt hour returned to the power supply regenerated energy q current hour sum of positive and negative current hours q positive current hour consumed q negative current hour returned to the power supply Time integration time Measurement functions of the sum of input elements x functions The following six types of numerical data can be determined For details on the determination of each measurement function data see appendix 1 Wpz sum of Wp Wp sum of Wp Wp 2 sum Wp q sum of q q sum of q q sum of q Integrati
301. e types of wiring systems are selected A B or C is appended to the symbols that were defined in the earlier section Measurement functions of the average or sum of input elements functions so that the correspondence between the numerical data and the wiring unit can be seen For example UrmsxA represents the true rms value of the average of the voltage of the input elements that are assigned to wiring unit ZA Efficiency n efficiency 1 is determined by the equation PXB PXA x 100 1 n efficiency 2 is determined by the equation PZA P B x 100 You can create an equation using user defined functions to determine efficiencies other than the above two In addition on models with the motor evaluation function option ymA Pm PZA x 100 and nmB Pm P B x 100 can be determined 1 4 IM 760101 01E 1 2 Measurement Function and Measurement Period Types of Measurement Functions during Harmonic Measurement The data numerical data of measurement functions during harmonic measurement is measured or computed from the sampled data described later in Measurement Period See the description of the sampled data in the earlier section Types of Measurement Functions during Normal Measurement Types of Harmonic Measurement Functions e Harmonic measurement functions on each input element The following 28 types of harmonic measurement functions are available For details on the dete
302. e value over one period of the signal As with the rms value if the mean value of the current of the instantaneous value i Imsinot is expressed as Imn then 2n 1 2 Imn Mean over one period of lil lildot Im 2T 5 T This relationship is the same for the voltage of the sine wave The maximum value rms value and mean value of an AC sine wave are related in the following way These values are used to calculate the crest factor and the form factor which are used to determine the trend of an AC signal Maximum value Crest factor Rms value Rms value Form factor Mean value App 18 IM 760101 01E Appendix 5 Power Basics Power Harmonics Three Constants Related to the AC Circuit Vector Display of an AC signal In general the instantaneous values of voltage and current are expressed by the following equations Voltage u Umsinat Current i Imsin wt 6 The time offset of the voltage and current is called the phase difference and 6 is called the phase angle This time offset is mainly created by the load that is supplied with power In general when there is only resistance in the load the phase difference is zero when there is inductance coil in the load the current lags behind the voltage when there is capacitance in the load the current leads the voltage When the current lags the voltage When the current leads the voltage The ve
303. ease lever to the HOLD position horizontal Release lever FREE MAN FEED V Roll paper Roll pocket Press SHIFT COPY MENU to display the Copy menu Press the Copy to soft key to display the Copy to menu Press the Printer soft key Press the Paper Feed soft key Each time the soft key is pressed the roll paper is fed approximately 2 cm Feed the roll paper until approximately 10 cm of paper is showing at the top of the paper roller Check that there are no slacks in the roll paper and that the roll paper is inside the roll pocket ONO M Comment Paper Feed E _ E L Roller Roll paper Roll pocket am d Press the Paper Feed soft key to take up Align the left and right edges of the paper as it the slack in the paper exits the printer so that they are even with the sides of the roll 14 2 IM 760101 01E 14 1 Installing the Paper Roll and Paper Feeding 9 Insert the roll paper that is showing in the slit of the printer cover 10 Close the printer cover Firmly press the section marked as PUSH until it clicks in place Printer cover IM 760101 01E 14 3 uondo Jeu Ul INg g 14 1 Installing the Paper Roll and Paper Feeding Explanation Printer Roll Paper Use only the dedicated roll paper provided by YOKOGAWA When using the printer for the first time use the roll paper that is included in the package
304. easurement Note After wiring the wiring system must be selected See section 5 1 Selecting the Wiring System The thick lines on the wiring diagrams are the sections where the current flows Use appropriate wires that are suitable for the current To more accurately measure apparent power and power factor in three phase unbalanced circuits we recommend the three voltage three current 3V3A measurement method The current sensor input transformation function can be used to transform the input signal to data that correspond to direct measurements For the procedures see section 5 3 Setting the Measurement Range When Using an External Current Sensor Note that the frequency and phase characteristics of the external current sensor affect the measured data Make sure you have the polarities correct when making the connections Otherwise the polarity of the measurement current will be reversed and correct measurements cannot be made Be especially careful when connecting the clamp type current sensor because it is easy to reverse the connection To minimize error when using a shunt type current sensor note the following points when connecting the external sensor cable e Connect the shielded wire of the external sensor cable to the L side of the shunt output terminal OUT e Minimize the area created between the wires connecting the current sensor to the external sensor cable The effects due to the line of magnet
305. easurement the applied voltage signal is converted to digital values at an interval that is an integer multiple of the PLL source signal cycle of the clock generated by the PLL circuit The measured value of each item of harmonic measurement is derived by performing an FFT based on the converted digital values using a DSP The measured value is transmitted to the CPU Various computed values are determined from the measured values These measured values and computed values are displayed output through a D A output or output through communications When waveform display data is not being retrieved during normal measurement the DSP and CPU processes are pipelined and the DSP process is executed in real time Therefore measurements with few data dropouts can be achieved against the input signal 1 2 IM 760101 01E 1 2 Measurement Function and Measurement Period Types of Measurement Functions during Normal Measurement The data numerical data of measurement functions during normal measurement is measured or computed from the sampled data described later in Measurement Period 1 The WT1600 samples the instantaneous values of the voltage and current signals at a specified sample rate The sampled data is processed as numerical data or data used to display waveforms on the screen waveform display data 2 Sample rate represents the number of data points that are sampled within 1 s For example at a sample rate of 200 k
306. eceived from a torque meter which is proportional to the motor s torque In addition the synchronous speed and slip of a motor can be determined by setting the motor s number of poles Furthermore the active power and frequency that are measured by the WT1600 and the motor output can be used to compute the motor efficiency and the total A efficiency The motor evaluation function does not operate during harmonic measurement CAUTION Applying a voltage exceeding the maximum allowable input to the revolution signal input connector SPEED or torque signal input connector TORQUE can damage the instrument Revolution Signal Input Connector SPEED Input the signal output from the revolution sensor a DC voltage analog signal or a pulse signal that is proportional to the rotating speed of the motor according to the following specifications A SPEED DC Voltage Analog Input Item Specification Connector type Input range Effective input range Input resistance Maximum allowable input Continuous maximum common mode voltage BNC connector 20V 10V 5V 2V and 1 V 110 of the measurement range However 20 V or less Approx 1 MQ 20 V 42 Vpeak or less Pulse Input Item Specification Connector type Frequency range Amplitude input range Effective amplitude Input waveform Input resistance Continuous maximum common mode voltage BNC connector 2 Hz to 2
307. ect the data format If you select TIFF or BMP proceed to step 9 If you selected Post Script proceed to step 11 Selecting the Color This procedure is applicable if you selected TIFF or BMP in step 8 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select Color to OFF If the data format is BMP and you selected Color or Reverse proceed to step 10 If you selected the TIFF data format or color OFF proceed to step 11 Turning ON OFF the Data Compression This procedure is applicable if you selected BMP in step 8 and Color or Reverse in Step 9 10 Press the Compression soft key to select ON or OFF For BMP Copy M Copy to File File List 4 Format BMP cJ Color Color Compression F ON File Name ESC Abort Setting the File Name and Comment 11 Same as the procedure given in Setting the File Name and Comment in section 12 6 Executing the Save Operation 12 Switch to the screen you wish to save 13 Press COPY The screen image data is saved to the directory indicated by Aborting the Save Operation 14 Press the Abort soft key in the Copy menu IM 760101 01E 12 21 eea y Buipeo7 pue Burnes D 12 7 Saving Screen Image Data Explanation You can save the screen image data Selecting the Medium and Directory Same as the explanation given in Selecting the Medium and Directory in section 12 6 Data
308. ect the wiring system for all wiring units ZA B and xC Example in which six elements are installed Wiring Element IL 1 1 Z 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 43 A ZB zC Pattern I _ iP3W 3P3U TC iP3u 3P3u TC iP3u 3Pu zA Pau ELE B ca 3P3U zc PSU ELETE IM 760101 01E 5 1 Selecting the Wiring System Explanation e The selectable wiring systems vary depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the instrument You may be able to select only a single type of wiring system or two or three types of wiring systems You can select the wiring system from the following five types 1P2W single phase two wire 1P3W single phase three wire 3P3W three phase three wire 3P4W three phase four wire and 3V3A three voltage three current The input element assignment to wiring units ZA XB and C is determined from the wiring system pattern This allows functions of voltage current active power apparent power reactive power power factor phase difference and other parameters to be determined For the relationship concerning the wiring system and the determination of the function see appendix 1 The following table shows the relationship between the number of installed elements the selectable wiring system patterns and the assignment of input elements to wiring units ZA B and C Installed input elements 1 Wiring system Pattern
309. ect_ Saving the Data To save the setup parameters waveform display data or numerical data carry out the save operation according to the procedure given in section 12 6 To save the screen image data carry out the save operation according to the procedure given in section 12 7 e However for the procedure Selecting the Save Destination Medium on page 12 14 select NDO for the medium IM 760101 01E 13 9 uondo suonesiunwwos 3Uu194 3 g 13 3 Saving Setup Waveform Display Numerical and Image Data to the FTP Server FTP Client Function Explanation The FTP client function of the WT1600 can be used to save the setup parameters waveform display data numerical data and screen image data to an FTP server on the network in a similar fashion to saving the various data on a floppy disk or the built in hard disk Save Destination FTP Server Specify the FTP server by entering the IP address If you are using DNS see section 13 2 you can specify the server by name The FTP server program must be running on the PC or workstation that is to become the save destination FTP server In addition the following points need attention regarding the server program settings e Set the list output string returned by the dir command to UNIX format e Set the home directory and its subdirectories to allow writing e The client cannot move above the home directory e The newest file is not nec
310. ection 16 3 A self test can be performed to check whether the instrument is operating properly Components such as the internal memory ROM and RAM the operation keys the floppy disk drive and the built in printer option can be tested Confirming the System Condition of the Instrument For procedures see section 16 4 The system condition of the instrument such as the model ROM version firmware version input element configuration and existence of options can be confirmed 1 34 IM 760101 01E Chapter2 Names and Uses of Parts 2 1 Front Panel Front Panel Rear Panel and Top View ESC key Jog shuttle Clears and escapes from Used when selecting setup parameters and setting values the current menu Section 2 2 QSOS co rere s 4 a Operation keys LCD Handle Keys that are pressed first when carrying out an operation Displays the first menu of the sled JO s sn pue soweN D Use the handles both sides corresponding key setting when moving the instrument Section 2 2 Section 3 1 Power switch Section 3 10 Floppy disk drive Used when saving or loading data Chapter 12 Soft keys Built in printer option Prints screen images and numeric data list Chapter 14
311. ector EXT connector EXT connector EXT Wiring Example of a Three Phase Four Wire System 3P4W Using a Shunt Type Current Sensor SOURCE R 4 LOAD N Input Input Input terminal 1 terminal 2 terminal 3 Current sensor input Current sensor input Current sensor input connector EXT connector EXT connector EXT Note For the relationship between the wiring systems and the method of determining the measured values or computed values see Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions IM 760101 01E 3 15 sjuswainseayy Buers 310499 el 3 8 Using an External PT or CT to Wire the Circuit under Measurement Connect a measurement cable from an external potential transformer PT or current transformer CT to the voltage or current input terminal of the input element To prevent the possibility of electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the precautions given in section 3 3 Wiring Precautions e An external PT can be used to make measurements when the maximum voltage of the circuit under measurement exceeds 1000 Vrms An external CT can be used to make measurements when the maximum current of the circuit under measurement exceeds the maximum range of the input element as shown below e 5 A input element When the maximum current exceeds 5 Arms e 50 A input element When the maximum
312. ed 2 Turn the jog shuttle to select Unit under Speed 3 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 4 Use the keyboard to set the unit For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Motor Set Range Sense Typ Pulse Rani Line Filt Scaling Unit Pulse N Pole Sync Speed I Syme Source 8 8 IM 760101 01E 8 4 Setting the Scaling Factor the Pulse Count and Unit Used to Measure the Rotating Speed Explanation Setting the Scaling Factor Set the factor used to transform the revolution signal Set the factor in the range from 0 0001 to 99999 9999 e When the revolution signal type is Analog By setting the number of rotations per volt of input voltage the rotating speed is derived from the following equation Speed rotating speed Input voltage from the revolution sensor x Scaling factor e When the revolution signal type is Pulse The value is used as a scaling factor in the equation given in the next item Setting the pulse count Setting the Pulse Count Set the pulse count per rotation Set the factor in the range from 1 to 9999 The scaling factor takes effect when the revolution signal type is set to Pulse in section 8 2 Number of input pulses from the revolution sensor per minute Speed rotating speed ____ _ x Scaling factor Pulse count pulse count per revolution When the scaling fa
313. ed Current Type Standard Power supply 250 V 6 3A Time lag UL VDE certified Standard Accessories e Power cord 1 piece e Spare power fuse 1 piece Attached to the fuse holder e 36 pin connector 1 piece for D A output only provided with option DA e Current input protective cover 1 piece with 4 attachment screws e Printer roll paper 2 rolls only provided with option B5 e Rubber feet 2 sets User s manual 1 piece this manual Communication interface user s manual 1 piece Safety standard Complying standard EN61010 1 Overvoltage category Installation category II Measurement Category CAT II Pollution degree 2 Emission Complying standard EN61326 Class A EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 AS NZS 2064 Class A This product is a Class A for commercial environment product For operating of this product in a residential area it may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Cable requirement EXT CLK EXT MEAS START EXT MEAS STOP TORQUE SPEED terminal Use a BNC cable SCSI connector Use a SCSI shielded cable Serial RS 232 connector Use a RS 232 shielded cable GPIB connector Use a GPIB shielded cable DA output terminal Use a shielded cable RGB video signal output VGA connector Use a D sub 15 pin VGA shielded cable When the measurement cable is connected it may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take ad
314. ed by setting the motor s number of poles Furthermore the active power and frequency that are measured by the WT1600 and the motor output can be used to compute the motor efficiency and the total efficiency Types of Measurement Functions Speed rotating speed Torque Pm motor output or mechanical power synchronous speed Sync Slip motor efficiency nmA and total efficiency nmB For details on the determination of the measurement functions see appendix 1 IM 760101 01E 1 7 1 2 Measurement Function and Measurement Period Synchronization source Measurement Period During Normal Measurement The numerical data is measured or computed using the sampled data in the measurement period that is determined according to the following principle The measurement period is set between the first point where the reference input signal synchronization source crosses the level zero point center of the amplitude on the rising slope or falling slope within the data update interval and the last point where the synchronization source crosses the level zero point center of the amplitude on the rising slope or falling slope within the data update interval e The rising or falling edge is automatically selected for the one that allows the interval to be longer e Ifthe number of rising slope or falling slope is zero or one within the data update interval the measurement period is set to the entire span within th
315. ed for a given element can be set to the elements of the same wiring unit The voltage range see section 5 1 is also copied The current sensor range for other elements that were specified before is not held 3 Range Copy Exec ol Element 2 Elenent 3 Element 4 Element 5 Element 6 Press one of the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element from which the information is to be copied the copy source Press the Range Copy Exec soft key The current sensor range and the voltage range of the copy source are copied to the elements of the same wiring unit However if the wiring system is pattern 1 the measurement range is copied to all other elements G BUUUUULE Range Element Object Element 1 U Range Up Exec m LJ es TA E E ES L fil Terminal Direct I Range Up Exec I Range Down Exec Range Copy Exec Hif Setting the Current Sensor Transformation Ratio 1 Press SCALING to display the Scaling menu e Selecting the target element If you are setting the current sensor transformation ratio on the same element that you entered the current sensor range steps 2 and 3 are not necessary 2 Press the Element Object soft key to display the Element menu Only the installed elements are displayed Press one of the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element to select the target element The selected element is displayed at the upp
316. ed from the following is saved Only the input signals of the installed elements are applicable for the selection For models with the motor evaluation function option the input signals of Speed and Torque are also selectable items e The setup parameters including vertical axis horizontal axis and trigger of the waveform to be saved are also saved Saving the Numerical Data Select Numeric from the File Item menu to save numerical data e Selecting the data type Select the data type from the following list of choices The extension is automatically added e ASCII e Saved in ASCII format The file can be used on your PC for analysis The file cannot be loaded to the WT1600 e Float e Saved in 32 bit floating format The file cannot be loaded to the WT1600 e Extension and data size e During normal measurement DataType Extension Data Size Bytes ASCII CSV Approx 2 K condition number of elements 1 all measurement functions Float WTD When integration is not performed Approx 4 K 4 x Dn When integration is performed Approx 4 K 4 x Dn 16 x Ti Dn Number of numerical data to be saved Number of measurement functions x number of elements number of wiring units Ti Number of integration time to be saved IM 760101 01E 12 17 eea y Bulpeo7 pue Burnes D 12 6 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data and Numerical Data e During harmonic measurement DataType E
317. eeeeseeeeeaesenseaeeaeeeaes 5 18 float floppy disk drive oo eee eee eee eee eeneeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 12 1 floppy disk formatting Of eee cece eee eeeeeeeeeee 12 9 formi TACION ses scrccsieuscredsrcneeebenviesscncrntearteneetetencsveatenoeees App 18 format oo eee Format Exe oiii siiip daa eian a ae avereascers format TY POs ireira eisiaa anas Freg MNT iiss sccpaiscticcne doen decnssotteuesecsneisecpaceuicasvareayicueenstuocees frequency measurement target front panel se csccievecesscucctecectesceessetsidesdeepsscevabeveed cescerteedvenvoends F EP Clent TUNGtiON sisnsrirehendansi n 1 32 FTP passive FTP server FTP Server function ccccccccececsesseeeeeeeeesssaaeeeeeessessseaees 1 33 function 6 2 7 3 7 4 7 20 10 3 10 4 12 6 12 26 12 29 12 32 12 36 15 2 15 3 fundamental frequency App 22 App 22 fundamental wave fuss ratingen eiea araea Eaa na a 16 9 G GPB nara a a NA A a e 1 33 graph COlOr sarsii nnrir dedandani reata 15 16 graphic color 15 16 15 18 graticule oo cece eecteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeneeeteeaeeetenaeeetee 1 27 9 17 FO hard disk formatting Of cccceceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeess 12 9 Harm Item No heann e a aaien 7 3 15 3 Harmonic component harmonic distortion factor eee eee eeeeeseeeeneeeees App 22 Harmonic order ceeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeseeseeeeseeeeae
318. eees Store to stored data SAVING Of ee eee ce cent cee eeeeeteeeteeeeeaes SLOMAG cs ia avii a iian daea arere stray capacitance strings entry of subnet mask 2 SUFI EEAO AE AOE DE A N A AA ii SYMDOISitsevsqetvessiveseie endiecearecicebeleievecnetreenavenreahees den resets i Sync Measure sync source Sync Speed eee synchronization SOULCE ooo eee eee eee eee teeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeteaeeeaees 1 8 synchronization source Copying Of 0 0 cease eeeeeeeeeeee 6 5 synchronization source Selection Of s src 8 4 synchronization source setting Of eee eeeeeeeeeeee 6 4 synchronized measurement eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 13 5 26 system Condition eeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeaeeetes 1 34 16 8 system configuration esseseesseierisriesrrerierinerrerrnerrerrnrrnere 1 1 T TCPIIP aaaea TCP IP Setup bet temperature ambient oo eee eter e eee tee teeeeeeeeeee 3 2 temperature coefficient cceeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeees 17 8 17 13 terminal seeen Test Exec Test Item ad test transmission eee eee eee eee eeeee teat eeeeeeeaeeneeeeee 13 17 text Color eeeeeceeeeeeceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeteeeeetseaeeetee Thd Formula lE E ER E EA E NE TTE MEanna aa i d a a aaa Ai Umea Sannie aaa Mes timeaxis setting Of isinira erea 9 2 time lag timeout timeout time 0 0 eee eects 13 9 13 10 13 20 13 21 TIMON ACCULACY sscseccessc
319. eeneeeeneeenees 8 1 8 2 Selecting the Input Range of the Revolution and Torque Signals and the Synchronization oU AE o E AE tds aed sl set ecg 2 E hte mld aerated ae E 8 3 8 3 Selecting the Line Filter 0 ee eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeceaeeceaeeeaeecseeseaeessaeesaeesaeeeaeeseaeeeeeteas 8 6 8 4 Setting the Scaling Factor the Pulse Count and Unit Used to Measure the Rotating Speed Lonia alia play seed ie He a A sel ieee 8 7 8 5 Setting the Scaling Factor and Unit Used to Measure the Torque eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 10 8 6 Setting the Motor s Number of Poles Used to Compute the Synchronous Speed and the SHiPisitiivs AE Gia eet een eG tances nists lg i Sapte ean eee 8 12 8 7 Setting the Scaling Factor and Unit Used to Compute the Motor Output ee 8 14 8 8 Computing the Motor Efficiency and Total Efficiency 0 ee ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeetens 8 16 Chapter 9 Waveform Display 9 1 Retrieving Waveform Display Data ecsceeeseeeseneeeeenneetenneeeseaeeeeeaeeeseneeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeenaeees 9 1 9 2 Setting the Time AXiS sedenie eed N E eee 9 2 AX9 3 Setting the TIe or ness ere aoe davenhs enemies ENS EEEE denen alee 9 4 9 4 Zooming Vertically and Moving the Vertical Position 2 0 eee eeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeneeeteneeeeenaeees 9 8 9 5 Turning ON OFF the Waveform Display ceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeteatens 9 11 9 6 Splitting the Screen and Displaying Waveforms ceccee
320. efficient as defined by the applicable standard IEC34 1 1996 Telephone influence factor of voltage 1 max 1 max Utif Utif Dane U k Itif T k 1 k Telephone influence factor of current U l Itif T k Coefficient as defined by the applicable standard IEEE Std 100 1992 Harmonic voltage factor mak 3 max hvf 1 U k 1 Harmonic eel factor vf U X k 100 hef T Ir 100 hef k 2 k 2 Voltage frequency fU FreqU Hz Current frequency fl Freql Hz The frequency of up to three signals including the signals selected for the PLL source as fU voltage frequency or fl current frequency can be measured You can also select to measure only three sets of voltage frequencies or only three sets of current frequencies Wiri t Single phase Three phase Three voltage Three phase Mng System three wire 1P3W three wire 3P3W three current 3V3A four wire 3P4W UZ V U1 U2 2 U1 U2 U3 3 1 IZ A 11 12 2 11 12 13 3 2 Px W P1 P2 P1 P2 P3 S SZ VA AP 4 OS bd QS var Q1 Q2 Q1 Q2 Q3 az Ez Note e kr and j denote the harmonic order real part and imaginary part respectively max denotes the upper limit of harmonic order under analysis see section 17 6 The upper lim it is determined automatically maximum is 100 by the frequency of the PLL source e The numbers 1 2 and 3 in the equations UX IZ PZ S and Q indica
321. elect the number of numerical data items that are displayed simultaneously or list display from the following list of choices e 4 2 e When the display format is Numeric 4 numerical data values are displayed in one column When the display format is other than Numeric 2 numerical data values are displayed e 8 4 e When the display format is Numeric 8 numerical data values are displayed in one column When the display format is other than Numeric 4 numerical data values are displayed e 16 8 e When the display format is Numeric 16 numerical data values are displayed in two columns When the display format is other than Numeric 8 numerical data values are displayed 4 8 IM 760101 01E 4 1 Displaying the Data Numerical Data of Measurement Functions Note Single List e When the display format is Numeric 48 numerical data values for a single measurement function are displayed in two columns e When the display format is other than Numeric 22 numerical data values for a single measurement function are displayed in two columns Dual List e When the display format is Numeric 24 numerical data values each for two measurement functions are displayed in each column e When the display format is other than Numeric 11 numerical data values each for two measurement functions are displayed in each column gt List e When the display format is Numeric a table is displayed indicating the numerical data of items with 19
322. electing the Save Destination Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 12 6 Executing the Copy Operation 14 Press the Copy Exec soft key All the copy source files with asterisks are copied Copy Function Copy Set Reset File List Path FDO All Reset Space 1302016 byte File Name Size Date Attribut ja 4 Property Filter 2001 08 24 19 34 2001 08 24 19 35 Item Ail 2001 08 24 19 35 2001 08 24 19 36 Attribute Copy Copy Exec E 12 34 IM 760101 01E 12 11 Copying Files Explanation CAUTION Do not remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or S is blinking Such acts can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Selecting the Copy Source Destination Medium and Directory Same as the explanation given in Selecting the Medium and Directory in section 12 6 Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box Same as the explanation given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box in section 12 9 Properties Same as the explanation given in Properties in section 12 9 Selecting the File Attribute Same as the explanation given in Selecting the File Attribute in section 12 9 Selecting the Copy Source Files e By placing asterisks to the left of the file names those files can be copied e T
323. elements phase difference o functions user defined functions and so on are saved Selecting the Medium and Directory Media on which saving and reading is possible are displayed on the File List dialog box Display example of media FDO Floppy disk SC4 SCSI device whose ID number is 4 built in hard disk fixed to D4 SC5 SCSI device whose ID number is 5 see section 12 3 SC5_01 Partition 1 of a SCSI device whose ID number is 5 NDO Network drive see section 13 3 File Name and Comment A file name must be assigned Comments are optional e You cannot save to a file name that already exists in the same directory overwriting not allowed Number of Characters and Types That Can Be Used Item Number of Characters Characters That Can Be Used File name 1 to 8 characters 0 9 A Z _ parenthesis minus sign Comment 0 to 25 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces 12 18 IM 760101 01E 12 6 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data and Numerical Data Auto Naming Function When Auto Naming is turned ON files with a three digit number from 000 to 999 are automatically created when saving the data You can specify a common name up to five characters specified through Filename that is placed before the number Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box Same as the explanation given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the
324. ement During harmonic measurement Nuner ic Numer ic A11 ON All OFF Preset 1 Preset 2 Element 1 0 Element 2 0 Element 3 0 Element 4 Element Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 Element 5 c Element 6 Element 5 c Element 6 A Urns Irns F Data Type ASCII Float List Item Data Type PASCI Fioat List Item OL M M o Function Umean Imean S Uac Function u I S Iac Q A ou a ol z Rs Xs Rp xp Others K K e ae aa Frequ U peak cri U peak CEU I peak FfI Oonan xR go Re Gee eee Zz Xp Rs Pc Rp Up o0 a 7 qe 3 F4 oogoconmnmnYhnhYNYYNYE ooopooomminnmnnnn AUmean AImean eee 5 0o00 JUU Utility Utility Selecting only the items that are preset during normal measurement only 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select Preset1 or Preset2 7 Press SELECT The buttons to the left of all the elements and measurement functions that are specified in Preset1 or Preset 2 are highlighted indicating that the items will be saved Items specified in Preset1 Items specified in Preset2 List Item List Iten All ON AL OFF Preset 1 Preset 2 All ON All OFF Preset 1 Preset Z Element Element 1 gj Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 Elenent Element if j Element 2 Element 3 E
325. ency respectively Motor efficiency nmA Motor output W x 100 ZA W Total efficiency nma Motor output W 400 B W Motor output derived in section 8 7 B XZA 7 Converter Motor output Power consumption Power consumption by the motor and by the motor converter Note With this wiring system the delta computation function see section 6 5 can be used to carry out 3P3W gt 3V3A transformation From the 3P3W gt 3V3A transformation you can determine one set of line voltage and common mode current that is not being measured IM 760101 01E Chapter9 Waveform Display 9 1 Retrieving Waveform Display Data For a functional description see section 1 7 a e A omer van p e e cor A SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o REMOTE a ficou wee Co T TMAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC n PUT a v RANGE scaunel WIRING o a eqs NTEGRATOR mm g a START STOP INTEGSET RESET FILTER o Beg g Hl H CAL H Procedure 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Bar or Wave Trend For details on setting the display format see section 4 2 2 Press WAVE to display the Wave menu 3 Press the Wave Sampling soft key to select ON or OFF When turned ON retrieval of waveform display data is started according to the tri
326. enees harmonics osese FIDD MO HOM diirai iaaa aa Eiai aaie higher harmonic hold Eetererreret reece A E tree rrr tere eer rerereer ree 1 13 5 24 horizontal axis cccceeeceesseeeeeesessseeeeeeeeessseteeees 1 23 10 11 humidity ambient seeeseeseeeeessesseerrerrnsrnerrnsrnsrrerrnerrerrnrene 3 2 DEES Range Down EX C ssssssssessisssrrssriesssirseresserrssres 5 5 5 10 Range Up Exec 5 5 5 10 independent control 6 20 6 23 INCUCTANCE oo eee eee cece eee tees cease tent tease teeeeeeeeeaeeneeeeae App 23 information ooo eee eeeeeeeseeeeceeeeeeteeeeeeees 4 17 13 23 14 7 16 8 INITIAL SOMINGS vais csccesesticcecesserssecescctsscedesvoeetevsesosacnaersvanens App 8 INITIALIZATION hea a N 1 33 15 10 Initialize Memory EX C sssesesseseessesieerrerrerrsrrrerrerrnereerress 11 10 Initialize SCSI Initialize Settings input filter oe input filter COPYING Of oo eee eee eee tees eeeeeteeeeeaeeeeaes 5 18 input terminal CONNECTION tO s s s 3 9 3 16 Installation Conditions 0 0 0 eee eect eeee eee eteeeeneeeenees 3 2 installation POSITION oe ee eee eee eee eteee tease eeeeeeeeeeeaees 3 3 instantaneous value App 17 Instrument NOs piesang aaaea raS iii insulation resistance eseeeseeeriereerierrerrereerrerrnernsre 17 19 INTEG SET oiiaaie 6 20 6 23 6 29 15 4 integ Sye ia aeh aa aiiai aia iae 11 1 integrated D A output rated time of 15 7 Integration Allowable Frequency
327. ent see section 5 4 of the scaling function area also copied e The current sensor transformation ratio and the ON OFF condition PT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient of the scaling function for other elements that were specified before are not held Configuration Example of the Current Sensor Range and Transformation Ratio When measuring a current with a maximum value of 100 A using a current sensor that outputs 10 mV when 1 A of current is flowing the equation becomes 10 mV A x 100 A 1 V Therefore set 1 V for the current sensor range and 10 mV A for the current sensor transformation ratio Note When attempting to directly read the current of the circuit under measurement by multiplying the output of the external current sensor by the transformation ratio turn OFF the external PT CT scaling function see section 5 4 If it is turned ON the value will be multiplied by the CT ratio IM 760101 01E 5 13 SUOI IPUOD JUBWaINSeaLy 5 4 Setting the Scaling Function When Using an External PT or CT For a functional description see section 1 3 a o pispLay Holo VRAE FILE STORE copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o coREMOTE E wave Hanwones Locat misc CURSOR TOMAX HOLD O NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC eq NTEGRATOR mmm z oa START STOP I
328. eps for Windows 95 98 If you are using Windows NT 2000 Pro carry out equivalent steps according to your operating system 1 Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel The Control Panel opens 2 Double click the Network icon to display the Network dialog box 3 Select TCP IP corresponding to the Ethernet NIC that is connected to your PC and click Properties The TCP IP Properties dialog box appears Network 21x Configuration Identification Access Control The following network components are installed a Client for Microsoft Networks I 3Com Fast EtherLink XL 10 100Mb TX Ethernet NIC 3C905 I Dial Up Adapter YY TCP IP gt 3Com Fast EtherLink XL 10 100Mb TX Ethernet N TCP IP gt Dial Up Adapter Remove Properties 4 Set the parameters such as the IP address according to the table above and click OK i TEPIP Properties HE Bindings Advanced Nebos Bindings Advanced NetBlos DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer The first gateway in the Installed Gateway list will be the default If your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask The address order in the list will be the order in which these your network administrator for an address and then type it in machines are used the space below Obtain an IP address a
329. equate measures Immunity Complying standard EN61326 Annex A Influence in the Immunity Environment Measurement input 20 of range within 40 of range if the crest factor is set to 6 DA output 40 of range Cable requirement Same as the above cable requirement about emission 1 Emission immunity and safety standards apply to products having the CE Mark For all other products please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative 2 Overvoltage Categories define transient overvoltage levels including impulse withstand voltage levels Overvoltage Category Il Applies to equipment supplied with electricity from fixed installations like a distribution board 3 Pollution Degree Applies to the degree of adhesion of a solid liquid or gas which deteriorates withstand voltage or surface resistivity Pollution Degree 1 Applies to closed atmospheres with no or only dry non conductive pollution Pollution Degree 2 Applies to normal indoor atmospheres with only non conductive pollution 4 The cable length is less than 3 m 5 Annex A normative Immunity test requirements for equipment intended for use in industrial locations 17 20 IM 760101 01E Unit mm imensions 17 Specifications 45
330. er Q Element 4 7 eee d Element 6 X au ol Z IM 760101 01E 15 3 al suonoun4 19440 pue nd no v a 15 1 Setting the D A Output Option Setting the Rated Time of Integrated D A Output 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 D A Rated Tine Press SHIFT START INTEG SET to display the Integ Set menu Press the D A Output Rated Time soft key to display the D A Rated Time dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select one of the hour minute and second boxes Press SELECT to display the entry box Turn the jog shuttle to set the hour minute or second that you selected in step 17 For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Press SELECT or ESC to close the box Repeat steps 17 to 20 to set hour minute and second ESG n Mode g Timer Setting Independent Control my o g Current Mode my o JUUUUULIS D A Output Rated Time 15 4 IM 760101 01E 15 1 Setting the D A Output Option Explanation The numerical data can be output using 5 V FS DC voltage from the D A output connector on the rear panel Up to 30 items channels can be specified for each measurement mode normal and harmonic Pin Arrangement and Signal Assignment of the D A Output Connector
331. er of displayed items Display 4 Format Numeric W Item Amount 4 2 Norn Item No 1 K Numeric Disp Items ESC Page U Scroll Exec Page Down Scroll Exec Scrolling the Display He 42 21 78 39 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the highlighting of the measurement function If the number of displayed items is set to 4 2 through 78 39 the item number of the highlighted measurement function is displayed in the Norm Item No box of the Display When set to 4 2 to 78 39 Display 4 Format Numeric Item Amount 4 2 Norn Item No 1 K Numeric Disp Items menu If the number of displayed items is set to All the symbol corresponding to the highlighted measurement function is displayed in the Function box of the Display menu ESC Page U Scroll Exec Page Down Scroll Exec He OOOCUOCE When set to All Format K Numeric Function Urns Page Up Scroll Exec 4 2 IM 760101 01E 4 1 Displaying the Data Numerical Data of Measurement Functions Page Scrolling the Display 7 Press the Page Up Scroll Exec or Page Down Scroll Exec soft key to scroll the page If you press the Page Up Scroll Exec soft key the numerical data corresponding to item numbers that are smaller than those of the numerical data of measurement functions displayed up to that point are displayed
332. er right corner of the screen if you selected element 1 U1 and l1 are displayed e Setting the current sensor transformation ratio 4 5 K Ct Scaling Element Ob ject Element 1 W Sensor Rat io mysa 10 0000 1 0000 Scaling 1 0000 Press the Sensor Ratio mV A soft key Turn the jog shuttle to set the transformation ratio For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings ESC Element Element 1 m JUUUUUUE S Q Element Ob ject Element 1 K E W Sensor Ratio mUsa 10 0000 Element 2 UE Elenent 3 Element 4 Ratio Ct Ratio Element 5 1 0000 Scaling Factor 1 0000 Factor Elenent 6 Scaling Copy Exec fH IM 760101 01E 5 11 SUOI IPUOD JUBWsINSeaLY 5 3 Setting the Measurement Range When Using an External Current Sensor Explanation e Copying the current sensor transformation ratio The current sensor transformation ratio specified for a given element can be set to the elements of the same wiring unit The ON OFF condition PT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient see section 5 4 of the scaling function area also copied The current sensor transformation ratio and the ON OFF condition PT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient of the scaling function for other elements tha
333. er to the explanation in the User s Manual or Service Manual gt Electric shock danger Alternating current Both direct and alternating current ON power OFF power In position of a bistable push control Out position of a bistable push control Ground eo TO d ce vi IM 760101 01E Safety Precautions Make sure to comply with the precautions below Not complying might result in injury or death Power Supply Ensure that the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before turning ON the power Power Cord and Plug To prevent the possibility of electric shock or fire be sure to use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA The main power plug must be plugged into an outlet with a protective earth terminal Do not invalidate this protection by using an extension cord without protective earth grounding Protective Grounding Make sure to connect the protective earth to prevent electric shock before turning ON the power Necessity of Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective earth wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective earth terminal Doing so poses a potential shock hazard Defect of Protective Grounding Do not operate the instrument if the protective earth or fuse might be defective Also make sure to check them before operation Fuse To avoid the possibility of fire only use a fuse that has a rating voltage current and type that is specified by the ins
334. ertical values and in the X axis values between the cursors can be measured Cursor Cursor x 9725 6mU 9725 6mMU O00kU ee 19 046ns Measured values Xx 36 666ns Ax 19 954ns 174x 50 116 HZ 1 28 IM 760101 01E 1 8 Bar Graphs Vectors and Trend Displays Bar graphs of harmonics of each order vectors of the fundamental signal of each element during harmonic measurement and trends of each measurement function can be displayed Bar Graph Display of Harmonic Data For procedures see section 7 9 The amplitude of each harmonic can be displayed on the bar graph The horizontal axis represents harmonic order and the vertical axis represents the amplitude of each harmonic The harmonic measurement functions elements and order to be displayed can be specified You can select the following harmonic measurement functions U I P S Q oU ol Z Rs Xs Rp and Xp The screen can be divided into top and bottom halves so that the bar graph can be displayed simultaneously with the numerical data Bar graph display of harmonic data Bar Ut 1 000K fos Scales TO Top p h f Measured values of cursor and x of bar graph 1 a Beit ono Boo gag Cursor Y2Z 0 0073nA E wi 0 0167mA AYZ 0093mA order 1 order 13 Measured values of cursor and x of bar graph 2 Harmonic order indicating the cursor position Cursor is at 15t order and
335. erty Pr BS AOOO JO OUUULE Filter all INS ic Save Exec E gt Executing the Save Operation 25 Press the Save Exec soft key The data is saved to the directory indicated by Path At the same time the Save Exec soft key changes to an Abort soft key Aborting the Save Operation 26 Press the Abort soft key to abort the save operation At the same time the Abort soft key changes to a Save Exec soft key File Name L Property Save Exec Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box Same as the procedure given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box in section 12 9 Viewing the Properties Same as the procedure given in Viewing the Properties in section 12 9 IM 760101 01E 12 15 eea y Bulpeo7 pue Burnes D 12 6 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data and Numerical Data Explanation CAUTION Do not remove the medium disk or turn off the power when the access indicator or lS is blinking Such acts can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data and Numerical Data can be saved Saving Setup Parameters Select Setup from the File Item menu to save setup parameters e Setup parameters that are saved The setup parameter of each key existing at the time of the save operation can be sa
336. es of cursor and cursor x D Data and time at the cursor position During normal measurement retrieval of waveform display data OFF Indicates the date and time year month date hour minute second of measurement During harmonic measurement and normal measurement retrieval of waveform display data ON Not displayed 10 16 IM 760101 01E 10 7 Performing Cursor Measurements Dx Date and time of cursor x position e During normal measurement retrieval of waveform display data OFF Indicates the date and time year month date hour minute second of measurement e During harmonic measurement and normal measurement retrieval of waveform display data ON Not displayed Cursor Movement e Cursors move on the selected trend The range of movement of cursors is from the left end to the right end of the screen e The cursors moves along the data points displayed on the screen one point at a time Note e If unmeasurable data exists is displayed in the measured value display area e AY is measured even if the unit is different The result has no unit in this case IM 760101 01E 10 17 Aejdsig pu L g 10 8 Restarting the Trend ESC OUOU L Procedure A Q 8 INPUT RANGE MOTOR SET SCALING WIRING o T Haul FILTER AVG CAL qe NTEGRATOR me a a START STOP INTEGSET RESET a o DISPLAY HOLD ical FILE STORE CO
337. es the data that is displayed on the screen as a waveform Because the number of display segments number of displayed points on the screen is constant at 501 rasters while the number of sampled data points varies according to the time corresponding to one screen the following process is performed P P compression is performed over a certain period along the time axis the waveform display data is determined and the data is displayed P P compression refers to the determination of the maximum and minimum values for each certain period One raster will display these two points oy Sampled data w ioe P P compression Sampled data On the screen sixe JeIIMA gt _ Time axis lt gt 0 501 rasters 500 Aliasing When the sample rate is comparatively low with respect to the input signal frequency the harmonics contained in the signal are lost In this case some of the harmonics will appear at low frequencies due to the effects described by the Nyquist sampling theorem This phenomenon is called aliasing Aliased signal Input signal Sampling point Retrieval of Waveform Display Data The WT1600 retrieves waveform display data to the memory at a sample rate of approximately 200 kS s The frequency that allows displaying of waveforms that are close to the input signal is up to approximately 10 k
338. essarily displayed at the top of the file list e Files and directories that are longer than 8 characters cannot be accessed Depending on the server lt gt that indicates a higher directory may not be displayed The time information in the file list will not be displayed correctly for the following cases On Windows NT when the time stamp is displayed using am and pm e Servers that return characters other than ASCII characters in the list The following operations are not possible from the WT1600 on files that have been saved on an FTP server e Enabling Disabling file protection copying and renaming e Formatting the FTP server medium Entering the Login Name and Password Enter the login name and password for accessing the save destination FTP server Login name e Enter up to 15 characters e The characters that can be used are 0 9 A Z _ parenthesis minus sign Password e Enter up to 15 characters The characters that can be used are 0 9 A Z _ parenthesis minus sign Setting the Timeout Time When an FTP server is accessed from the WT1600 and connection cannot be established after a certain period of time timeout time the WT1600 decides that the connection to the FTP server is not possible and closes the connection Select the value in the range of 0 to 3600 s The default value is 15 s Note The FTP client function cannot be used under the following cases e When th
339. est Factor CF6 CF6 Key Lock Key Lock BFF oN E oN OUUULUEE OOUULBUR _ 15 14 IM 760101 01E 15 6 Selecting the Message Language and the Screen Brightness Explanation Selecting the Message Language An error message is displayed when an error occurs Select the language to use to display the message and the menu from the choices below The error codes for the error messages are the same For details on the error messages see section 16 2 e JPN Displays the messages in Japanese e ENG Displays the messages in English e CHN Displays the messages in Chinese Selecting the Screen Brightness Select the screen brightness in the range of 1 to 3 The darkest setting is 1 and the brightest setting is 3 IM 760101 01E 15 15 a suonoun4 19410 pue ndyno w a 15 7 Setting the Display Color of the Screen Procedure 2 i eA eee ESC z a SINGLE STORE SET MENU o TRIG D o REMOTE a fea oe CURSOR CMAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC lt NP o RANGE scaunel WIRING MOTOR SET JOUOUL o TA CAL qe NTEGRATOR mm a a START STOP smc sac INTEG SET RESET 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu Communication Date Tine Conf ig K Selftest
340. et eca11 Recall Store to File to File Store ng Setting Convert Menory Initialize Memory Exec rt Y JOUOOUUGUR IM 760101 01E 11 13 e eq pa101S ay Burnes pue geq Hulijjes y pue Bunos z 11 5 Saving the Stored Data When Saving Data That Has Already Been Stored 4 Press the Convert Memory soft key to display the Convert Memory dialog box Selecting the Data Type for Saving the Data 5 Press the Data Type soft key to select ASCII or Float Selecting the Save Destination Medium 6 Press the File List soft key to display the File List dialog box 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select the save destination medium indicated by 8 Press SELECT to confirm the new medium Selecting the Save Destination Directory Perform this operation when directories are present on the medium 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the save destination directory indicated by lt gt 10 Press SELECT to confirm the new directory The selected medium directory is displayed in Path located at the upper left corner of the File List dialog box ESG CF ite List Path SC4 OoNuTio0oDA Space 2138112000 byte File Nane Size Date Attribute a w JUUUUUOS S Q Store Set Mode onvert Menory K File List Ki File Name Data Type ASCII Float Convert Memory Recall Store to File
341. etting Of ececccecce eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 15 current determination Of eee cece eee cess eeeeeeeeeeaes 1 4 Current input terminal eee cece eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeenees 2 1 current input terminal construction Of seeen ii current MOE cccececeessteeeeeeeeeeeeaeee 6 29 6 30 Current range list OF ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeees 5 8 Current range Setting Of ee eeessesesesseeeeseeeseseneesseeseaee 5 5 current sensor input Connector s es 2 1 5 10 current sensor input connector connection to wi 38 12 current sensor range copying Of n 5 11 current sensor range setting Of oo ee we 5 10 current sensor transformation ratio copying of we 12 current sensor transformation ratio setting of 5 11 CUISOR r aina aeeiiaii EEA 7 21 9 21 10 14 Cursor measurements eee eee 1 28 9 21 10 14 cursor pathi sesuratan ine diie ea aiant 9 22 D D A OUtPUR iai aaa a cle aa AN E RaT REN D A output connector D A output connector pin arrangement of ee 15 5 D A output items D A Output Rated Time D A output voltage ssesseesesieesieseerierinerrnrinsrrsrrnsrnsrrerrnereers 15 7 data Compression cc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeees 12 21 data length data points ata size niena 11 17 12 16 12 17 12 22 data type 0 11 14 11 17 12 12 12 13 12 16 12 17 data update interval 0 eee eee eee eeeeese
342. ference in the zoom factor between U Mag and Mag The value of the digit being specified by U Mag changes 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the zoom factor Format K Vector m Q Numer ic g Explanation The phase and size rms value relationship between the fundamental waves U 1 and I 1 of each element specified for harmonic measurement see section 7 3 can be displayed using vectors The positive vertical axis is set to 0 angle 0 and the vector of each input signal is displayed Turning ON OFF the Numerical Data Display Select whether to display the numerical data The size and the phase difference between the signals can be displayed along with the vector display For the display format of the phase difference see section 6 7 e ON Displays the numerical data e OFF Does not display the numerical data Setting the Zoom Factor of Vectors The size of the vectors can be changed The zoom factor can be set in the range of 0 100 to 100 000 e You can specify separate zoom factors for the fundamental waves U 1 and I 1 7 24 IM 760101 01E 7 10 Changing the Vector Display Vector Display Examples When displaying numerical data For a 3P4W three phase four wire wiring system U1 1 U2 1 and U3 1 are common mode voltages 11 1 12 1 and 13 1 are line currents Size of the peripheral circle range 102 60 U Wiring A 3P4U 3 5237 A PLL Sr
343. formed when harmonic measurement is turned ON OFF or the measurement range or input filter is changed However if the harmonic measurement ON OFF setting measurement range and input filter are not changed over an extended time the zero level may change due to the changes in the environment surrounding the instrument In such case you can manually perform zero level compensation There is also a function that performs zero level compensation during integration NULL Function For procedures see section 15 5 When the NULL function is turned ON Udc and Idc numerical data of the simple average of the voltage and current during normal measurement are set as NULL values The NULL value is subtracted from the sampled data of voltage and current Hence all measurement functions are affected by the NULL values Selecting the Message Language For procedures see section 15 6 The language of the error messages displayed on the screen during operation can be set to English or Japanese Setting the Brightness of the Screen For procedures see section 15 6 The brightness of the LCD monitor can be adjusted Setting the Display Colors For procedures see section 15 7 The colors for graphical elements such as the waveform background scale and cursor and text elements such as the menu and the menu background can be selected Set the color using a ratio of red R green G and blue B Self Test Function For procedures see s
344. functional description see section 1 3 a o DISPLAY HOLD ica FILE STORE copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o coREMOTE oa wave Js oca msc a CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT Q To exit the menu during operation press ESC K INPUT SCALING x I 3 D a q o rae CAL n NTEGRATOR me g D STOP INTEG SET RESET JOUA FILTER T jE START Procedure Holding the Numerical Data Display at the Maximum 1 Press SHIFT LOCAL MAX HOLD The MAX HOLD indicator above and to the left of the key illuminates and the numerical data display is held at the maximum Releasing the MAX Held Condition 2 Press SHIFT LOCAL MAX HOLD when the MAX HOLD indicator above and to the left of the key is illuminated The MAX HOLD indicator turns OFF and MAX hold is released Explanation MAX Hold This function enables the maximum value of the numerical data to be held Holds the data of measurement functions Urms Umn Udc Uac Irms Imn Idc lac P S Q U pk U pk l pk and I pk as well as the data of the function of these functions while the MAX hold function is enabled e The D A output the numerical data list that the built in printer prints the communication output and other values are set to the maximum held values IM 760101 01E 5 25 SUOI IPUOD JUBWs
345. fundamental signal component for the minimum order For details see section 7 5 max denotes the upper limit of harmonic order under analysis see section 17 6 The upper limit is determined automatically maximum is 100 by the frequency of the PLL source App 4 IM 760101 01E Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions Table 2 2 Method of Determination Equation Measurement Functions during Harmonic Characters values inside the of the measurement function are either dc k 0 or k k 1 to max Pthd Measurement 3 5 F F When the denominator of the equation When the denominator of the equation for the distortion factor is Total for the distortion factor is Fundamental Harmonic distortion factor of voltage U k 100 U k 100 Uhdf _ U U 1 Harmonic distortion factor of current I k I k 100 100 Ihdf l 1 Harmonic distortion factor of active power P k 100 P k 100 Phdf _ P P 1 max max Total harmonic distortion of voltage 3 U k D U k Uthd k 2 100 k 2 100 U U 1 max max Total harmonic distortion of current y i k x I k Ithd Z2 Kz2 si E 00 i 00 max max Total harmonic distortion of active power D P k y P k 2 k 2 k P P 1 Telephone harmonic factor of voltage Uthf un Yew U k 100 Ithf 1 LAW 1 k 2 100 1 k Uthf Telephone harmonic factor of current Ithf k Co
346. g harmonic measurement they do not appear Measurement Item e Y Vertical value of cursor Y axis value e Yx Vertical value of cursor x Y axis value e AY The difference between the Y axis values of cursor and cursor x e X X axis value of cursor from the left end of the screen e Xx X axis value of cursor x from the left end of the screen e AX The difference between the X axis values of cursor and cursor x e 1 AX The inverse of the difference between the X axis values of cursor and cursor x Movement Path of the Cursor Since the WT1600 P P compresses the sampled data see section 1 7 two data points maximum and minimum values are displayed at the same time axis position This specifies where the cursor is to move e Max Moves along the maximum values on the time axis and measures the value at each point e Min Moves along the minimum values on the time axis and measures the value at each point e Mid Moves along the middle of the maximum and minimum values on the time axis and measures the value at each point Cursor Movement e Cursors move on the selected waveform e The range of movement of cursors is from the left end to the right end of the screen e The movement step of cursors is as follows e For normal measurement the step is equal to time corresponding to one screen 500 For harmonic measurement the step is 1 point Note e If unmeasurable data exists is displayed in the measured
347. g menu Format K Bar W Bar Format Single l Bar Item No 1 4 Function u Element 7 Element 1 D Start Order 1 End Order 100 m Q JOL IM 760101 01E 7 19 juswainseayy 2luoweH 7 9 Changing the Display Items of Bar Graphs and Performing Cursor Measurements The following procedures are given for a representative example in which the display format is set to Bar Selecting the Number of Split Bar Graph Windows 2 Press the Bar Format soft key to display the Bar Format menu 3 Press one of the keys from Single to Triad to select the number of windows e If you select Single the bar graph with the Bar Item No 1 in the next section is displayed e If you select Dual the bar graphs with the Bar Item No 1 and 2 in the next section is displayed e If you select Triad the bar graphs with the Bar Item No 1 to 3 in the next section is displayed Selecting the Item to Be Changed 4 Press the Bar Item No soft key 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select 1 to 3 Changing the Measurement Function 6 Press the Function soft key to display the measurement function selection box 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select the measurement function 8 Press SELECT The symbol for the selected measurement function and the bar graph are displayed Changing the Element 9 Press the Element soft key to display the element selection box 10 Turn the jog shutt
348. gger Slope 4 Press the Slope soft key to select or Ft Setting the Trigger Level 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger level For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 4 Source UL Slope ea te ft CJ Level 0 0 BOL 9 5 IM 760101 01E Aejdsig wiojsone M el 9 3 Setting the Trigger Explanation Trigger is a cue used to display the waveform on the screen The trigger is activated when the specified trigger condition is met At this point the waveform is ready to be displayed on the screen Selecting the Trigger Mode Trigger mode specifies the conditions for updating the screen display You can select from the following list of choices e Auto Enables auto mode e Ifa trigger occurs TRIG D indicator illuminates within the timeout time approx 100 ms the display is updated using that trigger e Ifa trigger does not occur within the timeout time the display is automatically updated TRIG D indicator not illuminated when the timeout time elapses e When the trigger signal period is greater than or equal to 100 ms the two conditions above are met alternately and the display is updated In such case use normal mode e Normal Enables normal mode e The display is updated when the trigger occurs e The display is not updated if the trigger does not occur Selecting the Trigger Source Sele
349. gger setting see section 9 3 4 Format Wave Sampling OFF O Time div Wave 0 5ms Trigger K U Zoon amp Position K Wave Setting JUUUUUL Explanation The retrieval of waveform display data must be turned ON to display waveforms The sample data that was acquired within the data update rate is P P compressed and stored to the memory as waveform display data ON The retrieval of waveform display data starts according to the trigger settings see section 9 3 OFF Waveform display data is not retrieved IM 760101 01E 9 1 Aejdsig wiojsone jy el 9 2 Setting the Time Axis For a functional description see section 1 7 2 DISPLAY HOLD ical FILE STORE COPY ESC SINGLE STORE SET MENU aTRIGD REMOTE a WAVE paruowes LOCAL MISC O A CURSOR TOMAX HOLD O NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC es PUT o MOTOR SET o ueasure CAL RANGE OUOU SCALING WIRING o FILTER AVG ami N TEGRATOR mm z a START STOP INTEGSET RESET Procedure e Check that the measurement mode is set to normal measurement If the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement Set Mode to OFF in the Harmonics menu see section 7 1 The retrieval of waveform display data must be turned ON to display waveforms For the procedure see section 9 1 1 Press DISPLAY t
350. grated value of 100 5 V is assumed to change linearly with time The D A output value is determined by the level of the actual input with respect to this assumed line see the figure on the next page Setting the Rated Time of Integrated D A Output e Set the time in units of hour minute second in the following range 0000 01 00 to 10000 59 59 e This setting is valid in the manual integration mode For normal integration and repetitive integration modes includes real time the time specified for the timer is the rated time of integrated D A output Note You cannot specify a time less than 1 minute to the rated time of integrated D A output Relationship between the Output Items and D A Output Voltages Frequency D A output 4 Approx 7 5 V 0 2 r rrr rrr errr rrr r cre oo 5 0 V J 2 5 V 0 5 V l L Displayed value 0 5Hz 10Hz 1 kHz 100 kHz 1 Hz 100 Hz 10 kHz 1 MHz Integrated Value D A output 4 APprox 7 0 V paire Input that is 140 of the rating 5 0 V Rated input t Integration time to Rated time of integrated D A output for manual integration mode specified time of timer for normal integration and repetitive continuous integration modes IM 760101 01E 15 7 al suonoun4 19440 pue indino v a 15 1 Setting the D A Output Option Other Items Displayed Val Output isplayed Value utpu 140 Approg tov Oe 100 5 0 V i ace 0 ov 5 0 V
351. gt c F 8 E T OA z Coa wee i COM ee is 3 J a lE lE ia ooganNaoma nn a 0o00 Fe G8 ooe Gee dInean dInean Setting the items one at a time 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select the element or measurement function that you wish to specify 7 Press SELECT When the button to the left of the selected element or measurement function is highlighted the numerical data of the measurement function of the element will be printed When the highlighting of the button is cleared the numerical data of the measurement function of the element will not be printed Proceed to step 10 14 8 IM 760101 01E 14 3 Printing Numerical Data Lists and Bar Graphs During Harmonic Measurement 5 Press the List Item soft key to display the List Item dialog box Selecting the Numerical Data to Be Printed 6 7 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select Numeric Bar Press SELECT to select Numeric Turn the jog shuttle to select the element or measurement function that you wish to specify Press SELECT When the button to the left of the selected element or measurement function is highlighted the numerical data of the measurement function of the element will be printed When the highlighting of the button is cleared the numerical data of the measurement function of the element will not be printed Selecting the Bar Graph to Be Printe
352. hapter 2 Names and Uses of Parts 2 1 Front Panel Rear Panel and Top View sssssssssssssnsesssrrenssrrnrressrernnnrsrrnrnnssennnnnnsennnn teenet 2 1 2 2 Operation Keys Jog Shuttle eee eeccceeseeceneeseeeeeeeeesaeseaeesseeseaeeeeeeeaeeseeeseaeessaeeeeeteas 2 3 Chapter 3 Before Starting Measurements 3 1 Precautions Concerning the Use of the Instrument ecceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeeeetaes 3 1 3 2 Installing the IMSrUMEN avsitin rna tain eaaa a Ta a irse 3 2 ASSIS Wiring PreCautions itsectee ei tektites eet A ee dy 3 4 3 4 For Making Accurate Measurements eeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeesaneeseaeeeseneeenenneeennaeees 3 6 A 3 5 Connecting the Power Supply c ccccccccscsscsceseesessescsecseeeececseeesseeesseeecsecesaecasseseseesaeeesees 3 8 3 6 Directly Wiring the Circuit under Measurement ceeceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeateeteeesaeetaes 3 9 3 7 Using an External Current Sensor to Wire the Circuit under Measurement 3 12 3 8 Using an External PT or CT to Wire the Circuit under Measurement ceeeeeeeeees 3 16 A 3 9 Wiring a Circuit with Voltage Input Exceeding 600 V u eccecesceescescsseeceeescneeseeesseeeaees 3 19 3 10 Turning ON OFF the Power Switch cecececceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeseaeesaaeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeaees 3 20 3 11 Setting the Date and Time 0 0 cece eeceeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeeseeteaeeeaeesaaeeeaeesaeeeaeeseaeeseeeeeeeaeees 3 22 3 12 Entering Values
353. he current at a given voltage is calculated as a negative value for a leading phase and a positive value for lagging phase App 2 IM 760101 01E Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions Table 3 3 Measurement Functions during Normal Measurement Method of Determination Equation Rotating Speed When the type of input signal from the revolution sensor is DC voltage analog signal When the type of input signal from the revolution sensor is pulse count Input voltage from the revolution sensor Scaling factor Scaling factor Number of rotations per volt of input voltage Number of input pulses from the revolution sensor per minute Number of pulses per rotation Scaling factor When the signal of the gear ratio or revolution sensor is a converted signal you can specify the gear ratio for the scaling factor to determine the rotating speed before the gear change e Scaling factor Torque Input voltage from the torque meter Scaling factor Scaling factor torque per volt of input voltage 120 Frequency of the frequency measurement source Hz Motor s number of poles output Motor efficiency or total efficiency 5 Synchronized e The unit of synchronized speed is fixed to min or rpm g speed Sync e Normally the frequency measurement source is set to the voltage or current m that is supplied to the motor The synchronized speed may not be determined
354. he keyboard to set the unit For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Setting the Equation 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select Expression 9 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 10 Use the keyboard to set the equation For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Expression S E1 0R1 inc Measure Expression SCET ORI _ fc Measure Explanation Measure ESC Measure K K Freq Item Freq Item g g User User Def ined Defined Y p UCE1 0R1 Function 1 pFF Dl INSERT INSERT QELBHGEPEREPONE E z Expressin C EREE HOREN ji CR INTOTP TQTRTST rue ux NA Function 2 PFF ON Eere bAt EE TE Lp eL FES aN ool wal wad Ra ad Expression TCE1 0R1 i Function 3 FF _ON Unit _W__ Function 3 FF _ON Unit y Expression PCE1 0R1 Expression PCE1 0R1 Function 4 PFF ON Unit Function 4 Unit Ster Slave Ster Slave An equation can be created by combining the measurement function symbols Using the numerical values of the measurement functions the numerical data of the new equation can be determined Turning ON OFF the User Defined Function You can select whether to perform the
355. he master Measurement start delay time Within 100 ns 1 sample period Applicable to the master Output hold time Low level 200 ns or more Applicable to the master Input logic LI Negative logic falling edge Applicable to the slave Minimum pulse width Low level 200 ns or more Applicable to the slave Input delay time Within 100 ns 1 sample period Applicable to the slave 17 8 External Clock Input Common Item Specification Connector type BNC connector Input level TTL Synchronization source Ext Clk during normal measurement Item Specification Frequency range Same as the measurement range as indicated in Frequency Measurement in section 17 6 Input waveform 50 duty ratio rectangular wave PLL source Ext Clk during harmonic measurement Item Specification Frequency range 10 Hz to 1 kHz Input waveform 50 duty ratio rectangular wave Sampling clock Smp Clk during harmonic measurement Item Specification Frequency range Frequency equal to 2048 times the fundamental frequency of 0 5 Hz to 100 Hz Input waveform 50 duty ratio rectangular wave Trigger Item Specification Minimum pulse width tus Trigger delay time Within 1 u s 1 sample period 17 16 IM 760101 01E 17 9 RGB Video Signal VGA Output Item Specification Connector type D sub 15 pin receptacle Output type VGA compatible 17 10 Built in Floppy Disk Item Specific
356. he positive vertical axis set to zero degrees this format displays 6 using 360 in the clockwise direction Not m e The display format in the harmonic measurement mode is fixed regardless of the selection as follows Measurement function is displayed using 360 notation in the clockwise direction Measurement functions oU and ol are displayed using 180 notation with respect to the fundamental signals U 1 and I 1 The counter clockwise direction is negative and clockwise direction is positive When the measured value of either the voltage or current is zero an error is displayed When both the voltage and current are sinusoids and the ratio of the voltage and current inputs do not differ greatly with respect to the measurement range the phase difference 6 of lead and lag are detected and displayed correctly e When the computation result of power factor exceeds 1 is displayed as follows e When the power factor is greater than 1 and less than equal to 2 displays zero e When the power factor is greater than 2 displays an error IM 760101 01E 6 19 uolesbaju pue JUoWeinseayy JEUN el 6 8 Setting the Normal Integration Mode and the Integration Timer For a functional description see section 1 6 SI sere a FALE a SINGLE oTRGD WAVE HARMONICS CURSOR a FILE STORE COPY STORE SET MENU REMOTE Loca MISC MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT
357. here are two methods in selecting the files to be copied e Selecting the files one at a time Press the Set Reset soft key to place asterisks to the left of the files one at a time e Selecting the files at once Press the All Set soft key to place asterisks to the left of the selected file names at once There are three methods in selecting the files at once If you select a file and press the All Set soft key asterisks are placed by the directory containing the selected file and all the files in the directory If you select a directory and press the All Set soft key asterisks are placed by the selected directory and all the files in the directory If you select a medium and press the All Set soft key asterisks are placed by all the directories and files in the selected medium You cannot copy files if files with the same file name exist at the copy destination e You cannot copy the same files to another directory after copying the files Select the files to be copied again and copy them e When File Item is Wave Data Type is Binary and Filter is Item copying a file with a wvf extension that has an asterisk causes the file with the same name with the hdr extension to also be copied When Filter is All only the files that have the asterisks are copied e If an error occurs while copying multiple files the files after the error occurrence are not copied IM 760101 01E 12 35 eea y Bulpeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 12 Rena
358. here water oil or chemicals may splash It is recommended that the instrument be stored in an environment where the temperature is between 5 and 40 C and the relative humidity is between 20 and 80 3 2 IM 760101 01E 3 2 Installing the Instrument Installation Position Desktop Place the instrument on a flat even surface as shown in the figure below If the instrument is installed in a horizontal position rubber feet can be attached to prevent slipping Two sets four pieces of rubber feet are included in the package Rack Mount To rack mount the instrument use the rack mount kit that is sold separately Name Model Notes Rack mount kit 751535 E4 For EIA Rack mount kit 751535 J4 For JIS An outline of the attachment procedures is given below For details regarding the attachment procedures see the instructions that are included with the rack mount kit 1 Remove the handles on both sides of the instrument 2 Remove the four feet on the bottom of the instrument 3 Remove the two plastic rivets and the four seals covering the rack mount attachment holes on both sides of the instrument near the front 4 Places seals over the feet and handle attachment holes Attach the rack mount kit 6 Mount the instrument on the rack a N e When rack mounting the instrument allow at least 20 mm of space around the vent holes to prevent internal overheating Make sure to have adequate support for the bottom
359. hlighting of the button is cleared the trend is no longer displayed Trend Setting Trend Display Trend Format Single Trend i Samp1 ing OFF py Restart Trend Exec All ON All OFF T1 rz T3 T4 TS5 T6 T T8 T9 T0 One Be L O Trend T div asvdiv M m3 tia T16 T15 Trend Disp Items JOL Explanation You can turn ON OFF the 16 lines of trends trend 1 T1 through trend 16 T16 The trend display varies depending on the time axis T div setting of section 10 5 For example if T div is 3 s and the data update rate is set to 50 ms the trend display is updated every second If T div is 1 day and the data update rate is set to 50 ms the trend display is updated every 1728 s IM 760101 01E 10 7 Aejdsig pu L 2 10 4 Splitting the Screen and Displaying Trends For a functional description see section 1 8 a o DISPLAY HOLD ical FILE STORE COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o REMOTE Loca MISC CURSOR CMAX HOLD c NULL SHIFT A y I ESC WAVE pi To exit the menu during operation press ESC INPUT UJUUUUL pe v A RANGE canel WIRING MOTOR SET o T Haul FILTER AVG CAL qe NTEGRATOR me a a START STOP INTEGSET RESET Procedure The retrieval of trend display data must be turned
360. huttle to select Object Press SELECT The wiring unit selection box appears Turn the jog shuttle to select the wiring unit 3 4 5 6 Press SELECT to confirm Selecting the Delta Computation Type The menu varies depending on the wiring system Turn the jog shuttle to select Type Press SELECT to display the type selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select the delta computation type re 8 9 10 4 Measure Object L Press SELECT to confirm m JUUUOULIS S Q Freq Item A Measure S Formula Urns Irns g Pe Formula 4 Phase 186 Lead Lag Sync Measure Slave Select 3P3WP3 3A 6 12 IM 760101 01E 6 5 Setting the Delta Computation Explanation In the normal measurement mode the sum or difference of the instantaneous values sampled data of the voltage or current between the elements assigned to the target wiring unit for the delta computation can be used to determine the measurement functions AU AUrms AUmn AUdc AUac Al Alrms Almn Aldc Alac This operation is called delta computation For the equation see appendix 2 The measurement periods are the same as those described in section 1 2 Measurement Functions and Measurement Periods Selecting the Target Wiring Unit for the Delta Computation You can select the target wiring unit for the delta computation from the following list of choices The select
361. i Index patter isnabin acca babes wade attend des 5 1 PASC tia n a A aaa S a AaS 6 18 phase angle App 19 phase difference cccccssesessseseeseesseeseeesesseesseeeeseeenentens 1 19 physical form t m eain a a ia 12 10 pin arrangement 15 5 15 9 PLE SSOUNGCO ninmi caves igccvesbasciss a tnteveteae 1 7 PLL Source Down EXEC ececseceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeateeeeentees 7 8 PLE Source Up Exoten eiaei aieea naei 7 8 Pmscaling Oinaan sana o amaaa a Eao Parai aA heana aS 8 14 PONG aseara hesan arpat a 8 12 PostScript 12 21 12 22 13 12 POWO ienna sne i A NN e einai App 17 power coefficient setting Of 0 0 eee eee eereeeeeeaes 5 15 power CONNECHON o oo cece e eee eee eeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeaeneee 2 1 power cord POWER fACIOF innir ai POWER fUSO ints fiiisse irisa eridar aera power lOSS 0 0 power mean value of power range seee pOWer SUPDIY o eee eee cee eee eee eeeeeseaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeseeeeaeenaes power switch turning ON OFF Of seses 3 20 precautions use of the instrument ceeeeeeeeeteeeeeee 3 1 Preset Preset we 11 7 12 13 14 8 11 7 12 13 14 8 PUAN AN E E E A E 13 4 PUUING E E E E E N T 1 32 printer 14 2 14 5 14 7 printer COVEN cevccecescercsecarccseencenicotens aidati de yida anaidia 14 1 printer name 13 12 13 14 printer roll paper ssesssssssesssrrssrsrrusenseresrnssreennrnneeenrrneensrenne 14 4 printerSe I
362. ic Order Hz S s Freq of the Fundamental Wave under Analysis 8192 4096 2048 0 5 lt f lt 100 f x 2048 4 2 1 100 However it is 1 lt f lt 100 when the FFT data length is 8192 Accuracy When line filter 5 5 kHz is ON Frequency Voltage and Current Power reading error measurement reading error measurement range error range error 0 5 Hz lt f lt 10 Hz 0 4 of reading 0 2 of range 0 7 of reading 0 3 of range 10 Hz lt f lt 45 Hz 0 4 of reading 0 1 of range 0 6 of reading 0 2 of range 45 Hz lt f lt 66 Hz 0 3 of reading 0 05 of range 0 4 of reading 0 05 of range 66 Hz lt f lt 1 kHz 1 of reading 0 1 of range 1 5 of reading 0 1 of range 1 kHz lt f lt 2 5 kHz 2 of reading 0 1 of range However for nt order component input add n m 1 50 of the nt order reading to n m order and n m order Accuracy obtained by doubling the measurement range error if the crest factor is set to 6 When line filter is OFF Add the following value to the accuracy during normal measurement For n order component input add n m 1 50 of the n order reading to n m order and n m order For n order component input add n 500 of the nt order reading to the n order component 17 12 IM 760101 01E 17 6 Functions Motor Evaluation Option Item Specification Measurement function See section 17 3 Revolut
363. ic force caused by the measurement current and noise that enter this area of space can be reduced Shunt type current sensor reg of space created by the connection wires Ic External sensor cable gt WT1600 Ec Shielded wire OUT L For a shunt type current sensor connect it to the power earth ground side as shown in the figure below If you have to connect the sensor to the non earth side use a wire that is thicker than AWG18 conductive cross sectional area of approx 1 mm between the sensor and the instrument to reduce the effects of common mode voltage Take safety and error reduction in consideration when constructing an external sensor cable Shunt type current sensor V Voltage input O terminal LOAD Current sensor input connector When the circuit under measurement is not grounded and the signal is high in frequency or large in power the effects of the inductance of the connection cable for the shunt type current sensor become large In these cases use an isolation sensor CT DC CT or clamp for the measurements Clamp type current sensor Vv Voltage input O termipal P LOAD Current sensor input connector IM 760101 01E 3 13 sjuswainseayy Buers 310499 el 3 7 Using an External Current Sensor to Wire the Circuit under Measurement The following wiring examples are for connecting
364. ical display is difficult due to fluctuations This occurs when the fluctuation of the power supply or the load is large or when the input signal frequency is low During Normal Measurement Two types exponential average and moving average are available e Exponential average The numerical data can be exponentially averaged using a specified attenuation constant Averaging is performed according to the following equation Dre Dieii Mn Dn 1 K Dn Displayed value that has been exponentially averaged n times The displayed value D1 on the first time is M1 Dn 1 Displayed value that has been exponentially averaged n 1 times Mn Measured data on the nt time K Attenuation constant select from 2 4 8 16 32 and 64 e Moving average The numerical data can be linearly averaged using a specified average count Averaging is performed according to the following equation Mn m 1 Mn 2 Mn 1 Mn Da gt OTO m Dn Displayed value obtained by linearly averaging m points of numerical data from the n m 1 to n time Mn m 1 Measured data on the n m 1 time Mn 2 Measured data on the n 2 time Mn 1 Measured data on the n 1 time Mn Measured data on the nt time m Average count select from 8 16 32 64 128 and 256 During Harmonic Measurement When the fundamental frequency is 50 60 Hz the attenuation constant is automatically adjusted so that a first order low pass filter with a t
365. icator above and to the left of the key illuminates The store operation starts according to the following conditions depending on the store mode see section 11 1 During manual mode Starts the store operation When STORE is pressed the first store operation is executed Store Start is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen During real time mode The instrument enters the store ready condition and Store Ready is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen The store operation starts at the reservation time for starting the operation When the reservation time for starting the store operation is reached the first store operation is executed Store Start is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen e During integration synchronization mode The instrument enters the store ready condition and Store Ready is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen When integration starts the store operation starts When integration starts the first store operation is executed Store Start is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen Stopping the Store Operation 8 Ifthe store operation is in progress pressing STORE again stops the operation The STORE indicator above and to the left of the key turns off Automatically Stopping the Store Operation 8 The store operation stops automatically according to the following conditions depending on the store mode The STORE indicator above and t
366. ied with the line filter turned ON for 10 current sensor transformation ratio A or less When the data update rate is 50 ms add 0 1 of range to all accuracy figures All accuracy figures for 0 5 to 10 Hz are reference values e Iff Hz x voltage V gt 2 2 x 10 for frequencies above 100 kHz the voltage accuracy figures are reference values e For currents that exceed 20 AAC excluding the range of 50 to 400 Hz the current accuracy figures are reference values For currents less than 5 mA with frequencies above 1 kHz the current accuracy figures are reference values ee o o IM 760101 01E 17 7 h Ey suoneoyioeds bas 17 5 Accuracy Item Specification Effective input range 0 to 110 of the measurement range for Udc and Idc 1 to 110 of the measurement range for Urms Uac Irms and lac 10 to 110 of the measurement range for Umn and Imn Lower limit of measurement frequency 50ms 100ms 200ms 500ms 15s 2s 5s 15Hz 5Hz 2 5Hz 1 5Hz 0 5 Hz Data update rate Lower limit of measurement frequency 45 Hz 25 Hz Line filter influence When the cut off frequency is 500 Hz 45 to 66 Hz Add 0 2 of reading Less than 45 Hz Add 0 5 of reading When the cut off frequency is 5 5 kHz Less than 66 Hz Add 0 2 of reading 66 to 500 Hz Add 0 5 of reading Conditions for detecting lead and lag Lead and lag are detected correctly when the voltage and current
367. igned to T1 through T16 During harmonic measurement you can also specify the harmonic order The screen is divided up to 4 windows and the trends that are turned ON are mapped to the divided windows in order from T1 through T16 Horizontal Time Axis For procedures see section 10 5 When the retrieval of waveform display data is OFF during normal measurement the time per division can be set in the range of 3 s to 1 day When the retrieval of waveform display data is ON during normal measurement or during harmonic measurement the value can be set in terms of the number of measurements per division Setting the Scale For procedures see section 10 6 Auto scaling is provided in which the upper and lower limits of the screen are determined automatically from the maximum and minimum values of the trend display data Manual scaling is also available in which the upper and lower limits can be set arbitrarily as necessary Display Interpolation Graticule and Label Display For procedures see sections 9 7 and 9 8 The settings specified for waveform display are used IM 760101 01E 1 31 1 9 Saving and Loading Data and Other Functions Storing and Recalling For procedures see chapter 11 The numerical data and waveform display data can be stored to the internal memory approximately 12 MB or approximately 11 MB when using a WT1600 with ROM version 2 01 or later The data is stored to the internal memory at the data upda
368. ile menu Press the Utility soft key The Utility menu and the File List dialog box appear Press the Function soft key to display the Function menu Press the Delete soft key to display the Delete menu Poh gt File Function ESC Delete Copy Delete File Item unction z Setup Delete Set Reset All Set Renane BE Annon Load Property MakeDir Filter Save Format ten All Attribute Attribute Utility Delete Exec Delete Exec JUUUUUG eea y Bulpeo7 pue Burnes D HE HE Selecting the Medium and Directory 5 Same as the procedures given in Selecting the Save Destination Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 12 6 Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box 6 Same as the procedure given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box in section 12 9 Viewing the Properties 7 Same as the procedure given in Viewing the Properties in section 12 9 Changing the File Attribute 8 Same as the procedure given in Changing the File Attribute in section 12 9 IM 760101 01E 12 29 12 10 Deleting Files Selecting the File to Be Deleted One at a Time 9 10 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file Press the Set Reset soft key If an asterisk is displayed to the left of the file name in the File List dialog box
369. ile to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box Same as step 11 under Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box on page 11 15 Viewing the Properties Same as steps 11 to 13 under Viewing Properties on page 11 15 Note If the medium at the save destination does not exist when saving the stored data an error message is displayed and the save operation is aborted Since the data is stored in the internal memory in this case you can save the data stored to the memory by selecting Memory according to step 3 on page 11 13 and then carrying out the steps on given on pages 11 14 and 11 15 Since filing operations are not possible during the integration operation condition do not perform the store and save operation sequence while in integration synchronization mode Also data that are stored cannot be saved during the integration operation condition 11 16 IM 760101 01E 11 5 Saving the Stored Data Explanation CAUTION Do not remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or S is blinking Such acts can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Selecting the Data Type Select the data type from the following list of choices The extension is automatically added e ASCII e Numerical data or waveform display data is saved in ASCII format e The file can be used on your PC for analysis e The file cannot be loaded to the WT1600 e Float e Numerica
370. ime 11 3 Setting the Numerical Data and Waveform Display Data to Be Stored ceeeeees 11 6 EINE MAEN Data EAE EE A T 11 10 Saving the Stored Datawii s tarie adit a boy cect di eee 11 13 Recalling the Stored Datta aiioa o a aaa aaaea i aE 11 20 Chapter 12 Saving and Loading the Data 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 12 8 12 9 12 10 12 11 12 12 Precautions to Be Taken When Using the Floppy Disk Drive sesscsseceeceer 12 1 Built in Hard Disk Option irismen n e ae A 12 2 Connecting a SCSI Device o0 ec eeeeecceetceeeeeeeneeeeaeeeaeeteaeeeaeeseaeesaeeeeaeesseeseaeesaeseaeeteeeteaes 12 3 Changing the SCSI ID Number eee eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeseeeeeaeestaeesaeeseaeeseeseeeeeeeeeaes 12 4 Formatting the DiS kaicen nna RI Aiea is tein ee ie te 12 6 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data and Numerical Data 4 12 11 Saving Screen Image Dala T tp lari a T aar i aa aae ra a aoidean 12 20 Loading Setup Parameters ccceescesececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeseeseaeeeaeessaeeseesnaeeteeenaeeeaes 12 23 Specifying the File to Be Displayed Viewing File Properties and Changing the File AtriDUtE isi retea eaa adri leet ae erie a eee 12 26 Deleting EESTE E AETA 12 29 COPYING Files ienn stile E A A ee 12 32 Renaming Directories and Files and Creating Directories ccceeceeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeee 12 36 Chapter 13 Ethernet Communications Option 13 1 13 2 13 3
371. ime constant of 1 5 s is achieved Exponential averaging is performed using this attenuation constant For example if the data length for the analysis is 8192 points and the fundamental frequency of the PLL source is between 55 Hz and 75 Hz the attenuation constant is set to 5 625 For other frequencies it is set to 4 6875 1 12 IM 760101 01E 1 3 Measurement Conditions Data Update Rate For procedures see section 5 7 This is the period by which the data is sampled for determining the measurement functions During Normal Measurement Select the value from 50 ms 100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1s 2s and 5 s The numerical data is updated once at the selected period You can increase the data update rate to acquire relatively fast load fluctuations in the power system or decrease the rate to acquire sampled data for several periods even for relatively long signals During Harmonic Measurement The data update rate is determined by the fundamental frequency of the PLL source and the number of periods of the PLL source used for the analysis Hold For procedures see section 5 8 The data display of each measurement function can be held The communication output data while the display is held is the held numeric data Single Measurement For procedures see section 5 8 While in the held condition the measurement is performed once at the specified data update rate and enters the held condition MAX Hold For procedures see se
372. inals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous When connecting measurement cables from an external current sensor to the current sensor input connector remove the cables connected to the current input terminals In addition when the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current sensor input terminal do not touch the current input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous When using the external potential transformer PT or current transformer CT make sure it has enough withstand voltage with respect to the voltage U being measured 2U 1000 V recommended Also make sure that the secondary side of the CT does not become an open circuit while the power is being applied Otherwise high voltage will appear at the secondary side of the CT making it extremely dangerous When using an external current sensor make sure to use a sensor that comes ina case The conductive parts and the case should be insulated and the sensor should have enough withstand voltage with respect to the voltage being measured Using a bare sensor is dangerous because you might accidentally come in contact with it When using a shunt type current sensor as an external current sensor turn OFF the circuit under measurement Connecting or removing a sensor while the power is ON is dangerous When using a clamp type current sensor
373. inc sad INTEG SET RESET Procedure Check that the measurement mode is set to normal measurement If the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement set Mode to OFF in the Harmonics menu see section 7 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Numeric Numeric Wave or Numeric Trend For details on setting the display format see section 4 1 Check that Item Amount number of displayed items is set to 4 2 8 4 16 8 42 21 or 78 39 For details on setting the number of displayed items see section 4 1 mm OUOOOOULUR S Display K Format Numer ic 4 Item Amount 4 2 Norm Item No 1 K Numeric Disp Items Page Up Scroll Exec Page Down Scroll Exec HH IM 760101 01E 6 1 uolesbaju pue JUoWeINSseayy JEUN el 6 1 Changing the Displayed Item of Numerical Data The following procedures are given for a representative example in which the display format is set to Numeric 2 Press the Numeric Disp Items soft key to display the Numeric Items menu Selecting the Item to Be Changed 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the item to be changed The item to be changed is highlighted Changing the Measurement Function 4 5 Press the Function soft key to display the measurement function selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select any of the measurement function starting with None Press SEL
374. indicator illuminates and the numerical data display is held Integration continues Releasing the Held Condition Press HOLD while the values are held The HOLD indicator turns OFF and the numerical data display is updated In the held condition the display can be updated by carrying out single measurements by pressing SHIFT HOLD SINGLE Stopping the integration Press STOP The START indicator turns OFF and the STOP indicator illuminates The integration time and integration value are held If you press STOP before the time specified by the integration timer is reached and then press START integration continues up to the time specified by the integration timer If the time specified by the integration timer elapses in the normal integration mode the START indicator turns OFF and the STOP indicator illuminates The integration time and integration value are held If the time specified by the integration timer elapses in the repetitive integration mode the integration time and integration value are automatically reset and the integration is repeated until Stop is pressed e Resetting the integration 7 Press SHIFT STOP RESET The STOP indicator turns OFF the integration time and integration value are reset and the display shows no data Displays Stop Displays Ready at when Elementi when integration is only Elementi is Displays Reset when the integration value is Displays Start aborte
375. ing from the day of delivery and does not cover any other items nor expendable items items which wear out The replacement period for expendable items varies depending on the conditions of use Refer to the table below as a general guideline Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for replacement parts Parts Name Recommended Replacement Period Built in printer LCD backlight Backup battery Lithium battery Under normal usage 200 rolls of paper part No B9316FX 3 years 3 years Parts Name Warranty Period Built in hard disk 1 year after purchase excludes data 16 10 IM 760101 01E Chapter 17 Specifications 17 1 Input Item Specification Input terminal type Voltage Plug in terminal safety terminal Current e Direct input Large binding post frequency band of assured accuracy up to 1 MHZ for the 5 A terminal up to 100 kHz for the 50 A terminal e Current senser input BNC connector frequency band of assured accuracy up to 500 kHz Input format Voltage Floating input resistive voltage divider Current Floating input shunt input Measurement range Rated value Voltage When the crest factor is set to 3 1 5 V 3 V 6 V 10 V 15 V 30 V 60 V 100 V 150 V 300 V 600 V and 1000 V When the crest factor is set to 6 750 mV 1 5 V 3 V 5 V 7 5 V 15 V 30 V 50 V 75 V 150 V 300 V and 500 V Current 5 A input element e Direct in
376. ings already in the entry box they are overwritten with the recalled string 2 Correct the recalled equation according to steps 1 to 4 in Entering the file name and comment and temporary storing them described above and confirm it At this point the string is temporarily stored in the internal memory Save Menu ESG 4 Moves the cursor upward Entry box Moves the cursor downward ae Switches between upper case and lower case EA A GIGI DOOD Deletes the character before the entry position Switches the insert overwrite mode Recalls the temporary stored string Confirms the string LI 3 26 IM 760101 01E 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Ke ys other than the character keys BS Deletes the character before the entry position INS Switches the insert overwrite mode During the insert mode the INSERT indicator on the keyboard lights When a new character is entered in the insert mode the new character is placed at the entry position and all following characters are moved backward On the keyboard that appears when entering a file name or comment pressing RESET on the front panel achieves the same operation as CLR CLR Clears all displayed characters CAPS Switches between upper case and lower case SPACE Enters a space ENT Confirms the displayed characters e Number of characters and types that can be used
377. instrument By turning the power OFF you can protect the built in hard disk from vibrations The SCSI ID of the built in hard disk is fixed to 4 The size of the built in hard disk is approximately 10 GB The disk is formatted with 5 partitions before being shipped from the factory NJUUUOUU NJUWUUUU CAUTION e Do not turn OFF the power while the built in hard disk is being accessed Such act can damage the data on the hard disk e When using the instrument in a vibrating environment turn OFF the motor power of the built in hard disk 12 2 IM 760101 01E 12 3 Connecting a SCSI Device SCSI Option Specifications Item Specification Interface standard Connector type Electrical specifications SCSI Small Computer System Interface ANSI X3 131 1986 Half pitch 50 pins pin type Single end See the figure below for the pin configuration Terminator is built in Pin No Signal Name Pin No Signal Name 1to12 GND 38 TERMPWR 13 NC 39 40 GND 14 to 25 GND 41 ATN 26 DBO 42 GND 27 DB1 43 BSY 28 DB2 44 ACK 29 DB3 45 RST 30 DB4 46 MSG 31 DB5 47 SEL 32 DB6 48 C D 33 DB7 49 REQ 34 DBP 50 I O 35to 37 GND Items Necessary for Connection Cable Use a commercially sold cable that is 3 m or less in length that has a ferrite core on each end of the cable and that has a characteristic impedance between 90 and 132 Q Procedure When
378. ion humming overheating and burnouts Cable Overheating of the neutral conductor caused by harmonic currents flowing through it in a three phase four wire system Potential transformer Causes magnetostrictive noise of the iron core which leads to increased iron and copper losses Breaker and fuse Erroneous operation caused by excessive harmonic current Causes fuse to blow Communication Causes noise voltage from electro magnetic induction Control device Erroneous operation caused by distorted control signals Audio visual equipment Deterioration of performance and life span Flicker caused by video noise Malfunction of parts App 22 IM 760101 01E Appendix 5 Power Basics Power Harmonics Three Constants Related to the AC Circuit Three Constants Related to the AC Circuit Resistance Current i when the instantaneous value of u Umsinat of AC voltage is applied to load resister R Q is expressed by the following equation Im denotes the maximum value of the current _ Um i sinat Imsinat R If expressed in terms of the rms value the equation becomes U R The current flowing through a resistive circuit has no phase difference with respect to the voltage tA l v Inductance Current i when the instantaneous value of u Umsinat of AC voltage is applied to the load inductance L H is expressed by the following equation T ot gt Imsin 2 t 2 m TZ SINO XL
379. ion 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Copy ESG Printer Information Ba File List W List Item CAPS m INSERT GECELBULEPEPLELIMNEER BS Print Data List Exec K Comment File Name PIECING JUUUUOL UUUUUUU uondo Jeu Ul INg g IM 760101 01E 14 5 14 2 Printing Screen Images Executing the Print Operation 6 Switch to the screen you wish to print 7 Press COPY to print the screen image Aborting the Print Operation 8 Press the Abort soft key in the Copy menu 4 Copy to Printer Informat ion OFF pr List Item 4 Print Data List Exec 4 Comment Paper Feed Abort Explanation The screen image can be printed on the built in printer option Setting Comments The comment that you entered is displayed at the bottom of the screen The comment on the screen is also printed as a screen image Number of Characters and Types That Can Be Used Item Number of Characters Characters That Can Be Used Comment 0 to 25 characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces You can enter up to 25 characters for the comment but only the first 20 characters are displayed on the screen 14 6 IM 760101 01E 14 3 Printing Numerical Data Lists and Bar Graphs o a UP DATE os a
380. ion can be created by combining the measurement function symbols Using the numerical values of the measurement functions the numerical data of the new equation can be determined Turning ON OFF the User Defined Function You can select whether to perform the specified user defined function computation e ON Performs the computation e OFF Does not perform the computation Setting the Unit Number of characters Eight characters or less However not all eight characters can be shown on the numerical data display This depends on the number of displayed items see section 4 1 e Types of characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard or a space IM 760101 01E 6 4 Setting the User Defined Function Setting the Equation The combination of the measurement function and element number Urms1 for example can be used as an operand to create up to four equations F1 to F4 There can be up to 16 operands in one equation Measurement functions for computation The operands for the measurement functions are shown below in the form measurement function operand Urms URMS Umn UMN Udc UDC Uac UAC Irms IRMS Imn IMN Idc IDC lac IAC P P S S Q Q LAMBDA o PHI fU FU fl FI U pk UPPK U pk UMPK l pk IPPK l pk IMPK CfU CFU Cfl CFI FfU FFU Ffl FFI Z Z Rs RS Xs XS Rp RP Xp XP Pc PC n ETA 1 DIVETA AUrms D
381. ion signal When the revolution signal is DC voltage analog input Item Specification Connector type BNC connector Input range 1V 2V 5V 10V and 20 V Effective input range 110 of the measurement range However 20 V or less Input resistance Approx 1 MQ Maximum allowable input 20 V Continuous maximum common mode voltage 42 Vpeak or less Accuracy 0 1 of reading 0 2 of range Temperature coefficient 0 03 of range C For pulse input Item Specification Connector type BNC connector Frequency range 2 Hz to 200 kHz Amplitude input range 5 Vpeak Effective amplitude 1 V peak to peak or more Input waveform 50 duty ratio rectangular wave Input resistance Approx 1 MQ Continuous maximum common mode voltage 42 Vpeak or less Accuracy 0 05 of reading 1 mHz 1 digit Torque signal Same as the DC voltage of the revolution signal Motor evaluation cannot be executed during harmonic measurement D A output option Item Specification Number of outputs 30 channels Output item for each channel specifiable Accuracy accuracy of each measurement function 0 2 of FS Maximum output current 0 1 mA Temperature coefficient 0 05 of FS C Relationship between the See section 15 1 output items and D A output voltages Computation Item Specification User defined function Compute numerical data of equations up to four equations that are created by combining the measu
382. ions 3 16 IM 760101 01E 3 8 Using an External PT or CT to Wire the Circuit under Measurement Note e After wiring the wiring system must be selected See section 5 1 Selecting the Wiring System e The thick lines on the wiring diagrams are the sections where the current flows Use appropriate wires that are suitable for the current e The scaling function can be used to transform the input signal to data that correspond to direct measurements For the procedures see section 5 4 Setting the Scaling Function when using an External PT or CT e Note that the frequency and phase characteristics of the PT or CT affect the measured data e This section includes wiring diagrams that show for safety purposes the grounding of the secondary common terminals for PT and CT To more accurately measure apparent power and power factor in three phase unbalanced circuits we recommend the three voltage three current 3V3A measurement method The assignment of elements to the input terminals in the following figure varies depending on the number of installed input elements For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 1 3 Measurement Conditions Wiring Example of a Single Phase Two Wire System 1P2W Using PT and CT SOURCE LOAD SOURCE LOAD A Input terminal Input terminal em Wiring Example of a Single Phase Three Wire
383. isplayed see section 1 2 Measurement Functions and Measurement Periods 1 5 Computation 1 6 Integration appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions and appendix 2 Determination of Delta Computation e For details on the wiring units expressed as XA B C see section 5 1 Selecting the Wiring System Example The true rms value of the voltage of element 1 Urms1 E Element 1 True rms value Voltage Simple average of the current of the elements combined by wiring unit ZA IACZA pae function of wiring unit A Simple average Current 4 6 IM 760101 01E 4 1 Displaying the Data Numerical Data of Measurement Functions Selecting the Display Format Select the display format of the numerical data from the following list of choices Pinna no data is displayed in places where the measurement function is not selected or where no numerical data is present Numeric Only the numerical data is displayed Numeric Wave The numerical data and waveform are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on setting the waveform display see section 4 2 and chapter 9 Numeric Trend The numerical data and trend are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For details on setting the trend display see section 4 5 and chapter 10 Selecting the Number of Displayed Items Select the number of numerical data items that are displayed simultaneous
384. itch is turned ON the instrument powers up using the stored setup parameters Note A lithium battery is used to retain the setup parameters When the lithium battery voltage falls below a certain level a message is displayed on the screen see section 16 2 when the power switch is turned ON When this message appears frequently the battery must be replaced quickly The user cannot replace the battery For battery replacement contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer For information regarding battery life see section 16 6 IM 760101 01E 3 21 sjuswainseeyy Buers 310499 el 3 11 Setting the Date and Time 2 o pserav HOLD UR FILE STORE copy SINGLE oTRIGD o coREMOTE WAVE HARMONICS CURSOR STORE SET MENU To exit the menu during operation press ESC o RANGE scaune wana MOTOR SET o o rom we f CAL m NTEGRATOR mmm g START STOP ene sacl INTEGSET RESET Procedure 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Date Time soft key to display the Date Time dialog box e Turning ON OFF the Date Time Display 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select Display 4 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF Setting the Date and Time 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select Date or Time 6 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 7 Use the keyboard to set the date or
385. itializing Clearing the Internal Memory e Store operation can be executed only when the internal memory is cleared e If you are performing the first store operation after turning ON the power switch there is no need to clear the internal memory Starting the Store Operation The store operation starts according to various conditions depending on the store mode see section 11 1 For details see the procedural explanation Stopping the Store Operation e The store operation can be forcibly stopped using the STORE key e The store operation stops automatically according to the various conditions depending on the store mode For details see the procedural explanation Saving the Stored Data The data stored to the internal memory cannot be held by means of the internal lithium battery The data in the internal memory is lost when the power to the WT1600 is turned OFF If you wish to keep the data save the data to a storage medium before turning OFF the power Note e To start the store operation again after stopping the operation the internal memory must be cleared e no data is stored in places where there is no numerical data If there are no integrated values because integration is not performed no data is stored The integration time is stored along with The maximum harmonic for which the data is stored is the maximum harmonic order to be analyzed that is specified in section 7 5
386. itor 1 Turn OFF the power to the WT1600 and the monitor 2 Connect the WT1600 and the monitor using an analog RGB cable 3 The screen of the WT1600 appears on the monitor when the power to both the WT1600 and the monitor are turned ON e The RGB video signal is constantly output from the video signal output connector The monitor screen may flicker if the WT1600 or another device is brought close to the monitor The edge of the screen may drop out depending on the monitor type IM 760101 01E 15 9 al suoljoun 19440 pue nd no v a 15 3 Initializing the Settings a o DISPLAY roo ree FILE STORE COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU ESC o TRIG D o OREMOTE Se A Om CURSOR Tmax HOLD Sa SHIFT a To exit the menu during operation press ESC Oo J MOTOR SET we eam CAL miN TEGRATOR mm ser stor frec INTEG SET RESET Procedure Note Check that it is okay to initialize the settings before actually initializing the settings You cannot set the settings back after initialization It is recommended that the setup parameters be saved see section 12 6 before initialization Press MISC to display the Misc menu Press the Initialize Settings soft key An Alert dialog box appears Turn the jog shuttle to select OK or Cancel Select OK and press SELECT to execute the initialization Select Cancel and press SELECT to abort the initialization PO Alert Initiali
387. ize approximately 12 MB or approximately 11 MB when using a WT1600 with ROM version 2 01 or later of the store destination the store operation stops before reaching the specified store count Setting the Store Interval Set the interval at which the data is to be stored e Set the interval in units of hour minute second in the following range If the interval is set to 00 00 00 the data is stored in sync with the updating of the numerical data or waveform display data 00 00 00 to 99 59 59 By setting the time of the integration timer see section 6 8 or 6 9 to an integer multiple of the store interval the integrated values at integration start and integration stop that are repeated according to the time setting of the integration timer can be stored Setting the Store Reservation Time e The reservation time is set in units of year month date hour minute second e Set the hour minute second in the following range 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 e Make sure the reservation time for stopping the store operation is after the reservation time for starting the store operation Note ___ e The reservation time allows up to 31 days to be specified for February If an erroneous date is specified an error message is displayed at the time of execution of the store operation section 11 4 Reset the reservation time in this case e Leap years are recognized at the time of execution of the store operation IM 760101
388. l 14 Turn the jog shuttle to select one box from hour minute and second for Element 1 15 Press SELECT A box used to set the timer appears 16 Turn the jog shuttle to set the hour minute or second that you selected in step 14 For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 17 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box If you selected Each in step 13 the hour minute and second are set only to Element 1 If you selected All in step 13 the hour minute and second are set to all elements at once 18 Repeat steps 14 to 17 to set hour minute and second 19 If you selected Each in step 13 repeat steps 14 to 18 for all elements The procedure for setting the integration timer during individual element computation ends here IM 760101 01E 6 21 uolesbaju pue JUoWeiINSeayy JEUN el 6 8 Setting the Normal Integration Mode and the Integration Timer Explanation merset 4 Mode Norma1 Independent Timer Setting Setting Each Ai Element 1 00000 00 00 Element 2 00000 L00 00 Element 3 00000 00 00 Independent c Element 3 00000 00 00 Independent Timer Setting Setting Toe AIL E senent p0 L00 L00 Elenent 2 00000 00 00 Timer Setting rr N Element 4 00000 L00 C00 Element 5 00000 00 L00 Current Mode Element 4 00000 00 00 Eleme
389. l Measurement Header Information Only installed elements are applicable for the selection The following items are available as header information e Measurement mode Normal e Data update rate Date time e Measurement range of each element Turning ON OFF Header Information Printing ON Prints the header information ON Does not print the header information Selecting the Numerical Data e Only installed elements and wiring units are applicable for the selection e The numerical data can be selected from the items that are indicated in Measurement Function Types during Normal Measurement and Measurement Function Types for Motor Evaluation Function Option in section 1 2 Delta Computation User Defined Functions and Corrected Power in section 1 5 and Measurement Functions of Integration in section 1 6 Print Format of the Numerical Data List e The selected numerical data items are printed e Prints a list consisting of elements in the horizontal direction and measurement functions in the vertical direction 14 10 IM 760101 01E 14 3 Printing Numerical Data Lists and Bar Graphs During Harmonic Measurement Header Information Only installed elements are applicable for the selection The following items are available as header information Measurement mode Harmonics Date time PLL Source fU fl Phase difference of the fundamental wave oU1 U2 oU1 U3 oU1 11 pU1 12 and oU1
390. l data corresponding to item numbers that are larger than those of the numerical data displayed up to that point are displayed Display 4 Format Numer ic Item Amount 4 2 Harn Item No 1 m Q K Numer ic Disp Items Page Up Scroll Exec Page Down Scroll Exec HE ania e When Single List or Dual List is selected in step 6 7 Press the Page Up Scroll Exec or Page Down Scroll Exec soft key to scroll the page e If you press the Page Up Scroll Exec soft key the numerical data corresponding to orders that are smaller than those of the numerical data displayed up to that point are displayed e If you press the Page Down Scroll Exec soft key the numerical data corresponding to orders that are larger than those of the numerical data displayed up to that point are displayed Display ESC 4 Format Numer ic Item Amount Single List K List Items cJ Order i Page Up Scroll Exec Page Down Scroll Exec Hel all IM 760101 01E ewo Aejdsig uaa19S a 4 1 Displaying the Data Numerical Data of Measurement Functions Explanation A display example is shown below For the procedure in changing the displayed items and contents of numerical data see chapters 6 7 and 8 r The color changes from green to red when the input signal level exceeds approx three or six times the specified measurement range when the crest
391. l data or waveform display data is saved in 32 bit floating format e The file cannot be loaded to the WT1600 Extension and Data Size of the Numerical Data File e During normal measurement Data Type Extension Data Size Bytes ASCII CSV Approx 7 K condition number of elements 1 store all measurement functions 10 times Float WTD When integration is not performed Approx 4 K 4 x Dn 16 x store count When integration is performed Approx 4 K 4 x Dn 16 16 x Ti x store count Dn Number of numerical data to be stored Number of measurement functions x number of elements number of wiring units Ti Number of integration time to be stored e During harmonic measurement DataType Extension Data Size Bytes ASCII CSV Approx 25 K condition number of elements 1 measurement functions U and Others maximum order 100 store 10 times Float WTD Approx 4 K 4 x Dn 16 x store count Dn Number of numerical data to be stored e When U or P is stored Number of elements x maximum order x 2 e When S to Xp are stored Number of elements x maximum order e When Others are stored Number of elements x 11 21 The maximum 2 Total dc harmonic order to be analyzed as specified in section 7 5 Extension and Data Size of the Waveform Display Data File e During normal measurement Data Type Extension Data Size ASCII CSV Approx 103 K condition when one waveform is to
392. l for the selected measurement function and the numerical data are displayed at the highlighted position Changing the element wiring unit Press the Element soft key to display the element and wiring unit selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select any of the elements wiring units starting with Elementi Press SELECT The symbol for the selected element number or wiring unit and the numerical data are displayed at the highlighted position Changing the harmonic order 11 12 Press Order soft key Turn the jog shuttle to set the order The specified harmonic order and the numerical data are displayed at the highlighted position ESG Numeric Items Harm Item No Numeric Itens Harm Item No Select Function M Function None Element h Se lect Element 2 Element K Element 1 Element 1 Order Total Elenent 3 Element 4 Element 5 Element 6 Reset List JUUUUUUE JUUUUUUE Reset List Exec IM 760101 01E juswainseayy D1uOW Ie 7 2 Changing the Displayed Item of Numerical Data e Resetting the order of the displayed items Press the Reset List Exec soft key The order of the displayed items is reset Turn the jog shuttle to select OK or Cancel Select OK and press SELECT to execute the reset of the order of the displayed items Select Cancel and press SELECT to abort the reset of the order of
393. lation Table of D A Output Channels and Measurement Functions 5 Press the D A Output soft key to display the relation table of D A output channels and measurement functions Displayed only on products with the D A output option Displaying the Relation Table of Rotating Speeds and the Input Ranges of Torque Press the Motor Element soft key A relation table of the rotating speed and the input range filter scaling factor unit and synchronization source of torque number of poles frequency measurement source and other parameters is displayed Displayed only to products with the motor evaluation function option a Display ESC Format z Information Power Element Trend DA Output Motor Element Relation Table of Elements and Measurement Ranges If the menu is cleared using ESC a relation table of up to 6 elements is displayed The following figure shows an example when the crest factor is set to 3 ace lover Power Element Settings Elenenti Elenenta Element3 Element4 Elements Element6 U Range 104 16060 16060 16660 16060 16060 I Range 10V 50A 50A 50A 50A 50A Terminal sensor Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Line orf Off Off Off OFF OFF Filter 2 Cross Off Off Off Off off off Filter Sensor Ratio 10 0000 19 9060 190 0000 10 0099 10 0090 10 0090 nyA Scaling Off Off Off Off OFF OFF Pt Ratio 1 0000 1 0000
394. lay range is determined based on the specified measurement range For example if the crest factor is set to 3 and the voltage measurement range is set to 100 Vrms then the display range is set so that the top of the screen is 300 Vpk 100 Vrms x 3 and the bottom is 300 Vpk 100 Vrms x 3 with the zero input line at the center If the crest factor is set to 6 and the voltage measurement range is set to 50 Vrms then the display range is set so that the top of the screen is 300 Vpk 100 Vrms x 6 and the bottom is 300 Vpk 100 Vrms x 6 with the zero input line at the center However the display range for a measurement range of 1000 V or 500 V when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively is within 2000 V The waveform clips if this range is exceeded When the same signal is measured When the measurement range with the measurement range set to is set to 100 Vrms 300 Vrms 300 Vpk 900 Vpk Zero input lines 300 Vpk 900 Vpk p 1 grid 1 div 1 grid 1 div 75V 225V Horizontal Time Axis For procedures see section 9 2 Set the horizontal time axis by specifying the time per grid 1 division The time axis can be setin 1 2 or 5 steps in the range up to the point in which the time corresponding to one screen is equal to the data update rate For example if the data update rate i
395. lay the Display menu 2 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Displaying Waveforms 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select Wave Numeric Wave Wave Bar only during harmonic measurement or Wave Trend 4 Press SELECT to confirm the new display format ES Q Display Select Format Numeric Numeric Teen aman Bar 4 2 Vector Norn Item No Trend 1 Numeric Wave fj Nuner ic Numer ic Bar Disp Items Numer ic Trend Wave Bar Wave Trend Page Up Bar Trend Scroll Exec Information Page Down Scroll Exec UOUUUUUER il 4 10 IM 760101 01E 4 2 Displaying Waveforms Explanation A display example is shown below For the procedure in changing the displayed items and contents of waveforms see chapter 9 Uover m m m ut 1000 YOKOGAUA Distinction of voltage or current mom e I somu Wave Setting the element and the upper limit BEG pea of the displayed waveform Distinction of voltage or current the element and the lower limit of the displayed waveform Time at the left end of the screen WA Wave Format Single Interpolate Graticule Scale Value Orr N Trace Label BFF ON K Wave Mapping ur i 300 0 W AA lt 6 1008 cpp gt gt o 000r Time at the right end of the screen fixed to 0 s time span of the screen e Number of data points displayed in the range from
396. le to select any of the elements wiring units starting with Elementt 11 Press SELECT The selected element number and the bar graph are displayed Setting the Display Range of the Bar Graph The difference between the start and end orders must be greater than or equal to 10 e Setting the start order 12 Press the Start Order End Order soft key to set the jog shuttle target to Start Order 13 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start order of the bar graph For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings e Setting the end order 14 Press the Start Order End Order soft key to set the jog shuttle target to End Order 15 Turn the jog shuttle to set the end order of the bar graph For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings ESC ESC R Format Format 4 Format Bar Bar Bar Format Single r Bar Item No 1 u Bar Format Single W Bar Format Bar Format Display Ba Single Single Bar Item No Select Bar Item No 2 1 1 Elenent End _ 100 W Function Select u Element 2 Element Element 3 Element 4 Element 5 End a 100 E Function W Function u u 4 Element K Element Element 1 Element 1 O Start Order l Start Order 1 1 End Order
397. lected in the latter section Selecting the revolution signal type 2 Turn the jog shuttle to select Range under Speed 3 Press SELECT to display the input range selection box 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select the input range from Auto and 20 V to 1 V 5 Press SELECT to confirm the new input range Input range is selectable when the type of revolution signal is Analog Motor Set Speed Torque Range ZOU select Sense Type fnalog Pul Auto Pulse Range 6 6660 Line Filter OFF Scaling 1 6666 Unit pr Pulse N Pole 2 Sync Speed _ g TT Sync Source IM 760101 01E 8 3 uondo uoljenjeaq 1030 8 2 Selecting the Input Range of the Revolution and Torque Signals and the Synchronization Source Selecting the Input Range of the Torque Signal 2 Turn the jog shuttle to select Range under Torque 3 Press SELECT to display the input range selection box 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select the input range from Auto and 20 V to 1 V 5 Press SELECT to confirm the new input range Selecting the Revolution Signal Type 2 Turn the jog shuttle to select Sense Type 3 Press SELECT to select Analog or Pulse Motor Set Motor Set Speed Torque Pn Speed Torque Range 1 ZOU select Range py Zou
398. lement 4 Element 5 Element 6 za EEB Urns Umean Irms Imean P 5 M o M ae s 5 3 a Function Uac Function Tac A I peak FfI Rp Ude Ide q FreqI I peak Fru Xs T a aaa Frequ U peak CFI Tarten n age wee Ge mem up ea COM ee q F4 F3 eea y Bulpeo7 pue Burnes D E E E E E E E E E Q 5 GOQOCCOMR AMAA GOOO VOOOWseee Eoman na ooo 0g G20 8 eee Gee AImean AImean IM 760101 01E 12 13 12 6 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data and Numerical Data e Setting the items one at a time 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select the element or measurement function that you wish to specify 7 Press SELECT When the button to the left of the selected element or measurement function is highlighted the numerical data of the measurement function of the element will be saved When the highlighting of the button is cleared the numerical data of the measurement function of the element will not be saved Proceed to step 10 Executing Aborting the Save Operation 10 Press ESC to close the List Item dialog box 11 Press the Save soft key to display the Save Menu menu 12 Press the File List soft key to display the File List dialog box Selecting the Save Destination Medium 13 Turn the jog shuttle to select the save destination medium indicated by 14 Press SELECT to confirm the new medium
399. lement 5 Element 6 Filter Copy Exec Epaper Explanation There are two types of filters Selecting the Line Filter The line filter is inserted into the circuit under measurement It removes the noise from the inverter and from distorted waveforms e The cutoff frequency can be selected from the list of choices below OFF 500 Hz and 5 5 kHz e lf any of the target elements is set to a setting other than OFF the FILTER indicator above and to the left of the key illuminates Selecting OFF disables the filter Selecting the Zero Crossing Filter This filter is inserted only into the frequency measurement circuit Zero crossing refers to the point at which the input signal crosses the center level of the amplitude This filter is used to accurately detect the zero crossing point e The cutoff frequency can be selected from the list of choices below OFF and 500 Hz e This instrument detects the zero crossing point with a hysteresis of approximately 5 of the measurement range When the zero crossing filter is OFF and the line filter above is ON the cutoff frequency specified by the line filter is used as a zero crossing filter Note For selecting the line filter for the motor evaluation function see section 8 3 5 18 IM 760101 01E 5 6 Averaging For a functional description see section 1 3 o a ose HOLD ca FILE srone COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTAIGD o REMOTE a v
400. ly from the f ollowing list of choices 4 2 e When the display format is Numeric 4 numerical data values are displayed in one column e When the display format is other than Numeric 2 numerical data values are displayed 8 4 e When the display format is Numeric 8 numerical data values are displayed in one column e When the display format is other than Numeric 4 numerical data values are displayed 16 8 e When the display format is Numeric 16 numerical data values are displayed in two columns e When the display format is other than Numeric 8 numerical data values are displayed 42 21 e When the display format is Numeric 42 numerical data values are displayed in three columns e When the display format is other than Numeric 21 numerical data values are displayed 78 39 e When the display format is Numeric 78 numerical data values are displayed in three columns e When the display format is other than Numeric 39 numerical data values are displayed All A table is displayed indicating the numerical data of items with measurement functions listed vertically and symbols indicating elements and wiring units listed horizontally The number of displayed items varies depending on the number of installed elements IM 760101 01E yewo Aejdsig uae19S a 4 1 Displaying the Data Numerical Data of Measurement Functions During Harmonic Measurement Meaning of the Measurement Function Symbols For the
401. me time the All Set soft key changes to an All Reset soft key Press the All Reset soft key Asterisks to the left of the directory containing the selected file and all the files in the directory the selected directory and all the files in the directory or all the directories and files in the selected medium disappear The corresponding items will not be copied At the same time the All Reset soft key changes to an All Set soft key File List Copy ES Path SC4 O0 UTDN Function Space 2137817088 byte File Name Size Date Attribute Copy a Q ES Q ion Set Reset Set Reset Iten Dest D All Set EE Property Filter Attribute li aooo 2001 08 24 18 09 2001 08 24 19 15 A11 Reset 2001 08 24 19 16 2001 08 24 18 10 2001 08 24 19 14 2001 08 24 19 14 Property 2001 08 24 19 15 2001 08 24 19 15 BE Andion Filter Item All Fa Attribute E ir Dest Dir IM 760101 01E 12 33 eea y Bulpeo7 pue Burnes 5i 12 11 Copying Files Selecting the Copy Destination 12 Press the Dest Dir soft key The copy execution menu and the copy destination File List dialog box appears ES Q Copy 4 Function Copy Set Reset All Reset Property Filter Iten Attribute 4 Dest Dir BOUCOUE Selecting the copy destination medium or directory 13 Same as the procedures given in S
402. measure the analog signal of the revolution signal and torque signal If you specify no synchronization source by selecting None the entire sampled data within the data update interval is the data used to determine the rotating speed and torque e This does not apply when the revolution signal is a pulse signal e When the revolution signal is a pulse signal the measured value of the revolution signal is the averaged interval of the pulse signal of the measurement period determined from the synchronized source selected here If the period of the pulse signal is not included in this measurement interval the measured value is determined from the previous period IM 760101 01E 8 5 uondo uoljenjeaq 10 0 e 8 3 Selecting the Line Filter T keys o a ff i DISPLAY HOLD Ba FILE STORE COPY ESG SINGLE STORE SET MENU a oTRIGD o REMOTE a WAVE LOCAL MISC wae N CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC ss PUT o Ped nae care JOTOR SET o FILTER AVG CAL qm NTEGRATOR mm g G START STOP Re INTEG SET RESET WUUOUU j H Procedure Press SHIFT RANGE MOTOR SET to display the Motor Set dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select Line Filter Press SELECT to display the line filter selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select OFF or 100 Hz Press SELECT to confirm the new line filter The sam
403. measurement functions such as U I P S Q A 6 listed vertically and symbols indicating elements and wiring units listed horizontally e When the display format is other than Numeric a table is displayed indicating the numerical data of items with 11 measurement functions such as U I P S Q A 6 listed vertically and symbols indicating elements and wiring units listed horizontally e A table is displayed for each order All harmonic orders Total or from dc 0 order up to 100 order can be displayed However the numerical data up to the order corresponding to the upper limit of harmonic order under analysis see section 17 6 that is automatically determined by the frequency of the PLL source is the data determined by the harmonic measurement no data is displayed in places where the measurement function is not selected or where no numerical data is present If Urms Umn Uac Udc Irms Imn lac or Idc exceeds 140 of the measurement range over the range OL is displayed P shows over the range OL if the measured values of either the voltage or current exceeds 140 of the measurement range If the measured or computed result cannot be displayed using the specified decimal position or unit overflow OF is displayed If Urms Uac Irms or lac is less than or equal to 0 3 when the crest factor is set to 3 less than or equal to 0 6 when the crest factor is set to 6 or Umn or Imn is less than or equal t
404. medium Selecting the Copy Source Destination Medium and Directory Same as the explanation given in Selecting the Medium and Directory in section 12 6 Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box Same as the explanation given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box in section 12 9 Properties Same as the explanation given in Properties in section 12 9 Selecting the File Attribute Same as the explanation given in Selecting the File Attribute in section 12 9 Renaming a Directory or File The method in setting the name when renaming a directory or file is the same as the explanation given in File Name and Comment in section 12 6 Creating a Directory You can create a new directory in the medium The method in setting the name when creating a directory is the same as the explanation given in File Name and Comment in section 12 6 Note e You cannot change a directory attribute e Ifa file with the same name already exists in the same directory the file cannot be renamed e Ifadirectory with the same name already exists in the same directory the directory cannot be created e When File Item is Wave Data Type is Binary and Filter is Item renaming the name of the selected file with a WVF extension causes the file with the same name with the HDR extension to be changed When Filter is All the name of only the selected files is changed IM 760101
405. ment Function and Measurement Period Element Element refers to a set of input terminals that can input a single phase of voltage and current to be measured The WT1600 can contain up to six elements which are numbered from 1 to 6 The element number is appended to the symbols that were defined in the earlier section Harmonic measurement functions on each input element so that the correspondence between the numerical data and the element can be seen For example U1 2 represents the voltage of the 2 order harmonic of element 1 suoloun jo uoneuejdxa Wiring System The selectable patterns of wiring systems vary depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the instrument You may be able to select only a single type of wiring system or two or three types of wiring systems When two or more types of wiring systems are selected A B or C is appended to the symbols that were defined in the earlier section Harmonic measurement functions of the average or sum of input elements functions so that the correspondence between the numerical data and the wiring unit can be seen For example UXA 1 represents the average of the voltage of the fundamental signal of the input elements that are assigned to wiring unit XA PLL Source For procedures see section 7 4 When measuring harmonics the fundamental period period of the fundamental signal must be determined in order to analyze the
406. meout time selection box 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set the timeout time For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 8 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box Setting the SMPT Timeout Time 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select SMTP Time Out 6 Press SELECT to display the timeout time selection box 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set the timeout time For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 8 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box Others FTP Passive FF _ON_ LPR Tine Out sec SMTP Time Out sec L 15 Explanation Enters special settings related to the FTP client LPR and SMTP Normally these parameters do not need to be specified Turning ON OFF the FTP Passive Mode Turn this function ON when using the WT1600 behind a firewall that requires the passive mode The default setting is OFF A firewall is furnished on a system that has security features It prevents intrusion from the outside into the network system Setting the LPR Timeout Time The WT1600 closes the connection to the printer if there is no response from the printer for a certain period of time timeout time when it accesses the printer Select the value in the range of 0 to 3600 s The default value is 15 s Setting the SMTP Timeout Time When a mail server is accessed from the WT1600 and connection can
407. ming Directories and Files and Creating Directories Procedure 2 o DISPLAY HOLD ica FILE sToRE copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD REMOTE a WAVE HARMONICS LOCAL MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD O NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC RANGE scana WIRING MOTOR SET o o nom CAL qm NTEGRATOR mmm z oa STOP Ri INTEG SET RESET A H START Press FILE to display the File menu Press the Utility soft key The Utility menu and the File List dialog box appear Press the Function soft key to display the Function menu Delete ES File Item WA Function Setup Delete Set Reset All Set BE anariam Property Filter Item ALL Attribute Utility Delete Exec HUUUUOUE EL 12 36 IM 760101 01E 12 12 Renaming Directories and Files and Creating Directories Renaming a Directory or File 4 Press the Rename soft key to display the Rename menu Delete Renane o OUUUGULE MakeDir Attribute Delete Exec Selecting the Medium and Directory 5 Same as the procedures given in Selecting the Save Destination Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 12 6 E Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File
408. mode and integration time must be set before starting the operation This section will describe how to set the normal integration mode and the integration time for real time control For the procedure in starting the integration see section 6 11 Selecting the Real time Normal Integration Mode or Real time Repetitive Integration Mode In this mode integration is performed between the times specified by integration start and stop This mode consists of the following two types e Real time normal integration mode The date and time of start and stop of the integration operation and the integration timer value are specified The integration is stopped at the specified time when the timer value is reached when the maximum integration time of 10000 hours is exceeded or when the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value 999999 MWh or 999999 MAh The integration time and value are held at that point Real time repetitive integration mode continuous integration The date and time of start and stop of the integration operation and the integration timer value are specified The integration is repeated at the specified timer setting during that time When the time specified by the timer elapses the operation is automatically reset and restarted The integration is stopped at the specified time or when the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value The integration time and value are
409. mory e Store operation can be executed only when the internal memory is cleared e If you are performing the first store operation after turning ON the power switch there is no need to clear the internal memory Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box Specify the type of files to be displayed e Item Displays only the numerical data and waveform display data files in the selected directory e All Displays all the files in the selected directory 11 18 IM 760101 01E 11 5 Saving the Stored Data Properties Displays the filename extension the file size the date the file was saved the attribute and the comment of the selected file Note The following data is stored in the places where numerical data does not exist when saving the stored numerical data e For ASCII files Characters NAN INF INF or ERROR e For Float files 0x7FC00000 0x7F800000 OxFF800000 or OxFFFFFFFE Up to 36 characters can be displayed in Path The file names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following five file names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL and CLOCK When using the GP IB or serial interface commands to enter a file name the following symbols that do not exist on the keyboard of this instrument can be used IM 760101 01E 11 19 e eq p310 S ay urnes pue geq Buljjeo0y pue Bunos z 11 6 Recalling the Stored Data a o
410. mpany and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies e First edition June 2001 Second edition August 2001 Third edition December 2002 e Fouth edition April 2004 All Rights Reserved Copyright 2001 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 760101 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument If some of the contents are not correct or missing or if there is physical damage contact the dealer from which you purchased them WT1600 Check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate on the side panel match those on the order ep S ae YOKOGAWA Made in Japan MODEL and SUFFIX Codes Model Suffix Code Description 760101 100 120 200 240 VAC For details on the construction of the current input terminal that is equipped on the instrument see the next section Current input terminal Element 1 2 3 4 5 6 Construction 01 50A 02 50A 50A 03 50A 50A 50A 04 50A 50A 50A 50A 05 50A 50A 50A 50A 50A 06 50A 50A 50A 50A 50A 50A 10 5A 11 5A 50 A 12 5A 50A 50A 13 5A 50A 50A 50A 14 5A 50A 50A 50A 50A 15 5A 50A 50A 50A 50A 50A 20 5A 5A 21 5A 5A 50A 22 5A 5A
411. n CAUTION Do not remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or lS is blinking Such acts can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Selecting the Medium and Directory Same as the explanation given in Selecting the Medium and Directory in section 12 6 Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box You can specify the file to be displayed on the File List dialog box e Item The list of files corresponding to the file type Setup Wave or Numeric that is specified for File Item in the File menu in the selected directory is displayed e All The list of all the files in the selected directory is displayed Property Displays the filename extension the file size the date the file was saved the attribute and the comment of the selected file Selecting the File Attribute Select the file attribute of each file from the following list of choices e R W Read and write e R Read only No writing or deleting Note You cannot change a directory attribute 12 28 IM 760101 01E 12 10 Deleting Files l E aan man Aee SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTAIGD o coREMOTE a wo Jos oeu om CURSOR it MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC RANGE scaunel WIRING eqs NTEGRATOR wma g a START STOP INTEGSET RESET g 1 g S Procedure Press FILE to display the F
412. n Rp Up x S Numeric COMMeeeeee ng g BO a n 4 List Item OO F2 4Unean AImean oagaoao uuna 3 5 00 00 000 e Selecting only the items that are preset during normal measurement only 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select Preset1 or Preset2 8 Press SELECT The buttons to the left of all the elements and measurement functions that are specified in Preset1 or Preset 2 are highlighted indicating that the items will be stored Items specified in Preset1 List Iten Items specified in Preset2 List Item AI ON All OFF Preset 1 Preset 2 2 ALL ON All OFF Preset 1 Preset 2 Elenent Function Element ifg Element 2 g Element 3 9 Element 4 Element 5iaj Element 6 ZA Urms Irms 3 P TADA M a aaa Uspeak ceu Element Function Element 1 Element Zig Element 3 Element 4 Element 5igj Element 6 zA Urns Irns P U peak cru ZB Unean M o E a f PE ae fae Uac lac A I peak Fri SelaSalee eee Rp 00w up 0 Cleese n a F4 amp E E E E E E E E E E E E E E 0 i c E amp i E io 5 E pogano Gee Oe Gee eel eel sata el eee Bee AImean AImean e Setting the items one at a time 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select the element or measurement f
413. n it OFF Do a key test If it fails servicing is required 16 3 Triggering does not work Check the trigger conditions 9 3 Check that the trigger source is being applied 9 3 Unable to make harmonic measurements Check the PLL source settings 7 4 Check that the PLL source input signal is within the specifications 7 4 Unable to print The printer head may be damaged or worn out Servicing required Unable to recognize the medium Check that the cables are properly connected 12 3 Check the format of the medium If necessary format the medium 12 5 The medium may be damaged Unable to save data to the selected medium Check the format of the medium If necessary format the medium 12 5 Check that the write protect is disabled Check the free space on the medium Remove unnecessary files as necessary or use a new medium 12 5 Unable to set or control the instrument via the communication interface Check that the GP IB address or the parameter settings of the serial interface satisfy the specifications Check that the interface satisfies the electrical and mechanical specifications See the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760101 11E IM 760101 01E 16 1 g uonsedsu pue avueugzuien HunooysajqnoiL 16 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Error Messages There are cases in which error messages are displayed on the screen during operation This section describes the meanings of the messages and
414. n the jog shuttle to select one of the reservation year month date hour minute and second boxes for specifying when the integration operation will start Press SELECT A box used to set the timer appears Turn the jog shuttle to set the year month date hour minute or second that you selected in step 12 For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Press SELECT or ESC to close the box Repeat steps 12 to 15 to set the year month date hour minute and second Turn the jog shuttle to select one of the reservation year month date hour minute and second boxes for specifying when the integration operation will end Repeat steps 13 to 16 to set the year month date hour minute and second The procedure for setting the reservation time during all element simultaneous computation ends here 6 24 IM 760101 01E 6 9 Setting the Real time Integration Mode the Integration Timer and the Reservation Time g Timer Setting A11 Start A11 End Setting Real Time Control 2007 01 2001 01 Real Tine Control Independent Control All Start 2001_ 61 01 CAN att End zooko Lor 0 4 Current Mode RMS the Integration Timer during Individual Element Computation Independent Control ON 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
415. n time Wp Sum of positive and negative watt hours Wp Sum of positive P consumed watt hour Wp Sum of negative P watt hour returned to the power supply q Sum of positive and negative ampere hours q Sum of positive ampere hour q Sum of negative ampere hour However the ampere hour is the integration of one of the selected current Irms Imn Idc or lac IM 760101 01E 17 3 h Ey suoneoyioeds 17 3 Measurement Functions Items during Normal Measurement Measurement Functions Functions Determined for Each Wiring Unit A B and C For details on the determination and equations of functions see appendix 1 Item Symbol and Meaning Voltage V Urmsz true rms value Umnz rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value UdcS simple average UacS AC component Current A Irmsz true rms value Imnz rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value Idcz simple average lacx AC component Active power W Px Apparent power VA Sy Reactive power var Q Power factor AX Phase difference oz Impedance Q of the yay load circuit Resistance and reactance Q of the load circuit Rsz Resistance of the load circuit that has a resistor R inductor L and capacitor C connected in series Xsz Reactance of the load circuit that has a resistor R inductor L and capacitor C connected in series Rp Resistance of the load circuit that has
416. ncel and press SELECT to abort the reset of the order of the displayed items Numeric Itens Norn Item No Function Urns K Element Normal Numeric Items will be initialized Alert Really Element 1 OK Cancel Reset List Exec IM 760101 01E 6 1 Changing the Displayed Item of Numerical Data Explanation Changing the measurement function The types of measurement functions that can be selected are the items that are indicated in Measurement Function Types during Normal Measurement and Measurement Function Types for Motor Evaluation Function Option in section 1 2 Delta Computation User Defined Functions and Corrected Power in section 1 5 and Measurement Functions of Integration in section 1 6 You can also select not to display the measurement functions None The number 1 2 3 and 4 that is attached to the measurement function symbol of the delta computation has no relation to the element number For delta computation with only a single measurement function a fixed number is displayed regardless of the element selected in the next section For delta computation with multiple measurement functions voltage Elementi through Element3 selected in the next section correspond to the numbers 1 through 3 that are attached to the measurement functions of the delta computation regardless of the element specified as the delta comp
417. nctions U pk U pk I pk I pk CfU Cfl FfU and Ffl that are determined from the maximum value of the voltage and current is also the entire span within the data update interval e The measurement period during harmonic measurement is as follows The number of sampled data to be used in harmonic measurement is set to 8192 4096 or 2048 points see section 7 7 The range corresponding to the selected number of sampled data is the measurement period When the waveform is displayed the measurement period corresponds to one screen of the waveform Copying the Synchronization Source The synchronization source specified for a given element can be set to the elements of the same wiring unit However if the wiring system is pattern 1 the measurement range can be copied to all other elements The synchronization source for other elements that were specified before is not held 6 6 IM 760101 01E 6 3 Selecting the Frequency Measurement Target Procedure Explanation n PUT a RANGE scaunel WIRING MOTOR SET a FILTER Ava jj b 3l T eqs NTEGRATOR wma g a START STOP INTEGSET RESET H For a functional description see section 1 2 o a ose ay HOLD cad FILE srone COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU aTAIGD o REMOTE 2 WAVE sons Loca MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC 1 Press MEASURE to dis
418. nctions that cannot be displayed on one screen Page scrolling is also possible Resetting the display Reset the display order of the numerical data to default Waveform Display Item Specification Retrieval of waveform ON OFF selectable display data Sample rate Approx 200 kS s Time axis During normal measurement In the range of 0 5 ms div to 500 ms div However less than or equal to 1 10 of the data update rate During harmonic measurement Automatically determined from the PLL source and window width Trigger Trigger type Edge type Trigger mode Select auto or normal Trigger source Select from the voltage or current applied to the input element and external clock Trigger slope Select from rising falling or 4 rising and falling Trigger level When the trigger source is a voltage or current applied to the input element Set in the range of 100 from the screen center measurement range x 3 the upper and lower limits of the screen Resolution 0 1 e When the trigger source is Ext Clk external clock TTL level For the specifications of the external clock see section 9 3 Vertical zoom on the Zoom in out vertically for each voltage or current applied to the input element Set the zoom rate in waveform the range from 0 1 to 100 times Turning ON OFF the Select ON OFF for each voltage or current applied to the input element waveform display Waveform display format
419. nd 0 0002 for the 50 A input terminal 2 mQ 1 KQ SOURCE T ena eR aA LOAD Je WT1600 IM 760101 01E 3 4 For Making Accurate Measurements Effects of Stray Capacitance The effects of stray capacitance on the measurement accuracy can be minimized by connecting the current input terminal of the instrument to the side that is close to the earth potential of the power source SOURCE The internal structure of the instrument is as follows The voltage and current measurement circuits are each enclosed in shielded cases These shielded cases are placed inside the outer case The shielded case of the voltage measurement circuit is connected to the terminal of the voltage input terminal and the shielded case of the current measurement circuit is connected to the terminal of the current input terminal Because the outer case is insulated from the shielded case stray capacitance Cs of approximately 100 pF exists The current generated by this stray capacitance Cs will cause errors Shielded case of the voltage measurement circuit Outer case Earth Shielded case of the current measurement circuit For example we will consider the case when one side of the power source and the outer case are grounded In this case two current flows can be considered load current iL and the current that flows through the stray capacitance ics iL flows through the current measurement circuit then thro
420. nd 2 to enter all the characters 4 After entering all the characters select ENT on the keyboard and press SELECT The string is confirmed and the keyboard disappears At the same time the equation is temporarily stored in the internal memory When the equation is not correct and an error message is displayed it is still stored in the memory Up to five equations can be stored Beyond five for all successive equations the oldest equation is cleared e Recalling the temporarily stored equation 1 Select on the keyboard and press SELECT A window opens and the temporarily stored equation is displayed 2 Select the equation you wish to recall and press SELECT The selected equation appears in the entry box on the keyboard If there are strings already in the entry box they are overwritten with the recalled equation 3 Correct the recalled equation according to steps 1 to 4 in Entering the equation and temporary storage described above and confirm it At this point the equation is temporarily stored in the internal memory The window displaying the equation that is stored in the memory ABCDEFGH ABCDEFGH INSERT IZBEEEVEDe kd IBCDEFGH LF UGTHU TL JTL UN c NOP TOTRS Tru eux Ee pence Let CEL LELET SS aS Ga EG The key that is selected when displaying the window on the right IM 760101 01E 3 25 sjuswainseayy Buers 310499 el 3 12 Entering Values and Strings
421. nd Disp Items soft key to display the Trend Items menu Format Trend Trend Setting JOOU During normal measurement Trend Setting Trend Display M Trend Format Single Restart Trend Exec Trend Tvdiv 3svdiv Trend Disp Items During harmonic measurement Trend Setting Trend Display M Trend Format Single Restart Trend Exec Trend Prdiv JOL 50 Trend Disp Items L JBUUUULE 10 2 IM 760101 01E 10 2 Selecting the Trend Display Target During Normal Measurement Selecting the Item to Be Set 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select T1 to T16 Selecting the Measurement Function 5 Press the Function soft key to display the measurement function selection box 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select any of the measurement function starting with None 7 Press SELECT to confirm Selecting the Element Wiring Unit 8 Press the Element soft key to display the element wiring unit selection box 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select any of the elements wiring units starting with Elementi 10 Press SELECT to confirm ESC Trend Ttems ESC Trend Items Trend Ob ject Trend Ob ject Trend Itens Trend Ob ject T1 T1 T1 e W Function Select Function M Function Urns None Urns Urns H Element Element Select Element Element 1 Unean Eleme
422. nd ON OFF of Integration Auto Calibrationicissits chasis tit ieee aie Sa he ae ed a ee 6 29 6 11 Performing Integration Start Stop and Reset cceeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeens 6 31 Chapter 7 Harmonic Measurement 7 1 Setting the Harmonic Measurement Mode secceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeaeeeeeee 7 1 7 2 Changing the Displayed Item of Numerical Data 0 0 0 cceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaees 7 2 7 3 Selecting the Measurement Target ccesceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeseeseaeeeeeeeaeeseesseeeeeeeeaees 7 7 ATA Selecting the PE SOU visics eeccseeess Aire n a rasta wedsauced r ee 7 8 7 5 Setting the Harmonic Order to Be Analyzed eecececeeeeeeeteeteeeeeeeeteneeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeentens 7 11 7 6 Selecting the Equation for the Distortion Factor c cecceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeteetens 7 13 7 7 Changing the Data Length ee eeceeeceeeseesseeeeeeeseeeeseeeeaeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeesaeseaeesaeeeaeeteaten 7 14 7 8 Setting the User Defined FUNCTION 0 eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeeeeteaeeeaeeteaeeseeeenaeestaeeeaeeenetee 7 15 7 9 Changing the Display Items of Bar Graphs and Performing Cursor Measurements 7 19 7 10 Changing the Vector Display 0 00 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseaeeseeeseeeseaeeeeeeeaeeseeeteaeess 7 23 Chapter 8 Motor Evaluation Option A 8 1 Inputting Signals of Rotating Speed and Torque cecceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeee
423. neeeeteeeeeeeeeeetseaees 1 26 waveforms weight 17 19 WINGOW FUNCTION 0 ee eet eee eens eeeee tenet teeeeeaeeteaeeeaeeeeaes 17 12 window width 1 0 0 0 cece eeeeteeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeesssstseeeeeeesens 7 14 17 12 windows number Of ccececeessseeeceeesssneeeeeeeesssseeeeeeeess 9 13 WIPLING oie ccees ve ceveyenashsvedeacdecevsesaseteeidecdeapsusevssteeed sescerb eh avenvo0eai 5 1 wiring example current sensor 3 14 wiring example direct Wiring eee eee tee eeeeeeee 3 10 wiring example PT ANd CT oo eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 3 17 Wiring PFECAUTIONS oo ee eee eee e eee eeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseneenaes 3 4 wiring system 1 4 1 7 1 9 5 2 wiring system pattern 0 eee eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeneees 1 9 5 1 withstand Voltage cece cece eeeeeeseeseeeeeeesseeeeneeeaes 17 19 WT COO so ras aie ons fase cee hte Ena aaiae n Weiss TAE ETa a te anal ii Z zero crossing filter zero crossing filter selection of zero level COMpeNsAtION eee ee eee eeeeeeeeeee ZOOM eiieeii Seed tie AU eek canna cnt EE ZOOM VECIOIS sscexeccepanevaeiseanetoat ccssensacsayeaebecndipeusinesyaeeusdeass Index 6 IM 760101 01E
424. ng the Scaling Function When Using an External PT or CT Setting the CT Ratio 4 Press the Ct Ratio soft key 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the CT ratio For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Scaling Element Object Element 1 K Sensor Ratio mua 10 0000 JUE ct Ratio 1 0000 O Scaling Factor 1 0000 Scaling Copy Exec Setting the Power Coefficient 4 Press the Scaling Factor soft key 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the power coefficient For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Scaling Element Ob ject Element 1 K Sensor Rat io mu a 10 0000 Scaling Factor 1 0000 Copying the ON OFF Condition PT Ratio CT Ratio and Power Coefficient of the Scaling Function The ON OFF condition PT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient of the scaling function specified for a given element can be set to the elements of the same wiring unit The current sensor transformation ratio See section 5 3 is also copied The current the ON OFF condition PT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient of the scaling function and the current sensor transformation ratio for other elements that were specified before are not held 3 Press one of the sof
425. njea po e169 u wy uonei6a u limer setting Timer Timer setting gt gt setting STOP is Start pressed Reset IM 760101 01E 1 21 suo1 2uny jo uoneuejdxa 1 6 Integration Real time Normal Integration Mode The start and stop of the integration operation is set through date and time The integration is stopped at the specified time or when the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value The integration time and value are held at that point Hold 5 3 Sa Py a Hold 25 33 S Ss Start Stop Reset date time date time Real time Repetitive Integration Mode Continuous Integration The start and stop of the integration operation is set through date and time The integration is repeated at the specified timer setting during that time When the time specified by the timer elapses the operation is automatically reset and restarted The integration is stopped at the specified time or when the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value The integration time and value are held at that point 53 5a Hold a 25 33 Hold Ea s Timer Timer Timer l setting setting setting Start Stop Reset date time date time 1 22 IM 760101 01E 1 7 Waveform Display The WT1600 displays waveforms based on the data sampled within the data update rate Vertical Amplitude Axis The vertical disp
426. not be established after a certain period of time timeout time the WT1600 decides that the connection to the mail server is not possible and closes the connection Select the value in the range of 0 to 3600 s The default value is 15 s SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is a protocol that resides above the TCP IP layer and is used by the e mail transmission system IM 760101 01E 13 25 uondo suonesiunwwos 3u194 3 g Chapter 14 Built in Printer Option 14 1 Installing the Paper Roll and Paper Feeding CATES pispLay HoLp Y PATE LN ERN ear rao Ma EA SINGLE STORE SB aTRIGD o REMOTE WAVE ones LOCAL MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT PUSH Oo0000 Oo0000 o0000 TS ee PUT a TAL To exit the menu during operation press ESC INTEG SET RESET Procedure 1 Press the section marked as PUSH on the printer cover The printer cover opens Printer cover 2 Pull up on the release lever to the FREE position vertical Release lever Roll pocket uondo Jeu Ul INg g IM 760101 01E 14 1 14 1 Installing the Paper Roll and Paper Feeding 3 With approximately 13 cm of the roll paper unrolled place the roll paper in the roll pocket in the direction indicated by the figure below If you reverse the direction in which the roll paper is placed nothing will be printed 4 Insert the roll paper evenly under the paper roller and move the rel
427. nput Stores numerical data option element waveform display data Recalls numerical data waveform o display data o Built in hard disk option Saves stored data Saves setup parameters Voltage Current numerical data waveform display data Input either one Input any one screen image data Revolution Torque sensor meter Item under measurement Conforms to EIA 574 9 pin EIA 232 RS 232 IM 760101 01E 1 1 suoloun jo uoneuejdxa 1 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram Block Diagram He H EXT TORQUE RTC option a 7 Sl lt A D l Fiter O DSP vO DET DSP OW E i Al D A SPEED ELEMENT2 6 ELEMENT1 Display _ 6 4 GA LCD oil CPU A RQ Ld lt A D a Line E a Filter O Zero No ZERO DSP KEY amp Cross LO DET CPU Filter PEAK G A DET LED GP IB pee t Fine i Q fng ROM Serial Filter Zero DET Ci Fiter O PRINTER PEAK t DET DRAM option scsi SRAM option MOTOR option gt HDD lt A D z S PLL option Fiter O ZERO 10BASE T 3 PHOTO l COUNTER option I
428. nt 1 Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 Element 5 Element 6 X UU NJUUUUUO IM 760101 01E 10 3 Aejdsig pu L 2 10 2 Selecting the Trend Display Target During Harmonic Measurement Selecting the Item to Be Set 4 Press the Trend Object soft key 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select T1 to T16 Selecting the Measurement Function 6 Press the Function soft key to display the measurement function selection box 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select any of the measurement function starting with None 8 Press SELECT to confirm Selecting the Element Wiring Unit 9 Press the Element soft key to display the element wiring unit selection box 10 Turn the jog shuttle to select any of the elements wiring units starting with Elementi 11 Press SELECT to confirm Selecting the Harmonic Order 12 Press the Order soft key 13 Turn the jog shuttle to select the order from Total and 0 to the maximum harmonic order see section 7 5 ESC Trend Items ESC Trend Ttems OTrend Ob ject Trend Ob ject ESC Trend Ttems Trend Ob ject Trend Itens Trend Ob ject ESG T1 Ti T1 Ti W Function Select Function M Function WM Function None u u g Element Element h Se lect Element 2 Element g Element Element 1 Element 1 Element 1 Element 1 Order 1 Element 3 Element 4 Element 5 Element 6 X
429. nt 5 00000 00 L00 Element 6 00000 00 00 Element 6 60000 00 00 Auto Cal To perform integration the integration mode and integration time must be set before starting the operation This section will describe how to set the normal integration mode and the integration time For the procedure in starting the integration see section 6 11 Selecting the Normal Integration Mode or Repetitive Integration Mode In this mode the integration time is set in relative time and the integration is performed over the specified time This mode consists of the following two types e Normal integration mode The integration time is set in relative time The integration is stopped after the specified time elapses when the maximum integration time of 10000 hours is exceeded when you press STOP or when the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value 999999 MWh or 999999 MAh The integration time and value are held at that point e Repetitive integration mode continuous integration The integration time is set in relative time When the specified time elapses the operation is automatically reset and restarted Integration is repeated until Stop is pressed When the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value The integration time and value are held at that point Setting the Integration Timer e Set the time in units of hour minute second in
430. o 1 when the crest factor is set to 3 less than or equal to 2 when the crest factor is set to 6 of the measurement range Urms Umn Uac Irms Imn lac and the measurement functions that are determined using these measurement functions display zeroes A or gt displays an error If the measured value of frequency is outside the measurement range fU or fl displays an error If both the voltage and current are sinusoids and the ratio of the voltage and current inputs do not differ greatly with respect to the measurement range the phase difference of lead D and lag G are detected correctly If the power factor A is greater than 1 and less than or equal to 2 becomes 1 displays zero If the power factor A is greater than 2 and display errors IM 760101 01E yewo Aejdsig uae19S a 4 2 Displaying Waveforms For a functional description see section 1 7 PNS i DISPLAY I HOLD ica FILE STORE COPY ESC SINGLE STORE SET MENU o TRIG D REMOTE pi WAVE Loca MISC CURSOR CMAX HOLD O NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC lt NP o RANGE scaunel WIRING JOUOUL MOTOR SET o o FILTER AVG resur CAL qe NTEGRATOR mm a a START STOP smc sad INTEG SET RESET Procedure The retrieval of waveform display data must be turned ON to display waveforms For the procedure see section 9 1 1 Press DISPLAY to disp
431. o W The power varies depending on the phase difference even when the voltage and current are the same As shown in the figure below the section above the horizontal axis represents positive power power supplied to the load and the section below the horizontal axis represents negative power power delivered from the load The difference between the two is the power dissipated by the load As the phase difference between the voltage and current increases negative power increases At 7 2 the positive and negative powers become equal and no power is dissipated in the load When the phase difference between the voltage and current is 0 Positive power Mean power P UI 0 T 2r at When the phase difference between the voltage and current is Positive power Positive and negative powers are equal App 20 IM 760101 01E Appendix 5 Power Basics Power Harmonics Three Constants Related to the AC Circuit Active power and the power factor Not all of the power represented by the product of the voltage and current Ul is dissipated The product Ul is called the apparent power S The unit is VA volt ampere Apparent power is used to express the electrical capacity of the devices that run under AC power Of the apparent power the true power that is dissipated by the device is called the active power or effective power P This power is the same as the AC power described earlier S UI VA P Ulc
432. o No Hold Yes Yes Yes Single measurement Yes Yes Yes Data update rate Yes No No Display format Yes Yes Yes Integration mode Yes No No Displayable Displayable Integration timer Yes No No Displayable Displayable Integration start Yes No Yes Integration stop No Yes No Integration reset Yes No Yes Waveform data acquisition Yes No No Harmonic measurement Yes No No Store excludes integration Yes Yes Yes synchronization mode Printer Yes Yes Yes Zero level crossing Yes No No Null Yes No No IM 760101 01E Chapter7 Harmonic Measurement 7 1 Setting the Harmonic Measurement Mode ee sete o a ose ay HOLD cad FILE srone COPY SINGLE STORE SET MEN omeo E N REMOTE o maea cocu me A CURSOR OMAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC a g START STOP sinc sad INTEGSET RESET Procedure 1 Press HARMONICS to display the Harmonics menu Turning ON OFF the Harmonics Measurement Mode 2 Press the Mode soft key to select ON or OFF When turned ON the HARMONICS indicator above and to the left of the key illuminates Mode orF M Object Harmonics ESC zA PLL Source Up Exec PLL Source Down Exec ifi JUL Min Order J W Max Order 100 W Thd Formula 1 Total M Window Width 8192 Explanation To perform harmonic measurement the harmonic measurement mode m
433. o ON in the Harmonics menu see section 7 1 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu 2 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Displaying Vectors 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select Vector 4 Press SELECT to confirm the new display format Select Format Numeric Numeric Wave Item Amount Bar Trend Norn Item No 1 Numeric Wave fj Numeric Numer ic Bar Disp Items Numer ic Trend Wave Bar Wave Trend Page U Bar Trend Scroll Exec H Information Page Down Scroll Exec JUUUUUUE il Explanation The phase and size rms value relationship between the fundamental waves U 1 and I 1 of each element specified for harmonic measurement see section 7 3 can be displayed using vectors The positive vertical axis is set to 0 angle 0 and the vector of each input signal is displayed For examples of vector displays and the procedure in changing the displayed items and contents see section 7 10 4 14 IM 760101 01E 4 5 Displaying Trends For a functional description see section 1 8 STORE SET MENU aTRIGD o REMOTE 2 WAVE Loca MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT os 2 2 DISPLAY HOLD Ba FILE STORE copy SINGLE To exit the menu during operation press ESC RANGE scaunel WIRING MOTOR SET wa road CAL a o FILTER am NTEGRATOR wma g a son oa INTEG SET RESET
434. o display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Wave Numeric Wave or Wave Trend For details on setting the display format see section 4 2 2 Press WAVE to display the Wave menu 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the time axis When the display of scale values is turned ON see section 9 8 the time at the left end fixed to 0 s and the right end of the screen are displayed at the lower left corner and lower right corner of the screen respectively ESC L L L L L L Format Wave Sampling OFF px we Timesdiy Wave Sms m R K Trigger g U Zoom amp Position Wave Setting IM 760101 01E 9 2 Setting the Time Axis Explanation During Normal Measurement Set the time axis in terms of Time div time per grid The time axis can be set in 1 2 or 5 steps in the range up to the point in which the time corresponding to one screen is equal to the data update rate If the data update rate is 500 ms for example changing the time per division in the order 0 5 ms 1 ms 2 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms and 50 ms changes the time corresponding to one screen in the order 5 ms 10 ms 50 ms 100 ms 200 ms and 500 ms YOKOGAWA Wave Sampling orr N Timevdiv Time div setting sms Trigger Number of data points displayed i in the range from the left tothe zona right end of the screen KISA
435. o display the menu yj corresponding to the item indicated below the operation key Jog shuttle EO Rotate the jog shuttle to select setup parameters or to set values Amer It is also used to move the cursor RANGE scauma WIRING The step size increases as the rotation angle of the shuttle ring increases a a Shuttle ring pee p Arrow lt and gt keys sanr sro E Moves along the digits of the value that is set by the jog shuttle or moves INTEG SET RESET the input position of the character string Soft keys Press these keys to select the setup parameter on the displayed menu Set Measurement Conditions and Normal Measurement Mode SHIFT RANGE MOTOR SET key option Sets items that are required in the motor evaluation such as torque number of rotations and motor output Sections 8 2 to 8 7 RANGE key Sets the measurement range of voltage and current Sections 5 2 and 5 3 HOLD key Puts the instrument in a held condition Section 5 8 SHIFT HOLD SINGLE key Performs a single measurement Section 5 8 UPDATE RATE key iF Sets the data update rate Section 5 7 S smo e SHIFT MISC NULL key ma Ea a Activates the NULL function Section 15 5 ices SHIFT LOCAL MAX HOLD key SCALING key Holds the maximum value of the numeric data Section 5 9 Sets the transformation ratio PT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient of the current sensor Sections 5 3 and 5 4 a WIRING key l aner peura femne Sets the wi
436. o exit the menu during operation press ESC MOTOR SET o FILTER a NTEGRATOR mme o a a AVG MEASURE CAL STOP sme see INTEG SET RESET 1 Press SHIFT START INTEG SET to display the Integ Set menu Procedure Selecting Real time Normal Integration Mode R Normal or Real time Repetitive Integration Mode R Continuous 2 Press the Mode soft key to display the Mode menu 3 Press either the R Normal or R Continuous soft key to select the integration mode Selecting All Element Simultaneous Integration or Individual Element Integration This menu does not appear on products with only a single element Proceed to step 5 4 Press the Independent Control soft key to select OFF or ON If OFF is selected integration is performed on all elements at the same reservation time Proceed to step 5 If ON is selected integration is performed according to the reservation time and integration timer for each element Proceed to step 19 Cont inuous Real Time Control R Nornal Independent Control ON Independent Control ON R Cont inuous im W Current Mode RMS Note You can set the individual element integration through key operation but the execution of integration can only be done through communication commands Even if Independent Control is set to ON individual element integration ON
437. o the left of the key turns off During manual mode The store operation stops when the specified store count of data is stored or when the data is stored up to the internal memory size approximately 12 MB or approximately 11 MB when using a WT1600 with ROM version 2 01 or later Store Stop is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen During real time mode The store operation stops when the specified store count of data is stored when the reservation time for stopping the store operation is reached or when the data is stored up to the internal memory size Store Stop is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen During integration synchronization mode The store operation stops when the specified store count of data is stored when integration stops or when the data is stored up to the internal memory size Store Stop is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen e eq Pal0 s ay urnes pue geq BHuljjeoo0y pue Bunos z IM 760101 01E 11 11 11 4 Storing the Data Explanation To store data parameters such as the store mode the store count the store interval and the store reservation time must be specified before executing the operation This section explains the start and stop operations of storage For the procedure on how to set the store mode see section 11 1 for the procedure on how to set the store count the store interval and the store reservation time see section 11 2 In
438. oU ol Z Rs Xs Rp Xp and Others If Others is selected the measurement functions Uthd Ithd Pthd Uthf Ithf Utif Itif hvf hcf fU and fl of the selected elements phase difference functions user defined functions and so on are stored Selecting the Waveform Display Data to Be Stored Select which waveform display data items are to be stored Only the input signals of the installed elements are applicable for the selection For models with the motor evaluation function option the input signals of Speed and Torque are also selectable items Note For the meanings of the measurement function symbols that are displayed see section 1 2 Measurement Functions and Measurement Periods 1 5 Computation 1 6 Integration appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions and appendix 2 Determination of Delta Computation For details on the wiring units expressed as XA B and C see section 5 1 Selecting the Wiring System no data is stored in places where there is no numerical data If there are no integrated values because integration is not performed no data is stored The integration time is stored along with The maximum harmonic for which the data is stored is the upper limit of harmonic order under analysis that is specified in section 7 5 no data is stored for harmonic orders without data IM 760101
439. ockNumber Number of blocks in this group TraceName Name of each waveform BlockSize Number of data points in a single block of each waveform VResolution Value of coefficient VResolution of the Y axis conversion equation of each waveform VOffset Value of coefficient VOffset of the Y axis conversion equation of each waveform VDataType Type of binary waveform display data of each waveform gt VUnit Unit used on the Y axis of each waveform no effect on the data VPlusOverData Error data when the binary data of each waveform is greater than or equal to this value VMinusOverData Error data when the binary data of each waveform is less than or equal to this value VMaxData Maximum value of the binary data of each waveform VMinData Minimum value of the binary data of each waveform HResolution Value of coefficient HResolution of the X axis conversion equation of each waveform HOffset Value of coefficient HOffset of the X axis conversion equation of each waveform HUnit Unit used on the X axis of each waveform no effect on the data Date Date when the trigger occurred Time Time when the trigger occurred Privatelnfo Model Specific Information Mode Two types available Wave Normal and Wave Harmonics ModelVersion Version No of the instrument 1 Endian mode when saving data Big Motorola 68000 family data 2 Storage format of the binary waveform display data Trace Format in which each block contains a waveform 3 Start position
440. ode When the fundamental frequency is 50 60 Hz the attenuation constant is automatically adjusted so that a first order low pass filter with a time constant of 1 5 s is achieved Exponential averaging is performed using this attenuation constant For example if the data length for the analysis is 8192 and the fundamental frequency of the PLL source is between 55 Hz and 75 Hz the attenuation constant is set to 5 625 For other frequencies it is set to 4 6875 Turning ON OFF Averaging You can select whether to perform the specified averaging operation e ON Performs averaging e OFF Does not perform averaging Measurement Functions That Are Averaged The measurement functions that are directly averaged are shown below Other functions that use these functions in their computation are also affected by the averaging For details regarding the determination of each measurement function see appendix 1 U k I k P k and Q k k harmonic order Note The following measurement functions are not affected by averaging e During normal measurement fU fl U pk U pk l pk l pk Time Wp Wp Wp q q q Wp Wp 2 WP 2 qd q x and q amp e During harmonic measurement oU k ol k 9U1 U2 U1 U3 U1 I1 U1 12 and oU1 13 k harmonic order IM 760101 01E 5 21 SUOI IPUOD JUBWaINSeaLY 5 7 Changing the Data Update Rate For a functional description see section 1 3 a o DISPLAY roro eree FILE STO
441. of periods of the input signal is as many as possible by setting the measurement period long This is to improve the measurement accuracy IM 760101 01E 6 5 uolesbaju pue JUoWeiINSeayy EWON el 6 2 Setting the Measurement Period Measurement Period e The measurement period is set between the first point where the synchronization source crosses the level zero point center of the amplitude on the rising slope or falling slope within the data update interval and the last point where the synchronization source crosses the level zero point center of the amplitude on the rising slope or falling slope within the update interval e The rising or falling edge is automatically selected for the one that allows the interval to be longer e If the number of rising slope or falling slope within the data update interval is zero or one the measurement period is set to the entire span within the data update interval Data update interval a ye Data update interval z Data update interval 4 Measurement Period Ke Measurement Period Measurement Period Synchronization source Input signal U1 7 v Input signal U2 x Input signal U3 x Note The measurement period for the numerical data of the maximum value Peak for voltage and current is the entire span within the data update interval regardless of the settings above Therefore the measurement period for the measurement fu
442. of the instrument However do not block the vent holes in the process IM 760101 01E 3 3 s u w nsean Buers 310499 el 3 3 Wiring Precautions A To prevent the possibility of electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the warnings below Employ protective earth ground before connecting measurement cables Turn OFF the power to the measurement circuit when wiring the circuit Connecting or removing measurement cables while the power is turned ON is dangerous Take special caution not to wire a current circuit to the voltage input terminal or a voltage circuit to the current input terminal Strip the insulation cover of the measurement cable so that when it is wired to the input terminal the conductive parts bare wires do not protrude from the terminal Also make sure to fasten the input terminal screws securely so that the cable does not come loose Use cables with safety terminals that cover the conductive parts for connecting to the voltage input terminals Using a terminal with bare conductive parts such as a banana plug is dangerous when the terminal comes loose Use cables with safety terminals that cover the conductive parts for connecting to the current sensor input terminals Using a terminal with bare conductive parts is dangerous when the terminal comes loose When the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current input terminals do not touch the current sensor input term
443. of the signals starting with U1 5 Press SELECT to confirm the new synchronization source Motor Set Speed Torque Pn Range 10 __f Select Sense Type B Pulse Range 8 9008 u4 Line Filter OFF__ 14 scaling us Unit Crm 15 E n Pulse N U6 Pole e a I6 Sync Speed I Ti __ J Ext Clk Sync Source 8 4 IM 760101 01E 8 2 Selecting the Input Range of the Revolution and Torque Signals and the Synchronization Source Explanation Signals from revolution sensors and torque meters can be input to the revolution signal input connector SPEED and the torque signal input connector TORQUE of the WT1600 for making measurements For revolution sensors the signal is a DC voltage analog signal or a pulse count that is proportional to the rotating speed of the motor For torque meters it is a DC voltage analog signal that is proportional to the motor s torque Selecting the Revolution Signal Type You can select from the following list of choices e Analog Select this when the revolution signal type is a DC voltage analog signal e Pulse Select this when the revolution signal type is a pulse signal Selecting the Input Range of the Revolution and Torque Signals Two types of range settings are available fixed range and auto range e Fixed range Select from the following input ranges 20 V 10 V 5 V 2 V and 1 V e Auto range Select Auto for the input range setting
444. olate the Display When there are less than 500 points of sampled data on the time axis the area between the display points rasters is no longer continuous This function interpolates between the points to display the waveforms You can select from the following list of choices e No interpolation is performed e When there are 500 points or more of sampled data When there are less than 500 points of sampled data e s Linearly interpolates between two points e When there are 500 points or more of sampled data Connects the dots vertically When there are less than 500 points of sampled data IM 760101 01E 9 17 Aejdsig wiojone jy el 9 7 Interpolating the Display and Changing the Graticule Changing the Graticule Select the grid or cross scale to display on the screen from the following list of choices E Grid display No grid or cross scale display H Cross scale display 9 18 IM 760101 01E 9 8 Turning ON OFF the Scale Value and Waveform Label For a functional description see section 1 7 I sez o a S Leo DISPLAY HOLD Za FILE STORE cory SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o REMOTE a LOCAL MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC
445. olation is performed Only the data points are displayed Graticule For procedures see section 9 7 A grid or cross scale can be displayed on the screen You can also select not to display the grid or cross scale Displaying Scale Values For procedures see section 9 8 The upper and lower limits of the vertical axis and the values at the left and right ends of the horizontal axis time axis of each waveform can be turned ON or OFF IM 760101 01E 1 27 suoljoun jo uoneuejdxa 1 7 Waveform Display Displaying Waveform Labels For procedures see section 9 8 Waveform labels can be turn ON or OFF Upper limit Lower limit i T 300 0Y 3 000 A 3 000 A 300 0 V lt lt 1003 te 3D 0 0000 Waveform label Time at the right Time at the left end of the screen end of the screen Cursor Measurement For procedures see sections 7 9 9 9 and 10 7 The value at the crossing point of the waveform and cursor can be measured and displayed It can be used to measure the voltage and current of various sections of the waveform and the data on the horizontal axis X axis Cursor measurements are performed on the data that is displayed on the screen Cursors are the and x marks that are displayed on the screen The vertical value and the X axis value from the left end of the screen for each cursor can be measured In addition the difference in the v
446. ollowing procedures are given for a representative example in which the display format is set to Wave Selecting the Number of Split Windows 2 Press the Wave Setting soft key to display the Wave Setting menu 3 Press the Wave Format soft key to display the Format menu 4 Press one of the keys from Single to Quad to select the number of windows Wave Setting Wave Display Format K Wave Wave Format Single ILE Interpolate Graticule a Scale Value OFF pr Trace Label oN 4 Wave Setting K Wave Mapping m JUUUUGLS S Q Wave Setting Wave Display Fornat Single E Joodik Trace Label on Wave Mapping ESC IM 760101 01E 9 13 Aejdsig wiojsone jy el 9 6 Splitting the Screen and Displaying Waveforms Selecting the Waveform Mapping 5 Press the Wave Mapping soft key to display the Wave Mapping dialog box 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select Mode 7 Press SELECT to select Auto Fixed or User If you selected User proceed to step 8 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select the input signal you wish to set 9 Press SELECT to display the display position number selection box 10 Turn the jog shuttle to select 0 to 3 11 Press SELECT to confirm the new display position Wave Setting Wave Display Wave F
447. om amp Pos ESC U Zoom amp Pos ESC U Zoon amp Pos ESC M Element K Element M Element M Element e Object Object Object Object Element 1 Element 1 Element 1 Element 1 S cu 0 Zoon S 0 U Zoon S 0 U Zoon S 0 0 Zoom x1 xi xi x1 U Position OW Position OW Position OW Position 0 0007 0 0007 0 0007 0 0007 lt S C1 U Zoon l 1 U Zoon S C1 U Zoon S 1 U Zoon xi xi xi xi L O Position O Position I Position 1I Position 6 000 6 000 6 000 8 000 U Zoom Copy Exec Position il Copy Exec il V Zoom Copy Exec U Zoom Copy Exec U Zoom Copy Exec U Zoom Copy Exec JOL HE Fi Position Copy Exec Position Copy Exec Position Copy Exec Position Copy Exec JUUUEUL HE JOOG000 il IM 760101 01E Aejdsig woane jy el 9 4 Zooming Vertically and Moving the Vertical Position Explanation Selecting the Target Element to Be Specified Only the installed elements are displayed The Element menu is displayed according to the element configuration of the product Zoom Vertical Direction Only You can expand or reduce each displayed waveform voltage current You can select the zoom factor from the following list of choices 0 1 0 2 0 25 0 4 0 5 0 75 0 8 1 1 14 1 25 1 33 1 41 1 5 1 6 1 77 2 2 28 2 66 2 83 3 2 3 54 4 5 8 10 12
448. omputation ends here ESC Mode R Norma1 Independent Real Time Control Tiner Setting Setting Each __All_ Element 1 Start 2001_ L01 L01 60 Lot Element 1 End 2001_ 61 _61 61 Real Time Control Element 2 Start 2001_ 01 01 00 Element 2 End 2001_ 01 _01 61 Independent Control Element 3 Start 2001_ 01 01 00 OFF Element 3 End 2001_ L01 L01 1 00 Current Mode Element 4 Start 2001_ L01 L01 00 Element 4 End 2601_ 61 _61 61 RMS Element 5 Start 2001_ L01 L01 L90 H Auto Cal Element 5 End 2001_ 01 01 61 i Ep F ON Independent Real Time Control Setting Each Art Element 1 Start 12001 61 L Element 1 End 2001 aij Element 2 Start 2001 Con z Element 2 End 2001 61 Element 3 Start 2001_ 01 Element 3 End 2061_ 01 Element 4 Start 2001 Element 4 End 2001 Element 5 Start 2001 Element 5 End 2001 Element 6 Start 2001 Element 6 End 2001 ele Isle lege lee lel SS SS 55 55 SS or oi T 01 or or a JUUUUUL Element 6 Start 2001_ L01 L01 66 Element 6 End 2001_ L01 L01 61 H 6 26 IM 760101 01E 6 9 Setting the Real time Integration Mode the Integration Timer and the Reservation Time Explanation To perform integration the integration
449. on Mode For procedures see sections 6 8 and 6 9 Manual Integration Mode Integration continues from the point when integration is started to the point it is stopped However when the integration time reaches its maximum 10000 hours or the integration value reaches its maximum or minimum 999999 MWh or 999999 MAh the integration is stopped and the integration time and integration value at that point are held Hold Hold When the maximum 53 integration time is Se reached 999999 MWh S or 999999 MAh 2 L Hold uo1 e16 3 U f ae Start Stop Reset Start Reset When STOP is pressed or when the maximum integration time is reached 1 20 IM 760101 01E 1 6 Integration Normal Integration Mode The integration time is set in relative time The integration is stopped after the specified time elapses or when the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value The integration time and value are held at that Hold p 16 u Hold wy uo1e16 u f Timer setting f Eal gt Start Reset Repetitive Integration Mode Continuous Integration The integration time is set in relative time When the specified time elapses the operation is automatically reset and restarted Integration is repeated until STOP is pressed When the integration value reaches the maximum or minimum integration display value The integration time and value are held at that point a
450. only when you select Float in step 5 When the data type is set to Binary or ASCII the waveform that is displayed on the screen is saved 6 Press the Save soft key to display the Save Menu menu 7 Press the Trace soft key to display the input signal selection box 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select any of the signals starting with U1 9 Press SELECT to select the input signal to be saved Proceed to step 12 on page 12 14 File Item Wave UOL Utility 12 12 IM 760101 01E 12 6 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data and Numerical Data Selecting the Numerical Data Selecting the Type of Numerical Data to Be Saved 4 Press the Data Type soft key to select ASCII or Float Selecting the Numerical Data to Be Saved 5 Press the List Item soft key to display the List Item dialog box e Selecting all items at once during normal measurement only 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select All ON 7 Press SELECT The buttons to the left of all the elements and measurement functions are highlighted indicating that all items will be saved e Deselecting all items at once during normal measurement only 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select All OFF 7 Press SELECT The highlighting of the buttons to the left of all the elements and measurement functions are cleared indicating that all items will not be saved File Item K File Item K During normal measur
451. or Ffl 2V2 V2 Imn T Umn m Voltage crest factor CfU Current crest factor Cfl Active power P W Voltage crest factor CfU Upk Current crest factor Cfl oe Urms rms Upk U pkl or IU pkl whichever is larger lpk II pkl or Il pkl whichever is larger T 1 tfu e i t dt Apparent power S VA Urms Irms Umn Imn Udc Idc Umn Irms Combinations of rms mn and dc are selectable See section 6 6 Reactive power Q var Power factor A P S Phase difference cos 2 S The phase format can be displayed using Lead D Lag G format or 360 format See section 6 7 Impedance of the load circuit Urms Z 9 Irms Series resistance of the load circuit P Rs 9 Irms Series reactance of the load circuit Q Xs Q Irms Parallel resistance of the load circuit Urms2 Rp 2 1 G P Parallel reactance of the load circuit Urms2 Xp Q 1 B Q IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 IEC76 1 1993 Z P _ _ Umn Urms Corrected power Pc W P1 P2 Urms y P 1 nn Umn P1 P2 Coefficients as defined in the applicable standard Continues to the next page IM 760101 01E App 1 Ea xipueddy Appendix 1 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions Table 2 3 Measurement Functions during Normal Method of Determination Equation
452. ormat Single Wave Mapping Interpolate Graticule Scale Value OFF pr Trace Label DE oN Wave Mapping Auto_Fixed_ User a gel iJ u I mu Ce vu Gg e Ci u3 zJ 13 Ej w BIg 4 Bo US oJ 5 0 u6 16 Speed Ce Wave Mapping 9 14 IM 760101 01E 9 6 Splitting the Screen and Displaying Waveforms Explanation The screen can be evenly divided and the waveforms can be mapped to the divided windows Selecting the Number of Divisions Select the number of divisions of the screen from the following list of choices Single No division e Dual 2 divisions e Triad 3 divisions Quad 4 divisions The number of displayed points in the vertical direction of one divided window varies depending on the number of divisions as follows Single 432 points Dual 216 points Triad 144 points Quad 108 points Waveform Mapping e Auto The waveforms that are turned ON see section 9 5 are mapped to the divided windows in order by element numbers in the order voltage U and current I followed by speed and torque Applicable only to products with the motor evaluation function option Fixed The waveforms are mapped in order by element number in the order voltage U and current
453. ort Restart Start Restart Integration value lt Time specified for the timer Integration time ca START STOP START STOP RESET START RESET Holding Starting and Stopping the Integration When the display is held the display of the integration result and communication output is held The integration operation continues regardless of whether the hold function is ON The relationship between the hold function and the start and stop operations are as follows e Ifthe integration is started while the display is held the display and communication output do not change When the hold function is released OFF or a single measurement by pressing HOLD SINGLE after pressing SHIFT is made the integration result at that point is displayed or output via communications on _ HOLD HOLD OFF Pe Display value Dotted line is the integration value Integration time START STOP RESET Note e The reservation time section 6 9 allows up to 31 days to be specified for February If an erroneous date is specified an error message is displayed at the time of execution of the integration operation Reset the reservation time in this case e Leap years are recognized at the time of execution of the integration operation e The data update rate cannot be changed while the integration is in progress e You can set the individual element integration through key operation but
454. oso W coso represents the ratio of the true power with respect to the apparent power and this ratio is called the power factor A Reactive power When the current lags the voltage U by 0 the component of the power in the same direction as the voltage U is expressed as Icoso and the component of the power perpendicular to the voltage U is expressed as Isino The active power P Ulcoso is the product of the voltage U and the current component Icos Conversely the product of the voltage U and the current component Ising is called reactive power Q and its unit is var Q Ulsino var Apparent power S active power P and reactive power Q are related in the following way S P Q IM 760101 01E App 21 z xipueddy Appendix 5 Power Basics Power Harmonics Three Constants Related to the AC Circuit Harmonics Harmonics are sine waves that have frequencies that are integer multiples of the frequency of a fundamental signal generally a 50 60 Hz sinusoid in the field of power The current power that flows through the power rectification circuit phase control circuit and other circuits that are used in various electrical devices generates harmonic voltages and currents on the power line When the fundamental signal and harmonic signals are combined the waveform is distorted and this can cause interference to devices that are connected to the power line Terminology The following terms are related to harmonics Fund
455. ote the instrument No IM 760101 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Standard Accessories The following are supplied with the instrument Part Name Part Number Q ty Notes 1 Power cord See the previous table 1 2 Spare power fuse A1354EF 1 250 V 6 3 A time lag attached to the fuse holder 3 Printer roll paper B9316FX 2 For the built in printer Provided only with option B5 4 Rubber feet A9088ZM 2 Two pieces in one set Two sets provided 5 36 pin connector A1005JD 1 For D A output Provided only with option DA 6 Current input protective cover B9316BX 1 With 4 attachment screws part number B9946GZ 7 User s Manual IM760101 01E 1 This manual e Communication Interface IM760101 11E 1 User s Manual 1 One of the following power cords is supplied according to the instrument s suffix codes 2 IM 760101 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Optional Accessories Sold Separately The following optional accessories are available for purchase separately Part Name Part Number Q ty Notes 1 Serial port adapter 366971 1 9 pin 25 pin adapter 1 EIA 574 Standard 2 EIA 232 Standard RS 232 2 BNC alligator clip 366926 1 42 V or less length 1 m measurement lead 3 BNC BNC 366924 1 42 V or less length 1 m measurement lead 366925 1 42 V or less length 2 m 4 External sensor cable B9284LK 1 For connecting the current senso
456. ou change the item for which the trend is displayed see section 10 2 only the modified trend is cleared and the new trend is displayed from the cleared point position IM 760101 01E 10 19 Aejdsig pu L g Chapter 11 Storing and Recalling Data and Saving the Stored Data 11 1 Setting the Store Mode Procedure Recall File Setting Convert Memory T RSO Recall Store to ry Count Real Tine File 100 K Store Interval Integ Sync Setting Setting Initialize Memory Exec o a A SRANN eam eee SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTAIGD o oREMOTE Fa CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC n PUT a v RANGE Y ng CALING WIRING o 3 oq aj g a 3 dD fl bul AVG CAL eqs NTEGRATOR wma g a START STOP INTEGSET RESET H Press SHIFT STORE STORE SET to display the Store Set dialog box Press the Mode soft key to select Store Press the Store Setting soft key to display the Store Setting dialog box Press the Mode soft key to display the Mode menu Press one of Manual to Integ Sync soft keys to select the store mode m Ko ESC Mode Store Set Mode Store Setting 4 Mode Manua1 Convert Memory W Store Item W Store Item Numeric Numeric 4 List Item 4 List Item UO JUUUUUO JU UUOOU e eq Pal0
457. play format is set to Wave 2 Press the Wave Setting soft key to display the Wave Setting menu Format Wave K Wave Setting Q JUBUR IM 760101 01E 9 11 Aejdsig wiojsone jy el 9 5 Turning ON OFF the Waveform Display 3 Press the Wave Display soft key to display the Wave Display dialog box Turning ON OFF the Display of the Input Signal Waveforms at Once e Turning ON the display of the waveforms at once 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select All ON 5 Press SELECT All the buttons to the left of the input signal are highlighted In addition if the retrieval of the waveform display data see section 9 1 is ON the waveforms are displayed Turning OFF the display of the waveforms at once 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select All OFF 5 Press SELECT The highlighting of all the buttons to the left of the signal is cleared and the waveforms are no longer displayed Turning ON OFF the Input Signal Waveforms One at a Time 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select the input signal you wish to set 5 Press SELECT If the retrieval of the waveform display data see section 9 1 is ON and the button to the left of the selected input signal is highlighted the waveform of that input signal is displayed If the highlighting of the button is cleared the waveform of that input signal is no longer displayed Wave Setting Wave Display All ON All OFF u 11 uz iz u 13 K Wave Display W
458. play the Measure menu 2 Press the Freq Item soft key to display the Freq Item dialog box Only the input signal of installed elements are displayed 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the signal for which the frequency is to be measured 4 Press SELECT The frequency of the input signal to be measured is indicated by the highlighting of the button that is located to the left of the selected input signal If the highlighting is released the frequency of that input signal will not be measured ES Q Freq Item Def ined 4 Measure 4 S Formula Urns Irns Pc Formula i Phase 180 Lead Lag Sync Measure Slave AUUUUUUE Up to three input signals from the installed elements can be selected as targets for frequency measurements If three input signals are already selected and you wish to select another input signal release one of the selected input signal first Note Even if the harmonic measurement mode is turned ON see section 7 1 the Freq Item menu above is displayed and you can select the frequency measurement target The frequency measurement target is common to normal measurement and harmonic measurement For the relation between the frequency measurement target and the PLL source of harmonic measurement see section 7 4 IM 760101 01E 6 7 uolesbaju pue JUoWeiINSeayy EWON el 6 4 Setting the User Defined Function For a functional description see section 1 5
459. pling function 9 1 855 Storing momory is full 11 4 Storing has been stopped 856 An error has occured while storing Storing has been stopped 857 Cannot be set while Master Slave Syncronized 5 10 Measurement is set to Slave 860 Attempted to start integration while trend Turn OFF the trend sampling function 10 1 sampling was ON Error in System Operation Code Message Corrective Action Sections 901 Failed to backup setup data Will initialize 3 10 902 System RAM failure Maintenance service is required 903 System ROM failure Maintenance service is required 904 System RAM failure Maintenance service is required 906 Fan stopped Power off immediately Maintenance service is required 907 Backup battery is flat Maintenance service is required to replace the backup battery 908 Internal temperature is too high Power off immediately Maintenance service is required 909 Illegal SUM value Maintenance service is required 910 RAM read write error Maintenance service is required 911 Memory bus error Maintenance service is required 912 Fatal error in Communication driver Maintenance service is required 914 Time out occurs in Communications 915 EEPROM SUM error EEPROM may be damaged Maintenance service is required 920 SUM error of NULL value The Null value is reset to 0 921 System Failed to Draw Display 922 Failed in communication with DSP 923 Transmit da
460. power supply matches the rated electric power voltage for the instrument Connect the power cord after checking that the power switch of the instrument is turned OFF e To prevent the possibility of electric shock or fire always use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA e Make sure to perform protective grounding to prevent the possibility of electric shock Connect the power cord to a three pin power outlet with a protective earth terminal Do not use an extension cord without protective earth ground Otherwise the protection function will be compromised e Use a power outlet compatible with the accessory power cord and ensure proper protective grounding Do not use the instrument if no such compatible power outlet and proper protective grounding are available Connecting the Power Cord 1 Check that the power switch is OFF 2 Connect the power cord plug to the power connector on the rear panel Use the power cord that came with the package 3 Connect the plug on the other end of the power cord to the outlet that meets the conditions below The AC outlet must be of a three pin type with a protective earth ground terminal Item Specification Rated supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC 200 to 240 VAC Permitted supply voltage range 90 to 132 VAC 180 to 264 VAC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Permitted supply voltage frequency range 48 to 63 Hz Maximum power consumption when using the printer 150 VA 3 pin outlet
461. power reading x 0 15 0 3 x f KHz e For a current sensor input add the apparent power reading x 0 15 0 1 x f KHz e When0 lt A lt 1 Add the power reading x tan x influence when 0 0 is the phase difference between the voltage and current Line filter influence When the cut off frequency is 500 Hz 45 to 66 Hz Add 0 3 of reading Less than 45 Hz Add 1 of reading When the cut off frequency is 5 5 kHz Less than 66 Hz Add 0 3 of reading 66 to 500 Hz Add 1 of reading Temperature coefficient Same as the temperature coeficient for voltage and current One year accuracy reading error of the 3 month accuracy x 1 5 Accuracy when the crest factor is set to 6 Accuracy obtained by doubling the measurement range error for the accuracy when the crest factor is set to 3 Accuracy of Other Parameters and Computation Accuracy For the accuracy of frequency fU and fl see Frequency Measurement in section 17 6 Functions For the accuracy of measured values Wp Wp Wp q q and q and the integration time see Integration in section 17 6 Functions For the accuracy of voltage current and power during harmonic measurement see Harmonic Measurement in section 17 6 Functions e For the accuracy of the rotating speed and torque see Motor Evaluation Option in section 17 6 Functions For the D A output accuracy see D A Output
462. put When the crest factor is set to 3 10 mA 20 mA 50 mA 100 mA 200 mA 500 mA 1 A 2 A and5A When the crest factor is set to 6 5 mA 10 mA 25 mA 50 mA 100 mA 250 mA 500 mA 1A and2 5A e Current sensor input When the crest factor is set to 3 50 mV 100 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1 V 2 5 V 5 V an 10 V When the crest factor is set to 6 25 mV 50 mV 125 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1 V 2 5 V and 5 V Current 50 A input element e Direct input e When the crest factor is set to 3 1 A 2 A 5 A 10 A 20 A and 50 A e When the crest factor is set to 6 500 mA 1 A 2 5 A 5 A 10 A and 25 A e Current sensor input d e When the crest factor is set to 3 50 mV 100 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1 V 2 5 V 5 V and 10 V e When the crest factor is set to 6 25 mV 50 mV 125 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1 V 2 5 V and 5 V Input impedance Voltage Input resistance Approx 2 MQ Current 5 A input element e Direct input Approx 100 mQ approx 0 07 uH e Current sensor input Approx 100 kQ Current 50 A input element e Direct input Approx 2 mQ approx 0 07 uH e Current sensor input Approx 100 kQ Instantaneous maximum allowable input 1 period for 20 ms Voltage Peak value of 4000 V or RMS value of 1500 V whichever is less Current 5 A input element e Direct input Peak value of 30 A or RMS value of 15 A whichever is less e Current sensor input Peak value less than or equal to 10 times the measurement rang
463. putting the image on a floppy disk or the built in hard disk Printer Server e Specify the printer server by entering the IP address e Ifyou are using DNS see section 13 2 you can specify the server by name Printer Name Enter the name of the output destination printer on the network Selecting the Output Command Select the output command type from the following list of choices e ESC P e ESC P2 for printers that support ESC P raster commands e BJ e PCL5 e LIPS3 e Post Script Turning ON OFF the Color Output You can select whether to output the image in color when the output command type is ESC P ESC P2 BJ or PCL5 ON The displayed screen image can be output to a printer in color 256 colors e OFF The displayed screen image can be output to a printer in black and white Setting Comments Same as the explanation given in File Name and Comment in section 12 6 Note The LPR client function cannot be used under the following cases e When the WT1600 is being accessed by a PC or workstation on the network FTP server function see section 13 6 When the WT1600 is performing file operations see chapter 12 e When using the LPR client function set the TCP IP parameters according to section 13 2 Setting the Ethernet Interface TCP IP e Output is possible to printers that support the TCP IP protocol 13 14 IM 760101 01E 13 5 Sending E mail Messages Procedure n PUT
464. qi q2 q1 q2 q3 q Ah q q 1 q 2 q 1 q 2 q 3 q q 1 q 2 q 1 q 2 q 3 Px af P s gt Px MEL zrl cos1 8 Zz 9 Rs Q Sz e Sz lo pms p Irms 2 Xs Q 2 Rp 9 a Xp gt 0 Urms gt Irms gt 1 G 2 1 B Qz ini o PZB iai o PZA n efficiency1 Psa 100 1 efficiency 2 PB 100 Continues to the next page Note _____ Period T is the measurement period For details on the measurement period see section 1 2 u t and i t denote the sampled data of the voltage signal and the current signal respectively PXA and PB denote the active power of the wiring units XA and B respectively The assignment of input elements to wiring units XA and B is determined by the number of input elements that are installed in the WT1600 and the selected wiring system pattern For details see section 1 3 The numbers 1 2 and 3 in the equations UX IZ PZ SZ QE PcX Wp and q indicate the case when input elements 1 2 and 3 are set to the wiring system shown in the table If elements 2 3 and 4 are set to the wiring system shown in the table replace the numbers 1 2 and 3 with 2 3 and 4 respectively The same also holds true when using elements 5 and 6 For single phase models one input element and those with a 1P2W wiring system the functions numerical data are the same as that of the elements that were assigned to wiring units ZA B and XC With Q var calculation t
465. r HOLD ae FILE l srore COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU a OTRIGD o REMOTE o WAVE LOCAL MISC Ooo CURSOR TMAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC e NTEGRATOR mm g a START STOP INTEGSET RESET H Procedure 1 Press FILE to display the File menu Selecting the Item to Be Saved 2 Press the File Item soft key to display the File Item menu 3 Press one of the soft keys from Setup to Numeric to select the item to be saved If you selected Setup proceed to step 11 under Executing Aborting the Save Operation on page 12 14 If you selected Wave proceed to Selecting the Waveform Display Data on the next page If you selected Numeric proceed to Selecting the Numerical Data on the 12 13 Numer ic OO a Utility Utility i C O C O O L_ IM 760101 01E 12 11 eea y Bulpeo7 pue Burnes 5i 12 6 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data and Numerical Data Selecting the Waveform Display Data Selecting the Type of Waveform Display Data to Be Saved 4 Press the Data Type soft key to display the Data Type menu 5 Press one of the keys from Binary to Float to select the data type File Item 4 Wave Data Type Binary Utility AUUUUOL Selecting the Input Signals to Be Saved The input signal selection box appears
466. r input connector of the WT1600 Length 0 5 m 5 Measurement lead 758917 1 Two leads in one set used with the separately sold 758922 or 758929 adapter length 0 75 m ratings 1000 V 6 Alligator clip adapter set 758922 1 Two pieces in one set for the 758917 measurement lead Rated voltage 300 V 7 Alligator clip adapter set 758929 1 Two pieces in one set for the 758917 measurement lead Rated voltage 1000 V 8 Fork terminal adapter set 758921 1 Two pieces in one set for the 758917 measurement lead Rated current 25 A Spare Parts Sold Separately The following spare parts are available Part Name Part Number Q ty Notes 1 Printer roll paper B9316FX 10 One roll is one set thermal sensitive paper total length 10 m 2 Power fuse A1354EF 2 250 V 6 3 A time lag IM 760101 01E Safety Precautions This instrument is an IEC safety class instrument provided with terminal for protective earth grounding The general safety precautions described herein must be observed during all phases of operation If the instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual the protection provided by the instrument may be impaired Yokogawa Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements The following symbols are used on this instrument Handle with care To avoid injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must ref
467. r output that is determined in section 8 7 to W set the unit of torque to Nem IM 760101 01E 8 11 uondo uoljenjeaq 1030 e 8 6 Setting the Motor s Number of Poles Used to Compute the Synchronous Speed and the Slip Procedure ESC J E B srra HOLD UP DATE RATE FILE STORE COPY TRIG D WAVE CURSOR Fa FILTER AVG ues CAL i H INTEGRATOR a STOP Ri INTEG SET RESET START SINGLE HARMONICS REMOTE LOCAL MISC MAX HOLD NULL STORE SET MENU SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC 1 Press SHIFT RANGE MOTOR SET to display the Motor Set dialog box Setting the Motor s Number of Poles 2 Turn the jog shuttle to select Pole 3 Press SELECT to display the motor s number of poles selection box 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the number of poles For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 5 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box Motor Set Range Sense Type Pulse Range Line Filter Scaling Unit Pulse N Pole sync Speed sume Source Speed Torque mw zou LAnalog_ Pulse OFF 8 0000 L10000 0609 C 1 0000 1 0000 1 000 Nn
468. r setting box 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the scaling factor For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 5 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box Motor Set Speed Torque Range 10 20U Sense Type Anag Puse J Pulse Range 6 9000 10000 09000 Line Filter OFF Scaling 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 Unit m 7 Pulse N Pole Sync Speed Sync Source IM 760101 01E uondo uonenjesng 1030 e 8 4 Setting the Scaling Factor the Pulse Count and Unit Used to Measure the Rotating Speed Setting the Pulse Count per Rotation When the Revolution Signal type Is Set to Pulse 2 Turn the jog shuttle to select Pulse N 3 Press SELECT to display the pulse count setting box 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the pulse count For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 5 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box Motor Set Speed Torque Range 1 200 Sense Type Analog Pulse Pulse Range 8 9000 10000 0009 Line Filter OFF Scaling C 10000 ___1 0000 __ 1 0000 Unit TPN Nn W Fo Pulse N m 60 Pole Z Sync Speed Li Ti Syne Source Setting the Unit of Rotating Spe
469. rd Lock blinks at the upper right corner of the screen Note Key lock ON OFF setting is held even when the power is turned OFF IM 760101 01E a suonoun4 19440 pue indino v a Chapter 16 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection 16 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting f a message is displayed on the screen read the succeeding pages e If servicing is necessary or if the instrument is not operating correctly after performing the corrective actions below contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Problem and Corrective Action Sections Nothing shows up on the display when the power switch is turned ON Securely connect the power cord to the power connector of the instrument and the power outlet 3 5 Set supply voltage within the permitted range 3 5 Check the display settings 15 7 Check that the fuse is not blown 16 5 The displayed data is not correct Check that the ambient temperature and humidity are within the specifications 3 2 Check that noise is not affecting the measurement 3 1 3 3 Check the wiring of the measurement cable 3 3 to 3 9 Check the wiring system 3 6 to 3 9 5 1 Check that the line filter is turned OFF 5 5 Check the measurement period settings 6 2 Power cycle the instrument 3 10 Keys do not work Check the REMOTE indicator If the REMOTE indicator is ON press the LOCAL key to tur
470. rement function symbols and operators Delta computation Applicable only during normal measurement Compute other numerical data of the measured circuit from the computed results of the difference of the instantaneous values Equation for apparent power Applicable only during normal measurement Select the equation from Urms x Irms Umn x Imn Udc x Idc and Umn x Irms Corrected Power Correction of active power as defined by the applicable standard IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 and IEC76 1 1993 Phase difference display Select whether to display the phase difference using lead and lag format or 360 format Equation for distortion factor Set the denominator of the equation to the total waveform or fundamental waveform IM 760101 01E 17 13 h Ey suoneoyioeds bas 17 6 Functions Numerical Display Item Specification Displayed items Displays the numerical data of the measurement functions of sections 17 3 or 17 4 Display resolution 60000 Number of displayed items During normal measurement Select from 4 8 16 42 78 and All During harmonic measurement Select from 4 8 16 single list dual list and list Scrolling of displayed items During normal measurement Scroll to display the numerical data of measurement functions that cannot be displayed on one screen Page scrolling is also possible During harmonic measurement Scroll to display the numerical data of measurement fu
471. rent measurement range when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively the range is increased e Range decrease When the data of the measurement function Urms or Irms is less than or equal to 30 of the measurement range and Upk and Ipk is less than or equal to 300 or 600 of the next lower range when the crest factor is set to 3 or 6 respectively the range is decreased Power Range The measurement ranges power ranges of active power apparent power and reactive power are determined by the wiring system voltage range and current range as follows For the actual values of the measurement range see section 5 2 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input Wiring System Power Range 1P2W single phase two wire voltage range x current range 1P3W single phase three wire voltage range x current range x 2 3P3W three phase three wire when the voltage and current ranges on the 3V3A three voltage three current corresponding elements are set to the same range 3P4W three phase four wire voltage range x current range x 3 when the voltage and current ranges on the corresponding elements are set to the same range 1 10 IM 760101 01E 1 3 Measurement Conditions Scaling For procedures see sections 5 3 and 5 4 When inputting current signals via an external current sensor or inputting voltage or current signals via the external PT potential transformer or CT current transformer
472. rest YOKOGAWA dealer IM 760101 01E 16 7 g uolsedsu pue ooueuajueyy HunooysajqnoiL 16 4 Checking the System Conditions ee co 3 2 DISPLAY roo ree FILE STORE COPY ESC SINGLE STORE SET MENU o TRIG D o REMOTE ra a me woalf mee J CURSOR NULL SHIFT S L__J SS To exit the menu during operation press ESC ZE Cer es PUT i RANGE SCALING WIRING es MOTOR SET 2 FILTER AVG ease CAL qs NTEGRATOR oo ar START STOP erne sad INTEG SET RESET Procedure 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Information soft key to display the Information window Information Information Model Version WT1600 760101 24 1 01 DSP 6 01 ASIC 0 01 xxx Element Configuration wee Initialize Elementi Elenent2 Element3 Element4 Element Element6 Type 1000U 5A Element 1000U SA Element 1000V 50A Element 1000U S0A Element 1000V 50A Element 1000V 50A Element Calibration Date 01705714 09 54 06 01705707 16 01705714 09 01705714 09 54 01705714 09 54 16 01 05 14 09 54 18 Status DK OK OK Ok OK Ok OK OK OK OK OK OK Settings Communication Date Time 000000000 Dpt IONS seccceeed Communication GP IB Internal Printer Yes DA Output No Motor Evaluation No Yes Yes Yes Config SCSI Interface Ethernet Internal HDD Mac Address 600064_826_000 Selftest
473. ring Normal Measurement When the Retrieval of Waveform Display Data Is ON 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the time axis horizontal axis When the display of scale values is turned ON the data point number at the left end fixed to 0 and the right end of the screen are displayed at the lower left corner and lower right corner of the screen respectively During Harmonic Measurement 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the time axis horizontal axis When the display of scale values is turned ON the data point number at the left end fixed to 0 and the right end of the screen are displayed at the lower left corner and lower right corner of the screen respectively During normal measurement During harmonic measurement Trend Setting Trend Setting K Trend Display Trend Display M Trend Format W Trend Format Single Single Trend Sampling OFF By Restart Trend Exec W Trend Tvdiv Trend L L Eal C L C L_ Restart Trend Exec Trend P vdiv 3svdiv 50 Trend Disp Items Trend Disp Items Trend Scale During Normal Measurement When the Retrieval of Waveform Display Data see section 9 1 Is OFF Set the time axis in terms of T div time per grid Set the time per division in the range of 3 s to 1 day During Normal Measurement When the Retrieval of Waveform Display Data Is ON Set the time axis horizontal axis in terms of P div point
474. ring system Section 5 1 A m EEEEEE MEASURE key i a Sets the target frequency to be measured user defined functions smanr sror Se delta computation the equation for apparent power and corrected power deena the display format of the phase difference master slave synchronized FILTER key measurement and other settings Sections 5 10 and 6 3 to 6 7 ihg ca meh L SHIFT MEASURE CAL key section 5 5 Performs zero level compensation Section 15 4 AVG key Sets the averaging function Section 5 6 L SYNC SRC key Sets the synchronization source used to determine the measurement period Section 6 2 IM 760101 01E 2 3 sled JO s sn pue soweN D 2 2 Operation Keys Jog Shuttle Set Integration and Harmonics Measurement m O i 4 TH nu T000000 ra a p L SYN a 0 D 3 2 x g 9 5 z 3 8 2 R 4 E Set the Display ED pre afana ED SSS a ser ror INTEG SET RESET 2 4 vl z 3 SINGLE STOR MENU oTRIGD m REMOTE o WAVE esruomes LOCAL misc CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT HARMONICS key Sets various parameters for harmonic measurement Sections 7 1 and 7 3 to 7 7 START key Starts integration Section 6 11 STOP key Stops in
475. rmatted The selection of the number of partitions only applies to a hard disk For all other media it is handled as one partition Note If you format a medium that has data stored on it all the data are cleared when the medium is formatted It takes approximately a minute and a half to format a floppy disk You cannot format a floppy disk if the write protect is ON Do not format a disk while the WT1600 and a PC is connected via a SCSI cable Floppy disks that are formatted to formats other than those listed in this section cannot be used If an error message is displayed after the format operation the floppy disk may be damaged You can use floppy disks that are formatted using MS DOS on a PC Quick logical format only clears initializes information such as directory entries and FAT If you need to check for bad tracks perform a physical format Normal If data is written to an external SCSI device when there are bad tracks an access error 604 Media failure may occur preventing additional data to be written It is recommended that Normal be used when a medium is formatted for the first time after purchase or a medium that can no longer be read or written and that Quick be used on a medium you have been using before The WT1600 can perform Quick format of DVD RAM Physical format Normal is not possible 12 10 IM 760101 01E 12 6 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data and Numerical Data a Dispa
476. rmination of each measurement function data see appendix 1 ieasiraineni Chars and Numbers inside Be Function FA i k No U Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Numerical data exists IC Yes Yes Yes Yes No Numerical data does P Yes Yes Yes Yes not exist S Yes Yes Yes Yes Q Always 0 Yes Yes Yes A Yes Yes Yes Yes o No Yes Yes Yes ou No No Yes No ol No No Yes No Z Yes Yes Yes No Rs Yes Yes Yes No Xs Yes Yes Yes No Rp Yes Yes Yes No Xp Yes Yes Yes No Uhdf Yes Yes Yes No Ihdf _ Yes Yes Yes No Phdf Yes Yes Yes No Uthd No No No Yes Ithd No No No Yes Pthd No No No Yes Uthf No No No Yes Ithf No No No Yes Utif No No No Yes tif No No No Yes hvf No No No Yes hef No No No Yes fU No No No Yes fl No No No Yes e The meaning of measurement functions with parentheses varies depending on the characters or numbers that are inside the parentheses as follows dc Indicates numerical data of the DC component e 1 Indicates numerical data of the fundamental signal e k Indicates numerical data from 2 to N order harmonics N is the upper limit of harmonic order under analysis see section 17 6 The upper limit is determined automatically maximum is 100 by the frequency of the PLL source All No parentheses are appended after the measurement function Indicates numerical data related to all waveform
477. rrent of the circuit under measurement e 5 A input element When the maximum current exceeds 5 Arms e 50 A input element When the maximum current exceeds 50 Arms Ashunt type or clamp type current sensor can be used for an external current sensor Connecting to the Current Sensor Input Connector Connect an external sensor cable with the BNC connector B9284LK sold separately to the current sensor input connector When connecting the external sensor cable remove the measurement cable from the current input terminal Since the current sensor input connector and the current input connector are connected internally measurement inaccuracies or malfunction could result In addition when the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current sensor input terminals do not touch the other current input terminals or current sensor terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument doing so can be dangerous Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems The selectable wiring systems vary depending on the number of input elements that are installed in the instrument You may be able to select only a single type of wiring system or two or three types of wiring systems For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 1 3 Measurement Conditions 3 12 IM 760101 01E 3 7 Using an External Current Sensor to Wire the Circuit under M
478. rt soft key changes to a Convert Memory Exec soft key File List Path SC4 00 UT1600DA Space 2138046464 byte File Nane Size 2001 08 24 06 27 R W Attribute a Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box 11 Press the Filter soft key to select Item or All Viewing the Properties 11 On the File List dialog box turn the jog shuttle to select the file 12 Press the Property soft key to display the file property window 13 Press ESC to close the file property window convert Memory File Name STIDA Property Convert Memory Exec i File List Path SC4 00 UT1600DA Space 2138046464 byte File Nane ji Property FDO 1l SC4 001 SC4 01 INDO 1 File Name STDO0O CSU File Size 43135 byte Date Time 2001 08 24 09 14 Attribute R U Comment Ea gt STDEGO CSU Convert Menory g File Name STD Property Convert Memory Exec UUOUL IM 760101 01E 11 15 e eq Pal0 s ay urnes pue geq BHuljjeoo0y pue Bunos z 11 5 Saving the Stored Data When Saving Data through a Store and Save Operation Sequence 4 Press the File setting soft key to display the File setting dialog box Selecting the Data Type for Saving the Data 5 Same as step 5 under Selecting the Data Type for Saving the Data on page
479. rties 7 Same as the procedure given in Viewing the Properties in section 12 9 Changing the File Attribute 8 Same as the procedure given in Changing the File Attribute in section 12 9 12 32 IM 760101 01E 12 11 Copying Files Selecting the Copy Source Files One at a Time 9 10 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file Press the Set Reset soft key If an asterisk is displayed to the left of the file name in the File List dialog box the file will be copied If the asterisk to the left of the file name disappears the file will not be copied Proceed to step 12 File List Copy ESC Path SC4 O0 UTDN M Function Space 2137817088 byte File Name Size Date Attribut Copy a Set Reset 2001 08 24 18 09 2001 08 24 19 15 All Set 2001 08 24 19 16 2001 08 24 18 10 2001 08 24 19 14 2001 08 24 19 14 Property 2001 08 24 19 15 2001 08 24 19 15 EE Filter Item All Attribute L Anioi Dest Dir Selecting the Copy Source Files at Once o 10 i k Copy H Funct Copy Turn the jog shuttle to select a file directory or medium Press the All Set soft key Asterisks appear to the left of the directory containing the selected file and all the files in the directory the selected directory and all the files in the directory or all the directories and files in the selected medium The corresponding items will be copied At the sa
480. s 500 ms the time per division can be changed in the order 0 5 ms 1 ms 2 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms and 50 ms 1 grid 1 div 10 ms 1 grid 1 div 20 ms 100 ms a es 200 ms Observation time Observation time During Normal Measurement The time axis can be set in 1 2 or 5 steps in the range up to the data update rate according to the horizontal time axis setting described earlier For example changing the time per division in the order 0 5 ms 1 ms 2 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms and 50 ms changes the time corresponding to one screen in the order 5 ms 10 ms 50 ms 100 ms 200 ms and 500 ms IM 760101 01E 1 23 suoljoun jo uoneuejdxa 1 7 Waveform Display During Harmonic Measurement The time corresponding to one screen in harmonic measurement is automatically determined from the sample rate which can be derived from the fundamental frequency of the PLL source see page 1 7 and the window width time width over which FFT analysis is performed when determining harmonics Note Number of displayed points on the screen When waveforms are displayed the data points waveform display data are displayed in segments called rasters There are 501 rasters in the time axis direction on one screen On the other hand data is sampled according to the sample rate and one screen of the sampled data becom
481. s ay Bulnes pue geq Buljjeoo0y pue Bunos z IM 760101 01E 11 1 Setting the Store Mode Explanation To store data parameters such as the store mode the store count the store interval and the store reservation time must be specified before executing the operation This section explains the store mode For the procedure on how to set the store count the store interval and the store reservation time see section 11 2 for the procedure on how to start the store operation see section 11 4 Store Mode You can select the timing used to start or end the store operation from the following list of choices e Manual This is the manual mode When you press STORE the numerical data or waveform display data can be stored at the specified store interval for the specified store counts e Real Time This is the real time mode When you press STORE the numerical data or waveform display data can be stored from the specified reservation time for starting the store operation at the specified store interval for the specified store counts or until the reservation time for ending the store operation e integ Sync e This is the integration synchronization mode When you press STORE the numerical data or waveform display data can be stored when the integration starts at the specified store interval for the specified store counts or until the integration is stopped e By setting the time of the integration timer see section 6 8
482. s between resistance Rs reactance Xs and impedance Z are expressed as follows Xs XL Xc Z VRs Xs R L C parallel circuit The current when resistance Rp Q inductance L H and static capacitance C F are connected in parallel is expressed by the following equation The relationship between resistance Rp reactance Xp and impedance Z are expressed as follows XLXc Xc XL RPXP N RP XP Z App 24 IM 760101 01E Index Symbols POSION inina uai aA 9 9 I V Zoom wis 9 9 U Position 9 9 U V Zoom 1 9 9 TVF ndamental cscccstesstevsrecseccosnestcvesneessecdtieanedactaetetestecs 7 13 3 month accuracy 360 degrees ooo eee e cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeseeeseaeeeeeeeeneees 6 18 SOOG DE ws He VETE ric et Meee ieaee Wien Bishi 13 13 A abOMt ikaw chen k 11 15 12 15 12 24 13 13 AC circuit three constants eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees App 23 AC power ie AC signal vector display Of App 19 accessories Optional sisirin At eater saw ines v accessories standard AGCUIACY ss ecca vs cnncteaicesssitistasal nenntivitices caulsnsns iahsederneatetanesdan ACHUVE POWT rinane sanaaa cesccuetncasteeedseebeeatbere aliasing Alles All Reset All Set ambient humidity ambient temperature angular velocity apparent POWET ee apparent power equation for cceeeeeeeeeeeeees
483. s changed or when the harmonic mode is turned ON OFF e Ifthe crest factor is set to 3 a NULL value of approximately 50 is set for a signal that exceeds 50 of the range If the crest factor is set to 6 a NULL value of approximately 100 is set for a signal that exceeds 100 of the range Measurement Function Affected by the NULL Function The NULL value is subtracted from the sampled data Hence all measurement functions are affected by the NULL values IM 760101 01E 15 13 a suonoun4 19440 pue nd no v a 15 6 Selecting the Message Language and the Screen Brightness a o aserav HOLD ica FILE STORE cory SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD PN WAVE HARMONICS CURSOR To exit the menu during operation press ESC o RANGE scana WIRING o o ae am NTEGRATOR me z START STOP Ri INTEG SET RESET FILTER A Hg CAL Procedure 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Config soft key to display the Config menu Selecting the Message Language 3 Press the Message soft key to display the Message menu 4 Press the JPN ENG or CHN soft key to select the message language Selecting the Screen Brightness 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select 1 to 3 LCD Brightness 2 Lop Brightness 2 Crest Factor Cr
484. s for the computation It is recommended that the measurement range and scaling PT CT ratio and coefficients of the elements that are being computed delta computation be set the same as much as possible Using a different measurement range or scaling causes the measurement resolution of the sampled data to be different In effect the computation result will have errors The number 1 2 3 and 4 that is attached to the measurement function symbol of the delta computation has no relation to the element number For example if the delta computation type is set to 3P3W gt 3V3A the true RMS value is computed using the u1 u2 data The resultant data is displayed as a AUrms1 value This function does not operate on products with only a single element In such case the menu does not appear If the wiring system on which delta computation is to be performed is single phase two wire 1P2W delta computation cannot be performed 6 14 IM 760101 01E 6 6 Setting the Equations for Apparent Power and Corrected Power For a functional description see section 1 5 o a pispLaY HoLp VRRATE FILE STORE copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o cREMOTE WAVE Harmonics LocaL misc CURSOR TOMAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC START STOP INTEG SET RESET Procedure
485. s including the fundamental and harmonics e Uhdf to hcf are measurement functions that indicate characteristics specific to the harmonics For details on the determination of the measurement functions see appendix 1 The frequency of up to three signals including the signals selected for the PLL source as fU Frequ voltage frequency or fl Freql current frequency can be measured IM 760101 01E 1 5 suoljoun jo uoneuejdxa 1 2 Measurement Function and Measurement Period Harmonic measurement function that indicates the phase difference of the voltage and current between the input elements There are five harmonic measurement functions that express the phase difference 9 Explanation is given below for the case when the number of installed input elements is 5 the wiring system pattern is three phase four wire for ZA and three phase three wire for B When the target of the harmonic measurement is set to wiring unit ZA the target elements are 1 2 and 3 The numerical data of the harmonic measurement functions of phase difference concerning elements 1 2 and 3 can be determined as shown below When the target of the harmonic measurement is set to wiring unit B the target elements are 4 and 5 The numerical data of the harmonic measurement functions of phase difference concerning elements 4 and 5 pU4 U5 oU4 I4 and oU4 I5 can be determined The phase difference U4 U 6 and oU4 I6 cannot be determined e oU1 U2 Ph
486. s per grid Set the number of data points per division in the range of 1 to 500 During Harmonic Measurement Set the time axis horizontal axis in terms of P div points per grid Set the number of data points per division in the range of 1 to 500 Note If the time axis is changed the retrieval of trend waveform data restarts The trend display up to that point is cleared and the trend starts from the left end of the screen IM 760101 01E 10 11 Aejdsig pues 2 10 6 Setting the Scale Procedure ESC UUUUUU lt PU o RANGE scaunel WIRING MOTOR SET a na oe fe CAL qe NTEGRATOR me a a START wear eee lence INTEG SET RESET o rE nisp v J HOLD ical FILE STORE COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU o T IGD o REMOTE WAVE Loca MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD O NULL SHIFT pi To exit the menu during operation press ESC The retrieval of trend display data must be turned ON to display trends For the procedure see section 10 1 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Trend Numeric Trend Wave Trend or Bar Trend For details on setting the display format see section 4 5 The following procedures are given for a representative example in which the display format is set to Trend 2 Press the Trend Setting soft key to display the Trend Setting menu 3 Press the Trend Scale soft ke
487. s set to 3 Effective Power Range of the Wiring Unit of Wiring System 1P2W or Each Element Current Voltage Range V Range A 1 5000 3 0000 6 0000 10 000 15 000 30 000 60 000 100 00 150 00 300 00 600 00 1000 0 10 000m 15 000 mW 30 000 mW 60 000 mW 100 00 mW 150 00 mW 300 00 mW 600 00 mW 1 0000W 1 5000W 3 0000W 6 0000W 10 000 W 20 000m 30 000 mW 60 000 mW 120 00 mW 200 00 mW 300 00 mW 600 00 mw 1 2000W 2 0000W 3 0000W 6 0000W 12 000W 20 000 W 50 000m 75 00 mW 150 00 mW 300 00 mW 500 00 mW 750 0mW 1 5000W 3 0000W 5 0000W 7 500W 15 000W 30 000W 50 000 W 100 00m 150 00 mW 300 00 mW 600 00 mW 1 0000W 1 5000W 3 0000W 6 0000W 10 000W 15 000W 30 000W 60 000W 100 00 W 200 00m 300 00 mW 600 00 mW 1 2000W 2 0000W 3 0000W 6 0000W 12 000W 20 000W 30 000W 60 000W 120 00W 200 00W 500 00m 750 0mW 1 5000W 3 0000W 5 0000W 7 500W 15 000W 30 000W 50 000W 75 00W 150 00W 300 00W 500 00 W 1 0000 1 5000W 3 0000W 6 0000W 10 000W 15 000W 30 000W 60 000W 100 00W 150 00W 300 00W 600 00 W 1 0000 kw 2 0000 3 0000W 6 0000W 12 000W 20 000W 30 000W 60 000W 120 00W 200 00W 300 00W 600 00W 1 2000 kW 2 0000 kw 5 0000 7 500W 15 000W 30 000W 50 000W 75 00W 150 00W 300 00W 500 00W 750 0W 1 5000 kW 3 0000 kW 5 0000 kw 10 000 15 000W 30 000W 60 000W 100 00W 150 00W 300 00W 600 00 W 1 0000 kW 1 5000 kW 3 0000 kW 6 0000 kW 10 000 kw 20 000 30 000W 60
488. s the data determined by the harmonic measurement For harmonic orders less than the minimum analysis order specified in section 7 5 for example Oth order when Min Order is set to 1st order and those greater than the maximum analysis order the output is 0 V If scaling factors such as PT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient are specified on the voltage current and power and the scaling is ON 100 5 V is output when the scaled value is equal to the scaled rated value measurement range x scaling factor For functions 100 5 V is output when the input is equal to the total value that is obtained when the rated value is input to each corresponding element If different scaling factors are placed on each element 100 5 V is output when the scaled value is equal to the scaled rated value measurement range x scaling factor If numerous D A output items are specified other than None it may take some time before the built in printer starts printing In this case reduce the number of output items or hold the measurement see section 5 8 15 6 IM 760101 01E 15 1 Setting the D A Output Option Rated Time of Integrated D A Output In the case of integrated values the integrated value that is obtained while continuously applying a rated value same value as the measurement range for the specified time is taken to be 100 The D A output at that point is 5 V The D A output from the integrated value of 0 0 V to the inte
489. s4 value Almn Almn4 value Line current of the neutral Aldc Aldc4 value conductor as determined Alac Alac4 value by the delta computation Delta Star 1 2 3 computations Pelt AUrm AUrms1 value AUrms2 value AUrms3 value AUmn AUmn1 value AUmn2 value AUmn3 value AUde AUdc1 value AUde2 value AUdc3 value Line voltage of AUac AUac1 value AUac2 value AUac3 value each phase as determined by the Measurement 4 delta computation functions Alrm Alrms4 value Almn Almn4 value lt Line current of the neutral Alde Aldc4 value conductor as determined Alac Alac4 value by the delta computation Ea xipueddy IM 760101 01E App 7 of Numerical Data Initial Settings Factory Default Appendix 3 List of Initial Settings and Display Order Item Setting RANGE For a 5 A input element For a 50 A input element Element Object Elementi Elementi U Range 1000 V 1000 V Terminal Direct Direct Range 5A 50A Sen Range 10 V 10 V SCALING Element Object Elementi Sensor Ratio 10 0000 mV A Scaling Off Pt Ratio 1 0000 Ct Ratio 1 0000 Scaling Factor 1 0000 WIRING Pattern1 FILTER Element Object Elementi Line Filter Off Zero Cross Filter Off AVG Averaging Off Averaging Type Exp only during normal measurement Exp Count 2 only during normal measurement Lin Count 8 only during normal measurement MEASURE During normal measurement During harmonic measurement Freq Item U1 11 U2 U1 11 U2 up to 3 items including P
490. scription see section 1 8 es 2 oispray noro FILE STORE copy ESC r SINGLE STORE SET MENU o TRIG D o REMOTE a WAVE LOCAL misc O CURSOR TOMAX HOLD O NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC ee PUT o MOTOR SET o RANGE SCALING WIRING JUUUUU o FILTER AVG qe NTEGRATOR wm a a STOP INTEGSET RESET START measure CAL The retrieval of trend display data must be turned ON to display trends For the procedure see section 10 1 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Trend Numeric Trend Wave Trend or Bar Trend For details on setting the display format see section 4 5 The following procedures are given for a representative example in which the display format is set to Trend 2 Press the Trend Setting soft key to display the Trend Setting menu Format Trend Trend Setting 10 10 IM 760101 01E 10 5 Setting the Time Axis Explanation During Normal Measurement When the Retrieval of Waveform Display Data see section 9 1 Is OFF 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the time axis When the display of scale values is turned ON see section 9 8 the time at the left end and the right end of the screen are displayed at the lower left corner fixed to 0 s and lower right corner of the screen respectively Du
491. section 12 9 Selecting the Files to Be Deleted e By placing asterisks to the left of the file names those files can be deleted e There are two methods in selecting the files to be deleted e Selecting the files one at a time Press the Set Reset soft key to place asterisks to the left of the files one ata time e Selecting the files at once Press the All Set soft key to place asterisks to the left of the selected file names at once There are three methods in selecting the files at once If you select a file and press the All Set soft key asterisks are placed by the directory containing the selected file and all the files in the directory If you select a directory and press the All Set soft key asterisks are placed by the selected directory and all the files in the directory If you select a medium and press the All Set soft key asterisks are placed by all the directories and files in the selected medium e Data that is deleted cannot be recovered Make sure you erase the correct files e You can delete directories if there are no files in them e When File Item is Wave Data Type is Binary and Filter is Item deleting a file with a wvf extension that has an asterisk causes the file with the same name with the hdr extension to also be deleted When Filter is All only the files that have the asterisks are deleted Ifthe file attribute see section 12 9 is R you cannot delete the file e If an error occurs while deleting
492. shunt type current sensors When connecting a clamp type current sensor replace the shunt type current sensor with the clamp type In addition the assignment of elements to the input terminals in the following figure varies depending on the number of installed input elements For details see Number of Installed Input Elements and Wiring Systems in section 1 3 Measurement Conditions Wiring Example of a Single Phase Two Wire System 1P2W Using a Shunt Type Current Sensor SOURCE LOAD Input terminal Current sensor input connector EXT Wiring Example of a Single Phase Three Wire System 1P3W Using a Shunt Type Current Sensor SOURCE LOAD Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 O Current sensor input Current sensor input connector EXT connector EXT Wiring Example of a Three Phase Three Wire System 3P3W Using a Shunt Type Current Sensor SOURCE l LOAD Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 Current sensor input Current sensor input connector EXT connector EXT 3 14 IM 760101 01E 3 7 Using an External Current Sensor to Wire the Circuit under Measurement Wiring Example of a Three Voltage Three Current System 3V3A Using a Shunt Type Current Sensor SOURCE LOAD terminal 1 terminal 2 terminal 3 Current sensor input Current sensor input Current sensor input conn
493. signals are both sine waves the amplitude is greater than or equal to 50 greater than or equal to 100 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the measurement range the frequency is between 20 Hz to 10 kHz and the phase difference is greater than or equal to 5 Temperature coefficient Add 0 03 of reading C in the range 5 to 20 C or 26 to 40 C One year accuracy reading error of the 3 month accuracy x 1 5 Accuracy when the crest factor is set to 6 Accuracy obtained by doubling the measurement range error for the accuracy when the crest factor is set to 3 Power Accuracy Item Specification Accuracy 3 months accuracy Conditions Same as the conditions for voltage and current Frequency Accuracy reading error measurement range error DC 0 1 of reading 0 2 of range 0 5 Hz lt f lt 10Hz 10 Hz lt f lt 45 Hz 45 Hz lt f lt 66 Hz 66 Hz lt f lt 1 kHz 1 kHz lt f lt 50 kHz 0 2 of reading 0 3 of range 0 1 of reading 0 2 of range 0 1 of reading 0 05 of range 0 2 of reading 0 1 of range 5 A input element and the current is direct input 0 3 of reading 0 2 of range Current sensor input 0 02 x f 0 3 of reading 0 2 of range 50 A input element and the current is direct input 0 1 x f 0 2 of reading 0 2 of range 50 kHz lt f lt 100 kHz 5 A input element and the current is direct input 0 7 of reading 0 3
494. specified user defined function computation e ON Performs the computation e OFF Does not perform the computation Setting the Unit e Number of Characters Eight characters or less However not all eight characters can be shown on the numerical data display This depends on the number of displayed items see section 4 1 e Types of characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard and spaces 7 16 IM 760101 01E 7 8 Setting the User Defined Function Setting the Equation The combination of the measurement function element number and harmonic order U E1 OR1 for example can be used as an operand to create up to four equations F1 to F4 There can be up to 16 operands in one equation e Measurement functions for computation The operators for the measurement functions are shown below in the form measurement function operand U U S S o PHI Z Z Rp RP Ihaf IHDF Ithd ITHD Ithf ITHF hvf HVF fl FI oU1 11 PHIU111 Phdf PHDF oU1 U2 PHIU1U2 oU1 12 PHIU112 P P LAMBDA ol IPHI Xs XS Uhdf UHDF Uthd UTHD Uthf UTHF Itif ITIF fU FU U1 U3 PHIU1U3 oU1 I3 PHIU113 A symbol representing the element to which the measured signal is to be applied is entered on the left side OR followed by the harmonic order is entered on the right side E1 OR2 is an example Elements 1 2 3 4 5 6 XA
495. sre cor SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o OREMOTE a CURSOR MAX NULL SHIFT KY To exit the menu during operation press ESC a NTEGRATOR me z START STOP sine sad INTEG SET RESET JOUUUULE Activating the NULL Function 1 Press SHIFT MISC NULL The NULL indicator that is below and to the left of the key illuminates and the NULL function is activated Clearing the NULL Function 2 Press SHIFT MISC NULL when the NULL function is activated The NULL indicator turns OFF and the NULL function is canceled The NULL function can be used to subtract the DC offset while the external sensor or measurement cable is connected Execute the NULL function at zero input condition current input terminal open and voltage input terminal shorted Null Value When the NULL function is turned ON the NULL values are set to the Udc and Idc values numerical data of the simple average of the voltage and current during normal measurement Speed and Torque on products with the motor evaluation function when the input signal from the sensor is an analog signal that were measured the previous time If the previously measured Udc and Idc as well as Speed and Torque values do not exist such as when the NULL function is turned ON without making a measurement after turning ON the power Udc and Idc are set to zero Note e The NULL function is automatically cleared when the range or filter setting i
496. standard For details see appendix 1 IM 760101 01E 17 5 h Ey suoneoyioeds 17 4 Measurement Functions Items during Harmonic Measurement Measurement functions indicating the phase difference of the fundamental voltage and current between elements These measurement functions express the phase difference of fundamental wave U 1 and I 1 of other elements with respect to the fundamental wave U 1 of the element with the smallest number of the input elements that are assigned to the wiring unit The following table indicates the measurement functions for a wiring unit that combines elements 1 2 and 3 Item Symbol and Meaning Phase difference U1 U2 dJ1 U2 Phase difference of the fundamental voltage U2 1 of element 2 with respect to the fundamental voltage U1 1 of element 1 Phase difference U1 U3 dJ1 U3 Phase difference of the fundamental voltage U3 Phase difference U1 I1 1 11 Phase difference of the fundamental current I1 Phase difference U1 12 dU1 l2 Phase difference of the fundamental current 12 Phase difference U1 I3 1 13 Phase difference of the fundamental current 13 1 of element 3 with respect to U 1 1 1 of element 1 with respect to U1 1 1 1 1 1 lt J 1 of element 2 with respect to U1 1 of element 3 with respect to U1 Measurement Functions Functions Determined for Each Wiring Unit A XB and C
497. t 1 3 S functions during normal measurement s 1 6 SiliStsaiehata MAM aan cade asia Signal assignment eee eee ete eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaees signal flow and process SINGING AEA ET EEEE 5 24 9 13 10 8 Single listis eeii 1 16 4 9 7 4 single measurement 1 13 5 24 slave 5 26 SMP CIK aa a ARE A eE A AEA AERE 7 9 SMTP Time OUT aE ar eera a raea iain eeka Paai 13 25 SMTP timeout time 0 0 eee eee e eee eeteeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeees 13 25 SOM KO ARE APAE TATA AA A E E 16 7 spare fuse 16 9 spare parsan An E ae AE AAR v SPOC EE EEA E I E EEE 8 1 8 3 speed SCALING Of 02 0 eecesceesseeseeseeseseessaeseeeeseeesseessaeseaees 8 7 split screen split windows number Of cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeeeees 9 13 Standard ACCESSOLIES cceeeteeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeae iv Start OMe sccheveiceceratacaveties dad N 7 20 Index 4 IM 760101 01E Static CAPACITANCE soseri iiaee storage environment storage location SLOG cs skeen E E AEA T eitel ie olt a APAA EE E A TOT store interval Store Item nananana store item selection of a Store MOda e eaeoe Aa eat ee A ae 11 1 store operation automatically stopping of 11 11 store operation starting Of 0 0 store operation stopping of 2 Store reservation time ceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeteeneeeeeeaees STORE SET 4 Store Setting eee eeeeseeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeee
498. t Control is set to ON individual element integration ON the WT1600 operates in the same fashion as when Independent Control is OFF individual element integration OFF 6 20 IM 760101 01E 6 8 Setting the Normal Integration Mode and the Integration Timer Setting the Integration Timer during All Element Simultaneous Computation Independent Control OFF 5 6 7 8 Tiner Setting Press the Timer Setting soft key to display the Timer Setting dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select one of the hour minute and second boxes Press SELECT A box used to set the timer appears Turn the jog shuttle to set the hour minute or second that you selected in step 6 For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Press SELECT or ESC to close the box Repeat steps 6 to 9 to set the hour minute and second The procedure for setting the integration timer during all element simultaneous computation ends here Integ Set Mode Norma1 Tiner Setting Timer Setting gt moo oo Independent Control m o W Current Mode RMS OUUUUBU Setting the Integration Timer during Individual Element Computation Independent Control ON 11 Press the Timer Setting soft key to display the Independent Timer Setting dialog box 12 Turn the jog shuttle to select Setting 13 Press SELECT to select Each or Al
499. t caused by friction e Outputting If chemicals oil or other liquids come in contact with the paper the paper may change color or the printing may fade Note To cut the paper after the paper roll is installed and the printer cover is closed pull the roll paper upward against the cover If you open the printer cover immediately after you cut the roll paper repeat steps 5 to 10 After installing the roll paper and closing the printer cover check that the paper is being fed correctly by carrying out step 8 If the paper is not being fed evenly continue to feed the paper for approximately 30 cm The paper will straighten out If you reverse the direction in which the roll paper is placed the printer head does not make contact with the thermal sensitive surface Hence nothing will be printed 14 4 IM 760101 01E 14 2 Printing Screen Images o ose HOLD Ba FILE sron copy SINGLE STORE SB MENU oTAIGD o REMOTE S WAVE ones LOCAL MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC eqs NTEGRATOR mm g a START STOP INTEG SET RESET H Procedure 1 Press SHIFT COPY MENU to display the Copy menu 2 Press the Copy to soft key to display the Copy to menu 3 Press the Printer soft key Setting Comments 4 Press the Comment soft key to display the keyboard 5 Use the keyboard to enter the comment For keyboard operations see sect
500. t key to display the Text Color dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select the item you wish to set Press SELECT to display the color level selection box Turn the jog shuttle to set the color level For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Press SELECT or ESC to close the box IM 760101 01E 15 17 al suonoun4 19440 pue indino v a 15 7 Setting the Display Color of the Screen ESG Text Color a Mode Preset 1 User Color Menu Fore Menu Back E Select Box 0 0 7 Sub Menu B BI BI Selected key Explanation The display color for each item can be specified Set the color using a ratio 0 7 of red R green G and blue B Setting the Graphic Color Select default color or user color For user color the display color can be specified for each item e Back Set the background color within the waveform display frame e Grid Set the color of the grid within the waveform display frame and the area within the waveform display frame e Cursor Set the display color of the cursor e U1 to I6 Speed Torque Set the display color of the waveform 11 and U5 U2 and 15 I2 and U6 U3 and l6 I3 and Speed and U4 and Torque will have the same display color setting Applicable only on products with the motor evaluation function option Setting the Text Color Select from
501. t keys corresponding to the displayed element from which the information is to be copied the copy source 4 Press the Scaling Copy Exec soft key The current the ON OFF condition PT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient of the scaling function and the sensor transformation ratio of the copy source are copied to the elements of the same wiring unit However if the wiring system is pattern 1 the measurement range is copied to all other elements IM 760101 01E 5 15 SUOI IPUOD JUBWsINSeaLY 5 4 Setting the Scaling Function When Using an External PT or CT Explanation ES Q Element Object Element 1 Element 1 Element 2 Sensor Ratio mv a 10 0000 Element 3 Element 4 ct Ratio Element 5 1 0000 Scaling Factor 1 0000 Scaling Copy Exec Element 6 Scaling Copy Exec JUUOUUUE fH Measurements can be made by connecting the output of the secondary side of the PT and the output of the secondary side of the CT to the same voltage and current input terminals that are used when directly inputting a signal Turning ON OFF the Scaling Function You can select whether to multiply the voltage U current I and power P S and Q by the PT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient respectively If any of the target elements is turned ON the SCALING indicator above and to the left of the key illuminates e ON The voltage U current I and power P S and
502. t of harmonic order under analysis i Upper Scal riiseni eei aeeiiaii WrimsS Sissi Saeco als E T USEF ACCOUNT aner er a ari ser defigire an neaei aa dia aeiia na ainat user name 13 20 13 21 user defined function cceccccceesesstteeeeeeesessteeeeeees 1 18 6 8 utility 2 eee eeeeeeeeeees 12 6 12 26 12 29 12 32 12 36 V V Zoom amp POSION sssaaa ipe eivi 9 8 values entry of VOCIONS e cae aR ane a TES AOE AE Ta cathon cea vertical axis mnsine iain ese vertical position sesesssessissssrrsesesrnsrserrusrneeriseeeernriusensrrnees 1 26 VOA iaaea ia aa die a Nadiad piaia 1 33 15 9 video signal output connector pin arrangement of 15 9 voltage determination Of cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 1 4 voltage input terminal oo eee eee e eects eeeeeeeeeeeenees 2 1 voltage range Setting Of 0 cece eeeeeeneeeeeeteaeeeees 5 4 W WAVE display oo eee eee ee eee eee tees sees teeeseaeeseeeeteeteneeeaeees wave format f wave MAPPING ssssssrsssssrrsessrusesesineriutruneaseruneneennriusenerrnees wave sampling wave setting wave trace WaveC1 Trace WaveC2 Trace waveform display data extension Of eeeeeeeeeeeee 11 17 waveform display data retrieval of waveform display data saving of waveform MAPPING eee eee cee terete tees IM 760101 01E Index 5 Index Waveform ZOOMING Of cecceeeeeeeeeneeeee
503. t to the fundamental signal I 1 Z k Impedance of the load circuit observed by the k order harmonic signal Resistance and reactance Q of the load circuit Rs k Resistance observed by the k order harmonic signal of the load circuit that has a resistor R inductor L and capacitor C connected in series Xs k Reactance observed by the k order harmonic signal of the load circuit that has a resistor R inductor L and capacitor C connected in series Rp k Resistance observed by the k order harmonic signal of the load circuit that has a resistor R inductor L and capacitor C connected in parallel Xp k Reactance observed by the k order harmonic signal of the load circuit that has a resistor R inductor L and capacitor C connected in parallel Harmonic distortion factor Uhdf k The ratio of the harmonic voltage U k to U 1 or U expressed as a percentage Ihdf k The ratio of the harmonic current I k to I 1 or expressed as a percentage Phdf k The ratio of the active power P k of the harmonic signal to P 1 or P expressed as a percentage Total harmonic distortion Uthd The ratio of the total harmonic voltage to U 1 or U expressed as a percentage Ithd The ratio of the total harmonic current to I 1 or expressed as a percentage Pthd The ratio of the active power of the total harmonic signal to P 1 or P expressed as a percentage Telephone harmonic Uthf Telephone harmonic factor of
504. t were specified before are not held 3 Press one of the soft keys corresponding to the displayed element from which the information is to be copied the copy source 4 Press the Scaling Copy Exec soft key The current sensor transformation ratio and the ON OFF condition PT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient of the scaling function of the copy source are copied to the elements of the same wiring unit However if the wiring system is pattern 1 the measurement range is copied to all other elements Element 1 Element 2 SC Element Object Element 1 W Sensor Rat io muva 10 0000 Element 3 Element 4 Element 5 Element 6 Scaling Copy Exec JGOUO0UE fH The output of current sensors such as shunts and clamps can be input to the current sensor input connector of an element and be measured Display Position of the Target Element and Specified Range It is the same as section 5 2 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input Selecting the Current Sensor Input Connector To measure the current using the input signal from the current sensor input connector Sen must be selected for the Terminal in the Range menu and then the current sensor range and current sensor transformation ratio must be specified Selecting the Current Sensor Range Two types of range settings are available fixed range and auto range e Fixed range e When the crest factor is set to 3 Select
505. t with Ext Clk is not allowed Frequency range Frequency equal to 2048 times the fundamental frequency of 0 5 Hz to 100 Hz Input level TTL Input waveform 50 duty ratio rectangular wave AN CAUTION Applying a voltage outside the range of 0 to 5 V to the external clock input connector EXT CLK can damage the instrument IM 760101 01E 7 9 juswainseayy D1uOW Ie 7 4 Selecting the PLL Source Note The frequency of up to three signals including the signals selected for the PLL source as fU voltage frequency or fl current frequency can be measured For the procedure in selecting the frequency measurement target see section 6 3 If the number of frequency measurement targets exceeds three because you selected a PLL source other than the source selected in section 6 3 frequency measurement targets are removed in order from the element with the largest number in the order voltage and current Select a signal that has the same period as the target signal for the harmonic measurement Selecting an input signal with little distortion for the PLL source enables stable harmonic measurement If the fundamental frequency of the PLL source fluctuates or if the fundamental frequency cannot be measured due to waveform distortion correct measurement results will not be obtained It is recommended that the voltage of the PLL source be set so that the distortion is small with respect to the current If all the input signals ar
506. ta abnormality from DSP 924 FIFO abnormality 1 Note If the corrective action indicates maintenance service try initializing the instrument It may recover from the error IM 760101 01E 16 5 g uonsedsu pue avueugzuien HunooysajqnoiL 16 3 Performing a Self Test Procedure ESC UUUUUU o Sl D al g a ASS DISPLAY roo ree FILE STORE COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTAIGD o REMOTE ra a woul wee CURSOR MAK HOLD egg SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC ee PUT o RANGE scaunel WIRING Pa FILTER PO 4 Communication Date Tine Selftest qe NTEGRATOR me a a STOP INTEGSET RESET H H p K START Press MISC to display the Misc menu Press the Selftest soft key to display the Selftest menu Press the Test Item soft key to display the Test Item menu Press the Memory or Key Board soft key to select the test item If you selected Memory proceed to Testing the Memory on the next page If you selected Key Board proceed to Testing the Keys and the Keyboard on the next page Q m JUUUUUOS S Q Selftest W Test Item Memory JOUUUULS Test Exec 16 6 IM 760101 01E 16 3 Performing a Self Test Testing the Memory 5 Pressing the Test Exec soft key execute the memory test
507. tal efficiency and motor efficiency respectively Conversely if PZB is the power to the converter and the motor and PXA is the power to the motor nmB and nmA are the total efficiency and motor efficiency respectively For details see section 8 8 17 4 IM 760101 01E 17 4 Measurement Functions Items during Harmonic Measurement Measurement Functions Determined for Each Input Element For details on the determination and equations of measurement functions see appendix 1 Item Symbol and Meaning Voltage V U k rms value of the harmonic voltage of order k U total rms value of the voltage signal Current A I k rms value of the harmonic current of order k total rms value of the current signal Active power W P k Active power of the harmonic signal of order k P total active power Apparent power VA S k Apparent power of the harmonic signal of order k S total apparent power Reactive power var Q k Reactive power of the harmonic signal of order k Q total reactive power Power factor Xk Power factor of the harmonic signal of order k X total power factor Phase difference ak Phase difference between the harmonic voltage and current of order k total phase dU k Phase difference of each harmonic voltage U k with respect to the fundamental signal U 1 Impedance Q of the load circuit d k Phase difference of each harmonic current I k with respec
508. te rate or the specified time interval In addition the stored data can be saved to a floppy disk or built in hard disk The data that is saved to the built in hard disk or floppy disk cannot be recalled Saving and Loading to the Floppy Disk Built in Hard Disk and External SCSI Device For procedures see chapter 12 A floppy disk FD drive comes standard with the instrument Additionally a built in hard disk or SCSI can be installed as an option The numerical data waveform display data screen image data and setup parameters can be saved to these media The saved setup parameters can be loaded as necessary The screen image data can be pasted to documents on a word processing application SCSI Built in hard disk lt I PC wt ea SCSI device SEa Floppy disk S Printing on the Built in Printer For procedures see chapter 14 The screen image numerical data list and bar graphs can be printed on the built in printer option AE SS Built in printer option Ethernet Communications Option For procedures see chapter 13 The numerical data waveform display data screen image data and setup parameters can be saved to a device connected via the Ethernet interface or information about the WT1600 can be transmitted Saving and Loading from an FTP Server on the Network FTP Client Function The numerical data waveform display data screen
509. te the case when inp ut elements 1 2 and 3 are set to the wiring system shown in the table If elements 2 3 and 4 are set to the wiring system shown in the table replace the numbers 1 2 and 3 with 2 3 and 4 respectively The same also holds true when using elements 5 and 6 IM 760101 01E App 5 Ea xipueddy Appendix 2 Determination of Delta Computation Delta Computation Type Sampled Data and Measurement Function of Delta Computation The sampled data in the table are substituted into the equations on the next page to derive the computed results The synchronization source for the delta computation is the synchronization source Sync Src that is assigned to the first input element smallest number of the wiring unit on which delta computation is to be performed Sampled Data That Are Delta Computation Type Substituted into the Equations on the Next Page u t i t Data Determined by the Delta Computation and the Measurement Function Symbols Representing the Data Notes 3P3W D3V3A ul u2 i1 i2 Line voltage of the 3rd phase AUrms1 Alrms1 AUmn1 Almn1 AUdc1 Aldc1 AUac1 Alac1 Presumption ul u2 u3 0 i1 i2 i3 0 Delta gt Star i u1 u2 _ u1 u2 2 a 3 _ u1 u2 3 i1 i2 i3 Phase voltage of each phase Line current of the neutral conductor AUrms1 AUmn1 AUdc1 AUac1 AUrms2 AUmn2 AUdc2 AUac2 AUrms3 AUmn3 AUdc3
510. tegration Section 6 11 SHIFT STOP RESET key Resets the integrated result integrated value and integration time Section 6 11 SHIFT START INTEG SET key Sets the integration mode and timer Sections 6 8 to 6 10 DISPLAY key Sets the display format for numerical data waveforms bar graphs vectors trends and others Chapter 4 sections 6 1 7 2 7 9 7 10 9 5 to 9 8 and chapter 10 SINGLE OR MENU STRIGO o E REMOTE a WAVE ecruomes LOCAL MISC CURSOR EMAX RODE NULL SHIFT SHIFT WAVE CURSOR key Performs cursor measurement Sections 7 9 9 9 and 10 7 WAVE key Sets the acquisition conditions of waveform display data Sections 9 1 to 9 4 IM 760101 01E 2 2 Operation Keys Jog Shuttle Store and Recall Data Save and Load Data Set Ethernet Communications and Other Functions A y BEBEBE SYNC START STOP SYNC DISPLA HOLD VRR SINGLE cTRIGD nanmonics WAVE CURSOR r FILE key Formats disks saves setup parameters waveform display data numerical data and screen image data loads setup parameters changes file attributes deletes files copies files renames directories files and creates directories Chapter 12 LOCAL misc S MAX HOLD SHIFT STORE key Executes store operation Sections 11 4 and 11 6 COPY key Saves and prints screen image data ra erone corr Sections 12 7 13 3 and 14 2
511. the Scaling Factor and Unit Used to Compute the Motor Output Procedure ESC J E Fa FILTER AVG MEA i H INTEGRATOR mma STOP INTEGSET RESET START CAL o B UP DATE RATE DISPLAY HOLD SINGLE FILE STORE COPY STORE SET MENU REMOTE a oTRIGD o WAVE HARMONICS CURSOR LOCAL MISC OMAX HOLD O NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC 1 Press SHIFT RANGE MOTOR SET to display the Motor Set dialog box Setting the Scaling Factor Used to Compute the Motor Output 2 Turn the jog shuttle to select Scaling under Pm 3 Press SELECT to display the scaling factor setting box 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the scaling factor For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 5 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box Motor Set Range Sense Type Pulse Range Line Filter Scaling Unit Pulse N Pole Sync Speed Sumc Source Speed Torque mw ZOU LAnalog_ Pulse OFF 1 0000 1 6606 8 0000 L10009 0609 3 1 0000 Ww rpm Nn e can 8 14 IM 760101 01E 8 7 Setting the Scaling Factor and Unit Used to Compute the Motor Output Setting th
512. the WT1600 operates in the same fashion when Independent Control is OFF individual element integration OFF IM 760101 01E 6 23 uolesbaju pue JUoWeiINSeayy EWON el 6 9 Setting the Real time Integration Mode the Integration Timer and the Reservation Time Setting the Integration Timer during All Element Simultaneous Computation Independent Control OFF 5 6 7 8 Timer Setting Press the Timer Setting soft key to display the Timer Setting dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select one box from hour minute and second Press SELECT A box used to set the timer appears Turn the jog shuttle to set the hour minute or second that you selected in step 6 For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Press SELECT or ESC to close the box Repeat steps 6 to 9 to set hour minute and second The procedure for setting the integration timer during all element simultaneous computation ends here Integ Set K Mode R Nornal Timer Setting Timer Setting 90000 00 conf Real Time Control JOLE Independent Control ON Setting the Reservation Time during All Element Simultaneous Computation Independent Control OFF 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Press the Real Time Control soft key to display the Real Time Control dialog box Tur
513. the appropriate corrective actions The messages can be displayed in English or Japanese see section 15 6 If the corrective action indicates servicing contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs In addition to the error messages listed in this section there are also communication related error messages These messages are described in the Communication Interface User s Manual IM760101 11E Error in Execution Code Message Corrective Action Sections 11 Cannot measure PLL frequency Check input level 7 4 601 Invalid file name or SCSI ID Check file name or SCSI ID 12 4 12 6 602 No media inserted or no SCSI device Make sure that the storage medium is 12 1 12 4 inserted if applicable and check the SCSI device connection and the SCSI ID 603 No SCSI device or no media inserted Check the SCSI device connection and the SCSI 12 1 12 4 ID and make sure that the storage medium is inserted if applicable 604 Media failure Check the storage medium 605 File not found Check the file name and the storage medium 606 Media is protected Set the disk s medium s write protect switch to OFF 607 Media was removed while accessing Check the storage medium 608 File already exists 12 6 609 610 Contains invalid characters 12 6 611 Media full Delete unnecessary file s or use another disk 12 5 12 10 612 613 File system f
514. the displayed items aro ES Q Numeric Itens Harn Item No 1 Function uU R Alert Really Element Element 1 Harmonics Numeric Items will be initialized Ok Cancel BOOOUULE Reset List Exec When Item Amount Number of Displayed Items is set to Single List or Dual List 13 Press the List Items soft key to display the List Items menu Selecting the item to be changed 14 Press the List Item No soft key 15 Turn the jog shuttle to select 1 or 2 When Item Amount is set to Single List the data of List Item No 1 is displayed using two columns When Item Amount is set to Dual List the data of List Item No 1 and 2 is displayed in each column e Changing the measurement function 16 Press the Function soft key to display the measurement function selection box 17 Turn the jog shuttle to select the measurement function 18 Press SELECT The symbol for the selected measurement function and the numerical data are displayed e Changing the element wiring unit 19 Press the Element soft key to display the element wiring unit selection box 20 Turn the jog shuttle to select any of the elements wiring units starting with Elementi 21 Press SELECT The symbol for the selected element number or wiring unit and the numerical data are displayed 7 4 IM 760101 01E 7 2 Changing the Displayed Item of Numerical Data Display 4 Format D
515. the elements and measurement functions are cleared indicating that all items will not be printed Copy to All ON All OFF Preset 1 Preset 2 Element 1 c Element 2 0 Element 3 0 Element 4 Element 5 c Element 6 ZA uB Urns Unean Irms Inean y S Printer T g f El 3 x a 4 amp 3 Information OFF BR List Item M o Function udc Idc uac Tac A eee Frequ U peak cri Rs Pc U peak ceu I peak FfI Rp Wp eaneene p maa ZEE eae i Print Data List Exec q F4 Comment AUmean AImean GCOSCOOOVROAOe2eee2oO SCOCCOORBROeeee x 000 00 0o00 O C a L C L_ O e Selecting only the items that are preset 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select Preset1 or Preset2 7 Press SELECT The buttons to the left of all the elements and measurement functions that are specified in Preset1 or Preset 2 are highlighted indicating that the items will be printed Items specified in Preset1 Items specified in Preset2 List Iten List Iten All ON All OFF Preset 1 Preset 2 Element gi Element 1 9 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 gi Element 5 Element 6 ALL ON 9 All OFF Preset 1 Preset 2 Elenent Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 Element 5 gj Element 6 ZB Umean M z M 2 Function 5 E a Function Ude Ide wee
516. the following range 0000 00 00 to 10000 00 00 When performing all element simultaneous integration by turning Independent Control OFF a single integration timer can be specified The value specified here is also set in the integration timer of Element 1 in the Independent Timer Setting dialog box that appears when Independent Control is turned ON e When performing individual element integration by turning Independent Control ON timers can be specified for each element The value specified for the integration timer for Element 1 is also set in the integration timer in the Timer Setting dialog box that appears when Independent Control is turned OFF e By turning Independent Control ON the integration timer can be set for each element Each or for all elements at once All Note e Ifthe integration timer is set to 0000 00 00 in the normal integration mode the integration is performed in manual integration mode see section 1 6 and 6 11 e The individual element integration function does not operate on products with only a single element In such case the individual element integration menu does not appear 6 22 IM 760101 01E 6 9 Setting the Real time Integration Mode the Integration Timer and the Reservation Time For a functional description see section 1 6 a a osp ay HOLD FILE stone COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU OTRIGD o REMOTE a WAYE mcs an MSG p CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT T
517. the jog shuttle to select Unit 6 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 7 Use the keyboard to set the unit For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Setting the Equation 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select Expression 9 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 10 Use the keyboard to set the equation For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings G K Freq Item Freq Item Function 1 De Expression Function 2 De e m INSERT 112 314 Sfe 7 8 STON e E Cresta BICIDTELFIGUHUT ITKIL IN Ce ANCOL LOIRI ITU U UYE pere pe EEEL ECE eL Def ined Def ined y Measure m INSERT URMS E1 3 S Formula S Formula cr ANCOL IOLRIESITLU LU u Urns Irns perce x LT L CPe Urns Irns FRE pr foe eo eee Pr Expression IRMS E1 Function 3 PE ON mit C Formula Formula Function 3 FF _ON Unit V J Expression UPPKCE1 Expression UPPK CEI Phase Function 4 DFF m unit CA Function 4 PFF N Unit CA P Lead Lag Expression Explanation IPPK E1 c Measure Expression TPPKCE1 Ster Slave JUUUUUUE JUUUUULIS uoles6aju pue JUoWeINSeayy JEUN el An equat
518. ther master slave or both are in harmonic measurement mode e when the data update rate or retrieval of waveform display data ON OFF setting for the master is different from that of the slave e when real time integration mode or store is in real time mode Output Circuit for the External Start Stop Signal and Time Chart 5V 5V 10 KQ A 100 Q mE Start Stop A output signal V V Measurement start delay time Measurement start Start Stop output signal Fo Output hold time IM 760101 01E 5 27 SUOI IPUOD JUBWsINSeaLY 5 10 Performing Master Slave Synchronized Measurements Input Circuit for the External Start Stop Signal and Time Chart 5 V 100 Q Start Stop input signal WW 2 gt Minimum pulse width Start Stop lt input signal Input delay time t Trigger occurrence Measurement start CAUTION e When the instrument is set to master do not apply external voltage to the external start stop signal input output connector START STOP This may cause damage to the instrument e Applying a voltage outside the 0 to 5 V range to the external start stop signal input output connector when the instrument is set to slave may cause damage to the instrument 5 28 IM 760101 01E 5 11 Selecting the Crest Factor a FILE STORE COPY STORE SET MENU UP DATE RATE
519. tion 6 11 Reset the reservation time in this case Leap years are recognized at the time of execution of the integration operation 6 28 IM 760101 01E 6 10 Selecting the Current Mode for Current Integration and ON OFF of Integration Auto Calibration For a functional description see section 1 6 Procedure STS RANGE scanna WIRING MOTOR SET o a FILTER AVG MEASURE CAL NTEGRATOR mm z a STOP SYNC sd INTEG SET RESET ose ay HOLD TRIG D wooo CURSOR To exit the menu during operation press ESC a bia FILE SINGLE a stone COPY STORE SET MENU o COREMOTE LOCAL misc pq oea mee p MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT 1 Press SHIFT START INTEG SET to display the Integ Set menu Selecting the Current Mode for Current Integration 2 Press the Current Mode soft key to display the Current Mode dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select Setting Press SELECT to select Each or All Turn the jog shuttle to select Elementi Press SELECT to select one of the RMS to AC soft keys oa Pw If you selected Each in step 4 the current mode of only Element 1 is selected If you selected All in step 4 the current mode of all elements is selected at once 7 Ifyou selected Each in step 4 repeat steps 5 and 6 for all elements g Mode Normal 4 Tiner Setting C urrent Mode
520. trument When replacing a fuse turn OFF the power switch and unplug the power cord Never short the fuse holder Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation in such environments constitutes a safety hazard Do Not Remove Covers The cover should be removed by YOKOGAWA s qualified personnel only Opening the cover is dangerous because some areas inside the instrument have high voltages External Connection Securely connect the protective grounding before connecting to the item under measurement or an external control unit IM 760101 01E vii How to Use This Manual Structure of the Manual This user s manual consists of the following sections Chapter 1 Explanation of Functions Describes the functions of the instrument Operating procedures are not given in this chapter However reading this chapter will help you understand the operating procedures given in the chapters that follow Chapter 2 Names and Uses of Parts Describes the names and uses of each part of the instrument Chapter 3 Before Starting Measurements Describes precautions for the use of the instrument how to install the instrument how to connect to the power supply how to wire measurement circuits how to turn ON OFF the power switch and other preparations before starting measurements Chapter 4 Screen Display Format Describes how to display numerical data
521. trument starts its measurement at approximately the same time as the start of the measurement on the master instrument The slave instrument stops its measurement at approximately the same time as the stop of the measurement on the master instrument 5 26 IM 760101 01E 5 10 Performing Master Slave Synchronized Measurements Explanation With the master instrument outputting measurement start and stop signals and the slave instrument receiving those signals synchronized measurement on two instruments is achieved External Start Stop Signal Input Output Connector Connect the external start signal input output connectors on the rear panel between the master and slave instruments using BNC connectors sold separately and do the same for the external stop signal input output connectors Item Specification Notes Connector type BNC connector Common to master and slave I O level TTL Common to master and slave Output logic LI Negative falling edge Applies to the master Measurement start delay time Within 100 ns 1 sample period Applies to the master Output hold time Low level 200 ns or more Applies to the master Input logic LJ Negative falling edge Applies to the slave Minimum pulse width Low level 200 ns or more Applies to the slave Input delay time Within 100 ns 1 sample period Applies to the slave Note Synchronized measurement is unavailable in the following situations e when ei
522. ts with the Ethernet interface If the MAC address appears as xxxxxx_Xxx_Xxx even when the Ethernet Interface is installed then contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer IM 760101 01E 13 23 uondo suonesiunwwos 3u194 3 g 13 8 Setting the FTP Passive Mode and LPR SMTP Timeout o pispLay Holo VRAE FILE STORE COPY SINGLE oTRIGD WAVE HARMONICS CURSOR n PUT o RANGE scana WIRING MOTOR SET o o nom CAL qx NTEGRATOR mmm z START STOP Ri INTEG SET RESET A H Procedure 1 Press MISC to display the Misc menu STORE SET MENU REMOTE gm _ MAX HOLDALL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 3 Press the Network soft key to display the Network menu Kl Text Color 4 Communication SCSI Setting Network K Date Time 4 DA Output Itens 4 Selftest Net Print Setup coal we J 13 24 IM 760101 01E 13 8 Setting the FTP Passive Mode and LPR SMTP Timeout Turning ON OFF the FTP Passive Mode 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select FTP Passive 6 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF Setting the LPR Timeout Time 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select LPR Time Out 6 Press SELECT to display the ti
523. uation Note Number of characters 50 characters or less e Types of characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard or a space An equation F1 to F4 cannot be placed inside another equation F1 to F4 If an operand in the equation is undetermined the computation result displays no data For example if a measurement function of a delta computation is in the equation but the delta computation is turned OFF or a measurement function of an element that is installed is in the equation an error message is displayed IM 760101 01E uoljes6aju pue JUoWeINSeayy EWION el 6 5 Setting the Delta Computation Procedure ESC UJUUUUU n PUT o RANGE scaunel WIRING MOTOR SET o EA FILTER pi Si NTEGRATOR mw z START STOP INTEGSET RESET g HER For a functional description see section 1 5 a o DISPLAY roo ree FILE STORE COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o REMOTE a CURSOR TOMAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC Check that the measurement mode is set to normal measurement If the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement set Mode to OFF in the Harmonics menu see section 7 1 1 2 Press MEASURE to display the Measure menu Press the AMeasure soft key to display the AMeasure dialog box Selecting the Target Wiring Unit for the Delta Computation Turn the jog s
524. ugh the load and returns to the power source shown with a dotted line ics flows through the current measurement source through the stray capacitance and then through the earth ground of the outer case and returns to the power source shown with a dot dash line Therefore the current measurement circuit ends up measuring the sum of iL and ics even though it wants to measure only iL ics is the amount of error in this case If the voltage applied to Cs is Vcs common mode voltage then ics can be found using the following equation Because the phase of ics is ahead of the voltage by 90 the effects of ics on the measurement accuracy increases as the power factor gets smaller ics Vcs x 27f x Cs LOAD When measuring high frequencies as in this instrument this error ics cannot be ignored By connecting the current input terminal of the instrument to the side that is close to the earth potential of the power source SOURCE the terminal of the current measurement circuit of the instrument approaches the earth potential Thus Vcs becomes approximately zero and very little ics flows IM 760101 01E sjuswainseayy Buers 310499 el 3 5 Connecting the Power Supply Before Connecting the Power To prevent the possibility of electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the warnings below A WARNING Connect the power cord only after confirming that the voltage of the
525. unction that you wish to specify 8 Press SELECT When the button to the left of the selected element or measurement function is highlighted the numerical data of the measurement function of the element will be stored When the highlighting of the button is cleared the numerical data of the measurement function of the element will not be stored IM 760101 01E 11 7 e eq Pa10 s ay urnes pue geq Buljjeo0y pue Bunos z 11 3 Setting the Numerical Data and Waveform Display Data to Be Stored Selecting the Waveform Display Data to Be Stored This operation is valid if the stored item was set to Wave or Numeric Wave in step 5 6 e Deselecting all the items at once Turn the jog shuttle to select All OFF ON u uz us u us us e Setting the items one at a time Turn the jog shuttle to select the input signal you wish to set 7 8 Press the Wave Trace soft key to display the Wave Trace dialog box Selecting all the items at once Turn the jog shuttle to select All ON Press SELECT The buttons to the left of all the signals are highlighted indicating that all items will be stored Press SELECT The highlighting of the buttons to the left of all the signals are cleared indicating that all items will not be stored All ON All OFF n Iz 13 14 15 I6 Store Setting K Mode Manua1 Interval Setting H Store Item Wave Wave Trace
526. urement Functions 3 18 IM 760101 01E 3 9 Wiring a Circuit with Voltage Input Exceeding 600 V A When the voltage across the voltage input terminals exceeds 600 V do not directly input the current to the current input terminals Connect the output of an isolation sensor CT DT CT or clamp to the current sensor input connector The rated voltage between the input terminal voltage input terminal current input terminal and current sensor input connector and earth ground is 600 V Do not apply a voltage exceeding 600 V The rated voltage between the voltage and current input terminals between the voltage input terminal and current sensor input connector and between the current input terminal and current sensor input connector is 600 V Do not apply a voltage exceeding 600 V e The rated voltage between the U voltage input terminal and the terminal of voltage input terminal is 1000 V Do not apply a voltage exceeding 1000 V e When the voltage across the voltage input terminals exceeds 600 V do not directly input the current to the current input terminals Connect the output of an isolation sensor CT DT CT or clamp to the current sensor input connector e Follow the precautions given in section 3 3 Wiring Precautions D e When the isolation sensor is current output SOURCE LOAD Input terminal H When the isolation sensor is voltage output
527. urement functions None e Changing the elemeni wiring unit You can select the element wiring unit from the following list of choices The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements Element1 Element2 Element3 Element4 Element5 Element6 XA B and C If the selected wiring unit is not a harmonic measurement target there is no numerical data Thus no data is displayed in this case For example if the measurement target is XA no data is displayed at the measurement function of C For selecting the measurement target see section 7 3 IM 760101 01E 7 5 juswainseayy D1uOW Ie 7 2 Changing the Displayed Item of Numerical Data e Changing the harmonic order The harmonic order can be set to total or from dc Oth order up to 100th order U10 0 0094 V UMD 0 0094 V 111 0 0002 A Changing the measurement 118 0 0002 A function of the third item P101 0 000 W gt gl 130 853 SiC 0 000 VA 1 0 000 VA U10 0 0094 V Changing the 1141 0 0002 A element of the third item PXD 0 001kW S10 0 000 VA l Changing the order U11 0 0094 V 110 0 0002 A P236 0 000k W S101 0 000 VA When Item Amount Number of Displayed Items is set to Single List or Dual List Two types of lists are available When set to Single List the data of List Item No 1 is displayed using two columns When set to Dual List the data of List Item No 1 and 2 is displayed in each column
528. urn ON the display for the appropriate waves 9 5 671 Save data not found Check for presence of data 12 6 12 7 672 This model does not have the SCSI interface page iii 673 SCSI controller failure Maintenance service is required 674 Initializing file system Please wait 12 5 675 Cannot load this file 679 Printer error Maintenance service is required 680 Move the release arm to the HOLD position 14 1 681 Paper empty Load a roll chart 14 1 682 Printer over heat Power off immediately 683 684 No built in printer on this model Check the specifications to see whether or not the page ii optional printer is provided 685 Printer time out Maintenance service is required 705 Can not operate while accessing medium Wait until access has completed 706 Can not operate during hard copy Wait until output has completed 710 File not found Check the file 711 File operation not allowed during hard copy Wait until the hard copy completes 712 Can not compress this hardcopy image Turn off compression switch 12 7 750 Cannot connect to the ftp server Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 751 Has not connect with ftp server yet Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 752 This ftp function in not supported Chapter 13 753 FTP Error Pwd Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 754 FTP Error Cwd Confirm the network settings an
529. urn the jog shuttle to select P2 10 Press SELECT A box used to set coefficient P2 appears 11 Turn the jog shuttle to set P2 For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings 12 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box on Freq Iten Def ined 4 Measure 4 S Formula Urns Irns Pc Formula Pc Formula EC76 101976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 EC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 TEC 6 1 1993 IEC 76 1 1993 Pc Formula Ee 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 13 TEC 6 1 1993 Pc Formula Pie P2 8 5000 gt P1 o 0 5000 P1 9 5009 am P2 9 5000_ P2 oO 0 5000 i Phase 180 Lead Lag Sync Measure Slave 6 16 IM 760101 01E 6 6 Setting the Equations for Apparent Power and Corrected Power Explanation Selecting the Equation for Apparent Power The apparent power in the normal measurement mode can be determined by the product of the voltage Urms Umean and Udc and current Irms Imean and Idc There are three types of voltages and currents when measuring in the normal measurement mode Select which voltage and current to use to determine the apparent power from the following list of choices Urms Irms Determines the apparent power from the true rms values of voltage and current Umean Imean Determines the apparent power from the rectified mean value calibr
530. ursor Measurement Note ON OFF A cursor can be placed on the displayed bar graph to measure the value at that point e ON Performs cursor measurement e OFF Does not perform harmonic measurement Measured items e Y1 Y axis value of cursor of bar graph 1 e Y1x Y axis value of cursor x of bar graph 1 e AY1 The difference between the Y axis values of cursor and cursor x of bar graph 1 e Y2 Y axis value of cursor of bar graph 2 e Y2x Y axis value q cursor x of bar graph 2 e AY2 The difference between the Y axis values of cursor and cursor x of bar graph 2 e Y3 Y axis value of cursor of bar graph 3 e Y3x Y axis value of cursor x of bar graph 3 e AY3 The difference between the Y axis values of cursor and cursor x of bar graph 3 Cursor position e Two cursors and x are displayed in each graph bar graphs 1 to 3 e The cursor position is set using harmonic order e Bar graph displays the harmonic order indicating the cursor position e The position of cursor is displayed as in order 2 The position of cursor x is displayed as in orderx 55 e The harmonic order indicating the positions of cursor and x are common to bar graph 1 to bar graph 3 kD if unmeasurable data exists is displayed in the measured value display area 7 22 IM 760101 01E 7 10 Changing the Vector Display For a functional description see section 1 8 o a FILE STORE COPY _ DISPLA
531. ust be enabled ON Performs harmonic measurement OFF Does not perform harmonic measurement Normal measurement is performed Note e The setup menu may be different when in the normal measurement mode and in the harmonic measurement mode When setting the instrument check which measurement mode the instrument is in e The frequency measurement target is common to normal measurement and harmonic measurement For the procedure in selecting the frequency measurement target see section 6 3 IM 760101 01E 7 1 juswainseayy D1uOW Ie 7 2 Changing the Displayed Item of Numerical Data Procedure ESC JOUOUL For a functional description see section 1 4 a o DISPLAY I HOLD ica FILE STORE COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o REMOTE WAVE Loca MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD c NULL SHIFT pi To exit the menu during operation press ESC lt NP o RANGE scaunel WIRING MOTOR SET mrar TA CAL qe NTEGRATOR mm a a START STOP src sad INTEG SET RESET Check that the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement If the measurement mode is set to normal measurement set Mode to ON in the Harmonics menu see section 7 1 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Numeric Numeric Wave Numeric Bar or Numeric Trend For the display format of the numerical display see section 4 1 If Item Amount
532. utation target The number attached to the user defined function F1 to F4 is a portion of the measurement function symbol It is not related to the element number Changing the Element Wiring Unit You can select the element wiring unit from the following list of choices The selectable items vary depending on the installed elements Elementi Element2 Element3 Element4 Element5 Element6 XA B and C If there are no elements that are assigned to the selected wiring unit there is no numerical data Thus no data is displayed in this case For example if elements are assigned to XA and XB and no elements are assigned to XC then the measurement function for XC shows no data Urns1 5 0517 V Urns1 5 0517 V Umi 5 0516 U Changetreelementof Ummi 5 0516 V Udc1i 0 0315 V gt Unni 5 0516 V Uaci 5 0516 V Uaci 5 0516 V Irms1 5 0530 A Irms1 5 0530 A Inni 5 6551 A Inni 5 0551 A Urnsi 0517 5 Change the measurement Unnd 5 0516 function of the third item Udc2 0 0307 5 5 5 Uaci 0516 Irms1 0530 Imi 0551 oDpDdcCcCce Resetting the Order of Display Items You can reset the displayed order of numerical data to a preset order For details on the reset information see appendix 3 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numerical Data Note For the meanings of the measurement function symbols that are displayed see section 1 2 Measurement Functions and Measurement Periods
533. utomatically New gateway Specify an IP address aa IP Address Installed gateways Bemave Subnet Mak IM 760101 01E 13 7 uondo suonesiunwwos 3u194 3 g 13 3 Saving Setup Waveform Display Numerical and Image Data to the FTP Server FTP Client Function Procedure a o DISPLAY HOLD ica FILE STORE copy SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o coREMOTE a C ocaf me J CURSOR TOMAX HOLD iL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC os NUT o RANGE scana WIRING MOTOR SET i H il CAL m NTEGRATOR mm z START STOP Ri INTEG SET RESET Press MISC to display the Misc menu Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu Press the Network soft key to display the Network menu 13 8 IM 760101 01E 13 3 Saving Setup Waveform Display Numerical and Image Data to the FTP Server FTP Client Function Specifying the Save Destination FTP Server 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select FTP Server 6 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 7 Use the keyboard to enter the IP address of the FTP server If you are using DNS you can specify the server by name For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Entering the Login Name and Password for Accessing the Save
534. utting the Screen Image to a Network Printer Selecting the Resolution This procedure is applicable if you selected BJ in step 5 6 Press the Resolution soft key to display the Resolution menu 7 Select one of 180dpi to 360dpi soft keys to select the resolution Turning ON OFF the Color Output This procedure is applicable if you selected ESC P ESC P2 BJ or PCL5 in step 5 8 Press the Color soft key to select ON or OFF Setting Comments 9 Press the Comment soft key A keyboard appears 10 Use the keyboard to enter the comment For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings m Q M Copy to Copy to M Copy to Net Print Net Print Net Print L K Comment Comment W Resolution W Resolution 180dpi 180dpi UOL 360dpi HUUUUULS JUUUUULIS Executing the Output Operation 11 Switch to the screen you wish to output 12 Press COPY The screen image is output Canceling the Output Operation 13 Press the Abort soft key in the Copy menu M Copy to m Q Net Print L Comment W Resolution 180dpi IM 760101 01E 13 13 uondo suonesiunwwos 3u194 3 g 13 4 Outputting the Screen Image to a Network Printer Explanation The LPR client function of the WT1600 can be used to output screen images to a network printer in the same fashion as out
535. value display area AY is measured even if the unit is different The result has no unit in this case e Ifthe crest factor is set to 3 the allowed range of cursor measurement vertically is 300 of the range However for 1000 V range the range is within 200 If the crest factor is set to 6 it is 600 of the range However for 500 V range the range is within 400 IM 760101 01E 9 23 Aejdsig wojsone jy el Chapter 10 Trend Display 10 1 Retrieving Trend Display Data For a functional description see section 1 8 ain i DISPLA l HOLD STORE COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU oTAIGD o REMOTE a me one ficou wee CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC es PUT a A v RANGE scaunel WIRING o o Heli g lg H FILTER AVG CAL eqs NTEGRATOR wma A a STOP INTEGSET RESET H START Procedure 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Trend Numeric Trend Wave Trend or Bar Trend For details on setting the display format see section 4 5 2 Press the Trend Setting soft key to display the Trend Setting menu Selecting Whether to Retrieve Trend Data ON OFF 3 Press the Trend Sampling soft key to select ON or OFF If ON is selected the retrieval of trend waveform data starts Format 7 Trend Display Trend i M Trend Format
536. ve Destination Medium and Selecting the Save Destination Directory in section 12 6 Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box 6 Same as the procedure given in Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Dialog Box in section 12 9 Viewing the Properties 7 Same as the procedure given in Viewing the Properties in section 12 9 Changing the File Attribute 8 Same as the procedure given in Changing the File Attribute in section 12 9 Creating a Directory 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select a medium or directory 10 Press the Dir Name soft key to display the keyboard 11 Use the keyboard to enter the directory name For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings HakeDir ESC File List aA _ Path Sc4 00 Space 2137784320 byte File Name Size Date Attribute a L 2001 08 24 19 48 R W 2001 08 24 18 09 R U CAPS m INSERT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ToT NEE rs fer eLA LELCIDLELF LIHI LI IKLLLME g LofPTQt RES Tue UEL Pr A SECT Dieu PIECING JUUL 12 38 IM 760101 01E 12 12 Renaming Directories and Files and Creating Directories Explanation CAUTION Do not remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or is blinking Such acts can damage the medium or destroy the data on the
537. ved However setup parameters such as the date and time communications and SCSI ID numbers are not saved e Data size The data size of a single set of setup parameters is approximately 20 KB e Extension set extension is automatically added to the file name Saving the Displayed Waveform Data Select Wave from the File Item menu to save waveform display data e Selecting the data type Select the data type from the following list of choices The extension is automatically added e Binary e Saved in binary format e The file cannot be loaded to the WT1600 e ASCII Saved in ASCII format The file can be used on your PC for analysis The file cannot be loaded to the WT1600 e Float e Saved in 32 bit floating format The file cannot be loaded to the WT1600 12 16 IM 760101 01E 12 6 Saving Setup Parameters Waveform Display Data and Numerical Data e Extension and data size e During normal measurement Data Type Extension Data Size Bytes Binary WVF Approx 4 K 4 x 1002 x Tw Tw Number of displayed waveforms HDR Approx 7 K ASCII CSV Approx 15 K condition when there is one displayed waveform Float FLD Approx 4 K 4 x 1002 e During harmonic measurement Same as for normal measurement e Selecting the waveform e When the data type is set to Binary or ASCII the waveform that is displayed on the screen is saved e When the data type is Float the waveform of the input signal select
538. veris casei iA Ai ais 13 12 13 14 properties 11 15 11 19 12 27 12 28 protective earth ground eee eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeaes Pratio nnee asia de een ah hl a N e e aa PT ratio setting of pulse input range setting of PUISG N arsit rske ti aech Pulse RaM gO iesccccisccsstisceceivectccucsnesuedtvsunedsedhsiabipeoesteedsed ENEK USD teed a caves a ieia AN Da ai EE Q Quadi Ava sei a lee A a sae ta 9 13 10 8 R rack MOURE peeceaicenscecseronsteneseennedendonsndrsnsseaneccntoneneanatestegeese 3 3 FANQC Ra A EE E E 5 4 5 10 Range Copy EXEC ccccceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeneeseeeenaees FANGE COPYING OF wecvececesesseseesececciessteesececeseretsvecacereencenreaces raS tO Sla cesar ah aie E aT in a etree rated supply voltage rated supply voltage frequency 0 eee eee reins 17 19 reactive POWET ue eeeeeseeceseeseeeeeceeesenerseeseaeeesneneeteeeoees App 21 FEalFIME scented aration aati s 11 2 11 4 real time control ccccccccesessseeeceeessssseeeeeeesssneaees 6 24 11 4 real time normal integration mode real time repetitive integration Mode cece 6 27 regar panel cass aaia aan a AE aaa a RE a ai a a a 2 1 recall 1 32 11 20 Recall NO svscisccesdacedceveccetee costavicecdeecessevevassvsevtsteceonvecn vente 11 20 recipient mail address ececeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeeeeeeteneeeee 13 17 release lever ooo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeecaeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeees 14
539. waveforms bar graphs vectors and trends the mixed display and the meaning of each displayed item Chapter 5 Measurement Conditions Describes how to set the input conditions for the measured voltage current signal and the handling of the input signal such as the wiring system the measurement range the filter averaging data update rate and the crest factor Chapter 6 Normal Measurement and Integration Describes how to set the displayed items of numerical data during normal measurement how to set the computing equation and how to set integration Chapter 7 Harmonic Measurement Describes how to set the displayed item of numerical data the PLL source the order of analysis the computing equation the bar graph and the vector display during harmonic measurement Chapter 8 Motor Evaluation Option Describes how to set the instrument in order to determine the motor characteristics by inputting signals from revolution sensors and torque meters Chapter 9 Waveform Display Describes how to display the waveforms of the voltage and current signals Chapter 10 Trend Display Describes how to display the trend Chapter 11 Storing and Recalling Data and Saving the Stored Data Describes how to store and recall the data and how to save the stored data Chapter 12 Saving and Loading the Data Describes how to save setup parameters waveform display data numerical data and screen image data and how to load the saved d
540. we roar CAL qm NTEGRATOR mm z a START STOP erne sacl INTEGSET RESET Procedure The retrieval of waveform display data must be turned ON to display waveforms For the procedure see section 9 1 1 Press DISPLAY to display the Display menu Check that Format display format is set to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Bar or Wave Trend For details on setting the display format see section 4 2 The following procedures are given for a representative example in which the display format is set to Wave 2 Press the Wave Setting soft key to display the Wave Setting menu Selecting Whether to Interpolate the Display 3 Press the Interpolate soft key to select Or t Format K K Wave Display Wave W Wave Format Single Interpolate Graticule a Scale Value P Trace Label FF ON im W K Wave Setting Wave Mapping OUBLIE 9 16 IM 760101 01E 9 7 Interpolating the Display and Changing the Graticule Changing the Graticule 3 Press the Graticule soft key to select s Ld OF ES Q Wave Setting Wave Display A Wave Format Single Interpolate ra Graticule a Scale Value DFF PN Trace Label PEF ON K Wave Mapping JUUOUUUE Explanation Selecting Whether to Interp
541. wer Meter IM 760101 11E Explains the communication functions Communication Interface of the GP IB RS 232 and Ethernet User s Manual interfaces The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument s performance and functions The figures given in this manual may differ from the actual screen Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is strictly prohibited The TCP IP software of this product and the document concerning the TCP IP software have been developed created by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD Networking Software Release 1 that has been licensed from California University e MS DOS is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe Adobe Acrobat and PostScript are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated e Zip is either a registered trademark or trademark of lomega Corporation in the United States and or other countries For purposes of this manual the TM and symbols do not accompany their respective trademark names or registered trademark names Other co
542. wing Places e Indirect sunlight or near heat sources e Where an excessive amount of soot steam dust or corrosive gas is present e Near strong magnetic field sources e Near high voltage equipment or power lines e Where the level of mechanical vibration is high e In an unstable place Note For the most accurate measurements use the instrument in the following environment Ambient temperature 23 3 C Ambient humidity 30 to 75 RH no condensation When using the instrument in a place where the ambient temperature is 5 to 20 C or 26 to 40 C add the temperature coefficient to the accuracy as specified in chapter 17 When installing the instrument in a place where the ambient humidity is 30 or below take measures to prevent static electricity such as using an anti static mat Condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where the ambient temperature is higher or if the temperature changes rapidly In this case let the instrument adjust to the new environment for at least an hour before using the instrument Storage Location When storing the instrument avoid the following places e Where the relative humidity is 80 Where the level of mechanical vibration is or more high e Indirect sunlight Where corrosive or explosive gas is present e Where the temperature is 60 C Where an excessive amount of soot dust or higher salt and iron are present e Near a high humidity or heat source W
543. x Motor Set Speed Torque Range 10 Zou Sense Type Analog Pulse Pulse Range 0 0000 _10600 6600 Line Filter OFF 3 Scaling 1 0000 mi 1 0000 it Unit rpm Nn J Pulse N L o Pole sync Speed igi TT Sync Source 8 10 IM 760101 01E 8 5 Setting the Scaling Factor and Unit Used to Measure the Torque Explanation Setting the Unit of Torque 2 Turn the jog shuttle to select Torque under Unit 3 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 4 Use the keyboard to set the unit For keyboard operations see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Motor Set Range Sense Typ Pulse Rani Line Filt Scaling Unit Pulse N Pole Sunc Speed Sync Source None Setting the Scaling Factor You can specify the scaling factor used to transform the torque signal to the torque of the motor Set the factor in the range from 0 0001 to 99999 9999 By setting the torque per volt of input voltage the torque is derived from the input voltage from the torque meter using the following equation Torque Input voltage from the torque meter x Scaling factor Setting the Unit of Torque e Number of Characters Eight characters or less e Types of characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard or spaces Note To set the unit of the moto
544. xtension Data Size Bytes ASCII CSV Approx 4 2 K condition number of elements 1 measurement functions U and Others maximum order 100 Float WTD Approx 4 K 4 K x Dn Dn Number of numerical data to be saved When U I or P are to be saved Number of elements x maximum order x 2 When S to Xp are saved Number of elements x maximum order e When Others are stored Number of elements x 11 21 The maximum harmonic order to be analyzed as specified in section 7 5 Selecting the numerical data Select which numerical data items are to be saved e During normal measurement e Only installed elements and wiring units are applicable for the selection The measurement functions can be selected from the items that are indicated in Measurement Function Types during Normal Measurement and Measurement Function Types for Motor Evaluation Function Option in section 1 2 Delta Computation User Defined Functions and Corrected Power in section 1 5 and Measurement Functions of Integration in section 1 6 e During harmonic measurement Only installed elements are applicable for the selection The measurement functions can be selected from U including Uhdf including Ihdf P including Phdf S Q A 0 oU ol Z Rs Xs Rp Xp and Others If Others is selected the measurement functions Uthd Ithd Pthd Uthf Ithf Utif Itif hvf hcf fU and fl of the selected
545. y HOLD cad FILE srone COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU ATRIGD ee REMOTE a Fae om foe me CURSOR j TOMAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC n PUT a RANGE scaunel WIRING a MOTOR SET T H FILTER a qs NTEGRATOR mm g a START STOP INTEGSET RESET CAL H Procedure Press HARMONICS to display the Harmonics menu Press the Mode soft key to select ON Press the Object soft key to display the measurement target selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select the measurement target wiring unit Press SELECT to confirm 1 2 3 4 5 Select B PLL Source Up Exec PLL Source Down Exec zc Min Order Min Order 9 ql Max Order Max Order 100 100 Thd Formula W Thad Formula 7 1 Total 1 Total M Window Width 8192 Explanation You can select the target wiring unit for the harmonic measurement from the following list of choices The selectable items vary depending on the selected wiring system pattern XA B and C Note For the procedure in selecting the frequency measurement target see section 6 3 IM 760101 01E 7 7 juswainseayy D1uOW Ie 7 4 Selecting the PLL Source Procedure ESC UUUUUU INPUT RANGE SCALING MOTOR SET o pi FILTER AVG eS 8192
546. y HOLD RATE FILE stone conx SINGLE STORE SI MENU aTAIGD o REMOTE AN WAVE HARMONICS LOCAL MISC ei Se ae CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC RANGE scaunel WIRING eqs NTEGRATOR mm g a STOP INTEGSET RESET START Procedure 1 Press SHIFT COPY MENU to display the Copy menu 2 Press the Copy to soft key to display the Copy to menu 3 Press the Printer soft key Q LJ L m L L L L Printing or Not Printing ON OFF the Header Information Press the Information soft key to select ON or OFF ha Copy Copy to Printer Information OFF pry W List Item Print Data ist Exec li UUUUUELE Comment Paper Feed Abort cE IM 760101 01E 14 7 uondo Jeu Ul INg g 14 3 Printing Numerical Data Lists and Bar Graphs During Normal Measurement 5 Press the List Item soft key to display the List Item dialog box Selecting the Numerical Data to Be Printed e Selecting the items at once 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select All ON 7 Press SELECT The buttons to the left of all the elements and measurement functions are highlighted indicating that all items will be printed e Deselecting all the items at once 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select All OFF 7 Press SELECT The highlighting of the buttons to the left of all
547. y hour while integration is in progress OFF Zero level compensation is not automatically performed while integration is in progress Note When zero level compensation is in progress when integration auto calibration is turned ON the power and current values that were measured immediately before are integrated 6 30 IM 760101 01E 6 11 Performing Integration Start Stop and Reset Procedure For a functional description see section 1 6 al eey seve HOLD hte FILE sToRE copy INGLE STORE SET MENU oTRIGD o coREMOTE i oea wee PS CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT CY To exit the menu during operation press ESC MOTOR SET a o OOUE rom CAL NIEGRATOR mmm ae war oo peed A J Saget RESET H Check that the measurement mode is set to normal measurement If the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement set Mode to OFF in the Harmonics menu see section 7 1 Also check that the retrieval of waveform display data see section 9 1 is turned OFF Performing Integration in the Manual Integration Mode 1 Check that the integration mode is set to normal integration See section 6 8 2 Check that the integration timer is set to 0000 00 00 See section 6 8 Starting the integration 3 Press START The START indicator above and to the left of the key illuminates
548. y to display the Trend Scale menu Format Trend Trend Setting OOBUOLULCLR ny UUUUUUUE S Q K Trend Display M Trend Format Single Trend Sampling OFF pn Trend T div asvdiv Trend Disp Items 10 12 IM 760101 01E 10 6 Setting the Scale Selecting the Target Trend to Be Scaled 4 Press the Trend Object soft key 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select T1 to T16 Selecting Auto Scaling or Manual Scaling 6 Press the Scaling soft key to select Auto or Manual Setting the Upper Limit during Manual Scaling 7 Press the Upper Scale soft key 8 Turn the jog shuttle to set the upper limit For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Setting the Lower Limit during Manual Scaling 7 Press the Lower Scale soft key 8 Turn the jog shuttle to set the lower limit For the procedures on how to enter values using the jog shuttle see section 3 12 Entering Values and Strings Trend Scale Trend Ob ject T1 Scaling Manual Upper Scale 1 0006E 02 Lower Scale 1 0006E 02 ESG NJUUUUUUE Explanation Trend Scale Trend Ob ject T1 Scaling Manua1 Upper Scale 1 0006E 02 Lower Scale 1 0000E 02 ESC OOOOUELE Setting the Scale Set the upper and lower limits of the display frame when displaying the trend You
549. ze Really Settings g A11 Settings will be initialized Communication OK cancer g Date Time Config Selftest 15 10 IM 760101 01E 15 3 Initializing the Settings Explanation The values specified by the panel keys can be reset to the factory default values This is useful when you wish to clear previous settings or start the settings from scratch For details on the initial settings see appendix 3 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numerical Data Settings That Cannot Be Initialized Date and time settings e Settings related to saving and loading data e Settings related to screen image output e Settings related to the GP IB interface serial interface and Ethernet interface e SCSI ID number setting SCSI is optional Initializing at Power Up If the power switch is turned ON while pressing RESET the WT1600 powers up using initial settings In this case Settings That Cannot Be Initialized as indicated above excluding the date and time are also initialized IM 760101 01E 15 11 a suonoun4 19410 pue yndyno v a 15 4 Performing Zero Level Compensation Q O D00000 Procedure Explanation A y o a ise HOLD Ba FILE srore COPY SINGLE STORE SET MENU aTRIGD o REMOTE a WAVE LOCAL MISC CURSOR MAX HOLD NULL SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC T n PUT a RANGE SCALING mane

Yokogawa WT1600 Digital Power Meter

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents